XDesignerPlus V4

User Manual

Manual Revision List

Revision no Date Revision Contents
Ver 1.0 2016.3.2 Version 4
목차
CHAPTER 1 - Overview ................................................................................................................................................................. 15
1.1 Hardware overview ............................................................................................................................................ 15
1.1.1 Use of the product .................................................................................................................................... 15
1.1.2 Communication ports of the product ........................................................................................................ 15
1.1.3 List of supported PLCs .............................................................................................................................. 16
1.1.4 XTOP menu screen .................................................................................................................................... 20
1.1.5 Touch calibration method.......................................................................................................................... 27
1.1.6 How to switch from the Run Screen to the Menu Screen ........................................................................... 27
1.2 Software overview.............................................................................................................................................. 28
1.2.1 PC hardware specifications ........................................................................................................................ 28
1.2.2 Touch program writing and testing order .................................................................................................. 29
1.2.3 Software types and supported XTOP models ............................................................................................. 29
1.2.4 Using old project files in the new XDesignerPlus4 software ....................................................................... 29
1.2.5 Relationship between software version and TOP OS version ...................................................................... 31
1.2.6 How to upgrade/downgrade OS ............................................................................................................... 32
CHAPTER 2 - Installation .............................................................................................................................................................. 35
2.1.1 Downloading the XDesignerPlus4 program ................................................................................................ 35
2.1.2 Installing XDesignerPlus4 .......................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.3 Updating the XDesignerPlus4 program ...................................................................................................... 39
2.1.4 Removing the XDesignerPlus4 program ..................................................................................................... 39
2.1.5 Running the XDesignerPlus4 ..................................................................................................................... 40
CHAPTER 3 - Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 ................................................................................................................... 42
3.1 XDesignerPlus4 composition .............................................................................................................................. 42
3.2 Menu composition ............................................................................................................................................. 42
3.2.1 File menu (Alt + F) .................................................................................................................................... 42
3.2.2 Edit menu (Alt + E) ................................................................................................................................... 44
3.2.3 View menu (Alt + V) ................................................................................................................................. 46
3.2.4 Project menu (Alt + P) .............................................................................................................................. 47
3.2.5 Draw menu (Alt + D) ................................................................................................................................ 48
3.2.6 Tag menu (Alt + T) .................................................................................................................................... 49
3.2.7 Tool menu (Alt + O) .................................................................................................................................. 50
3.2.8 Transmission menu (Alt + R) ..................................................................................................................... 51
3.2.9 Window menu .......................................................................................................................................... 51
3.2.10 Help menu................................................................................................................................................ 52
3.2.11 Toolbar Composition ................................................................................................................................. 52
3.2.12 File toolbar ............................................................................................................................................... 52
3.2.13 Transmission toolbar ................................................................................................................................. 53
3.2.14 Grid toolbar .............................................................................................................................................. 53
3.2.15 Hint toolbar .............................................................................................................................................. 53
3.2.16 Help toolbar ............................................................................................................................................. 54
3.2.17 Screen toolbar .......................................................................................................................................... 54
3.2.18 Edit toolbar ............................................................................................................................................... 55
3.2.19 Align toolbar ............................................................................................................................................. 55
3.2.20 Draw toolbar............................................................................................................................................. 56
3.2.21 Tag toolbar ............................................................................................................................................... 57
3.2.22 Zoom toolbar............................................................................................................................................ 57
3.3 Screen composition ........................................................................................................................................... 57
3.3.1 Base screen ............................................................................................................................................... 57
3.3.2 Window screen ......................................................................................................................................... 58

2 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 3.3.3 Sub screen ................................................................................................................................................ 58
3.3.4 Global screen ............................................................................................................................................ 60
3.3.5 Docking window composition.................................................................................................................... 65
3.3.6 Status bar ................................................................................................................................................. 65
3.3.7 Shortcut list .............................................................................................................................................. 66
CHAPTER 4 - File Menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 69
4.1 New (Ctrl + N) ................................................................................................................................................... 69
4.1.1 New project .............................................................................................................................................. 69
4.1.2 New base screen ....................................................................................................................................... 71
4.1.3 New window screen .................................................................................................................................. 72
4.1.4 New sub screen ........................................................................................................................................ 73
4.2 Opening a project (Ctrl + O) .............................................................................................................................. 74
4.3 Add new project ................................................................................................................................................ 74
4.3.1 Add new project ....................................................................................................................................... 74
4.3.2 Add open project ...................................................................................................................................... 75
4.3.3 Using multiple projects.............................................................................................................................. 76
4.4 Making templates .............................................................................................................................................. 78
4.4.1 Step 1: Create template ............................................................................................................................. 78
4.4.2 Step 2: Copy screen .................................................................................................................................. 79
4.4.3 Step 3: Convert Address ............................................................................................................................ 80
4.4.4 Step 4: Macro............................................................................................................................................ 82
4.5 Importing templates .......................................................................................................................................... 83
4.5.1 Step 1: Select template .............................................................................................................................. 83
4.5.2 Step 2: Copy screen .................................................................................................................................. 83
4.5.3 Step 3: Convert address ............................................................................................................................ 83
4.5.4 MultiCopy ................................................................................................................................................. 85
4.6 Save project (Ctrl + S) ........................................................................................................................................ 85
4.7 Save as (Shift + Ctrl + S) .................................................................................................................................... 86
4.8 Close a project ................................................................................................................................................... 86
4.9 Close all projects................................................................................................................................................ 87
4.10 Print (Ctrl + P) ................................................................................................................................................... 87
4.10.1 Printed items............................................................................................................................................. 87
4.10.2 Option ...................................................................................................................................................... 88
4.10.3 Using the printer ....................................................................................................................................... 92
4.10.4 Using a roll printer .................................................................................................................................... 92
4.11 Recent files ........................................................................................................................................................ 98
4.12 Exit (Alt + F4) ..................................................................................................................................................... 99
CHAPTER 5 - Edit Menu.............................................................................................................................................................. 101
5.1 Select............................................................................................................................................................... 101
5.1.1 Normal selection ..................................................................................................................................... 101
5.1.2 Range selection....................................................................................................................................... 101
5.1.3 Selecting partially overlapping shapes/tags.............................................................................................. 102
5.1.4 Selecting overlapping shapes/tags using the POP-UP menu .................................................................... 102
5.1.5 Multiple select and deselect .................................................................................................................... 103
5.2 Move and resize .............................................................................................................................................. 103
5.2.1 Moving and resizing using the mouse. .................................................................................................... 103
5.2.2 Moving and resizing using the keyboard ................................................................................................. 103
5.2.3 Moving and resizing in the properties page ............................................................................................ 104
5.2.4 Resizing using the keyboard and mouse .................................................................................................. 104
5.3 Undo and redo ................................................................................................................................................ 105
5.3.1 Undo (Ctrl + Z) ....................................................................................................................................... 105
5.3.2 Redo (Ctrl + R) ........................................................................................................................................ 105

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 3
 5.4 Select all .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
5.5 Copying and deleting ...................................................................................................................................... 105
5.5.1 Cut (Ctrl + X) .......................................................................................................................................... 105
5.5.2 Copy (Ctrl + C) ....................................................................................................................................... 105
5.5.3 Multi copy (Ctrl + T) ............................................................................................................................... 105
5.5.4 Paste (Ctrl + V) ....................................................................................................................................... 107
5.5.5 Paste in same position (Ctrl + Shift + V) ................................................................................................. 107
5.5.6 Delete ..................................................................................................................................................... 107
5.6 Group .............................................................................................................................................................. 107
5.6.1 Create group (Ctrl + G) ........................................................................................................................... 107
5.6.2 Ungroup (Ctrl + G).................................................................................................................................. 108
5.6.3 Editing shapes/tags in groups ................................................................................................................. 108
5.7 Rotate.............................................................................................................................................................. 108
5.7.1 Rotate left (<) ......................................................................................................................................... 108
5.7.2 Rotate right (>) ....................................................................................................................................... 108
5.7.3 Cancel rotate (/) ...................................................................................................................................... 109
5.8 Properties ........................................................................................................................................................ 109
5.9 Mirror .............................................................................................................................................................. 109
5.9.1 Mirror vertical ......................................................................................................................................... 109
5.9.2 Mirror horizontal ..................................................................................................................................... 109
5.10 Cancel inheritance ........................................................................................................................................... 109
5.11 Align ............................................................................................................................................................... 109
5.12 Snap ................................................................................................................................................................ 113
5.12.1 Grid snap ................................................................................................................................................ 114
5.12.2 Object snap ............................................................................................................................................ 114
CHAPTER 6 - View Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 116
6.1 Show name (F5) ............................................................................................................................................... 116
6.2 Show ID (F5) .................................................................................................................................................... 117
6.3 Docking window .............................................................................................................................................. 117
6.3.1 Handling docking windows ..................................................................................................................... 118
6.4 Project manager .............................................................................................................................................. 122
6.4.1 Screen .................................................................................................................................................... 122
6.4.2 Global settings ........................................................................................................................................ 129
6.5 MY CLIPBOARD................................................................................................................................................ 130
6.5.1 Palette .................................................................................................................................................... 130
6.5.2 Items ...................................................................................................................................................... 131
6.6 List window ..................................................................................................................................................... 132
6.6.1 Composition of the list window ............................................................................................................... 132
6.6.2 Selecting shapes/tags/groups .................................................................................................................. 133
6.6.3 Viewing shape/tag/group properties ....................................................................................................... 133
6.7 Properties window ........................................................................................................................................... 133
6.7.1 Composition of the properties window.................................................................................................... 134
6.8 Memory manager ............................................................................................................................................ 134
6.8.1 Composition of the memory manager ..................................................................................................... 134
6.9 Global object ................................................................................................................................................... 137
6.9.1 Registering global objects ....................................................................................................................... 138
6.9.2 Using global objects ............................................................................................................................... 138
6.9.3 Deleting and changing properties ........................................................................................................... 138
6.9.4 Cancel inheritance................................................................................................................................... 139
6.10 Status number ................................................................................................................................................. 140
6.11 Zoom in/Zoom out .......................................................................................................................................... 141
6.12 Toolbar option ................................................................................................................................................. 142

4 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 6.13 Hint ................................................................................................................................................................. 142
6.13.1 Show hint (Ctrl + H) ................................................................................................................................ 142
6.13.2 Hint option (Shift + Ctrl + H) .................................................................................................................. 142
6.14 Previous screen (PageUp) ................................................................................................................................. 143
6.15 Next screen (PageDown) .................................................................................................................................. 143
6.16 Language ......................................................................................................................................................... 143
CHAPTER 7 - Project Menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 145
7.1 Edit master screen............................................................................................................................................ 145
7.2 Master screen properties .................................................................................................................................. 145
7.3 Text table ......................................................................................................................................................... 146
7.3.1 Preparing the text table ........................................................................................................................... 146
7.3.2 Setting a text table in a project ............................................................................................................... 148
7.3.3 Selecting the language to display ............................................................................................................ 149
7.3.4 Viewing each language in the edit screen ................................................................................................ 149
7.3.5 Batch automatic registration of text tables ............................................................................................... 149
7.4 Logging setting................................................................................................................................................ 149
7.4.1 Basic items page ..................................................................................................................................... 150
7.4.2 Column name & data type page ............................................................................................................. 152
7.4.3 Advanced page ....................................................................................................................................... 153
7.4.4 New/Save/Delete button ......................................................................................................................... 154
7.4.5 Logging list ............................................................................................................................................. 154
7.4.6 Memory usage display ............................................................................................................................ 154
7.4.7 Viewing logging data .............................................................................................................................. 155
7.4.8 Setting logging data autosave to CF memory .......................................................................................... 157
7.5 Alarm setting ................................................................................................................................................... 158
7.5.1 Alarm list registration .............................................................................................................................. 159
7.5.2 Select alarm content registration method ................................................................................................ 160
7.5.3 Solution tip ............................................................................................................................................. 160
7.5.4 Color info/Current alarm trigger count/Address monitoring ..................................................................... 162
7.5.5 Editing the alarm list ............................................................................................................................... 163
7.6 Recipe setting .................................................................................................................................................. 164
7.6.1 Setting recipe block count/word count .................................................................................................... 164
7.6.2 Recipe movement condition .................................................................................................................... 165
7.6.3 Recipe movement target address............................................................................................................. 166
7.6.4 Memory usage display ............................................................................................................................ 166
7.6.5 New/Save/Delete button ......................................................................................................................... 167
7.6.6 Recipe data block.................................................................................................................................... 168
7.6.7 Loading/saving recipe data during operation ........................................................................................... 170
7.6.8 Saving recipe data to a CF memory card ................................................................................................. 170
7.7 Script setting ................................................................................................................................................... 171
7.7.1 Global scripts and local scripts ................................................................................................................ 171
7.7.2 Composition of the script settings screen ................................................................................................ 172
7.7.3 Script conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 173
7.7.4 Script list ................................................................................................................................................. 174
7.7.5 Script operation ...................................................................................................................................... 174
7.7.6 Format of script content .......................................................................................................................... 183
7.7.7 Closing the script settings screen ............................................................................................................ 184
7.8 Message table.................................................................................................................................................. 184
7.8.1 Composition of the message table screen. ............................................................................................... 184
7.8.2 Message registration ............................................................................................................................... 185
7.9 Event log ......................................................................................................................................................... 187
7.9.1 Add event / Add group ........................................................................................................................... 187

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 5
 7.9.2 Event registration .................................................................................................................................... 188
7.9.3 CF card settings ...................................................................................................................................... 188
7.9.4 Event log file saved on the CF memory card ........................................................................................... 189
7.10 Password setting .............................................................................................................................................. 189
7.10.1 Password setting ..................................................................................................................................... 190
7.10.2 Screen level settings (Base screen)........................................................................................................... 190
7.10.3 Use device indirect .................................................................................................................................. 191
7.10.4 Password window screen and operation .................................................................................................. 191
7.10.5 Setting the security level for shapes and tags .......................................................................................... 192
7.10.6 Level refresh time ................................................................................................................................... 193
7.11 Symbol manager.............................................................................................................................................. 193
7.11.1 Writing the symbol list ............................................................................................................................ 193
7.11.2 Using symbol addresses in a project ....................................................................................................... 194
7.11.3 Tag and general settings ......................................................................................................................... 194
7.11.4 Export/Import ......................................................................................................................................... 195
7.12 Project property ............................................................................................................................................... 197
7.12.1 [Project settings] page ............................................................................................................................ 197
7.12.2 [Global alarm scroll] page........................................................................................................................ 205
7.12.3 TOP setting ............................................................................................................................................. 205
7.12.4 PLC setup ............................................................................................................................................... 207
7.12.5 CF card settings ...................................................................................................................................... 209
CHAPTER 8 - Shape Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 212
8.1 Dot .................................................................................................................................................................. 212
8.2 Line ................................................................................................................................................................. 212
8.3 Rectangle, rounded rectangle ........................................................................................................................... 213
8.3.1 Rectangle ................................................................................................................................................ 213
8.3.2 Rounded rectangle .................................................................................................................................. 214
8.4 Ellipse .............................................................................................................................................................. 215
8.5 Arc, pie, chord ................................................................................................................................................. 216
8.6 TEXT ................................................................................................................................................................ 217
8.7 Fill ................................................................................................................................................................... 219
8.8 Polyline, polygon ............................................................................................................................................. 220
8.9 Image .............................................................................................................................................................. 220
8.10 Rect ruler ......................................................................................................................................................... 221
8.11 Circle ruler ....................................................................................................................................................... 222
CHAPTER 9 - Common Tag Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 225
9.1 Composition of the tag properties screen ........................................................................................................ 225
9.1.1 Information page .................................................................................................................................... 225
9.1.2 Preview ................................................................................................................................................... 226
9.1.3 Security .................................................................................................................................................. 226
9.1.4 OK/cancel buttons .................................................................................................................................. 226
9.2 Address entry .................................................................................................................................................. 226
9.2.1 Address types ......................................................................................................................................... 227
9.2.2 Entering addresses using the keyboard.................................................................................................... 236
9.2.3 Entering addresses using the address keypad .......................................................................................... 237
9.3 Color palette.................................................................................................................................................... 239
9.3.1 Selecting colors from basic colors............................................................................................................ 239
9.3.2 Registering/selecting My colors ............................................................................................................... 240
9.3.3 RGB input/selection ................................................................................................................................ 240
9.4 Image library ................................................................................................................................................... 241
9.4.1 Composition of the image library ............................................................................................................ 241
9.4.2 Image registration ................................................................................................................................... 242

6 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
CHAPTER 10 - Bit Lamp Tag........................................................................................................................................................ 244
10.1 Bit Lamp Tag Overview..................................................................................................................................... 244
10.2 Page composition of the bit lamp properties screen ......................................................................................... 244
10.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 244
10.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL) ......................................................................................................................... 245
10.3.2 Lamp setup ............................................................................................................................................. 246
10.3.3 Caption ................................................................................................................................................... 247
CHAPTER 11 - Word Lamp Tag ................................................................................................................................................... 249
11.1 Word Lamp Tag Overview ................................................................................................................................ 249
11.2 Page composition of the word lamp properties screen ..................................................................................... 249
11.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 250
11.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL) ......................................................................................................................... 250
11.3.2 Lamp Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 251
11.3.3 Caption ................................................................................................................................................... 252
11.4 Case page ........................................................................................................................................................ 252
11.4.1 CASE List................................................................................................................................................. 252
11.4.2 Condition setting .................................................................................................................................... 253
11.4.3 Caption and lamp shape setting .............................................................................................................. 254
CHAPTER 12 - N Lamp Tag ......................................................................................................................................................... 256
12.1 N Lamp Tag Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 256
12.2 Page composition of the N lamp properties screen .......................................................................................... 256
12.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 256
12.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL) ......................................................................................................................... 257
12.3.2 Range setup............................................................................................................................................ 258
CHAPTER 13 - Bit Select Lamp Tag.............................................................................................................................................. 263
13.1 Bit Select Lamp Tag Overview........................................................................................................................... 263
13.2 Page composition of the bit lamp properties screen ......................................................................................... 263
13.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 264
13.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL) ......................................................................................................................... 264
13.3.2 Range setup............................................................................................................................................ 265
CHAPTER 14 - Touch Tag ............................................................................................................................................................ 267
14.1 Touch tag overview .......................................................................................................................................... 267
14.2 Page composition of the touch tag properties screen ....................................................................................... 267
14.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 268
14.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL) ......................................................................................................................... 268
14.3.2 Touch color ............................................................................................................................................. 269
14.3.3 Caption ................................................................................................................................................... 270
14.4 Interlock page .................................................................................................................................................. 270
14.4.1 Bit state condition ................................................................................................................................... 271
14.4.2 Word value condition .............................................................................................................................. 271
14.5 Operation page................................................................................................................................................ 271
14.5.1 Operation list .......................................................................................................................................... 272
14.5.2 Operation settings................................................................................................................................... 273
CHAPTER 15 - Touch + Bit Lamp Tag .......................................................................................................................................... 287
15.1 Touch + bit lamp overview ............................................................................................................................... 287
CHAPTER 16 - Touch + Word Lamp Tag ...................................................................................................................................... 289
16.1 Touch + word lamp tag overview ..................................................................................................................... 289
CHAPTER 17 - Touch + N Lamp Tag ........................................................................................................................................... 291
17.1 Touch + N lamp overview ................................................................................................................................ 291
CHAPTER 18 - Touch + Bit Select Lamp Tag ................................................................................................................................ 293
18.1 Touch + bit select lamp overview ..................................................................................................................... 293
CHAPTER 19 - Numeric Tag ........................................................................................................................................................ 295

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 7
 19.1 Numeric Tag Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 295
19.2 Page composition of the numeric tag properties screen ................................................................................... 295
19.3 Address page................................................................................................................................................... 296
19.3.1 Address setting ....................................................................................................................................... 296
19.3.2 Data processing ...................................................................................................................................... 297
19.4 Case page ....................................................................................................................................................... 298
19.4.1 CASE List ................................................................................................................................................ 299
19.4.2 CASE Condition & Status ........................................................................................................................ 300
19.5 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 301
19.5.1 Display settings (VISUAL)......................................................................................................................... 301
19.5.2 Format setting (FORMAT) ........................................................................................................................ 302
CHAPTER 20 - String Tag ............................................................................................................................................................ 304
20.1 String tag overview .......................................................................................................................................... 304
20.2 Page composition of the string tag properties screen ....................................................................................... 304
20.3 Address page................................................................................................................................................... 304
20.4 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 305
CHAPTER 21 - Keypad display (numeric) tag ............................................................................................................................... 307
21.1 Keypad display (numeric) overview ................................................................................................................... 307
21.2 Page composition of the keypad display (numeric) tag properties screen.......................................................... 307
21.3 Address page................................................................................................................................................... 308
21.3.1 Address setting ....................................................................................................................................... 308
21.3.2 Data processing ...................................................................................................................................... 309
21.4 Input mode page ............................................................................................................................................. 312
21.4.1 Input mode settings ................................................................................................................................ 313
21.4.2 Registering keypad (tenkey)..................................................................................................................... 316
21.5 Case page ....................................................................................................................................................... 318
21.5.1 CASE List ................................................................................................................................................ 319
21.5.2 CASE Condition & Status ........................................................................................................................ 319
21.6 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 321
CHAPTER 22 - Keypad Display (String) Tag .................................................................................................................................. 323
22.1 Keypad display (string) overview ...................................................................................................................... 323
22.2 Page composition of the keypad display (string) tag properties screen ............................................................. 323
22.3 Address page................................................................................................................................................... 324
22.4 Input mode page ............................................................................................................................................. 324
22.5 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 324
CHAPTER 23 - Bit Message Tag .................................................................................................................................................. 327
23.1 Bit message tag overview ................................................................................................................................ 327
23.2 Page composition of the bit message properties screen ................................................................................... 327
23.3 Message page ................................................................................................................................................. 328
23.3.1 Display settings (DISPLAY) ....................................................................................................................... 328
23.3.2 Message settings .................................................................................................................................... 329
23.4 Address page................................................................................................................................................... 329
CHAPTER 24 - Word Message Tag .............................................................................................................................................. 331
24.1 Word message tag overview ............................................................................................................................ 331
24.2 Page composition of the word message tag properties screen ......................................................................... 331
24.3 Message page ................................................................................................................................................. 331
24.3.1 Display settings (DISPLAY) ....................................................................................................................... 331
24.3.2 Message settings .................................................................................................................................... 333
24.4 Address page................................................................................................................................................... 335
CHAPTER 25 - Bit Window Tag ................................................................................................................................................... 337
25.1 Bit window tag overview .................................................................................................................................. 337
25.2 Page composition of the bit window tag properties screen .............................................................................. 337

8 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 25.3 Window page .................................................................................................................................................. 337
25.3.1 Window .................................................................................................................................................. 338
25.3.2 Popup position (VISUAL) ......................................................................................................................... 339
CHAPTER 26 - Word Window Tag ............................................................................................................................................... 342
26.1 Word window tag overview .............................................................................................................................. 342
26.2 Page composition of the word window tag properties screen ........................................................................... 342
26.3 Window page .................................................................................................................................................. 343
26.3.1 Window .................................................................................................................................................. 343
26.3.2 Popup position (VISUAL) ......................................................................................................................... 345
26.4 Moving the window screen position during operation ...................................................................................... 347
CHAPTER 27 - Bit Parts Tag ........................................................................................................................................................ 350
27.1 Bit parts tag overview ...................................................................................................................................... 350
27.2 Page composition of the bit parts properties screen ......................................................................................... 350
27.3 Parts page ....................................................................................................................................................... 351
27.3.1 Action when image list is set ................................................................................................................... 351
27.3.2 Action when sub screen is set ................................................................................................................. 353
CHAPTER 28 - Word Parts Tag .................................................................................................................................................... 356
28.1 Word parts tag overview .................................................................................................................................. 356
28.2 Page composition of the word parts properties screen ..................................................................................... 356
28.3 Parts page ....................................................................................................................................................... 356
28.3.1 Parts settings .......................................................................................................................................... 357
28.3.2 Address and parts number setting ........................................................................................................... 358
CHAPTER 29 - Alarm Tag ............................................................................................................................................................ 361
29.1 Page composition of the alarm tag properties screen ....................................................................................... 361
29.2 Alarm settings page ......................................................................................................................................... 362
29.2.1 Current alarm settings ............................................................................................................................. 362
29.2.2 Setting alarm history ............................................................................................................................... 364
29.2.3 Alarm history (CF) settings ...................................................................................................................... 366
29.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 367
29.3.1 Frame setting .......................................................................................................................................... 367
29.3.2 Font/color setting ................................................................................................................................... 369
CHAPTER 30 - Alarm Ext Tag ...................................................................................................................................................... 371
30.1 Composition of the alarm ext tag properties screen ......................................................................................... 371
30.2 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 372
30.2.1 Frame setting .......................................................................................................................................... 372
30.2.2 Font/color setting ................................................................................................................................... 373
30.3 Alarm settings page ......................................................................................................................................... 374
30.3.1 ALARM FEATURE ..................................................................................................................................... 374
30.3.2 Alarm data .............................................................................................................................................. 374
30.3.3 Key setting .............................................................................................................................................. 375
CHAPTER 31 - Log Table ............................................................................................................................................................. 377
31.1 Log table overview........................................................................................................................................... 377
31.2 Page composition of the log table properties screen ........................................................................................ 377
31.3 Data page ........................................................................................................................................................ 378
31.3.1 Table setting ........................................................................................................................................... 378
31.3.2 Data format ............................................................................................................................................ 378
31.4 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 379
31.4.1 Frame setting .......................................................................................................................................... 380
31.4.2 Default column width .............................................................................................................................. 380
31.4.3 Font ........................................................................................................................................................ 381
CHAPTER 32 - Event Log Viewer Tag ........................................................................................................................................... 383
32.1 Event log viewer tag overview .......................................................................................................................... 383

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 9
 32.2 Page composition of the event log viewer tag properties screen ...................................................................... 384
32.3 Event log page ................................................................................................................................................ 384
32.4 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 385
32.4.1 Frame setting.......................................................................................................................................... 385
32.4.2 Font/color ............................................................................................................................................... 385
CHAPTER 33 - Bar Graph Tag...................................................................................................................................................... 387
33.1 Bar graph tag overview .................................................................................................................................... 387
33.2 Page composition of the bar graph tag properties screen ................................................................................ 387
33.3 Graph page ..................................................................................................................................................... 388
33.3.1 Graph style ............................................................................................................................................. 388
33.3.2 Graph data setting .................................................................................................................................. 390
33.4 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 390
33.4.1 Color setting ........................................................................................................................................... 391
33.4.2 Range setup ........................................................................................................................................... 391
CHAPTER 34 - Linear Graph Tag ................................................................................................................................................. 394
34.1 Linear graph tag overview................................................................................................................................ 394
34.2 Page composition of the linear graph tag properties screen ............................................................................. 394
34.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 395
34.3.1 Frame setting.......................................................................................................................................... 395
34.3.2 Graph feature ......................................................................................................................................... 395
34.4 Graph page ..................................................................................................................................................... 396
CHAPTER 35 - Graph Ex Tag ....................................................................................................................................................... 399
35.1 Graph Ex Tag overview ..................................................................................................................................... 399
35.2 Composition of the graph Ex tag properties screen .......................................................................................... 399
35.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 400
35.3.1 Frame setting.......................................................................................................................................... 400
35.4 Graph page ..................................................................................................................................................... 400
35.4.1 Graph feature ......................................................................................................................................... 400
35.4.2 Cursor..................................................................................................................................................... 401
35.4.3 Scale to .................................................................................................................................................. 402
35.5 Data page........................................................................................................................................................ 403
35.5.1 Adding data to display in the graph ........................................................................................................ 403
35.5.2 Graph kind.............................................................................................................................................. 403
35.5.3 Graph data/read direction ....................................................................................................................... 404
35.5.4 Min value/Max value ............................................................................................................................... 406
35.5.5 Visibility on/off address ........................................................................................................................... 406
35.5.6 Line setting ............................................................................................................................................. 407
CHAPTER 36 - Record Tag .......................................................................................................................................................... 409
36.1 Record tag overview ........................................................................................................................................ 409
36.2 Page composition of the record tag properties screen ...................................................................................... 410
36.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 410
36.3.1 Frame setting.......................................................................................................................................... 410
36.3.2 Key setting.............................................................................................................................................. 411
36.4 Graph page ..................................................................................................................................................... 412
36.4.1 Record feature ........................................................................................................................................ 413
36.4.2 Show X-axis/Y-axis grid ........................................................................................................................... 414
36.4.3 Cursor..................................................................................................................................................... 414
36.5 Data page........................................................................................................................................................ 415
36.5.1 Data type/size ......................................................................................................................................... 416
36.5.2 Adding data to display in the graph ........................................................................................................ 416
36.5.3 [The value of Y axis when X axis cursor is placed upon graph] (internal address) ..................................... 416
36.5.4 Graph data/read direction ....................................................................................................................... 416

10 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 36.5.5 Min value/Max value ............................................................................................................................... 417
36.5.6 Visibility on/off address ........................................................................................................................... 418
36.5.7 Line setting ............................................................................................................................................. 418
CHAPTER 37 - X/Y Chart A Tag ................................................................................................................................................... 420
37.1 X/Y chart A tag overview ................................................................................................................................. 420
37.2 Composition of the X/Y chart A tag properties screen ...................................................................................... 420
37.3 Graph setting page .......................................................................................................................................... 421
37.4 Graph data page .............................................................................................................................................. 423
37.5 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 424
37.5.1 Frame setting .......................................................................................................................................... 424
37.5.2 Update condition .................................................................................................................................... 425
CHAPTER 38 - X/Y Chart B Tag ................................................................................................................................................... 428
38.1 X/Y chart B tag overview.................................................................................................................................. 428
38.2 Composition of the X/Y chart B tag properties screen ...................................................................................... 429
38.3 Graph setting page .......................................................................................................................................... 429
38.3.1 Graph feature .......................................................................................................................................... 430
38.3.2 Graph data setting .................................................................................................................................. 430
38.4 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 431
38.4.1 Frame setting .......................................................................................................................................... 432
38.4.2 Update condition .................................................................................................................................... 432
38.5 Data set page .................................................................................................................................................. 434
38.6 Graph condition page ...................................................................................................................................... 435
CHAPTER 39 - Calculation Tag .................................................................................................................................................... 438
39.1 Calculation tag overview .................................................................................................................................. 438
39.2 Page composition of the calculation tag properties screen ............................................................................... 438
39.3 Condition page ................................................................................................................................................ 439
39.3.1 Cycle conditions ...................................................................................................................................... 439
39.3.2 Bit state condition ................................................................................................................................... 439
39.3.3 Word value condition .............................................................................................................................. 439
39.4 Operation page................................................................................................................................................ 441
39.4.1 Composition of the operation page ......................................................................................................... 441
39.4.2 Operation settings................................................................................................................................... 442
CHAPTER 40 - Comm Tag ........................................................................................................................................................... 451
40.1 Comm tag overview ......................................................................................................................................... 451
40.2 Page composition of the comm tag properties screen ...................................................................................... 451
40.3 Condition page ................................................................................................................................................ 452
40.3.1 Cycle condition ....................................................................................................................................... 452
40.3.2 Bit state condition ................................................................................................................................... 452
40.4 Operation page................................................................................................................................................ 453
40.4.1 [Read] communication method................................................................................................................ 453
40.4.2 [Write] communication method ............................................................................................................... 453
CHAPTER 41 - Clock Tag ............................................................................................................................................................. 456
41.1 Clock tag overview........................................................................................................................................... 456
41.2 Page composition of the clock tag properties screen ........................................................................................ 456
41.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 456
41.3.1 Clock format ........................................................................................................................................... 457
41.3.2 Font ........................................................................................................................................................ 457
CHAPTER 42 - Filelist Tag............................................................................................................................................................ 459
42.1 Filelist overview................................................................................................................................................ 459
42.2 Page composition of the filelist tag properties screen ....................................................................................... 459
42.3 Data page ........................................................................................................................................................ 459
42.4 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 460

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 11
 42.5 Touch buttons used in the file list .................................................................................................................... 460
42.6 Searching/copying files using File manager ...................................................................................................... 461
CHAPTER 43 - DocViewer Tag..................................................................................................................................................... 464
43.1 DocViewer tag overview................................................................................................................................... 464
43.2 Page composition of the DocViewer tag properties screen ............................................................................... 465
43.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 465
43.3.1 Frame setting.......................................................................................................................................... 466
43.3.2 TITLE FONT/COLOR ................................................................................................................................. 466
43.4 DocViewer setting page ................................................................................................................................... 466
CHAPTER 44 - Slide Tag.............................................................................................................................................................. 469
44.1 Slide tag overview ........................................................................................................................................... 469
44.2 Page composition of the slide tag properties screen ........................................................................................ 469
44.3 Display page .................................................................................................................................................... 470
44.4 Condition page ................................................................................................................................................ 471
44.4.1 Setting operating conditions ................................................................................................................... 471
44.4.2 Animation setting ................................................................................................................................... 474
CHAPTER 45 - Animation Function ............................................................................................................................................. 476
45.1 Animal function overview ................................................................................................................................. 476
45.2 Page composition of the animal function properties screen .............................................................................. 476
45.3 Visible page ..................................................................................................................................................... 477
45.4 Position page ................................................................................................................................................... 477
45.4.1 Track move ............................................................................................................................................. 478
45.4.2 Position move ......................................................................................................................................... 479
45.5 Rotation page .................................................................................................................................................. 481
45.5.1 Auto rotate ............................................................................................................................................. 482
45.5.2 Manual rotate ......................................................................................................................................... 482
45.5.3 Operation conditions .............................................................................................................................. 483
45.6 Track edit ......................................................................................................................................................... 484
CHAPTER 46 - Tool Menu ........................................................................................................................................................... 487
46.1 Cross reference ................................................................................................................................................ 487
46.1.1 Searching addresses based on the tag .................................................................................................... 487
46.1.2 Searching tags using addresses ............................................................................................................... 488
46.1.3 Convert to Excel...................................................................................................................................... 489
46.2 Address converter ............................................................................................................................................ 490
46.2.1 PLC Select ............................................................................................................................................... 490
46.2.2 Address List ............................................................................................................................................ 491
46.2.3 Address Convert Rule.............................................................................................................................. 492
46.2.4 Convert Rule List..................................................................................................................................... 495
46.2.5 Saving convert rules and converting addresses........................................................................................ 495
46.3 Screen Manager............................................................................................................................................... 496
46.3.1 View ....................................................................................................................................................... 496
46.3.2 Editing .................................................................................................................................................... 497
46.4 CF-Recipe Maker.............................................................................................................................................. 499
46.4.1 Settings before using CF-Recipe .............................................................................................................. 499
46.4.2 Created CF-Recipe file ............................................................................................................................. 500
46.4.3 CF-Recipe load/save ................................................................................................................................ 502
46.5 Screen preview ................................................................................................................................................ 502
46.5.1 Screen preview options ........................................................................................................................... 502
46.5.2 Save screen as image file ........................................................................................................................ 503
46.6 PDF image converter ....................................................................................................................................... 504
46.6.1 Converting PDF files ............................................................................................................................... 505
46.6.2 Exporting images .................................................................................................................................... 506

12 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 46.7 My button maker ............................................................................................................................................. 507
46.7.1 MBS image editing .................................................................................................................................. 507
46.7.2 File menu ................................................................................................................................................ 510
46.8 Image library ................................................................................................................................................... 511
46.8.1 Composition of the image library ............................................................................................................ 511
46.9 Project image tool............................................................................................................................................ 513
46.9.1 Convert and save images ........................................................................................................................ 513
46.9.2 Image list ................................................................................................................................................ 514
46.9.3 Image statistics and info.......................................................................................................................... 514
46.10 Run Simulator .................................................................................................................................................. 515
46.10.1 Menu and toolbar composition ............................................................................................................... 515
46.10.2 Address List ............................................................................................................................................ 516
46.11 TopView client creation .................................................................................................................................... 517
46.11.1 Creating a client file ................................................................................................................................ 518
46.11.2 TopView screen ....................................................................................................................................... 519
46.12 Editing options ................................................................................................................................................ 520
46.12.1 Editing options page ............................................................................................................................... 520
46.12.2 Hint Option............................................................................................................................................. 521
CHAPTER 47 - Transfer Menu...................................................................................................................................................... 524
47.1 Transfer overview ............................................................................................................................................. 524
47.2 Build and transfer ............................................................................................................................................ 525
47.2.1 Project builder......................................................................................................................................... 525
47.2.2 Transmitter run after build ....................................................................................................................... 529
47.3 Running the transmitter ................................................................................................................................... 529
47.3.1 Composition of the transmitter................................................................................................................ 530
47.4 Errors that occur during transfer....................................................................................................................... 536
47.5 V4.0 OS Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................. 536
47.6 USB driver installation ...................................................................................................................................... 537
47.7 Transfer to USB memory storage device ........................................................................................................... 537
47.7.1 Copying and transmitting projects to USB memory ................................................................................. 537
47.7.2 Copying and transmitting OS and font files to USB memory .................................................................... 538
47.7.3 Copy internal address and logging data to USB memory ......................................................................... 538
CHAPTER 48 - Window Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 541
48.1 Minimize all ..................................................................................................................................................... 541
48.2 Maximize all..................................................................................................................................................... 541
48.3 Cascade ........................................................................................................................................................... 542
48.4 Tile .................................................................................................................................................................. 542
48.5 Close all ........................................................................................................................................................... 543
CHAPTER 49 - Help Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 545
49.1 Help ................................................................................................................................................................ 545
49.2 Communication manual ................................................................................................................................... 545
49.3 Product info ..................................................................................................................................................... 545

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 13
 CHAPTER 1 Over view

14 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
CHAPTER 1 - Over view

Thank you for your purchase from M2I. Before using, please read this manual and sufficiently familiarize yourself

with the product and its software XDesignerPlus4 for proper use.

1.1 Hardware overview

The following is a hardware overview for XTOP.

1.1.1 Use of the product

XTOP handles the complex functions of cutting edge FA equipment with a graphic interface.

XTOP communicates with various controllers such as PLC, and allows users to visually monitor and

control equipment in real-time.

(1) Fields of application

XTOP is being used in a variety of different fields.

Field Subfield

Displays Logistics equipment, surveillance equipment, washing equipment, return equipment, etc.

Chemicals/steel Pharmaceuticals, plastics, cosmetics, chemical processes, steelmaking, ironmaking, etc.

Instant noodles, noodles, soups, snacks, rice, ice cream, milk, packing machines,
Foods/beverages
warehouse management, etc.

Textiles Dyeing, printing, dry cleaning, weaving, rotating machinery, etc.

Energy Petroleum refineries, batteries, power generation, hydropower, etc.

Gas cabinets, BMC, cooling equipment, scrubber equipment, loaders/unloaders,

Semiconductors/electronics
chambers, lead framers, laser markers, etc.

Automotive/shipbuilding Painting, welding, pressing assembly, etc.

1.1.2 Communication ports of the product

Depending on the model, various communication ports are provided, among serial, ethernet, USB

Device/Host, CF card, SD card, and Fieldbus.

Communication ports Description

Power AC 85~264V or DC 24V(20~28V) power is provided, depending on the model.

Two serial ports, COM1, and COM2 are provided. [COM1] has 6 pins, ans supports only

RS-232C communications. [COM2] has 9 or 15 pins, ans supports RS-232C/422/485

Serial
communications. [COM1] can connect to both PCs and controllers. [COM2] can connect

to controllers.

Ethernet Connects to controllers or PCs for ethernet communications.

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 15
 USB device Is located on the front face of the product. Uses a USB cable to communicate with the PC.

USB host This port is used to connect to USB memory storage devices or printers.

CF card This port is used to insert CF memory cards.

A Profibus module (option) can be equipped for Profibus communication. Alternatively, a

Fieldbus
CC-Link module (option) can be equipped for CC-Link communication.

1.1.3 List of supported PLCs

The following is a list of controllers that can be used for communication. The list of controllers

supported is continuously updated. Please refer to the M2I Co., Ltd. website (www.m2i.co.kr) for the

latest information.

Connectable PLC

RS-232C/
Manufacturer Series CPU Type Ethernet
422/485

MELSEC-Q *주 1) Q□□/00J/□□H/□□UDH/□□UDEH ● ●

FX0/1/2/1S/1N/2N/2NC/3U/3UC/3G ●
MELSEC-FX
10/20GM ●

MITSUBISHI Electronic A1N/2N/3N ● ●

Corporation A1S(H)/2S(H)/AOJ2(H) ● ●
MELSEC-A
A2A/3A/2A-S1 ● ●

A2U/3U/4U/2USH ● ●

CC-Link(RD) CC-Link Master Device ●

SYSMAC CJ2 CJ2H ● ●

SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1G/1M ● ●

SYSMAC CS1 CS1G/H ● ●

OMRON Industrial
SYSMAC CP CP1L/1H ● ●
Automation
C50/120/200/500/1000 ●

SYSMAC C CQM1/1H ●

CPM1/2A/2C ●

XGT XGK/XGI/XGR ● ●

XGB XEC/XBC/XBM ● ●

GLOFA-GM GM1/2/3/4/6/7 ● ●

LS Industrial Systems 80/120/200/300/1000S ● ●

10S1/10/30/60/100S ●
Master-K
60/200H ●

500(H)/1000 ●

SIMATIC S7-1200 All Models ●

SIEMENS AG. SIMATIC S7-400 All Models ● ●

SIMATIC S7-300 All Models ● ●

16 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 SIMATIC S7-200 All Models ●

SIMATIC S5 90/95/100/115/135/155U ●

PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP Master Device ●

ControlLogix 1756 ● ●

CompactLogix 1768/1769 ● ●
Rockwell Automation
MicroLogix 1000/1200/1500 system ● ●
(Allen Bradely)
SLC500 SLC5/03/04/05 ● ●

PLC-5 PLC5/11/20/30/40/40L/60/60L ●

MODBUS All Models ●

MODBUS
MODBUS/TCP All Models ●

VersaMax PLC IC200C/N/U□□□□□ ● ●

Series 90-30 PLC IC693C□□□□□ ● ●

GE Fanuc Intelligent
Series 90-70 PLC IC697C□□□□□ ● ●
Platforms
PACSystems RX3i IC695□□□□□□ ● ●

PACSystems RX7i IC698C□□□□□ ● ●

Micro TSX37 All models ●

Premium TSX/TPMX P57 All models ● ●

Twido TWD LCAA/LMDA All models ●

Schneider Electric
Quantum 140 CPU All models ● ●
Industries
Momentum 171 CCS/CCC All models ● ●

M340 M340 ●

MDrive MAI3CRL23□6-□□□ ●

PANASONIC Electric
FP FP2(SH)/X/Σ/0/e/M/10S(H)/3/1,FP-X ●
Works

PROGIC-8 PROGIC-8 ●
YASKAWA Electric
MP900/2000 MP920/930/2200/2300 ● ●
Corporation
Control Pack CP-9200SH ●

YOKOGAWA Electric
FA-M3 F3SP□□-□N/H/S ● ●
Corporation

Micrex-SX SPH□□□ ●
FUJI Electric
Micrex-F F, F□□(S/H), F1□□(S/H), F200 ●

KV-700/1000 ●
KEYENCE Corporation KV
KV-10/24 ●

KOYO Electronic
DL-205/305/405 D2 240/330/430 ●
Industries

FBs FBs-□□MA/MC/MN ● ●
FATEK Automation
FBe FBe–□□MA/MC ●
Corporation
FBn FBn-□□MCT ●

RS Automation Alpha N7/NX(70/700/750/CCU) ●

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 17
 Plus NX7/NX Plus(70P/700P/CCU+) ●

SPC SPC-10/100/120S/300 ●

X8 All Models ● ●

CP CM1-CP3/4□ ● ●

KDT Systems XP CM1-XP1/2/3□ ● ●

BP CM2-BP16/32□□ ● ●

Tiny PLC TCP-3X/9X ●

Comfile Technology
Qubloc All models ●

Hitachi Industrial EH-150 ●

HIDIC-H
Equipment Systems Micro EH ●

POSCON POSFA A POSFA-A ●

EMERSON EC20 EC20 ●

Delta DVP DVP series ●

VIGOR Electric
M/VB/VH M series / VB series / VH series ●
Corporation

Connectable DDC

ASIC DDC DDC ●

Speed tech ExtDDC ST/PS, ST/RS, ASIC/2-7040 ●

SAIA SAIA PCD2 ●

Connectable Temperature Controller

CB CB100/400/500/700/900 ●

FB900/400 All models ●

HA900/400 All models ●

MA900/901 All models ●

RKC Instrument SRV V-TIO-A/V-TIO-C ●

SRX X-TIO-A ●

SA200/100 SA100 ●

SR Mini HG H-PCP-A/H-PCP-J ●

SRZ Z-TIO/DIO/CT/COM ●

NP200/100 All models ●

NX, PX NX9/7/3/2, PX9/7 ●

HanyoungNux
RT RT9 ●

UX100 UX100 ●

SD5□□/SL5□□/SP5□
NOVA500 ●
□/ST5□□
SamwonTech
SD3□□/SS3□□/ST3□
NOVA300 ●
□

18 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 SP790 SP7□□ ●

UT(/UP/UM/UD)3/4/5/7/1
YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation UT/UP/UM ●
0□□

DB DB1/DB2 All models ●

KP KP1/2/3 All models ●

CHINO Corporation LT LT23/3/4/830 All models ●

JU JU All models ●

JW JW All models ●

IMO DTP DTP/TP ●

Connectable Invertor

Sanken SAMCO-i ihf/ipf/QS/QT/It/iF ●

SV-
Starvert
LS Industrial Systems iS7/G5A/P5A/C5/V5/G5/S ●
Inverter
5/H/V/S3

ABB ACS ACS140/400/500 ●

Huropec HC HC ●

UDICON UDICON ●
FEBA
SMARTCON SMARTCON ●

FUJI Electric Systems Inverter FRN□□□□11S-□ ●

IMO Jaguar CUB/VXSM/VXM ●

Connectable Weigh Indicator

AND AD AD4326/4327/4328/4329 ●

CAS CI/NT CI/NT ●

BONGSHIN BS BS ●

SEWHACNM SI 3000 ●

SinHan SH5100 ●

Connectable Barcode Reader

General Barcode Reader USB/RS-232C USB/RS-232C ●

Connectable RFID Reader

OMRON RFID V680 ●

LS Industrial Systems RFID XCODE-1306/1307 ●

RIM125 ●
CEYON Technology RFID
TRA5 ●

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 19
 Connectable Motion Controller

iMS-J iMS-J ●

DONGBU iM-Σ iM–Σ2/3/4/5/6/7/8 ●

(DASAROBOT) UNICON UNICON ●

DTR DTR2/3/4 ●

ROBOSTAR Newro RCS6000/RCM ●

MCU MCU-MA/MP/XA/XP ●

EMOTIONTEK MCU2 MCU-MA2/MP2/XA2/XP2 ●

MCS MCS-80A4/P4/A8/P8 ●

OMRON Campositioner 3F88L-160/162 ●

Gidding & Lewis MMC MMC ●

Hyundai Heavy Industries Hi4 Robot BD412 Board ●

Bosch-Rexroth AG VisualMotion VM7,VM8 ●

Delta-Tau PMAC Mini-PMAC ●

Connectable Servo

MITSUBISHI Electronic Corporation MELSERVO MR-J2S/M, MR-J3 ●

HIGEN Motor(구 OTIS) FDA FDA6000/7000 ●

LS MECAPION (구 Metronix) Anypack APD-VS/VP/VK/VN□□ ●

Connectable Pump

Alcatel ADP/ADS ●

Ebra EST/ESR/ESA ●

Edward iM ●

Kashiyama SDE ●

LOT DD ●

1.1.4 XTOP menu screen

The XTOP has a [Menu Screen] and an [Run Screen].

In the [Menu Screen], the XTOP settings can be accessed. The model name and the version of the

loaded OS can be viewed. Also, date, time, and communication settings can be made, and system

initialization can be performed. A diagnostics menu is provided for checking normal operation of the

XTOP. The [Run Screen] is the screen where the loaded project program is operated. Users can easily

switch between the menus screen and the run screen.

(☞ See [1.1.6] of [chapter 1] for how to switch screens.)

(1) First page

This is the first page of the menu screen. On the first page, there are buttons to navigate to each page

of the menu screen. On the left top, the model name of the product is shown. On the bottom right, the

20 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
currently selected language, date, and time are shown. The language, date and time can be changed.

[Fig. First page]

No Menu Description

When the RUN button is touched, the screen switches from the menu screen to the run
1 RUN
screen.

2 System setup The system setup screen is brought up.

3 PLC setup The PLC setup screen is brought up.

4 Device manager The device manger screen is brought up.

5 Interface The interface screen is brought up.

6 System initialization The system initialization screen is brought up.

7 System information The system information screen is brought up.

The current language for the [Menu Screen] is displayed. Touch to select between Korean
8 [A] – Language
and English.

9 Date / Time The current date and time are displayed. Touch to change.

(2) System setup screen

On this page, basic XTOP settings can be made.

[Fig. System setup screen]

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 21
 No Menu Description

Set the operation mode when XTOP is turned ON.

1 Initial operation mode
[Menu]: The menu screen is shown. [Run]: The run screen is shown.

2 RUN start screen number Set the number of the first screen to be shown on the run screen.

This function turns off the backlight if the system is left idle for a set period of time.

3 Screen saver Set the time in minutes. When the screen is touched, the backlight is switched back

on. By using this function, the service life of the backlight can be extended.

If a password is entered, the password is asked for for downloads and uploads, and
4 Password
when entering the menu screen.

XTOP has internal addresses from 0 to 5119. Internal addresses are in word units.

5 Latch set All address data is erased if power is reset. However, is latches are set, data is

preserved even if power is reset.

6 TOP ID number The ID number of XTOP for N:1 communication is set.

Check cycle, 1:N Ethernet Set the cycle for checking Ethernet 1:N comm errors.
7
Comm. Error

Set to use the communication error message display function. [Visible]: Error details

8 Comm. Error message are shown on the bottom of the run screen when a communication error occurs.

[Invisible]: The message is not shown.

Set the action when a fatal system error occurs. [Restart] XTOP power is reset when
9 Fatal system error
an error occurs. [Stop]: XTOP stops operation.

10 Serial bypass Set whether to use serial bypass.

11 Protocol analyzer Set whether to use the protocol analyzer.

(3) PLC setup screen

From this page, communication settings can be made for the PLC connected to XTOP.

[Fig. PLC setup screen]

22 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
No Menu Description

<Setting 1: Serial communication>

1 (PLC info) Info on the set PLC is shown.

2 (Communication info) Info on the set communication method is shown.

Set the station number (used for comm. diagnostics) of the controller connected
3 PLC station number
to the COM port.

Set the time out period for the controller connected to the COM port. (Time
4 Time out
out: Time during which controller (PLC) response is waited for)

Set the pre-send delay of the controller connected to the COM port. (Delay

5 Delay before send before send: When the XTOP require communication, communication is

performed after the set delay.)

6 TOP COM setting Brings up the communications settings screen (device manager) of XTOP.

Diagnoses communication with the PLC connected to the COM port.

7 Communication diagnostics
(OK is shown if there are no anomalies.)

[Fig. PLC setup screen 2]

No Menu Description

<Setting 2: Ethernet communication>

1 (PLC info) Info on the set PLC is shown.

2 (Communication info) Info on the set communication method is shown.

3 PLC IP Set the IP address for the controller connected to the ethernet port.

4 Protocol Set the protocol for the controller connected to the ethernet port.

5 PLC read port Set the read port for the controller connected to the ethernet port.

6 PLC write port Set the write port for the controller connected to the ethernet port.

7 TOP Port Set the XTOP port for the controller connected to the ethernet port.

8 PLC station number Set the station number (used for comm. diagnostics) of the controller connected to the

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 23
 ethernet port.

Set the time out period for the controller connected to the COM port. (Time out: Time
9 Time out
during which controller (PLC) response is waited for)

Set the time out period for the controller connected to the ethernet port. (Time out: Time
10 Delay before send
during which controller (PLC) response is waited for)

Set the pre-send delay of the controller connected to the ethernet port.

11 TOP IP (Delay before send: When the XTOP require communication, communication is performed

after the set delay.)

12 TOP ethernet setting Brings up the communications settings screen (device manager) of XTOP.

Communication Diagnoses communication with the PLC connected to the ethernet port. (OK is shown if
13
diagnostics there are no anomalies.)

(4) Device manager screen

[Fig. Device manager screen]

No Menu Description

<Ethernet communication>

1 MAC The MAC address of XTOP is shown.

2 IP Address Set the IP address for XTOP.

3 Subnet mask Set the subnet mask for XTOP.

4 Gateway Set the gateway for XTOP.

<Serial communication>

1 Baud rate Set the communication speed (baud rate) of the controller connected to the COM port.

2 Data bit Set the data bits for the controller connected to the COM port.

3 Stop bit Set the stop bit for the controller connected to the COM port.

4 Parity bit Set the parity bits for the controller connected to the COM port.

5 Signal level Set the signal level (RS-232C/422/485) of the controller connected to the COM port.

6 COM loopback Diagnoses communication with the controller connected to the COM port. (OK is shown if

diagnostics there are no anomalies.)

24 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 [Fig. Device manager screen 2]

No Menu Description

1 Buzzer Set whether to use a buzzer sound with touch.

2 Touch method Set the touch method. (Normal / Safe) (Safe: Two-touch prevention)

3 Touch sensitivity Set touch sensitivity. (Normal / Low)

Test whether the touch position is normal. Click the 'X' button on the top right corner to exit
4 Touch test
the touch test.

Test whether the SRAM memory is normal. (If there are no anomalies, the 'SRAM normal'
5 SRAM test
message is shown.)

6 Brightness level Set the brightness of the LCD. (Level 0: Brightest ~ Level 7: Darkest)

Test the status of the LCD screen. Click the 'X' button on the top right corner to exit the touch
7 Color test
test.

Test the status of the LEDS on the front face of the XTOP. (The LEDs on the front face are lit,
8 LED test
alternating between green and red.)

(5) Interface screen

[Fig. Interface screen]

No Menu Description

Using a USB memory device, USB memory data is copied to XTOP, or XTOP data is copied
1 File copy
to the USB memory. (Project files / OS files / font files)

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 25
 2 Capacity check The total capacity / used capacity / remaining capacity of the USB memory is shown.

3 CF Card Eject Click to safely remove a CF card.

4 CF Card Format Formats a CF card.

5 Capacity check The total capacity / used capacity / remaining capacity of the CF card is shown.

6 Printer Set the properties (portrait/landscape, color) for the printer connected to XTOP.

7 Test print Perform test print for the printer connected to XTOP.

(6) System initialization screen

[Fig. System initialization screen]

No Menu Description

1 Erase project Initializes the project file.

2 Reset backup memory Initializes backup memory data.

In [Project]-[Project property] of XDesignerPlus4 on the PC, click the model

3 Set with PC setup value name of the touch. [HMI Setting] is shown on the right. If HMI settings have

been made, the value is set to these settings.

Initialize communication settings and all initial settings to their factory default
4 Reset menu to factory value
values. (When reset is performed, the menu screen is changed to English.)

(7) System information screen

[Fig. System information screen]

26 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
No Menu Description

1 OS Version The OS version of XTOP is shown. The version and date of the OS is shown.

2 H/W Version The hardware version of XTOP is shown.

3 Running Time The running time of XTOP is shown.

4 Error Code When an error occurs, an error code is displayed.

5 Error Scan Code When an error occurs, the location of the error is shown.

6 Clear error Delete an error that has occurred.

1.1.5 Touch calibration method

With the [Analog Touch] method, the touch position may change due to external factors such as

temperature. When the touch position requires correction during use of the product, calibration is

performed as follows.

[Fig. Touch calibration method]

① Turn the XTOP off. Touching the bottom half of the screen, turn the touch screen on. A moment

later, the screen shows the message [Remove your fingers]. When the fingers are removed, [Touch

calibration mode] is entered.

② The message [Touch anywhere to calibrate.] is shown, and a countdown [10, 9, 8, ..., 0] is shown on

the screen. Before the count down reaches [0], touch anywhere on the screen.

③ The message [Press the center of the screen.] is displayed, together with a black rectangle. Using

the touch pen, touch the marked area accurately. According to the messages displayed, touch the

top left, top right, bottom left, and bottom right parts of the screen.

④ After designating the screen positions, the message [Press the screen to save.] is shown. Touch the

screen one more time to complete touch calibration. The message [Data Writing...] is displayed.

1.1.6 How to switch from the Run Screen to the Menu Screen

[Fig. Switching to the menu screen]

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 27
 (1) Method 1
Turn the XTOP off. When power is turned on, a [Beep] is sounded.

As soon as the beep is sounded, touch the main key part of the menu screen (the LCD screen directly

beneath the TOP logo) to transition to the menu screen. If it is difficult to time your touch, reset the

device, and tap regularly on the main key part.

If the power is turned on with the touch screen pressed, the menu screen is not brought up.
Note
Tap the screen after the beep sounds.

(2) Method 2
Transition by registering a touch button on a project. From the [Operation] page of the touch tag,

enable [EXIT] under [Special Functions]. When this touch button is pressed on the screen, the run

screen is closed, and the menu screen is brought up.

[Fig. Switching to the menu screen using a touch button]

1.2 Software overview

The XDesignerPlus4 program used for XTOP screen projects is described.

1.2.1 PC hardware specifications

These are the minimum PC specifications for normal operation of the XDesignerPlus4 program.

Item Minimum requirement Recommended specifications

CPU Pentium 3 800MHz or higher Pentium 4 1.2Ghz or higher

Memory 512 MB or higher 1 GB or higher

Graphic Adapter
SVGA(800*600) 16bit color or higher SVGA(1024*768) 32bit color or higher
and Monitor

HDD Space 500 MB or more 1 GB or more

Key Board Windows compatible keyboard Windows compatible keyboard

Mouse Windows compatible mouse Windows compatible mouse

28 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
 Printer Windows compatible printer Windows compatible printer

OS Windows 2000/XP or higher Windows 2000/XP or higher

1.2.2 Touch program writing and testing order

① After closing the PLC (controller) program, write a [Project] according to the PLC program.

② The completed project is transmitted to XTOP. Data can be transmitted between the PC and XTOP

using serial/USB/ethernet cables.

③ The PLC and XTOP are connected depending on the communication method. Communication

manuals are provided for each PLC manufacturer. Refer to these manuals when connecting the PC

and XTOP. The communication manuals include detailed descriptions of communication setting

methods, and wiring diagrams. The communication manuals are included in the XDesignerPlus4

software, and can also be downloaded individually from the website.

④ Check communications, and test the project. Communication status can be checked from the

[Diagnostics screen] of the [Menu screen] of XTOP. If communication is not established between the

PLC and XTOP, the XTOP does not operate normally.

1.2.3 Software types and supported XTOP models

Category Software Extension Supported TOP models Unsupported TOP models

All discontinued models

XDesignerPlus4 *. DPX4 XTOP, HTOP series Some XTOP models (XTOP10T, XTOP10TS,

XTOP12T, XTOP15T)
New
Some discontinued models (TOP3SA,

XDesignerPlus *. DPX ATOP, XTOP, HTOP series TOP3SAE, TOP5SAD, TOP8TA, XTOP10T,

XTOP10TS, XTOP12T, XTOP15T)

Discontinued ATOP/CTOP All XTOP, HTOP, Wide Type models

Old TOP-Designer *.TOP
model series
model
XTOP-Designer *.XOP All XTOP series models All ATOP, CTOP, HTOP, Wide Type models

XDesignerPlus4 can use XTOP and HTOP Series programs.

1.2.4 Using old project files in the new XDesignerPlus4 software

When the XDesignerPlus4 program is installed, the icon [XDPConvertor] is created on the desktop.

[Fig. XDPConvertor on the desktop]

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 29
 Using the XDPConverter, a file for old software can be converted into a file for XDesignerPlus.

Using the [Source Open] button, open an old project file (*.TOP, *.PMU, *.XOP).

When the [Convertor] button on the bottom is clicked, a [*.DPX] file for XDesignerPlus is created in the

path below.

OPen the created file in XDesignerPlus4, then save again as a [*.DPX4] file.

Note) Before opening, editing and transmitting a converted file, be sure to check the model name of the

touch in [Project]-[Project property].

(1) Manual settings required after converting.

Same settings need to be performed manually after converting.

① When an ATOP file [*.TOP] file has been converted.

Th touch model must be designated again in [Project]-[Project property]. In the previous TOP-

Designer, touch screen models were grouped by resolution, and therefore model names did not

have to be designated. However, in the XDesignerPlus4 program, individual touch model names

must be designated.

[Fig. Changing the touch model name]

If the wrong touch model name is selected, the project is not transferred to the touch screen.

After converting, the original file is backed up as a [*.OLD] file. The existing [*.TOP] file is internally

changed, and therefore cannot be opened. Therefore, when using the existing file, please change
the extension of the newly created [*.OLD] file to [*.TOP].

30 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
② When a [*.TOP] or [*.XOP] file has been converted

In [TOP-Designer] and [XTOP-Designer], the [Body settings] under the [File] menu are not

converted. These [Body settings] are the same as [Use HMI settings] in [Project property] under the

[Project] menu of [XDesignerPlus4]. Therefore, in the case of projects using body settings, check

[Use HMI settings], and perform settings again. (☞ See [7.12.3] of [chapter 7] for the HMI setting

method.)

[Fig. Using HMI settings]

Also, when using a barcoder, settings are not converted.

Therefore, barcoder settings must be performed again, as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. Barcoder settings]

1.2.5 Relationship between software version and TOP OS version

Software TOP model OS version

TOP-Designer ATOP/CTOP V 2.3

XTOP-Designer XTOP V 2.4

XDesignerPlus ATOP/CTOP V3.0

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 31
 XTOP/HTOP V3.1

XDesignerPlus4 XTOP/HTOP V4

If the XTOP OS version and the software version do not match, projects cannot be transferred.

1.2.6 How to upgrade/downgrade OS

XTOP products are equipped with version 4 since September 2014. If the XTOP OS version is 4, use

XDesignerPlus V4. If the version is 3.1, XDesignerPlus V2 must be used.

If the touch is V4, data cannot be transmitted using XDesignerPlus V2.

If the touch is V2, upgrade the touch to V4 to use XDesignerPlus V4.

XTOP XDesignerPlus
Result Action
OS Version Version

1. Download XDesignerPlus V4 from the website, install, then run.

Cannot connect to
V4 V2 2. Downgrade and use XTOP. (All XTOP projects and data is
PC for transfer
erased when a downgrade is performed.)

Asked to perform 1. Upgrade and use XTOP. (All XTOP projects and data is erased
Previous
V4 OS upgrade when an upgrade is performed.)
V3.1
when transmitting. 2. Download XDesignerPlus V2 from the website, install, then run.

(1) OS upgrade method

The process of changing a 3.1 version XTOP OS to V4 is called an OS upgrade.

When transmitting to a V3.1 XTOP from XDesignerPlus4, the following OS upgrade info message is

shown. Because all data, including loaded projects, is erased from the touch when an OS upgrade is

performed, a warning message is displayed together.

Click the [Ok] button to run the following [V4 OS upgrade] program.

Data transfer can only be performed using USB cable. Click the [Next] button to transfer the V4

upgrade Boot/Font/OS files in sequence. After transferring files at each stage, wait for the touch to

reboot before making the next transfer. When transfer is completed, touch calibration is performed.
Following the instructions on the screen, accurately touch the 5 points.

32 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
If the upgrade is interrupted, run the [Transfer]-[OS Upgrade] menu to resume.

(2) OS downgrade method

The process of changing a V4 version XTOP OS to V3.1 is called an OS downgrade. Run the transmitter

in XDesignerPlus V2, and transfer the V3.1 Boot/Font/OS files in sequence. The V3.1 Boot/Font/OS files

can be downloaded from [Downloads]-[Other Programs] on the website. After transferring files at each

stage, wait for the touch to reboot before making the next transfer. When transfer is completed, touch

calibration is performed. Following the instructions on the screen, accurately touch the 5 points.

CHAPTER 1 -Overview 33
 CHAPTER 2 Installation

34 CHAPTER 1 -Overview
CHAPTER 2 - Installation

Installing the XDesignerPlus4 illustration program.

2.1.1 Downloading the XDesignerPlus4 program

XDesignerPlus4 can be downloaded for free from the M2I Co., Ltd. website (www.m2i.co.kr).

As shown in the figure below, click the software download button on the bottom of the main page.

[Fig. Navigating to the software download page on the website]

The software download page comprises the following list. Click XDesignerPlus4 on the top to download

the latest full installation file. When XDesignerPlus4 is installed, OS files and USB driver files are

included in the installation path.

[Fig. The software download page on the website]

Older version programs and OS files, etc., can be downloaded from the posts below.

(1) Update and previous illustrator software

CHAPTER 2 -Installation 35
 No List Description

1 XDesignerPlus V4 Illustrator software for XTOP OS V4.

2 XDesignerPlus V2 Illustrator software for XTOP OS V3.1.

3 Old TOP-Designer Old software for ATOP.

4 Old XTOP-Designer Old software for XTOP.

5 TOPAnywhere An ethernet communication data management program.

Driver files for USB transfer. This driver is installed automatically when

XDesignerPlus4 is installed. The file is included in the path below, which is the
6 USB driver
installation path for XDesignerPlus4.

[C:\Program Files (x86)\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\usb_driver]

2.1.2 Installing XDesignerPlus4

The installation method for the XDesignerPlus4 program is explained below.

① The downloaded file is a zipper file. Unzip the file.

② Double click and run the installation file (XDesignerPlus(Version)Setup.exe).

③ When the installation file is run, the following [Installation wizard] is run. Click the [Next] button.

[Fig. Program installation wizard start screen]

④ Enter the user name and company name, then click the [Next] button.

[Fig. Enter user name and company name]

36 CHAPTER 2 -Installation
⑤ Next, the SUB driver is installed. If the driver is not already installed in the PC, the USB driver is

installed. If the driver is already installed, the message "USB Driver already installed" is displayed.

[Fig. USB driver installation]

⑥ Select the installation type, and click the [Next] button.

Complete – All items are installed, and the installation path is automatically set to

[C:\program Files\M2I Corp\ XDesignerPlus4]. (Recommended)

Custom – The items to install, and the installation path can be designated.

[Fig. Choosing setup type]

⑦ When [Complete] is selected, the installation start screen is shown immediately. Click the [Install]

button to begin installation. To change settings, click the [Back] button.

After [Install] button is clicked, installation proceeds and is completed.

[Fig. Installation start screen]

CHAPTER 2 -Installation 37
 ⑧ When [Custom] is selected, the installation path can be specified using the [Change] button as shown

in the figure below. When the [Next] button is clicked, installation proceeds and is completed.

[Fig. Installation path selection]

This screen shows the installation in progress.

[Fig. Installation in progress]

This screen shows the installation completed.

[Fig. Installation completed]

38 CHAPTER 2 -Installation
2.1.3 Updating the XDesignerPlus4 program
If the XDesignerPlus4 program is already installed on the PC, but the version is low, the following

screen is brought up when the latest XDesignerPlus4 program is installed.

[Fig. XDesignerPlus4 update]

Select options and click the [Next] button. Installation proceeds according to the selected options.

List Description

Modify Only newly added functions are installed.

Repair Re-install with the latest version.

Remove the XDesignerPlus4 program installed on the PC. Select [Remove] and click the [Next]

button to bring up the following program removal confirmation message. Clicking [Yes] here

removes the XDesignerPlus4 program.

Remove

2.1.4 Removing the XDesignerPlus4 program

To remove the XDesignerPlus 4 program from the PC, select [Add/Remove Programs] from the [Control

Panel] of Windows, then bring up the Add/Remove programs screen as shown in [Fig. Add/Remove

Programs].

Select XDesignerPlus4 and click the [Modify/Remove] button on the right to complete the

XDesignerPlus4 removal process.

Even if the installed XDesignerPlus4 program is removed, project files created by the user, image
Note
libraries, and other files that were created after the installation are not deleted.

CHAPTER 2 -Installation 39
 [Fig. Add/Remove Program]

2.1.5 Running the XDesignerPlus4

When installation of the XDesignerPlsu4 program is completed successfully, an XDesignerPlus4 icon is

created on the desktop. Also, an XDesignerPlus4 shortcut icon is created in the Path [Start]-[All

Programs]-[M2I Corp]-[XDesignerPlus4] of Windows.

Click the icon on the desktop, or the XDesignerPlus4 icon from the Windows start menu. The following

screen for language selection is shown. Select from English, Korean, Chinese, and Arabic.

Click the [OK] button to run the XDesignerPlus4 program. The display language can be changed in

[View]-[Language].

[Fig. XDesignerPlus4 program run screen]

40 CHAPTER 2 -Installation
CHAPTER 3 Overall Composition of

XDesignerPlus4

CHAPTER 2 -Installation 41
CHAPTER 3 - Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

3.1 XDesignerPlus4 composition

The XDesignerPlus 4 screen is composed as follows.

[Fig. Screen composition]

[Menu] is located on the top, and the [Toolbar] is beneath. There are [Docking Windows] on the left

and right, and the [Screen] is shown in the center. At the bottom is the [Status bar].

3.2 Menu composition

This menu is necessary for illustrating. Menu items are file, edit, view, project, draw, tag, tool,

transmission, window, and help. Each of the menus is explained in detail from [Chapter 4] onwards. In

this chapter, the composition of each menu will be explained briefly.

3.2.1 File menu (Alt + F)

In the file menu, tasks such as new project creation/save/open/close/end can be performed. Also, by

creating base screens/window screens/sub screens, and using the [Add project] menu, multiple project

functionality is provided. (☞ See [chapter 4] for a more detailed description of the file menu.)

[Fig. File menu]

42 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

(1) New Project (Ctrl + N)
Creates a project and screens.

Menu Description

New project Creates a new project.

New base screen Creates 1 base screen in addition to the existing base screen.

New window screen Creates 1 window screen in addition to the existing window screen.

New sub screen Creates 1 sub screen in addition to the existing sub screen.

(2) Open Project (Ctrl + O)

Loads a project file written with XDesignerPlus4 and saved as a [*.DPX4] file.

(3) Add project

This menu provides multiple project functionality.

Multiple project functionality allows for up to 4 projects to be opened in the XDesignerPlus4 program

for editing. Using this function, different projects can be edited at the same time, and functions such as

copying screens between different projects are facilitated.

[Fig. Add project]

Menu Description

Add new project A new project is created, and added to the bottom of [Project manager].

Add open project A saved project is opened, and added to the bottom of [Project manager].

(4) Template admin

A template saves the base format of the illustrator format, and allows for continued use of that format

afterwards. A template file is created using the currently open project file.

(5) Template agent

Retrieves a template file.

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 43

 (6) Save Project (Ctrl + S)
Save the currently opened project. If the project has never been saved before, then the save path and

[File name] are designated, and the file is saved as a [*.DPX4] file.

(7) Save As Project (Shift + Ctrl + S)

The currently open project is saved as a separate file with a different name.

(8) Close
Among the currently open projects, the active project is closed.

(9) Close project all

All currently open projects are closed.

(10) Print (Ctrl + P)

The content of the project is printed.

(11) Recent file

A list of recently opened projects is shown. When an item is selected from the list, the corresponding

project is opened.

(12) Exit (Alt + F4)

The XDesignerPlus4 program is exited.

3.2.2 Edit menu (Alt + E)

In the edit menu, shapes and tags registered to the screen can be edited.

(☞ See [chapter 5] for a more detailed description of the edit menu.)

[Fig. Edit menu]

Menu Description

Undo the latest edits made, one step at a time.

Undo (Ctrl + Z)
Up to 50 steps can be undone for each screen.

44 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 Cancels undos, one step at a time.
Redo (Ctrl + R)
Up to 50 steps can be redone for each screen.

Select all (Ctrl + A) All shapes and tags registered to the currently active screen are selected.

Cut (Ctrl + X) Cut the selected shape, tag or group.

Copy (Ctrl + C) Copy the selected shape, tag or group.

Multi copy (Ctrl + T) Copy the selected shapes, tags, or groups along the X or Y axis, at the set intervals.

Paste (Ctrl + V) Paste the cut or copied shape, tag or group at the location clicked with the mouse.

Paste (SamePos)
Paste the cut or copied shape, tag or group at the same position.
(Shift + Ctrl + V)

Delete (Del) Delete the selected shape, tag or group.

Group (Ctrl + G) Group two or more selected shapes or tags.

Ungroup (Ctrl + G) Ungroup.

Rotate left Rotate the selected shape, tag or group left.

Rotate right Rotate the selected shape, tag or group to the right.

Cancel rotate Rotate the rotated shape, tag or group to the original position.

Mirror vertical Flip the selected shape, tag or group vertically by 180 degrees.

Mirror horizontal Flip the selected shape, tag or group horizontally by 180 degrees.

Cancel inheritance This function is associated with global objects. The inheritance of inherited tags is canceled.

Property (Enter) The properties window for the selected shape, tag or group is opened.

Align Aligns the selected shape, tag or group.

(1) Align
A variety of align functions are provided, as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. Align functions]

Menu Description

Bring forward If shapes are overlapping, the selected shape is drawn one step forward.

Send backward If shapes are overlapping, the selected shape is drawn one step behind.

Bring to front If shapes are overlapping, the selected shape is drawn at the very front.

Send to back If shapes are overlapping, the selected shape is drawn at the very rear.

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 45

 Align left
Aligns two or more selected shapes, tags or groups to the left.
(Shift + Ctrl + Left)

Align right
Aligns two or more selected shapes, tags or groups to the right.
(Shift + Ctrl + Right)

Align top
Aligns two or more selected shapes, tags or groups along the top.
(Shift + Ctrl + Up)

Align bottom
Aligns two or more selected shapes, tags or groups along the bottom.
(Shift + Ctrl + Down)

Align horizontal center

Aligns two or more selected shapes, tags or groups along the horizontal center.
(Shift + Ctrl + C)

Align vertical center

Aligns two or more selected shapes, tags or groups along the vertical center.
(Shift + Ctrl + M)

Horizontal space equally Horizontally spaces two or more selected shapes, tags or groups equally.

Vertical space equally Vertically spaces two or more selected shapes, tags or groups equally.

Horizontal center in window Moves the selected shape, tag to the horizontal center of the screen.

Vertical center in window Moves the selected shape, tag to the vertical center of the screen.

The width of two or more selected shapes, tags or groups are made equal, to match
Grow to largest width
the size of the widest.

The width of two or more selected shapes, tags or groups are made equal, to match
Shrink to smallest width
the size of the smallest.

The height of two or more selected shapes, tags or groups are made equal, to match
Grow to largest height
the size of the highest.

The height of two or more selected shapes, tags or groups are made equal, to match
Shrink to smallest height
the size of the smallest.

3.2.3 View menu (Alt + V)

In the view menu, the various docking windows provided on the left and rights sides of the program

can be made visible or invisible. Also, help baloons, ON/OFF status, zoom in/zoom out, language, and

other view methods can be selected.

(☞ See [chapter 6] for a more detailed description of the view menu.)

[Fig. View Menu]

46 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 Menu Description

Show name The [Tag name] is shown in the [Hint] shown on the top left corner of tags registered to the

(F5) screen.

Show ID
The [Tag ID] is shown in the [Hint] shown on the top left corner of tags registered to the screen.
(F6)

This is a left side docking window. From this window, the project screen and overall settings can
Project manager
be viewed and managed at a glance.

This is a right side docking window. Frequently used shapes, tags, and groups can be registered
MY CLIPBOARD
for convenient use when performing repetitive tasks.

This is a left side docking window. Lists of registered shapes, tags, and groups for the currently
List window
open screen are shown.

Property window This is a right side docking window. The properties of the selected shapes and tags registered to

(F11) the screen are shown.

This is a left side docking window. Lamps indicate the memory usage status of addresses used in
Memory manager
the currently open screen.

This is a left side docking window. Shapes, tags, and groups can be placed here by drag&drop,

then taken out and registered to screens. When registered to a screen, properties are inherited.

Global object When the properties of shapes, tags, or groups registered in global objects are changed, the

properties of all inherited shapes, tags, and groups are changed simultaneously. Inheritance can

be partially enabled, or disabled.

Status no. The shape of the tag depending on its ON/OFF status and 0~15 bit status can be viewed.

Zoom in/Zoom
Zoom in or zoom out of the screen. 40~400% is supported.
out

Toolbar option Edit the toolbar. Frequently used toolbars can be selected and registered.

Show hint
Decide whether to use [Hints] attached to tags.
(Ctrl + H)

Hint setting This is the same as [Tools]-[Editing options]-[Hints]. The font color, background color, and font

(Shift + Ctrl + H) size for Hints can be set.

Previous screen Navigate to the screen with the previous number from the currently open base screen, window

(PageUp) screen, sub screen or global screen.

Next screen Navigate to the screen with the next number from the currently open base screen, window

(PageDown) screen, sub screen or global screen.

Language Select the language for the XDesignerPlus4 program. The default setting is English. Users can

Display language select among [English, Korean, Chinese, Arabic].

3.2.4 Project menu (Alt + P)

In the project menu, settings that apply generally to all projects are made.

(☞ See [chapter 7] for a more detailed description of the project menu.)

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 47

 [Fig. Project menu]

Menu Description

Edit master screen Open and edit the master screen, which is a global screen.

Master screen
Shows the [Screen property] window for the master screen, which is a global screen.
property

Alarm setting Set alarm data.

Logging setting Set logging data.

Recipe setting Set recipe (parameter) data.

Script setting Set global scripts.

Password setting Set the password according to level, and set the security level for each screen.

Event log Set event log data.

Message list Enter message data.

Symbol manager Set the symbol list.

Text table When using multiple languages, set multilanguage text data.

Project property
Here, general project settings are made. The touch model and PLC model, etc., are set.
(Shift + Ctrl + P)

3.2.5 Draw menu (Alt + D)

In the draw menu, various shapes necessary for illustration are provided.

(☞ See [chapter 8] for a more detailed description of the draw menu.)

[Fig. Draw menu]

48 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 Menu Description Suboptions

In select mode, shapes and tags registered to the screen can be

Select
selected.

Dot Draws a dot.

Line Draws a line.

Rectangle Draws a rectangle. Rectangle, rounded rectangle

Ellipse Draws an ellipse. Circle, arc, pie, ellipse

Text Writes text.

Fill Fills a closed area with color.

Poly Draws a polygon. Broken line, polygon

Image Register images such as bitmap or jpg

Rect ruler Draws a rectangular ruler.

Circle ruler Draws a circle ruler.

3.2.6 Tag menu (Alt + T)

In the tag menu, various tags for action designation, controller data display, or control are provided.

(☞ See [chapters 9~43] for a more detailed description of the tag menu.)

[Fig. Tag Menu]

Menu Description Suboptions

Bit lamp, word lamp, N lamp,

Registers touch buttons. The designated actions are
Touch touch, touch + bit lamp,
performed, and data changes are shown.
touch + word lamp, touch + N lamp

Numeric & Data is displayed as numeric or string, or numeric or string Numeric, string,

string values are entered. show numeric keys, show string keys

The registered message is called and displayed, depending Bit message, word message
Message
on the conditions.

Window A window screen is called, depending on the conditions. Bit window, word window

Images or subscreens are called, depending on the Bit parts, word parts
Parts
conditions.

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 49

 Alarms that have been triggered are displayed. Alarm, expand alarm,
Alarm
The log table displays logging data. log table, event log viewer

Bar/broken line graph,

Graph Data is shown as a graph. expanded graph, record,

X/Y chart A, X/Y chart B

The designated action is performed, depending on the

Calculation
conditions.

Comm Data is moved between the controler and the touch screen.

Clock The date and time are displayed.

The data saved in the touchscreen, the CF memory card, and

File list
the USB memory storage device is shown, and moved.

DocViewer Displays PDF files.

Slide Uses multiple images to create an animation effect.

3.2.7 Tool menu (Alt + O)

The tool menu provides convenient functions necessary to form and manage the project screen.

(☞ See [chapter 44] for a more detailed description of the tool menu.)

[Fig. Tool menu]

Menu Description

Address/tag cross
View the current status of addresses used in the project.
reference

Address converter Performs batch conversion of addresses used in the project, depending on conditions.

Project screens can be viewed at a glance.

Screen Manager
Multi-copy, delete, and rename of screens are possible.

CF-Recipe Maker Creates, saves, and manages recipe data in the CF memory card.

Shows the screen being edited like the actual touch screen, and saves the preview screen
Screen preview
as an image.

PDF image converter Converts PDF files into images for use in the [DocViewer] tag.

My button maker Manually create button images.

Images here are used as the image for lamp or touch buttons. Images provided in the
Image library
program are shown. Images can be added/deleted by users.

50 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 All images used in the image are shown in a list, together with detailed info. Images can
Project image tools
be converted, or only the necessary images can be selected and saved to the PC.

Run simulator Using this function, the project currently being edited can be run virtually on the PC,

(F12) without a touch screen and controller.

TopView Using this function, the current screen of the touch screen can be monitored from the PC

client creation when the PC and touchscreen are connected through ethernet.

Editing options XDesignerPlus4 program options can be set to suit the user.

3.2.8 Transmission menu (Alt + R)

The transmission menu is used when transferring project/OS/Font files to the touch equipment, or when
uploading touch screen data to the PC.
(☞ See [chapter 45] for a more detailed description of the transmission menu.)

[Fig. Transfer Menu]

Menu Description

Build and transfer Builds (compiles) a project, then runs the transmitter and transmits the project.

(F9) This is used when transmitting projects.

Execute
Immediately runs the transmitter. This is used when project building (compiling) is not necessary,
Transmitter
that is, when performing tasks such as OS transmission or upload.
(Ctrl + F9)

3.2.9 Window menu

The window menu provides functions to organize currently open editing screens.

(☞ See [chapter 46] for a more detailed description of the window menu.)

[Fig. Window menu]

Menu Description

Minimize all Minimizes all open screens.

Maximize all Maximizes all open screens.

Cascade Aligns all open screens in cascading order.

Tile Tiles all open windows.

Close all Closes all open screens.

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 51

 3.2.10 Help menu
Info on the XDesignerPlus4 program, and online help are provided.

(☞ See [chapter 47] for a more detailed description of the help menu.)

[Fig. Help menu]

Menu Description

Help XDesignerPlus4 program help: user manuals are provided as PDF files.

Communication manuals for different manufacturers can be viewed. Wiring diagrams and
Communication manual
communication setting methods are described.

Product info Info such as the XDesignerPlus4 program version, etc., is shown.

3.2.11 Toolbar Composition

The [Toolbar] comprises image buttons for frequently used menu functions. Clicking the icon of the

desired function immediately performs the action. This allows fast and convenient use of functions.

[Fig. Toolbar]

By pressing the shortcut(Ctrl + W), the toolbar can be hidden or shown. To edit the toolbar, run [Toolbar

options] from the [View] menu. In [Toolbar options], groups in the toolbar can be hidden or shown.

[Fig. Toolbar options]

3.2.12 File toolbar

This toolbar includes functions that are used frequently in the file menu.

52 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 [Fig. File toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

[File]-[New]

[File]-[Close screen]

[File]-[Open project]

[File]-[Save project]

[File]-[Print]

3.2.13 Transmission toolbar

This toolbar includes frequently used transmission functions.

[Fig. Transmission toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

[Transmit]-[Build and transfer]

[Tool]-[Address/Tag Cross Reference]

[Project]-[Project Property]

[Project]-[Symbol Manager]

3.2.14 Grid toolbar

The dots on the screen are referred to as the [Grid]. Set whether to show the grid, and the grid

intervals.

[Fig. Grid toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

[Tools]-[Editing options]; set whether to display the grid. When pressed, the grid is shown.

[Tools]-[Editing options]; set the grid intervals in pixels.

3.2.15 Hint toolbar

Set the Hint and status display. Hints are descriptions attached above tags. Hints are referred to as hints.

Set whether to display hints, and the type of hint. The shape of the tag can be viewed depending on
whether status display has been set to ON or OFF. When using multilanguage tables, the languages set

for the table can be viewed.

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 53

 [Fig. Hint toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

Set whether to display hints. When pressed, hints are shown.

[Tools]-[Editing options]-[Hints]; set the color and font size of hints.

[View]-[Status number]; The shape of the tag can be viewed, depending on the ON/OFF status

set for the tag registered to the screen, and the 0~15 bit status.

The type of hint to display is set.

When using multilanguage tables, the language set for the table can be viewed on the screen.

(1) Type of hint shown

[Fig. Type of hint shown]

Type shown Description

Name The name of the tag is displayed. Ex) Touch Tag = [T]

This is the ID of the tag. The number is assigned in the order registered to the screen.
ID
Ex) [00001]

Read Address The address where data is read for the addresses used in the touch program is shown.

The address where touch program data is written for the addresses used in the touch
Write Address
program is shown.

Memo The content of [Property]-[Memo] of properties in tags or shapes is shown.

Read/Write Address All addresses used in the touch program are shown.

3.2.16 Help toolbar

From this toolbar, manual contents can be searched. Enter the search phrase, and click the button

to search.

[Fig. Help toolbar]

3.2.17 Screen toolbar

This toolbar is used to navigate screens.

[Fig. Screen toolbar]

54 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 Toolbar image Function

Navigate from the currently open base screen, window screen, sub screen, or global screen to the

previous screen.

Navigate from the currently open base screen, window screen, sub screen, or global screen to the

next screen.

3.2.18 Edit toolbar

This toolbar includes functions that are used frequently in the edit menu.

[Fig. Edit toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

[Edit]-[Undo]

[Edit]-[Redo]

[Edit]-[Cut]

[Edit]-[Copy]

[Edit]-[Paste]

[Edit]-[PasteSame]

[Edit]-[Copy multi]

[Edit]-[Delete]

[Edit]-[Group]

[Edit]-[Ungroup]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Bring forward], Bring to front

[Edit]-[Align]-[Send back], Send to back

Bring forward

Send back

3.2.19 Align toolbar

This toolbar is used to align shapes or tags registered to the screen.

[Fig. Align toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

[Tools]-[Editing options], Snap object; when drawing/moving/resizing shapes or tags, horizontal and

vertical snap lines are shown. Shapes or tags can be drawn to match pre-drawn shapes or tags.

[Tools]-[Editing options], Snap grid; when drawing/moving/resizing shapes or tags, shapes or tags

can be drawn to match the grid on the screen. This feature is useful when drawing squares or

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 55

 circles.

Drawing by center; draw from the center out when drawing shapes or tags.

[Edit]-[Align]-[Left align]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Right align]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Top align]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Bottom align]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Center align]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Middle align]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Equal horizontal space]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Equal vertical space]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Horizontal center in window]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Vertical center in window]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Grow to largest width]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Shrink to smallest width]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Grow to largest height]

[Edit]-[Align]-[Shrink to smallest height]

3.2.20 Draw toolbar

This is the toolbar for the draw menu.

[Fig. Draw toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

[Draw]-[Select]

[Draw]-[Dot]

[Draw]-[Line]

[Draw]-[Rectangle]: Rectangle, rounded rectangle

[Draw]-[Ellipse]: Circle, arc, pie, ellipse

[Draw]-[Text]

[Draw]-[Fill]

[Draw]-[Poly]: Broken line, polygon

[Draw]-[Image]

[Draw]-[Rect ruler]

[Draw]-[Circle ruler]

56 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 3.2.21 Tag toolbar
This is the toolbar for the tag menu.

[Fig. Tag toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

[Tag]-[Touch]: Bit lamp, word lamp, N lamp,

touch, touch + bit lamp, touch + word lamp, touch + N lamp

[Tag]-[Numeric & String] : Numeric, string, show numeric keys, show string keys

[Tag]-[Message]: Bit message, word message

[Tag]-[Window]: Bit window, word window

[Tag]-[Calculation]: Calculation, comm, time, file list, document viewer, slide

[Tag]-[Alarm]: Alarm, expand alarm, log table, event log viewer

[Tag]-[Graph]: Bar graph, broken line graph, expanded graph, records, X/Y chart A, X/Y chart B

3.2.22 Zoom toolbar

40% ~ 400% zoom in/zoom out is supported.

[Fig. Zoom toolbar]

Toolbar image Function

Zoom in by [+20%], beginning from 100%.

Zoom out by [-20%], beginning from 100%.

Return to the original 100% size.

The % zoom in/zoom out is shown. The desired % can be set.

3.3 Screen composition

There are four types of screen: [Base screen], [Window screen], [Sub screen], and [Global screen].

[Fig. Screen types]

3.3.1 Base screen

The base screen is the background screen where illustration is performed. Up to 65535 screens with

screen numbers in the range of [1~65535] can be drawn.

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 57

 [Fig. Base screen]

3.3.2 Window screen

The window screen is called and used from the base screen when needed. To call the windowscreen, a

[Window tag] or [Touch tag] is registered to teh base screen.

Up to 65535 screens with screen numbers in the range of [1~65535] can be drawn. However,

[65400~65499] are used for the tenkey (keypad) popup screen, and [65530~65535] are fixed for internal

use for screens such as [File manager window/Password window/Auto tenkey window]. Therefore,

caution is required so as not to assign other functions to screens [65400~65535].

[Fig. Window screen]

As shown in the figure above, a popup area is shown for window screens. Only the content within the

popup area indicated by the red dotted line is called to the window screen.

(☞ See [chapter 23~24] for window screen popup implementation.)

3.3.3 Sub screen

The sub screen supports the illustration to be drawn on the base screen. The sub screen has no

functions, and only images can be registered. Therefore, tags cannot be registered, and only shapes can.

Background images can be registered to the sub screen and called from the base screen. Using part

tags, animation effects can be applied.

Up to 65535 screens with screen numbers in the range of [1~65535] can be drawn.

58 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 [Fig. Sub screen]

(1) Calling a subscreen from the base screen

When using the background drawn in sub screen 1 in the figure below as is in teh base screen, select

sub screen 1 from the [Project manager], then drag with the mouse and drop on the base screen.

[Fig. Sub screen 1]

The image in the sub screen is registered as the background of the base screen, and the button
showing that a sub screen has been registered is shown on the top left corner of the base screen.

[Fig. Base screen with sub screen 1 called]

When the button is double clicked, info on the registered sub screen is displayed, as shown in the
following figure.

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 59

 [Fig. Info of the registered sub screen]

Info Description

IDs are assigned to sub screens registered to the base screen as well. The ID number is assigned in the
ID
order registered to the screen.

Sub No This is the umber of the registered sub screen.

Hide When checked, the sub screen is hidden and is not visible. The screen is visible on the actual touch screen.

This is the absolute position coordinate. When this is set to [Y], the position of the shape registered to the
Absolute
sub screen can be changed. If the setting is [N], the position of the shape registered to the sub screen
POS
cannot be changed.

This is the lock function. If the setting is [Y], the sub screen cannot be edited, and if the setting is [N], the
Lock
sub screen can be edited.

To delete a registered sub screen, select and delete the sub screen image fro the base screen.

[Fig. Deleting a registered sub screen]

(2) Using the sub screen with part tags

(☞ See [chapter 25~26] for part tags.)

3.3.4 Global screen

The global screen is a screen that can be applied to all base screens. Images or functions commonly

used in all base screens are registered to the global screen, and called and used as needed. There are

two types of global screen: master screen and frame screen.

(1) Master screen

Shapes or tags commonly used in base screens are implemented in the master screen, and applied to

60 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

each base screen. Whether to use the master screen can be set for each base screen. Only 1 master

screen can be drawn for one project.

[Fig. Master screen]

① Drawing the master screen

Select [Project]-[Edit Master Screen] from the menu, or double click Master Screen in the project

manager to open the master screen.

[Fig. Master Screen in the menu]

[Fig. Master Screen in the project manager]

Master screen editing is identical to base screen editing.

Also, as shown in the figure below, screen properties are also identical to the base screen.

[Fig. Master screen properties]

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 61

 ② Using the master screen

Master screens are not used alone, but are registered to base screens. To register to a base screen,

check [Use master screen] in the [Property screen] of the base screen, as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. Base screen properties]

In the base screen, master screen content cannot be edited. Master screen content can only be edited

in the master screen edit screen.

③ Example of master scren usage

Master screen

Base screen

Use master screen Y/N Yes No

Result of using master screen

[Fig. Example of master screen usage]

62 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

(2) Frame screen
Common illustration frames are drawn and used commonly over multiple base screens.

There are 4 types of frame screen: top frame, bottom frame, left frame, and right frame.

A total of 65535 frame screens can be created.

[Fig. Top frame screen]

① Creating and drawing frame screens

Frame screen editing is identical to base screen editing. However, like window screens, there is an area,

and drawing must be performed within these areas. The size of these areas is freely adjustable.

Frame screens can be drawn using the buttons above the base screen. Alternatively, they can be created

and drawn in [Project manager].

[Fig. Drawing frame screens]

Frame button Function

[Frame screen edit/registration buttons]

These are the buttons for Top, Left, Right, and Bottom frame screens. By

pressing these buttons, the corresponding frame screens can be edited.

With these buttons pressed, the [Create/Delete Frame Screen Button] can be

used to create new frame screens or delete existing frame screens.

When a pressed button is pressed again, the currently open frame screen is

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 63

 registered to the base screen. Therefore, when the [Move frame screen

button] is used to select the frame to register, then the pressed button is

pressed once again, the frame is registered to the base screen.

[Create/Delete Frame Screen Button]

Register a new frame screen, or delete a selected frame screen.

[Move frame screen button]

Move to the previous or next frame screen.

The screen umber of the frame screen is displayed.

The name of the frame screen is displayed.

In [Project manager], frames are created by clicking the button of the popup menu

shown when items are right clicked with the mouse from the [Top frame, left frame, right frame, bottom

frame] list. This is identical to the method of creating base screens. When a created frame screen is

double clicked, the screen is opened, and can be edited.

[Fig. Drawing frame screens]

Right click the number of the created frame screen to bring up a popup menu. Frame screens can be

opened, closed, copied or deleted from this menu.

[Fig. Frame screen popup menu]

By entering [Properties] in the frame screen popup menu, the frame screen number and name can be

modified, as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. Frame screen properties]

64 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

② Frame screen registration

Using the [Edit/register frame screen button] of the main screen, frame screens can be

registered or de-registered. With the [Edit/register frame screen button] pressed, select the screen to

register with the [Move frame screen button] to select the screen to register. Press the

[Edit/register frame screen button] again to register the selected frame screen.

3.3.5 Docking window composition

The docking window is a functional window which can be shown or hidden as needed by the user.

6 types of docking window are provided in XDesignerPlus: Project manager, list window, memory

manager, my clipboard, property window, and global object.

Click the [X] button on the top right corner of a docking window to hide, and select the docking

window form the [View] menu to show again. Docking means that the window sticks like a magnet.

Therefore, the docking window can be fixed in place by docking with the main window, or can be

placed separately from the main window.

(1) Left side docking windows

Left side docking windows include the project manager, list window, and memory manager.

(☞ See [chapter 6] for a more detailed description of the functions of each docking window.)

Type Description

Project manager From this window, the project screens and settings can be viewed and managed at a glance.

List window Shows a list of shapes, tags, and groups registered to the currently opened screen.

Memory manager Lamps indicate the memory usage status of addresses used in the currently opened screen.

Global object Shapes, tags and group scan be registered for programming through inheritance.

(2) Right side docking windows

Right side docking windows include my clipboard and the properties window.

(☞ See [chapter 6] for a more detailed description of the functions of each docking window.)

Type Description

This function allows registration of frequently used shapes/tags/groups for easy retrieval when
MY CLIPBOARD
using repetitively.

The properties of the selected shapes and tags registered to the screen are shown.

When nothing has been selected, the properties of the screen are shown.
Properties window
When editing shapes and tags, properties can be changed without entering the properties

window.

3.3.6 Status bar

The status bar is displayed on the bottom right corner of the XDesignerPlus4 program. The name of the

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 65

 set touch screen model, the set PLC model name, and the current mouse coordinates (X,Y) are shown.

[Fig. Status bar]

3.3.7 Shortcut list

Parent menu Shortcut Child menu 1 Child menu 2 Shortcut

New file New project Ctrl + N

Open project Ctrl + O

File Alt + F Save project Ctrl + S

Save as Shift + Ctrl + S

Exit Alt + F4

Undo Ctrl + Z

Redo Ctrl + R

Select all Ctrl + A

Cut Ctrl + X

Copy Ctrl + C

Copy multiple Ctrl + T

Paste Ctrl + V

Paste (SamePos) Shift + Ctrl + V

Delete Del

Group Ctrl + G

Ungroup Ctrl + U

Rotate left <

Edit Alt + E
Rotate right >

Cancel rotate /

Properties Enter

Bring forward Ctrl + Home

Send backward Ctrl + End

Bring to front Home

Send to back End

Align Align left Shift + Ctrl + Left

Align right Shift + Ctrl + Right

Align top Shift + Ctrl + Up

Align bottom Shift + Ctrl + Down

Align horizontal Shift + Ctrl + C

66 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

 center

Align vertical center Shift + Ctrl + M

Show name F5

Show ID F8

Properties window F11

0 (OFF) Ctrl + 1
Status number
View Alt + V 1 (ON) Ctrl + 2

Show hint Ctrl + H

Hint setting Shift + Ctrl + H

Previous screen PageUp

Next screen PageDown

Text table Alt + 1

Logging setting Alt + 2

Alarm setting Alt + 3

Recipe setting Alt + 4

Script setting Alt + 5

Project Alt + P
Message list Alt + 6

Event log Alt + 7

Password setting Alt + 8

Symbol manager Alt + 9

Project property Shift+ Ctrl + P

Tool Alt + O Simulator F12

Build and transfer F9

Transfer Alt + R
Execute Transmitter Ctrl + F9

Increase shape line

+
thickness

Reduce shape line

-
Edit screen thickness

Show properties
F11
window

Toggle toolbar show Ctrl + W

CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4 67

 CHAPTER 4 File Menu

68 CHAPTER 3 -Overall Composition of XDesignerPlus4

CHAPTER 4 - File Menu

The [File] menu is explained. The file menu performs the role of creating and saving new projects. Also, saved

project files can be opened or closed, and multiple projects can be added and opened.

4.1 New (Ctrl + N)

Create a new project or screen.

4.1.1 New project

Create a new project. From the menu, select [File]-[New]-[New project], or select [New]-[New Project]

from the toolbar to bring up a new project settings window.

[Fig. Select new project from the menu]

[Fig. Select new project from the toolbar]

The screen for [New project] settings is the [Project settings] window.

[Fig. Project settings]

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 69

 Select the model name of the touch used, and the model of the controller (PLC).

(1) Setting the XTOP model name

Select the touch series between XTOP and HTOP. Enter the accurate product model name under Model

If the project is transmitted with the wrong model name, the following error message is shown, and

transmit fails.

[Fig. Error Message]

(2) PLC model setting

For [PLC model], first select the [Manufacturer], then select the accurate [PLC Model] for the selected

manufacturer. If the wrong controller (PLC) model is selected, the address of that PLC cannot be entered

in the project, and communication cannot be established with the PLC.

PLC model selection is explained in the [PLC communication manual] provided for each manufacturer.

(☞ Communication manuals can be downloaded from the website.)

(3) Created projects

After selecting the touch model name and PLC model, click the [Ok] button.

The newly created project looks like the following figure. The project has the temporary name

[NEWPROJECT]. This name can be changed when saving the project. [Base screen] 1 and [Window

screen] 65535 are created automatically, and base screen 1 is opened and shown.

[Fig. Creating a new project]

Touch model name or PLC model can be changed under [Project info] in the [Project] menu.

70 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

4.1.2 New base screen
Add a new base screen to the project. The base screen is the background screen where illustration is

performed.

There are 3 ways to create the screen.

① Select [File]-[New]-[New base screen] from the menu.

② Select [New]-[New base screen] from the toolbar.

③ Click the [Base screen] list from the project manager, then right-click. Click [New screen] in the popup

menu that appears.

[Fig. Select new base screen from the menu]

[Fig. Select new base screen from the toolbar]

[Fig. Select new screen from the project manager]

When [New base screen] is run, a [Base screen] is added, with the number following the largest of the

currently registered [Base screens].

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 71

 [Fig. Creating a new base screen]

4.1.3 New window screen

Add a new window screen to the project. The window screen is called and used from the base screen

when needed.

There are 3 ways to create the screen.

① Select [File]-[New]-[New window screen] from the menu.

② Select [New]-[New window screen] from the toolbar.

③ Click the [Window screen] list from the project manager, then right-click. Click [New screen] in the

popup menu that appears.

[Fig. Select new window screen from the menu]

[Fig. Select new window screen from the toolbar]

[Fig. Select new screen from the project manager]

72 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

When [New window screen] is run, a window is added, with the number following the largest of the

currently registered [Window screens]. Here, numbers after [65400], which are internally reserved numbers,

are excluded.

When [New window screen] is run, a screen with the number 1 is created, as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. Creating a new window screen]

4.1.4 New sub screen

Add a new sub screen to the project. The sub screen supports the illustration to be drawn on the base

screen. The sub screen has no functions, and only images can be registered. Therefore, tags cannot be

registered, and only shapes can. Background images can be registered to the sub screen and called from

the base screen. Using part tags, animation effects can be applied.

There are 3 ways to create the screen.

① Select [File]-[New]-[New sub screen] from the menu.

② Select [New]-[New sub screen] from the toolbar.

③ Click the [Sub screen] list from the project manager, then right-click. Click [New screen] in the popup

menu that appears.

[Fig. Select new sub screen from the menu]

[Fig. Select new sub screen from the toolbar]

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 73

 [Fig. Select new screen from the project manager]

When [New sub screen] is run, a sub screen is added, with the number following the largest of the

currently registered [Sub screens]. A screen with the number 1 is created, as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. Creating a new sub screen]

4.2 Opening a project (Ctrl + O)

When a project is opened, a project file saved as [*.DPX4] is opened.

When [Open project] is selected, the [Open] screen is shown. The extension for project files is [*.DPX4].

Therefore only [*.DPX4] files are visible in the [Open] screen. Select the project file to open then click

the [Open] button.

4.3 Add new project

[Add new project] provides multi project functionality.

[Multiple projects] is a function that allows for up to 4 projects to be opened and edited in the
XDesignerPlus4 program. Using this function, multiple projects can be edited simultaneously. Functions

such as copying screens between different projects can be used easily as well. Projects can be added by

adding a new project, or retrieving an existing project.

4.3.1 Add new project

Add a project by creating a new project. When [Add new project] is run, the [Project settings] screen is

shown. Select the model name of the touch screen used, and the controller (PLC) model. Then click the

[OK] button.

74 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

 [Fig. Project settings]

After [Add new project] is completed, a project with the name [NEWPROJECT] is created and activated

in [Project Manager].

[Fig. Add new project]

4.3.2 Add open project

A project file saved as *.DPX or *.DPX4 is opened and added.

When [Add open project] is selected, the [Open] screen is shown. The extension for project files is

[*.DPX, *.DPX4]. Therefore only [*.DPX, *.DPX4] files are visible in the [Open] screen. Select the project
file to open then, click the [Open] button.

The existing project has been added.

[Fig. Add existing project]

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 75

 4.3.3 Using multiple projects
Using multiple projects is explained.

(1) Activating projects

If multiple projects are opened, only one of these projects is [Activated]. When actions such as transfer

and save are performed in the XDesignerPlus4 program, only activated projects are transmitted and

saved.

To activate a project, select the project name in the [Project Manager] and select [Activate] from the

popup menu that appears when the project name is right-clicked.

Activated project names are shown in red, and inactive project names are shown in black. When an

inactive project is activated, the previously activated project is automatically deactivated.

[Fig. Activating projects]

(2) Copying screens between different projects

In multiple projects, screens can be copied simply between different projects.

① Drag & drop method

Drag the screen to copy then drop onto the desired project screen. This copies the screen.

[Fig. Drag & drop method of screen copying]

[Fig. Screen copy confirmation message]

76 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

② Using the screen manager menu

Use [Tools]-[Screen manager] to more simply copy screens.

In [Screen manager], the screens registered to the screen can be viewed at a glance. From the [Screen

manager] screen, select the screen to copy. Then drag the screen and drop on the [Screen name] of the

desired project in [Project manager]. The copied screens are then pasted into the target project.

There is no limit to the number of screens that are copied. Therefore, multiple screens can be

simultaneously [Copy/Pasted].

[Fig. Copying screens using the screen manager menu]

[Drag & drop] to show a screen for setting the number of the copy/pasted screens.

[Fig. Screen number settings]

Menu Description

Default add The screens are added with numbers following the largest of the screen numbers in the project.

Keep the screen

Keep the screen number of the source project.
number

Change the screen

Designate the start screen number.
number

This is used only when the [Change the screen number] option is selected. The value is the
Start screen number
number of the changed screen number.

When multiple screens are copied, this value is the interval by which the screen numbers of the
Increase value
copied screens increase.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 77

 (3) Edit function
Tags/shapes/groups registered to a single project screen can also be edited using [Copy/Cut/Paste/Paste

same] functions in other project screens.

4.4 Making templates

If there is a large number of similar projects, projects can be created easily and quickly by using

templates.

A template refers to the basic framework of a project. If a single completed project is used frequently

with small modifications, it is advisable to create a template.

Instead of creating projects from scratch, templates made and saved previously are opened and

supplemented to create a project.

There are two template functions: Create template and import template.

Using Create template, a template is made using a currently open project. In Import template, a created

template is opened in XDesignerPlus to create a new project.

[Fig. Making templates]

When [Create template] is run, the screen shown in the figure above is shown.

[Create template] has 4 steps: [Create template]-[Copy screen]-[Convert address]-[Macro].

4.4.1 Step 1: Create template

This is the first step for template creation. If a project is open in XDesignerPlus4, the open project is

used to make a template. If there is no open project, the [Import] button can be used to import a

project to create the template from. If the open project has not been saved, save the project.

78 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

 [Fig. Step 1: Create template]

Menu Description

Import a project file (*.DPX4). If the create template menu has been selected with a
Import
project open in XDesignerPlus4, the template is created from the open project.

By default, [_Template] is added to the project.

Template name
The name can be modified.

Template preview screen By changing the screen number, the representative screen of the template can be

number changed.

Screen The number of registered screens is shown.

Global Whether global settings are used, and the number of lists is shown.

PLC PLS settings are displayed.

Cancel Template creation is canceled.

Next The next step is brought up.

4.4.2 Step 2: Copy screen

Multiple selected screens can be copied.

[Fig. Step 2: Copy screen]

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 79

 From the [Screen List] shown in the bottom left, select the screens for multiple copy. When screens are

selected, an image of the selected screen is shown in the [Main control screen] on the right, and the

[Add] button above the [Main control screen] is activated. After setting the copy start number, the

screen number increase interval, and the copy count, click the [Add] button to add the selected screen

to the [Screen copy list].

Menu Description

This is the number of the copy of the first screen selected in the screen list.

Start number Be careful to ensure that this number does not overlap with the existing screen numbers

currently in the [Screen list].

The numbers for the copies increases by this number.

Increase num
If the increase num is 1, screen numbers increase by increments of 1: 31, 32, 33 ...

Copy count Set the number of copies.

Menu Description

Cancel Template creation is canceled.

Previous Move to step 1.

Next Move to step 3.

4.4.3 Step 3: Convert Address

An address block is created. An address block can be created only for the same address of the same

screen.

When the same addresses are grouped, they can be converted at once.

Double click the list to view the object type in the popup screen.

[Fig. Step 3: Convert Address]

80 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

(1) View registered addresses only
Show only addresses with address blocks in the list.

(2) Type/screen
By designating the type and screen, all addresses of the project can be seen, or addresses can be

displayed by type and by screen. The type can be set according to screen type and general setting type,

as shown in the figure below.

All screen addresses can be designated, or a single screen address can be designated.

[Fig. Type list]

(3) Initialize
Cancel block settings to this point, and initialize.

(4) Auto address block

Automatically create a block for all addresses.

(5) Create address block

Manually create an address block.

The content of the list is as shown in the table below.

Menu Description

Type The screen type and general setting type are shown.

Screen Name The screen number and screen name are shown.

Tag Name The name of the tag is displayed. The number in parentheses is the ID.

Address The address used in the address is shown.

Bit The length of the address is shown, in bits.

Offset The difference between the block and the address is shown.

Memo Memos can be recored in lists set as blocks.

When a block is set, the [REMOVE ALL] button is created. When this button is clicked, the block is

Block deleted. Lists not designated as blocks have the [REMOVE] button. When this button is clicked, the

item is deleted.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 81

 4.4.4 Step 4: Macro
Shapes or tags on the same screen can be selected for multiple copies. Press the [Add] button to bring

up the [Select object] screen.

[Fig. Step 4: Macro]

When the type and screen are selected, the corresponding screens are displayed, as shown in the figure

below. From the screen, select the shape or tag to copy, and click the [Close] button on the bottom.

[Fig. Object selection]

The selected objects (shape, tag) are added as lists to the macro screen. After adding, the captions and

copy count can be modified from the list. The content of the list is as shown in the table below.

Menu Description

No This number is the object number, assigned sequentially.

Type The screen type and general setting type are shown.

Screen Name The screen number and screen name are shown.

Object Type The type of object is shown.

ID The ID of the object is shown.

Caption The caption of the object is modified. Double click a cell to modify.

Count Set the number of copies. Double click a cell to modify.

Delete By clicking this button, registered objects can be deleted.

82 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

 Step 4: After completing macro settings, click the [Finish] button to finish creating the template.

The template file is saved in the following path, with the extension [*.tml].

[C:\Program Files\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\Template]

4.5 Importing templates

A saved template file [*.tml] is imported, and a project for actual use is created.

[Fig. Importing templates]

4.5.1 Step 1: Select template

When the [File]-[Import template] menu is run, the following screen is shown. The template list on the

left shows the template files saved in the path [C:\Program Files\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\Template].

Template files in other PCs can be copied and placed in the path above for importing.

Unnecessary templates can be deleted from the path above.

When a template file is selected from the template list, [Project information] is shown on the right.

Click the [Next] button to move to step 2.

4.5.2 Step 2: Copy screen

[Step 2: Copy screen] of template import is the same as [Step 2: Copy screen] of the template creation

process. The screen of the template to copy are designated and copied. Here, multiple copying to

create multiple screens from one source screen is possible.

4.5.3 Step 3: Convert address

In [Step 3: Convert address] of template creation, objects using the same address of the same screen

were made into a block. Here, the address of this block is set. Double click the list to view the object
type in the popup screen.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 83

 [Fig. Step 3: Convert address]

(1) Type/screen
Lists can be viewed, categorized by screen type, general setting type, and as individual screens.

(2) View registered addresses only

Show only addresses with address blocks in the list.

(3) Address completion method

Offset and auto increase address completion methods are available.

In the OffSet method, the address is increased by the setting in the Offset column of the list.

In the auto increase method, the entered increase value is applied to addresses in all blocks.

(4) All apply button

When the all apply button is used, the addresses of the list are changed depending on the address

completion method setting.

In the case that the [New Address ID] for the group has been double clicked in the list and the address

has been manually changed as well, settings are applied to all addresses in the block.

Menu Description

Type The screen type and general setting type are shown.

Screen Name The screen number and screen name are shown.

PLC The name of the PLC is displayed.

Tag Name The name of the tag is displayed. The number in parentheses is the ID.

Address ID The address used in the address is shown.

Bit The length of the address is shown, in bits.

Offset The difference between the block and the address is shown.

The changed address is displayed. By double clicking, the address of the group and each object

New Address ID can be changed. When the changed address is wrong, the address is shown in red. When the

[Next] button is clicked, a warning message is shown.

Memo Memos are shown.

APPLY When the APPLY button is clicked, the addresses of the current block are changed according to

84 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

 the address increase method. Depending on the group address, changed addresses are applied to

all objects within the group.

Click the [Next] button to move to Step 4: MultiCopy.

4.5.4 MultiCopy
The objects registered in [Step 4: Macro] of template creation are shown in a list.

Using the [EDIT] button of each list, the properties of the objects can be changed.

In each list, multicopy can be performed using [Count] and [Address Increment].

[Fig. Step 4: MultiCopy]

Menu Description

No This number is the object number, assigned sequentially.

Type The screen type and general setting type are shown.

Screen Name The screen number and screen name are shown.

Object Type The type of object is shown.

ID The ID of the object is shown.

Caption The caption of the object is modified. Double click a cell to modify.

Count Set the number of copies. Double click a cell to modify.

Address Increment Set the increment to increase addresses by in Multicopy. Double click to modify.

Option By clicking the [Edit] button, object properties can be modified.

Click the [Finish] button to create a project based on the selected template.

4.6 Save project (Ctrl + S)

Save the project that is currently open. If the project has already been saved as a file, changes are

saved to that file. If the project has not been saved as a file, the [Save as] screen is brought up for
designation of the save path and file name.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 85

 [Fig. Save project]

Designate the file path and the file name. The default [File name] is [NewProject]. The desired name can

be entered. As the extension of projects is [*.DPX4], the [File format] is automatically set at [*.DPX4].

Click the [Save] button to save the file.

4.7 Save as (Shift + Ctrl + S)

Save the project that is currently open with a different name. This function is used to create a new file

and save with a different name. When [Save as] is run, a [Save as] screen is brought up for designation

of the new save path and file name.

The file name and file path of the [Save as] screen is preset using existing file info. Enter a new file path

and new file name. Click the [Save] button to save on a different name.

[Fig. Save as]

4.8 Close a project

Close the project that is currently activated. If the currently activated project has not been saved, a

message asking whether to save the project is shown.

[Fig. Save confirmation message]

86 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

 Button Description

Yes Save the changes to the project, and close the project.

No Do not save the changes to the project, and close the project.

Cancel Cancel closing the project.

If no changes have been made to the project, the close confirmation message is shown.

[Fig. Close confirmation message]

Button Description

Yes Close the project.

No Cancel closing the project.

4.9 Close all projects

When multiple projects are open, all open projects are closed.

[Fig. Close confirmation message]

Button Description

Yes Close all projects.

No Cancel closing all projects.

If the [Yes] button is clicked, messages appear asking whether to save each of the open projects that have

been changed. The changed projects can be saved here.

4.10 Print (Ctrl + P)

The content of the project is printed. When [Print] is run, the [Report] screen is brought up. The content

shown in the [Report] screen can be printed according to the format shown in the [SAMPLE], or printed

after editing.

4.10.1 Printed items

Items that can be printed are system information, global information, screen information, and address

info.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 87

 [Fig. Print]

Print Description

System information Print all system info.

HMI info Info on the set touch screen.

Device information Info on the set PLC (controller).

Project Project info set in [Project settings]

CF card Info on the CF memory card set in [Project settings]

Global settings Print all global info.

Logging Logging settings.

Alarm Alarm settings.

Recipe Recipe settings.

Script Script content.

Message Message table settings.

Multilanguage table Multilanguage table settings.

Event log Event log settings.

Security settings Password settings.

Screen info Print all screens.

Base screen Base screen.

Window screen Window screen.

Address info Print a list of addresses used in the project.

4.10.2 Option
Here, print options can be set. Click [View sample] to check the print format under [SAMPLE], and select

options.

(1) Logging print options

[Fig. Logging print options]

88 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

 Option Description

Normal Style Only print basic logging settings.

Detail Style Print logging settings in detail.

(2) Screen print options

[Fig. Screen print options]

Option Description

Normal Style Print one screen per page.

Detail Style A list of registered tags is printed together with the screen.

List Style Print all screens as a list.

(3) Address print options

[Fig. Address print options]

Option Description

Normal Style Print a list of used addresses.

When the list of used addresses is printed, the ID and name of the tags where the addresses
Detail Style
are used is also printed.

Select the screen range for the list of addresses to be printed.

Screen

[ALL] stands for all addresses used in the project, [ALL SCREEN] stands for all addresses used

in the screen, and [GLOBAL] stands for all addresses used in global settings. To print only a list

of addresses used in a single screen, select the desired page.

Select the type of address to print.

Device

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 89

 [ALL] stands for all addresses, [HMI] stands for internal addresses of the touch screen, and

[PLC] stands for PLC addresses.

① SAMPLE

When the list to print is selected, the format is shown under [SAMPLE] depending on the print items

and options.

② Preview

Check the items to print on the list to the left of the [Report] screen then click the [Preview] button on

the bottom. A new [Preview] screen composed of the checked items is brought up, showing the actual

file to be printed.

In the [Preview] screen, the print format can be set, and the [Preview] can be edited.

Also, the current [Preview] screen can be saved, or a saved [Preview] file can be imported.

[Fig. Preview]

When the print button is clicked on the [Preview] page, the file is printed.

Toolbar Description

Print the current preview file.

Import a saved preview file [*.fp3].

Save the preview file. The file extension is [*.fp3].

Export to another file. The available export file types are as follow.

This is the [Find] function.

Enter text (a word) and click the [OK] button to search.

In [Search options], [Search from beginning] searches from the top. [Case sensitive]

90 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

can be set to perform a case sensitive search.

This is the [Zoom in/Zoom out] function.

This is used to zoom into or zoom out of the preview screen.

The (+) zooms in in 25% increments, and the (-) button zooms out in 25%

increments.

The zoom in/out ratio can also be entered manually.

This is the [Full Screen]. This function is used to view the preview screen in full screen

mode. To return from the full screen mode to the original preview screen, right click

the mouse to bring up the popup menu.

Click [Full Screen] in the popup menu to return to the preview screen.

This is the [Report Outline] function.

An outline of the screen is shown to the left of the preview screen.

This is the [Thumbnails] function.

A list of screens is shown to the left of the preview screen.

[Page settings]

The printing paper is set in [Size].

[Orientation] is the direction of the paper. Select between portrait and landscape.

In [Margins], page margins can be set.

In [Other], [Apply to the current page] applies settings to the current page. Select

[Apply to all pages] to print all pages.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 91

 Navigate pages using the page navigation buttons.

The current page number is displayed.

Close the preview screen.

4.10.3 Using the printer

The printer can be used to print the touch screen in operation, or print logging or alarm data. Connect

the printer using the USB Host port. Currently, only printers supporting the PCL Level3 protocol of HP

can be used.

(1) Setting in the XDesignerPlus4 program

Touch tags of calculation tags can be registered to the screen and printed. Under special functions for

touch tags or calculation tags, set the [Category] to [PRINT] to show items that can be printed with the

printer in [Special Operations].

[Fig. Print]

Print Description

Print Screen Print the currently operating screen using the connected printer.

Print Logging Print currently saved logging data using the connected printer.

Print Alarm Print currently saved alarm data using the connected printer.

4.10.4 Using a roll printer

92 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

(1) Function
Data for the internal addresses of the touch can be printed using a roll printer. A roll printer is a mini

printer used for printing receipts, etc. The XTOP COM1 (232C only) and a roll printer are used. Only the

values of numerical and string tags using internal addresses can be printed. Only roll printers

supporting the [Epson Protocol] and RS232C can be used.

(2) Setting in the XDesignerPlus4 program

① Connecting the roll printer and adding to the project

The roll printer is connected to the COM1 port. The COM2 port of the touch screen is used for

communicating with the PLC.

After transferring the project to the touch screen, connect the roll printer. Create a new project in the

XDesignerPlus4 program, then enter, [Menu]-[Project]-[Project settings] and right click [COM1] as shown

below.

[Fig. Adding roll printer device]

Run the [Add] popup menu. The [Target PLC] window is brought up. Under vendor, select [OTHERS], and

select [roll printer (EPSON type)] as the PLC name. Roll printer(EPSON) is added to the [COM1] port, as

shown below.

[Fig. Adding roll printer]

② Illustrating

Operation tags and touch tags are used to send a print command to the printer. In [Special functions]

of the [Operation] page of the touch tag or operation tag, set “Roll Printer”. Select [Special functions] in
the [Operation] page of the touch tag and set to “Roll Printer”.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 93

 [Fig. Touch tag print button]

Set conditions in the [Operation conditions] page of the operation tag, then select [Special function] in

the [Operation] page as shown below, and set to "Roll Printer."

[Fig. Operation tag print function]

③ Transmitting

Run the [Transfer]-[Build and Transfer] menu, then check the [Include roll printer build file] option in the

[Project builder] screen, and add the [*.rbf] file. The [*.rbf] file is created in [C:\Program Files\M2I

Corp\XDesignerPlus4\TEMP] when save or compile is performed in the [Roll printer editor].

Include the file, [Compile] again, then [Transfer].

[Fig. Adding the roll printer edit file]

94 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

(3) Roll Printer editor
Using the roll printer editor, write the print format and content. In the [Start] program, run [All

programs]-[M2I Corp]-[XDesignerPlus4]-[RollPrinter].

The left side is the [Edit] portion, and the right side is the [Tag registration] portion. The left edit

portion is the part where the body to be printed is written, and the tag registration portion is where

the type and address of each of the tags used in the body are set.

[Fig. Roll printer editor]

① Writing the body

First, the body is written. The body is written according to the form the user wishes to print. The body

is printed as-is. The method of using and editing tags in the body is as follows.

② Showing tags

Numerical and string tags can be used.

In the case of numerical tags, '$' is displayed according to the number of places of the numbers

displayed. In the case of string tags, the number of '$' is equal to the number of letters in the string.

The following commands can be written in front of the '$' marks in numerical tags.

No Command Description

1 [32] This is written when the data size of the numerical size is 32 bits. A 32 bit value is printed.

This is written when the data type of the numerical tag is HEX data. Hexadecimal values are
2 [h]
printed.

3 [b] This is written when the data type of the numerical tag is BCD data. BCD values are printed.

In the body, the following commands can be used.

No Command Description

Used in front of a string when displaying text in the body with bold font.

1 [B] Add the command [B] in front of the string to show in bold, and add the command [N] to the

end of the string to show in bold. [B] stands for Bold, and [N] is for Normal.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 95

 2 [N] Used at the end of a string in the body when displaying the string in bold font.

This is the default font size. To return to the default font size after increasing the font size, add
3 [0]
[0] to the end.

4 [1] Magnify the horizontal and vertical size of the default font by a factor of 2.

5 [2] Magnify the horizontal and vertical size of the default font by a factor of 3.

6 [3] Magnify the horizontal and vertical size of the default font by a factor of 4.

7 [4] Magnify the horizontal and vertical size of the default font by a factor of 5.

This command cuts the paper in the roll printer. This must be included at the end of the body.

If the [END] command is missing from the body, the following error message is shown.

8 [END]

Warning *The [B], [N] [0]~[4], [END] commands may not be supported by the printer. Please check with the

printer vendor.

*Note when writing the body that commands are not printed. That is, when a command is used,

the letters are pulled forward by the number of places occupied by the command.

*The number of characters in a line varies according to the printer type. Please write the body

after checking.

*Consecutive commands can be written.

“[1][B]AA” displays “AA” in bold, double-sized font.

“[32][h]$$$$$$$$$$” shows that the address data of the numerical tag is 32 bit

hexadecimal data.

③ Entering tags

After writing the body, enter the tag address. This is because the number of tag addresses that can be
entered is equal to the number of tags written in the body. Tags cannot be entered before writing the

body.

Tag addresses are entered in the format [N:100], [S:200] in the tag address entry box.

“N” denotes a numeric tag. “S” denotes a string tag.

After the colon (:), enter the internal address. Currently, only internal addresses are supported for roll

printers.

[N:100] denotes the value of a numeric tag that uses internal address station 100.
After entering, click the [ADD] button to add the entered tag address to the list box. Below the tag
address entry box, there are three buttons. The three buttons operate as follows.

96 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

 Button Description

Checks whether the tag address entered in the tag entry box has been entered according to the

proper format, then adds the address to the list box on the right. If the tag input format is not

correct, an error message is shown and the tag must be entered again.
ADD
To add a tag address in the middle of tag addresses added to the list, select the middle of the list,

write a new tag address in the tag input window, and click the [ADD] button. This adds the newly

entered tag address behind the tag address selected in the list.

Modify an entered tag address.

MOD Select the tag address to modify from the list, then edit the tag address in the [Tag input window]

and click the [MOD] button to modify the selected tag address.

Delete an entered tag address. Select the tag address to delete form the list, and click the [DEL]
DEL
button to delete that tag address.

If the tag input format is not correct, an error message is shown and the tag must be entered again.

No Error Description

When a tag address has been entered with no text in the

1 There is no text!
body

2 First brackets‘[‘ is missing! When the first bracket is missing

Indication of Numeric Tag and String Tag is When characters other than 'N' denoting a numeric tag or
3
error! 'S' denoting a string tag have been entered

4 Colon(:) is missing! When the colon has been omitted

5 System buffer address is missing! When the internal address has been omitted

6 System buffer address is error! When the internal address has not been entered correctly

7 Last brackets‘]’ is missing! When the last bracket is missing

When the number of tag addresses entered is greater than

8 All tags are already input!
the number of tags entered in the body

④ Saving

After entering the body and all tags correctly, click the [Save] button on the bottom right hand corner.

If a file that has already been saved has been opened, the file name is indicated on the top of the roll

printer editor. If a file has been opened and its content has been edited, changes are overwritten in that

file. If the file has not been saved, the following save routine is executed, and input is saved as a [*.TXT]

file.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 97

 [Fig. Saving]

Button Description

New Erases all items in the editor for new entry.

Saves the content of the editor as a TEXT file, and simultaneously creates a file for internal
Save
transfer.

Open Reads a TEXT file, and shows the content of the read file in the editor.

Quit Exits the roll printer editor.

A file to be included [*.rbf] when transmitting from XDesignerPlus is created.

Compile(*.rbf) The [*.rbf] file is created in [C:\Program Files\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\TEMP].

Compile must be performed to use the print function.

4.11 Recent files

A list of recently opened files is shown. Up to 10 items are saved in the list.

Select the desired project from the list to open the selected project.

[Fig. Selecting a recent file from the list]

98 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

4.12 Exit (Alt + F4)

The XDesignerPlus4 program is exited. Select [File]-[Exit] from the menu, or click the Close[X] button on

the top right corner of the XDesignerPlus4 screen.

[Fig. Exiting with the [X] button]

Messages appear asking whether to save each of the open projects that have been changed. The

program is exited after the projects are saved.

CHAPTER 4 -File Menu 99

 CHAPTER 5 Edit Menu

100 CHAPTER 4 -File Menu

CHAPTER 5 - Edit Menu

The [Edit] menu is explained. The edit menu provides general editing functions such as shape/tag copy and paste

when editing the project screen, as well as rotate, align, and group/ungroup functions, allowing for more convenient

and accurate editing.

5.1 Select

5.1.1 Normal selection

All shapes/tags registered to the edit screen can be selected by clicking the left mouse button. The

method of selecting shape and touch tags is different depending on whether fill is used. In the case of

shape/touch tags that are filled, click any part within the area to select.

[Fig. Selecting filled shapes/tags]

If there is no fill property, the border, which is the line forming the border must be selected in order to

select.

[Fig. Selecting non-filled shapes/tags]

5.1.2 Range selection

In this method, the dotted rectangular area that is shown when the mouse is dragged in the edit screen

is used to select. There are two methods of range selection. Using these two methods depending on

the editing situation, shapes/tags can be selected or deselected conveniently.

(1) When dragging the selection area from the left to right, only shapes/tags that are fully included
within the area are selected.

CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu 101

 [Fig. Select only shapes/tags that are fully included]

(2) When dragging the selection area from the left to right, all shapes/tags that overlap with the

selection area are selected.

[Fig. Select shapes/tags that overlap partially with the selection area]

5.1.3 Selecting partially overlapping shapes/tags

When two or more shapes/tags are overlapping, it may be difficult to select the shape/tag desired.

[Fig. Selecting overlapping shapes] shows a situation where multiple shapes are overlapping. In this case,

left click the mouse with the right [Ctrl] button on the key board pressed. Each time the mouse is

clicked, the shapes in the area are selected in sequence. If there is no Ctrl key on the right side, the left

Alt key can be used instead.

[Fig. Selecting overlapping shapes]

5.1.4 Selecting overlapping shapes/tags using the POP-UP menu

When shapes/tags are overlapping, to select only the desired shapes or tags, a pop-up menu may be

used. Using range selection, select all the shapes and tags in the location where the desired shape/tag

is located, and double click. A pop-up menu showing the list of selected items is shown, as seen in [Fig.

Pop-up menu selection]. Select the shapes/tags in the list to conveniently select the desired shapes/tags.
Only the properties of selected shapes/tags can be edited.

102 CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu

 [Fig. Pop-up menu selection]

5.1.5 Multiple select and deselect

With a shape/tag selected, select another shape/tag with the [Shift] key on the keyboard pressed to

select or deselect additional shapes

5.2 Move and resize

5.2.1 Moving and resizing using the mouse.

When a shape/tag is selected, a tracker is shown as seen in [Fig. Tracker and mouse cursor]. The tracker

has 8 directions. The tracker in the direction desired by the user can be clicked with the left mouse

button and dragged to resize. If the mouse cursor is above a filled shape/tag or above the border of a

non-filled shape/tag, the cursor turns into a cross-shaped arrow. By dragging with the left mouse

button, the shape/tag can be moved to the desired location.

[Fig. Tracker and mouse cursor]

5.2.2 Moving and resizing using the keyboard

With a shape/tag selected, the direction keys on the keyboard can be used to move the shape in pixel

units. Pressing the space bar changes the move units from pixels to the grid units shown on the screen.

The move unit is changed each time the space bar is pressed.

[Fig. Moving shapes/tags using the keyboard]

CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu 103

 By pressing the direction keys with the Shift button of the keyboard pressed, the shape/tag can be

resized. Resizing is only possible to the right along the X axis, and down along the Y axis.

[Fig. Resizing shapes/tags using the keyboard]

5.2.3 Moving and resizing in the properties page

By changing the coordinates and size info in the [Properties] page of tag properties, the location and

size can be changed. The left and top trackers shown on the tag are the standards for the coordinates.

The size is indicated in pixels.

[Fig. Moving and resizing in the properties window]

5.2.4 Resizing using the keyboard and mouse

Shapes/tags can be resized using the keyboard and mouse together. Place the mouse cursor on the

trackers of a selected shape/tag. The cursor turns into an arrow. Use the direction keys on the keyboard

to resize.

[Fig. Resizing using the keyboard and mouse]

104 CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu

5.3 Undo and redo

5.3.1 Undo (Ctrl + Z)

Edits made in the project edit screen such as move, copy, paste, and delete of shapes/tags can be

canceled in sequence. Up to 50 undos can be performed on each screen. Select [Edit]-[Undo] in the

menu, or [Undo] in the toolbar.

5.3.2 Redo (Ctrl + R)

An [Undo] performed in the project edit screen can be reversed in sequence to the immediately

previous status. Up to 50 redos can be performed on each screen. Select [Edit]-[Redo] in the menu, or

[Redo] in the toolbar.

5.4 Select all

Select all shapes and tags registered in the screen. In the edit screen, select [Edit]-[Select all] in the

menu, click the toolbar, or right-click the mouse. In the pop-up menu that appears, select [Select all].

Use the [Ctrl + A] keyboard shortcut in the screen to select all items.

5.5 Copying and deleting

5.5.1 Cut (Ctrl + X)

Cutting is the same function as performing copy and delete sequentially. Select a shape/tag and select

[Edit]-[Cut] in the menu, click the toolbar, or right-click the mouse. In the pop-up menu that appears,

select [Cut]. When a cut is performed, the selected shape/tag is saved in the WINDOWS clipboard.

5.5.2 Copy (Ctrl + C)

Use the copy function to create copies of shapes/tags. Select a shape/tag to copy and select [Edit]-
[Copy] in the menu, click the toolbar, or right-click the mouse. In the pop-up menu that appears, select

[Copy]. When a copy is performed, the selected shape/tag is saved in the WINDOWS clipboard until the

next copy or cut is performed.

5.5.3 Multi copy (Ctrl + T)

This function can be used for convenient copying of one or many shapes/tags. In the case of tags, the

addresses used for tags can be increased automatically, depending on options.

Select a tag and select [Edit]-[Multi copy] in the menu, or click the [Multi Copy] icon in the tool bar.
[Multi copy] is shown, as seen in [Fig. Multi Copy].

CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu 105

 [Fig. Multi copy]

[Fig. Multi copy setting screen]

MultiCopy Description

When Rows (Y) is selected, the number of additional copies made in the vertical direction is
Rows (Y)
equal to the set value.

Pixel interval of row Set the interval (pixels) between copies in the Y direction.

When Colums (X) is selected, the number of additional copies made in the horizontal
Columns (X)
direction is equal to the set value.

Pixel interval of column Set the interval (pixels) between copies in the X direction.

The addresses of the copied items automatically increase according to the value set in

[Inc/Dec (Offset)], beginning from the station of the address set for the original. When [X

direction] is checked, address increase priority is given to the X direction. If [Y direction] is

Address increment checked, address increase priority is given to the Y direction.

e.g.) If the address of the original item is [MX0000], with 5 multicopy items, and an

increment of 1, the addresses of the created items become [MX0000, MX0001, MX0002,

MX0003, MX0004].

In the multi copy dialog window, [X direction] gives priority to address increase in the horizontal

direction, and [Y direction] gives priority to address increase in the vertical direction.

106 CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu

 [Fig. X direction address increase] [Fig. Y direction address increase]

5.5.4 Paste (Ctrl + V)

This function is used to insert shapes/tags saved to the clipboard by copying or cutting in the position

desired by the user. Select [Edit]-[Paste] in the menu, click the toolbar, or right-click the mouse. In the

pop-up menu that appears, select [Paste]. If paste is performed without performing a cut or copy

beforehand, nothing happens.

5.5.5 Paste in same position (Ctrl + Shift + V)

In the paste function described above, the position to paste the shape/tag must be designated with the

mouse. [Paste in same position] is a function used to insert the copied item in the same position as the

original. In the screen to paste to, select [Edit]-[Paste in same position], or select [Paste in same

position] in the pop-up menu that is displayed when the right mouse button is clicked.

5.5.6 Delete
Delete the selected shape/tag. Select a shape/tag to delete and select [Edit]-[Delete] in the menu, click

the toolbar, or right-click the mouse. In the pop-up menu that appears, select [Delete].

5.6 Group

5.6.1 Create group (Ctrl + G)

Multiple shapes/tags can be designated as a group for editing. Select two or more shapes/tags, and
select [Edit]-[Group] in the menu, click the tool bar, or right click the mouse. In the pop-up menu that

appears, select [Group] to group the selected items. The trackers for grouped shapes/tags are shown in

yellow.

[Fig. Grouped]

CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu 107

 5.6.2 Ungroup (Ctrl + G)
Ungroup grouped shapes/tags. Select [Edit]-[Ungroup] in the menu, click the tool bar, or right click the

mouse. In the pop-up menu that appears, select [Ungroup] to ungroup the group.

5.6.3 Editing shapes/tags in groups

Properties such as color or address can be changed for grouped shapes/tags without ungrouping.

Select a group and double click the left mouse button. This brings up a list of shapes/tags included in

the group, as seen in [Fig. Editing group properties]. Double click the shape/tag to be changed from

the list to bring up a property edit window.

[Fig. Editing group properties]

5.7 Rotate

This function rotates shapes/tags to the right or to the left. Select the shapes/tags to align, and select

the desired rotation direction in [Edit]-[Rotate] of the menu, or right-click the mouse and select [Rotate]

in the pop-up menu.

5.7.1 Rotate left (<)

The selected shape/tag is rotated left by 90°.

[Fig. Rotate left]

5.7.2 Rotate right (>)

The selected shape/tag is rotated right by 90°.

[Fig. Rotate right]

108 CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu

 5.7.3 Cancel rotate (/)
A rotated shape/tag is reverted to the original state.

5.8 Properties

This is used to run the edit properties window to change shape/tag properties. Select a shape/tag and

select [Edit]-[Properties] in the menu, click the toolbar, or right-click the mouse. In the pop-up menu

that appears, select [Properties]. For general use, double click the shape/tag to edit.

5.9 Mirror

5.9.1 Mirror vertical

Flip the selected shape, tag or group vertically by 180 degrees.

5.9.2 Mirror horizontal

Flip the selected shape, tag or group horizontally by 180 degrees.

5.10 Cancel inheritance

Inheritance of an object registered in global objects is canceled. If inheritance is canceled, changes to

properties in the global object list are not applied to the canceled item.

5.11 Align

XDesignerPlus4 provides a variety of alignment functions. Alignment allows for simpler and more

accurate editing. Select the shapes/tags to align, and select the desired rotation direction in [Edit]-

[Rotate] of the menu. Alternatively, select the align icon in the toolbar on top of the screen, or right-

click the mouse and select [Align] in the pop-up menu.

(1) Bring forward

When a shape/tag is overlapped by another shape/tag and is located behind the other, the shape/tag is

brought one step forward.

[Fig. Bring forward]

CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu 109

 (2) Send backward
When a shape/tag is overlapped by another shape/tag and is located behind the other, the shape/tag is

send one step backward.

[Fig. Send backward]

(3) Bring to front

The action is the same as [Bring forward], but when multiple items are overlapping, the selected item is

brought to the very front.

(4) Send to back

The action is the same as [Send backward], but when multiple items are overlapping, the selected item

is sent to the very back.

(5) Align left (Ctrl + Shift + ←)

The selected shapes/tags are aligned according to the shape/tag located farthest to the left.

[Fig. Align left]

(6) Align right (Ctrl + Shift + →)

The selected shapes/tags are aligned according to the shape/tag located farthest to the right.

[Fig. Align right]

(7) Align top (Ctrl + Shift + ↑)

The selected shapes/tags are aligned according to the shape/tag located farthest to the top.

110 CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu

 [Fig. Align top]

(8) Align bottom (Ctrl + Shift + ↓)

The selected shapes/tags are aligned according to the shape/tag located farthest to the bottom.

[Fig. Align bottom]

(9) Align center (Ctrl + Shift + ↓)

The selected shapes/tags are aligned along the central Y axis.

[Fig. Align center]

(10) Align middle (Ctrl + Shift + M)

The selected shapes/tags are aligned along the middle X axis.

[Fig. Align middle]

(11) Horizontal space equally

The selected shapes/tags are moved and spaced equally horizontally.

CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu 111

 [Fig. Horizonztal space equally]

(12) Vertical space equally

The selected shapes/tags are moved and spaced equally vertically.

[Fig. Vertical space equally]

(13) Horizontal center in window

The selected shapes/tags are centered horizontally in the edit screen.

[Fig. Horizontal center in window]

(14) Vertical center in window

The selected shapes/tags are centered vertically in the edit screen.

[Fig. Vertical center in window]

(15) Grow to largest width

The selected shapes/tags are resized to the width of the widest item.

112 CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu

 [Fig. Grow to largest width]

(16) Shrink to smallest width

The selected shapes/tags are resized to the width of the smallest item.

[Fig. Shrink to smallest width]

(17) Grow to largest height

The selected shapes/tags are resized to the height of the highest item.

[Fig. Grow to largest height]

(18) Shrink to smallest height

The selected shapes/tags are resized to the height of the smallest item.

[Fig. Shrink to smallest height]

5.12 Snap

The dictionary definition of snap is 'to make a clicking sound.' The snap function, which is also known
as the magnet function, provides a function where shapes and tags stick to a certain reference line

when drawing, moving, or resizing.

CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu 113

 5.12.1 Grid snap
In grid snap, shapes/tags are moved and resized according to the grid when the show grid option of

the edit screen is used. When the mouse is used, the mouse pointer moves not by pixels by according

to the grid spaces. When the keyboard is used, each time a direction key is pressed, the cursor moves

along the grid.

[Fig. Toolbar grid snap]

Note For fine movement when grid snap is enabled, use the mouse to move with the [Ctrl] key pressed

down. For fine movement using the keyboard, press the [Space] to transition between [Fine

movement] ↔ [Grid snap] modes.

5.12.2 Object snap

While in grid snap, the snap function is provided along the preset grid, in object snap, the snap
function is provided along the left or top, etc., of a shape/tag already registered in the screen by the

user.

Snap-related options are provided at the bottom of [Tools]→[Editing options] in the menu.

Object snap options can be set to show a line at the point where snap occurs.

[Fig. Toolbar object snap]

114 CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu

CHAPTER 6 View Menu

CHAPTER 5 -Edit Menu 115

CHAPTER 6 - View Menu

The [View] menu is explained. The view menu shows or hides the docking windows on the left and right side of the

XDesignerPlus4 program. Various screen views can be set, and the program language can be selected.

[Fig. View Menu]

6.1 Show name (F5)

On the top left of tags registered in the screen, hints explaining the tag are shown. The tag name is

shown in this hint.

[Fig. Tag name of a bit lamp]

The tag name is displayed as shown in the following table.

Tag English Tag name display

Bit lamp Bit Lamp [BL]

Word lamp Word Lamp [WL]

N lamp N-State Lamp [NL]

Touch Touch [T]

Touch + Bit Lamp Touch+ Bit Lamp [TL]

Touch + Word Lamp Touch+ Word Lamp [TW]

Touch + N lamp Touch+ N-State Lamp [TN]

Numeric Numeric [N]

Text String [S]

Show numeric keypad Keypad Display Numeric [NK]

Show string keypad Keypad Display String [CK]

Bit message Bit Message [MB]

Word message Word Message [MW]

116 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 Bit window Bit Window [WB]

Word window Word Window [WW]

Bit parts Bit Parts [BP]

Word parts Word Parts [WP]

Alarm Alarm [AL]

Alarm expand AlarmEx [ALEX]

Log table Log Table [LO]

Event log viewer EventLog View [EVLV]

Bar graph Bar Graph [GRA]

Linear graph Linear Graph [GRB]

Expanded graph Graph Ex [GEX]

Record Record [REC]

X/Y chart A X/Y chart A [XY]

X/Y chart B X/Y chart B [XY2]

Calculation Calculation [CA]

Comm Comm [CO]

Clock Clock [CL]

File list File List [LIST]

DocViewer DocViewer [DV]

Slide Slide [SL]

6.2 Show ID (F5)

On the top left of tags registered in the screen, hints explaining the tag are shown. The tag Id is shown

in this hint.

[Fig. Tag ID of a bit lamp]

The [ID] is a number assigned according to the order of registration of shapes and tags on the screen.

The ID is shown in [Properties] under shape or tag properties. The ID of the shape or tag registered

first to the screen is [00001], and the ID of the shape or tag registered second is [00002].

6.3 Docking window

Docking means that the window sticks like a magnet.

Functional docking windows provided in the XDesignerPlus4 program include [Project manager], [List

window], [Memory Manager] and [Global Object] on the left, and [My clipboard] and [Properties

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 117

 window] on the right.

6.3.1 Handling docking windows

All docking windows can be docked to the XDesignerPlus4 program or used separately, and can be

shown or hidden as needed.

(1) Separating docking windows

Docking windows that have been docked can easily be separated by dragging with the mouse.

[Fig. Separating docking windows]

Click the [Title] part of a fixed docking window, and drag outward with the mouse. This separates the

docking window, as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Separating docking windows]

(2) Fixing docking windows in place.

Separated docking windows can be docked by dragging the [Title] with the mouse and [Dropping] in
the vertical list section.

[Fig. Fixing docking windows in place]

118 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

(3) Showing and hiding docking windows
Docking windows appear immediately when selected from the [View] menu. As there are many types of

docking window, all left and right docking windows can be docked, and [Shown/Hidden] as needed.

① Showing and hiding left docking windows

Left side docking windows include the project manager, list window, and memory manager. Select all of

these windows in the [View] menu, register, and dock to show a vertical list on the left side. When the

vertical list is clicked, the corresponding window is shown, as seen in the following figure.

[Fig. Show left docking window]

Here, the window is not fixed. When the mouse clicks another location, the window closes. To keep an

open window open, click the thumbtack image ( ) on the top right hand corner. The thumbtack image

changes ( ), and the window is fixed in place.

[Fig. Show left docking window]

The title [Project] is shown on top, indicating that the [Project Manager] is open. In the vertical list,

[Project] is removed, and [Memory] and [List Window] remain.

The three left docking windows can all be hidden by clicking the thumbtack image ( ).

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 119

 [Fig. Hidden left docking windows]

Also, all three left docking windows can be fixed open by clicking the thumbtack image ( ) on the top

right corner.

[Fig. All left docking windows open]

The position of docking windows can be adjusted to suit the user by dragging the top title portion with

the mouse.

② Showing and hiding right docking windows.

Right side docking windows include my clipboard and the properties window. These windows are

registered in the project by default. However, if they are closed, they can be selected from the [View]

menu. Register and dock to create a vertical list on the right side. When the vertical list is clicked, the
corresponding window is shown, as seen in the following figure.

[Fig. Show right docking window]

120 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

Here, the window is not fixed. When the mouse clicks another location, the window closes. To keep an

open window open, click the thumbtack image ( ) on the top right hand corner. The thumbtack image

changes ( ), and the window is fixed in place.

[Fig. Show right docking window]

The title [My clipboard] is shown on top. [My clipboard] is removed from the vertical list, leaving the

[Properties] window. The two right docking windows can all be hidden by clicking the thumbtack image

( ).

[Fig. Hidden right docking windows]

Also, both right docking windows can be fixed open by clicking the thumbtack image ( ) on the top

right corner.

[Fig. All right docking windows open]

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 121

 (4) Removing docking windows
To close a docking window, click the [X] button on the top right corner. In the following figure, when

the [X] button is clicked, the open project manager and list windows are closed.

[Fig. Removing docking windows]

6.4 Project manager

[Project manager] is a left docking window. From the [Project Manager] window, the project screens and

settings can be viewed and managed at a glance. When the program is run, and a new project is

created or an existing project is opened, a list of screens and general settings is shown in the project

manager.

.
[Fig. Project Manager]

6.4.1 Screen
The screen composition of the project can be seen at a glance. Base screens, window screens, sub

screens, and global screens are shown in a tree structure.

(☞ See [3.4] of [chapter 3] for a description of each screen.)

122 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

① Creating screens

In [Project manager], click base screen, window screen, sub screen, top frame, left frame, right frame, or

bottom frame, then right click the mouse to bring up the [New screen] pop-up menu.

[Fig. Base screen, subscreen, and frame screen pop-up menu]

[Fig. Window screen popup menu]

When new screen is clicked from the pop-up menu, a new screen is created depending on the screen

type.

② Opening screens

Click the name of the projects screen to open then right click. Select [Open] in the pop-up menu that is

shown, or [Double click] the screen name to open.

[Fig. Selecting [Open] in the screen name pop-up menu]

[Fig. Double clicking the screen name]

③ Pop-up menu
To bring up the pop-up menu, select the applicable list and right click the menu. A different pop-up

menu is shown depending on the screen type.

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 123

 [Fig. Base screen pop-up menu]

Pop-up menu Description

New screen Create a new base screen.

Open Open the selected base screen.

Close Close the selected base screen.

Copy the selected base screen. When the menu is clicked, the [Set screen number] screen is

brought up. Here, the numbers for the screens to be copied and newly created as set. When

[Default add] is used, the copied screens are added from the number following the largest

number of the registered base screens. In [Change the screen number], the [Start screen

number] is entered, and the copied screens are added using the number that is entered.

Copy screen

Delete Delete the selected base screen.

Script Set the script that applies to the selected base screen only.

Properties The properties of the selected base screen are shown.

[Fig. Window screen popup menu]

124 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 Pop-up menu Description

New screen Create a new window screen.

Add a default tenkey window screen. The default tenkey window screen is automatically

created when the project is created. However, if the default tenkey window screen has

been deleted, this menu can be used to create a new window. The default tenkey
Add default tenkey
window screen is used in the [Show numeric/string key tag].

(☞ See [19.4.1] in [chapter 19] for instructions on how to use the default tenkey
window.)

A tenkey (keypad) window screen registered to the library is added. Various small/large

tenkeys are registered. Select the tenkey to register as a window screen, enter the

[Window number], and click the [Add] button on the bottom. The window numbers that

can be registered for library tenkeys are fixed:[65400~65499].

Add library tenkey

Add a file manager window screen.

Add file manager window

(☞ See [40.6] in [chapter 40] for file manager usage instructions.)

Add a password window screen. The password window screen is used to enter the

password if the [Set password] function is used in the project. Touch the password entry

portion on the top, enter the password using the string keypad, and press the [ENTER]

key.

Add password window

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 125

 (☞ See [7.10] in [chapter 7] for password settings and the password window screen.)

Open Open the selected window screen.

Close Close the selected window screen.

Copy screen Copy the selected window screen.

Delete Delete the selected window screen.

Script Set the script that applies to the selected window screen only.

Properties The properties of the selected window screen are shown.

[Fig. Sub screen popup menu]

Pop-up menu Description

New screen Create a new sub screen.

Open Open the selected sub screen.

Close Close the selected sub screen.

Copy the selected sub screen. When the menu is clicked, the [Set screen number] screen is

brought up. Here, the numbers for the screens to be copied and newly created as set. When

[Default add] is used, the copied screens are added from the number following the largest

number of the registered sub screens. In [Change the screen number], the [Start screen

number] is entered, and the copied screens are added using the number that is entered.

Copy screen

Delete Delete the selected sub screen.

Properties The properties of the selected sub screen are shown.

[Fig. Master screen popup menu]

126 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 Pop-up menu Description

Open Open the master screen.

Close Close the master screen.

Properties Show master screen properties.

[Fig. Frame screen popup menu]

Pop-up menu Description

New screen Create a new frame screen.

Open Open the selected frame screen.

Close Close the selected frame screen.

Delete Delete the selected frame screen.

Properties The properties of the selected frame screen are shown.

④ Screen properties

The [Properties] of each screen are explained.

[Fig. Base screen properties]

Properties Description

Screen number Designate the base screen number.

Screen name Designate the base screen name.

Select the base screen background type. There are two types of background:

[Color] and [Image].

Background type

B.G. color If [Color] is chosen for the [Background type], choose the color.

Background image If [Image] is chosen for the [Background type], use the [Load] button to load the

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 127

 image to use as the background (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.jpeg).

Use master screen Check to use the master screen.

[Fig. Window screen properties]

Properties Description

Screen number Designate the window screen number.

Screen name Designate the window screen name.

Select the window screen background type. Only [Color] can be used for window screen
Background type
background type. This option is fixed to [Color].

B.G. color Select the color to use as the background.

[Fig. Sub screen properties]

Properties Description

Screen number Designate the sub screen number.

Screen name Designate the sub screen name.

[Fig. Master screen properties]

128 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 Properties Description

Show the master screen number. There is only 1 master screen, and the screen number cannot be
Screen number
changed.

Show the master screen name. There is only 1 master screen, and the screen name cannot be
Screen name
changed.

Select the master screen background type. There are two types of background: [Color] and [Image].
Background

type

B.G. color If [Color] is chosen for the [Background type], choose the color.

Background If [Image] is chosen for the [Background type], use the [Load] button to register the image to use

image as the background (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.jpeg).

[Fig. Frame screen properties]

Properties Description

Screen number Designate the frame screen number.

Screen name Designate the frame screen name.

6.4.2 Global settings

These are common settings that apply generally throughout the project. Double click each list to bring

up the corresponding setting screen.

[Fig. Global settings]

Global settings Description

Multilanguage table Set the multilanguage table. (☞ See [7.3] in [chapter 7] for the multilanguage table.)

Logging setting Set logging data. (☞ See [7.4] of [chapter 7] for logging settings.)

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 129

 Alarm setting Set alarm data. (☞ See [7.5] of [chapter 7] for alarm settings.)

Recipe setting Set recipe data. (☞ See [7.6] of [chapter 7] for recipe settings.)

Script Set the script. (☞ See [7.7] of [chapter 7] for script settings.)

Message table Set the message table. (☞ See [7.8] in [chapter 7] for the message table.)

Event log Set the event log. (☞ See [7.9] of [chapter 7] for the event log.)

Register the image list to use in parts tags. Add images using the button on
Image list
the mouse right click pop-up menu. (☞ See [chapter 25~26] for part tags.)

6.5 MY CLIPBOARD

My Clipboard is a right docking window. My Clipboard is a user library of sorts, where frequently used

groups of shapes or tags are registered. Lists registered in my clipboard can be used conveniently

through [Drag&Drop].

6.5.1 Palette
The [Palette] is a space for keeping frequently used groups of shapes or tags. There is no restriction to

the number of palettes that can be created.

(1) Create/delete new palette

[Fig. Create new palette]

Click the button on top to create the [Palette]. When a palette is created, a new palette is

created with the name [NO NAME] at the bottom of the palette list. Select the create palette and right

click to bring up a pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to change palette names, and deleted unused

palettes.

[Fig. Palette popup menu]

Pop-up menu Description

Palette title Change the palette title.

Delete palette Delete the palette. When a palette is deleted, items in the palette are deleted together.

130 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

(2) Opening/closing palettes
The [+] and [-] buttons to the left of the palette name can be used to open and view or close palettes.

Button Description

Denotes a closed palette that does not have items.

Denotes a closed palette that has items.

Denotes an open palette that has items.

6.5.2 Items
[Items] refer to groups of frequently used shapes or tags that are registered in a [Palette]. [Items] can

be added simply to palettes, and [Items] registered in [Palettes] can easily be taken out and registered

to the screen.

(1) Registering palette items

[Drag] the shapes or tags to register as [Items] and drop them on the [Palette].

There is no restriction to the number of [Items] that can be registered to a single [Palette].

[Fig. Item registration]

After registering an item, to change the name of the item, or to delete an unused item, select the item

and right click the mouse to bring up a pop-up menu.

[Fig. Item popup menu]

Pop-up menu Description

Edit text Edit the TEXT (name) of the item.

Delete item The item is deleted from the palette.

(2) Using registered items

The method for using items registered in [My Clipboard] is as follows. Select the item to register to the
screen, and [Drag&Drop] in the [Edit screen].

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 131

 [Fig. Registering items to the screen]

6.6 List window

[List window] is a left docking window. The list window shows list of shapes/tags/selections/groups

registered to the current edit screen. To view the list window, select [List window] at the bottom of the

left docking window, or run [List window] in the [View] menu.

[Fig. List window]

6.6.1 Composition of the list window

(1) Page type

The list window comprises shape/tag/selection/group pages.

Page Description

Shape A list of shapes registered to the active screen.

Tag A list of tags registered to the active screen.

Select A list of shapes/tags/groups selected in the active screen.

Group A list of groups registered to the active screen.

(2) List properties

ID, SEQ, type, and information are displayed in each list.

132 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 List property Description

The ID of the shape/tag/group is shown. The ID number is assigned in the order registered
ID
to the screen.

SEQ stands for sequence, and indicates the run sequence.

SEQ
SEQ can be changed using the button on the top right corner.

Type [Shape type/tag type/group] is displayed.

Information (Left, Top, Right, Bottom) position info is shown.

6.6.2 Selecting shapes/tags/groups

When a shape/tag/group is selected in the list window, the corresponding shape/tag/group is selected

in the edit screen. The selected shape/tag/group is indicated by a light green area, as seen in the figure

below.

[Fig. Selecting from the list window]

6.6.3 Viewing shape/tag/group properties

When an item in the list window is double clicked, the [Properties] screen of the corresponding

tag/shape is brought up.

[Fig. Bringing up the properties screen from the list window]

6.7 Properties window

[Properties window] is a right docking window. The properties window shows screen properties and the

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 133

 properties of tags and shapes registered to the screen and allows editing.

[Fig. Properties window]

6.7.1 Composition of the properties window

The details of the properties window are explained.

Item Description

Indicates that the properties window is not fixed. Clicking this button fixes the properties window in

place.

Indicates that the properties window is fixed. Clicking this button hides the properties window.

Closes the properties window.

Expand all Expands and shows all properties

Collapse all Collapses and hides all properties

If checked, the properties window can be docked on the right. If this is not checked, the properties
Dockable
window is separated, and cannot be docked.

The properties list is collapsed and not visible. Clicking this button makes the properties list visible.

The properties list is expanded and visible. Clicking this button collapses and hides the properties list.

6.8 Memory manager

[Memory manager] is a right docking window. The memory manager displays the addresses used in the

screen as physical areas.

6.8.1 Composition of the memory manager

The memory manager comprises three parts.

1. Search area for selection of communication device, address, and screen.

2. Area where the memory area of the address used according to the search area is shown using

colored dots.
3. A list of tags using the address, shown when a colored dot is clicked.

134 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 [Fig. Memory manager]

(1) Search area

Designated the part of memory to show.

[Fig. Search area]

Search area Description

Select the type of address to view the memory usage situation for. In [PLC1], the memory

usage of the PLC address is viewed. [Internal] show the memory usage status of internal

addresses of the touch screen. One touch screen can communicate with multiple PLCs. When
Communication
communicating with 1 PLC only, only PLC1 is shown. When communicating with 2 PLCs, PLC1
device
and PLC2 are shown.

When PLC address has been selected, select the address range. Each PLC has a different
Address
address range.

View addresses used in all screens, or only addresses used in a single screen.

Screen Click [all screens] for all screens, and the corresponding window to view addresses for a single

screen.

(2) Memory usage status display

The [Rows] in the address area list word addresses, and the [Columns] list bits 0 through 15. Addresses

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 135

 used in the project are indicated with round dots. Each dot indicates a bit address. Therefore, for

addresses used as words, dots are shown from bits 0 to 15, while for addresses used as bits, dots are

shown in only the one corresponding bit. The address is shown differently depending on the PLC

selected and the type of address. If the address is in [8 bit], the number of columns becomes 8. If [32

bit] addresses, the number of columns becomes 32. The colors of the dots indicate the following

properties.

Shape Category Description

Read Green dots are shown when addresses used in a tag are used as read addresses. A

(Green) property [Read address] is an address where data is only read for display on the touch screen.

Blue dots are shown when addresses used in a tag are used as write addresses. [Write
Write
addresses] are addresses where data is input from the touch screen, and data is
(Blue) property
written to the controller.

Dots that are half green and half blue are shown when addresses used in a tag are

Read/Write used for both read and write actions. [Read/Write addresses] are addresses where data

(Green/Blue) property input is received from the touch screen and written to the controller, and data is read

from the controller and displayed on the touch screen.

Duplicate
Red dots are displayed when an address is used in 2 or more tags.
(Red) property

The [Read/Write] properties in memory manager indicate properties for tag operation on the touch

screen. They are unrelated to actual PLC address properties.

For example, the address [X] of a particular PLC is a read-only bit address in the PLC, but if this

Note address is used in the [Show numeric keys] tag in the touch screen, the address has [Read/Write

properties]. The [Show numeric key] tag is a tag that uses tenkey to enter data in the PLC, and

displays input data on the screen. Therefore, as input and display are performed at the same time,

the set address is said to be used with a [Read/Write property].

(3) Show tag list

When a dot is clicked, the screen where the address is used, and tag info is displayed on the bottom of

the memory manager. This function allows for easy locating of the tags where the address is used.

[Fig. Clicking a dot in the memory manager]

136 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 [Fig. Displaying the tag list in memory manager]

When the list above is [Double clicked], the screen where the tag is located is navigated to, and the tag

is selected.

Tag info Description

ID This is the tag ID.

Screen This is the number of the screen where the tag is registered.

Tag name This is the tag name.

Properties This is the property of the address used by the tag [Read address/Write address].

Address This is the address used by the tag.

6.9 Global object

Global object is a function for registration and easy retrieval and use of shapes, tags, and groups that

are frequently used. The function is similar to My Clipboard, but the concept of inheritance has been

applied.

[Fig. Global object]

When a registered global object is used in the screen, properties are inherited. Inheritance means that

the properties remain unchanged. If inheritance is not canceled for global objects registered in the

screen, when properties are changed in the global object window list, the changes are applied to the
properties of all global objects registered on the screen simultaneously. Therefore, by registering and

using shapes, tags, and groups that are copied and used in multiple screens in global objects, these can

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 137

 be modified in batch through the global object list. Inheritance can be partially or globally canceled.

6.9.1 Registering global objects

Global objects can be registered by dragging and dropping shapes, tags, and groups on the screen into

the global object window.

[Fig. Global object registration]

6.9.2 Using global objects

To use lists registered in the global object window, select and register using drag&drop as seen in the

figure below.

[Fig. Using global objects]

6.9.3 Deleting and changing properties

Registered global objects can be deleted by clicking the [X] mark on each list, as seen in the figure

below. To delete multiple global objects at once, select the lists to delete, and click the [Delete] button
on top.

138 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 [Fig. Deleting and changing properties]

If a global object already in use in the screen is deleted, the following [Global objects registered in the

screen will be released as normal objects.] message is shown.

[Fig. Delete confirmation message]

Click the [Yes] button to delete, and click the [No] button to cancel deletion. In the global object

window, click the image to change properties. If the global object is a group, the screen shown in

the figure below is displayed, and the properties of individual objects in the group can be changed.

[Fig. Group properties list]

6.9.4 Cancel inheritance

Properties can be edited by partially or globally canceling inheritance. If inheritance is canceled,

changes to properties in the global object list are not applied to the canceled item. Double clicking a

shape that has been retrieved from global objects and registered on the screen brings up the following

properties screen. The settings part is disabled, and the cancel inheritance button is shown on the

bottom. If inheritance is canceled, the settings part is enabled, and properties can be changed. However,

because inheritance is canceled, later changes to global object properties are not inherited, and these

changes are not reflected. is used to restore to the original size when resize has been performed.

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 139

 [Fig. Canceling inheritance for a shape]

Double clicking a tag that has been retrieved from global objects and registered on the screen brings

up the following properties screen.

is used to cancel all inheritances. Inheritance can be canceled partially for addresses, captions, and

images of tags.

[Fig. Canceling inheritance for a tag]

Double clicking a group that has been retrieved from global objects and registered on the screen brings

up the following properties screen.

[Fig. Canceling inheritance for a group]

When the cancel inheritance button on top is clicked, inheritance is canceled for the entire group.

By double clicking each object in the list, inheritance can be canceled individually.

6.10 Status number

[Status number] is a function that displays the tag shape in actual touch screen operation, depending

on the data status of addresses set for tags.

140 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 [Fig. Status number]

In the case of a bit address, the tag is displayed according to the [ON/OFF] status. In [ON status], the

shape of the tag when tag data is [ON] is shown. In [OFF status], the shape of the tag when tag data is

[OFF] is shown.

In the case of word addresses, the status of the tag is displayed according to the [ON/OFF] statuses of

bit 00 through bit 15. In the case of word lamps, N lamps, and word messages, statuses [0~15] are

used, and up to the 16th tag status can be viewed according to the set sequence.

In the toolbar shown in the figure below, status numbers can be set in the same manner.

[Fig. Toolbar status numbers]

6.11 Zoom in/Zoom out

The project edit screen can be zoomed in or out.

[Fig. Zoom in/out from the menu]

Zoom out of 40%~80%, and zoom in of 150%~400% is supported. 100% is the original size.

Zoom in/out is also possible using the mouse wheel with the [Ctrl key] pressed down. Also, the screen

can be zoomed in/out from the toolbar.

[Fig. Zoom in/out from the toolbar]

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 141

 Toolbar image Function

Zoom in by [+20%], beginning from 100%.

Zoom out by [-20%], beginning from 100%.

Return to the original 100% size.

The % zoom in/zoom out is shown. The desired % can be set.

6.12 Toolbar option

Toolbar option allows editing of the toolbar. Among the 11 toolbars, only the frequently used functions

can be checked and used.

[Fig. Toolbar]

[Fig. Toolbar options]

By pressing the shortcut (Ctrl + W), the toolbar can be hidden or shown.

6.13 Hint

6.13.1 Show hint (Ctrl + H)

Hints are help balloons. Hints are descriptions attached above tags.

[Fig. Hint]

In the [Show hint] menu, whether to display hints can be set. When the menu is run once, hints are

shown. If the menu is run again, hints are not shown.

6.13.2 Hint option (Shift + Ctrl + H)

142 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

 Set the [Font color/background color/font size] for hints. This is the same as [Tools]-[Editing options]-

[Hints].

[Fig. Hint option]

6.14 Previous screen (PageUp)

Navigate to the screen with the previous number from the currently open base screen, window screen,

sub screen or global screen.

6.15 Next screen (PageDown)

Navigate to the screen with the next number from the currently open base screen, window screen, sub

screen or global screen.

6.16 Language

Select the language to display in the XDesigerPlus4 program. When the program is run for the first

time after installation, English is displayed. To change to Korean or Chinese, select the language under

[View]-[Language].

[Fig. Language]

When a language is selected, the following confirmation language is shown.

[Fig. Language change confirmation message]

If the [Yes] button is clicked, the language is changed to the selected language.

CHAPTER 6 -View Menu 143

 CHAPTER 7 Project Menu

144 CHAPTER 6 -View Menu

CHAPTER 7 - Project Menu

The [Project] menu is explained. In the project menu, settings that apply to the overall project are made.

[Fig. Project menu]

7.1 Edit master screen

Opens, shows, and allows editing of the master screen.

[Fig. Master screen]

The [Master screen] is a global screen where shapes and tags used commonly in base screens are

implemented, for application and use in individual base screens.

(☞ See [3.4.4] of [chapter 3] for how to use the master screen.)

7.2 Master screen properties

Show master screen properties. The master screen background can be changed from the properties

screen.

[Fig. Master screen properties]

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 145

 Properties Description

Shows the master screen number.

Screen number
There is only 1 master screen, and the screen number cannot be changed.

Show the master screen name.

Screen name
There is only 1 master screen, and the screen name cannot be changed.

Select the master screen background type.

Background type

There are two types of background: [Color] and [Image].

Hint B.G. color If [Color] is chosen for the [Background type], choose the color.

If [Image] is chosen for the [Background type], use the [Load] button to load the image
Background image
to use as the background (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.jpeg).

7.3 Text table

The text table is the same as the text table under general settings in the [Project manager]. Text is a

function that converts strings used in projects into various languages, depending on conditions.

The usage method for the text function is as follows.

1. Register all strings used in the project in the [Text table], by language.

2. Set all string input parts in the project using the [Text table].

3. Set the data for the special address [_MULTI_LANG], depending on the language to be displayed.

7.3.1 Preparing the text table

The text table is prepared as follows.

[Fig. Text table]

(1) Select font to display

Set whether to display text as normal text or image text in the project.

146 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Font selection]

Font Description

In normal text, characters are displayed using font provided by XTOP. The fonts provided by

XTOP are limited to [English, Korean, and Chinese]. Therefore, when languages other than
Normal text
[English, Korean and Chinese] have been used in the text table, this option must be set as image

text.

In image text, characters are displayed using font provided in the PC.

Press the button and set the font to use as shown in the figure below.

Image text

In some cases, some fonts are unable to display certain languages. Select a font with the word

[Unicode] in the font name to safely display any language.

(2) Table setting

First, press the button on the top right corner to set the table. In table settings, the number

of tables created should be equal to the number of languages to use. Each table created should be

designated with a name. After completing settings, click the [OK] button.

[Fig. Table setting]

Table setting Description

Check as many boxes as the number of languages to use. Up to 16 different languages can
Usage
be registered.

Table Name Set the table name by selecting in [Select Language], or through manual entry.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 147

 (3) Entering strings for each language
All strings used in the project must be registered. The strings for each language must be entered

manually, or copied and pasted from files such as Excel files.

[Fig. Entering strings for each language]

Title Description

This number is assigned sequentially to registered strings. Up to 10000 images can be

No
registered.

This is the length of the longest string among the strings entered for each language.

After entering all strings, press the [Apply] button. The following message appears, and

settings are made automatically.

Length

When the [Yes] button is pressed, the length of the longest string is registered

automatically.

The [Table number] is placed ahead of the [Table name] set in [Table settings].
[Table number. Table name]
The table number becomes condition data for language selection.

7.3.2 Setting a text table in a project

Select the [Text table] for all parts where strings are entered in the project, and select the strings

registered in the text table. The list of the text table list comprises the strings in the first table.

[Fig. Text settings in the project]

148 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 7.3.3 Selecting the language to display
By changing the value of the special address [_MULTI_LANG], the language displayed can be changed.

[Fig. Table number]

If the [Table number] in the column name of the text table above is the same as the data of special

address [_MULTI_LANG], the language for that column is displayed. In the case of the table above, if the

data of [_MULTI_LANG] is [0], Korean is displayed, and English is displayed for [1].

7.3.4 Viewing each language in the edit screen

To view each language in the edit screen, use the toolbar. Depending on the table selected, the

language set in the text table is displayed on the screen.

[Fig. Table toolbar]

7.3.5 Batch automatic registration of text tables

By using [Tools]-[Text table converter], all strings registered to the shapes and tags in the currently open
project are registered in the first column of the text table, and the characters used in the shapes and
tags of the project are automatically designated using the text table. Therefore, it is only necessary to
write the tables for other languages in the text table.

7.4 Logging setting

Logging is a function for recording data. Particular data in the PLC or an internal address is recorded
according to conditions.

Internal touch memory or a CF memory card can be used as storage memory.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 149

 [Fig. Logging setting]

7.4.1 Basic items page

After setting the basic items page, which comprises the [Settings], [Log conditions], and [Log action]

parts, click the button on top to save logging settings.

Setting Description

The ID refers to the logging number. The ID is set automatically and sequentially. Up to 8 logs

ID can be set. That is the IDs available are [1~8]. After saving logging ID [1], click the

button on top to set logging ID [2].

Description Enter a description for each logging.

Normally, the logging data that occurred first is saved on the first line, and logging data that

Display the latest occurs later is saved in the following lines. When [Display the latest] is checked, the logging

save order is reversed, and the latest logging data is saved to the top of the list.

(1) Log condition

Set the conditions that trigger logging. That is, set the conditions for data recording.

Select among [Bit], [Word], and [Time].

① Bit condition

[Fig. Bit condition]

150 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Bit condition]

In the bit condition, when a bit address has been entered, and the data of that bit address satisfies the

set [ON/OFF/Reverse] conditions, logging data is saved.

② Word condition

[Fig. Setting the word condition in logging conditions]

In the word condition, when a word address has been entered, and the data of that word address

satisfies the set range conditions, logging data is saved.

③ Time condition

[Fig. Setting the time condition in logging conditions]

[Fig. Setting the date in the time condition]

In the time condition, logging data is saved at the determined date or time. [Day] stands for day.

Settings available are 1~31. [ALL] stands for every day. The time is entered in [Hour] and [Min].

When the time is set as seen in the figure above, logging data is saved at [9:30 everyday].

(2) Log action

Set the area to record as logging data.

[Fig. Log action setting]

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 151

 Setting Description

Set the start address of the PLC or internal address to record as logging data.
Address
By default, logging is saved in word (16 bit) units; therefore, word addresses are entered.

This is the number of logging data. With the set address as the start address, set how many

Column Count columns will be saved. Logging data may be 16 bit (1 word) in some cases, and 32 bits (2 words)

in other cases. Therefore, the column count and word count may be different.

This is the number of words actually used. With the address entered as the start address, how
Word Count
many word addresses will be recorded is indicated.

This is the total number of logging data. Whenever the log condition is satisfied, logging data is

saved. The total number of logging data is equal to the total count. After the total count has been

Total Count reached, if new logging data occurs, the oldest logging data is deleted, and the new logging data

is saved. When saving to a CF memory card, the total count does not apply. Logging data can be

saved up to the set size of the CF memory card.

7.4.2 Column name & data type page

After completing settings in the basic page, set the column name & data type page. Logging data is

recorded according to the column properties set in the column name & date type page.

[Fig. Column name & data type settings]

Column properties Description

Column numbers start from [0]. Date starts from column [0], Time starts from

column [2], and data starts from column [2].

Column number

Enter the title of each column.

Title If the column name is changed, the changed column name is used when actual

logging data is saved.

152 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 Set the data type of each column.

Select among [DEC], [UDEC], and [ASCII]. [DEC] is signed decimal, [UDEC] is

unsigned decimal, and [ASCII] is text type.

Data type When [ASCII] has been set, designate [Number of letters used in string]. Two

English letters can be saved in one-word address.

Set the data size for each column.

Data size
Select between [16 bit] and [32 bit].

Data length is the [Total number of places] of each logging data.

Data length If 16-bit data size has been selected, select from among 1~5 places.

If 32-bit data size has been selected, select from among 1~10 places.

Float data when input the default The number of decimal places can be designated when showing each logging

number of ___ decimal places. data.

Logging title & When column properties are set as above, the actual appearance of logging data

format preview saved according to the settings made can be previewed.

7.4.3 Advanced page

The advanced page shows additional logging setting functions.

[Fig. Advanced page]

(1) Logging count and interval

When the logging conditions set in basic settings have been satisfied, this function records additional

logging data equal to [Count], with a time interval. [Count] is the number of additional logging data to

create. In [Interval], designate the time interval for creation of logging data. The minimum length is 1

minute.

For example, if the above settings have been applied, logging data is recorded once at the time point

when the logging condition is recorded. This is followed by 9 more logging data at 2 minute intervals

to give a total of 10 logging data.

That is, whenever the logging condition is satisfied, 10 logging data are recorded.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 153

 7.4.4 New/Save/Delete button
Create and delete logging data using the buttons above.

[Fig. New/Save/Delete button]

Button Description

New Register new logging settings in the logging list.

Save Save the logging settings to the logging list.

Del Delete logging settings selected from the logging list.

7.4.5 Logging list

This is a list of set logging data. Logging operates according to the logging list. After changing logging

settings, be sure to click the button and save to the logging list.

[Fig. Logging list]

Menu Description

ID This is the logging number.

Descript This is the logging description

This is the memory usage of the logging The memory usage of the logging is calculated as

[((Word Count + 4 Word date and time data) x (Total count + Count in the advanced page))
Memory
+ 4 Word].

The 4 word added to the end is used as info for the current logging.

Log Condition This is the logging condition.

Log Action This is the logging action.

7.4.6 Memory usage display

The total memory used for data storage is 192K Word. This memory is used for saving

logging/alarm/recipe data. The figure below shows the current memory usage relative to total memory.

154 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Memory usage]

7.4.7 Viewing logging data

Logging data is saved in the [*.CSV] file format. These files can be viewed on the PC using the Excel

program, or using the CF Viewer program.

There are many ways of viewing logging data saved on the touch.

① Use Ethernet/USB/Serial cable to upload logging data to the PC, and view from the PC.

② Copy logging data to a USB memory storage device, then insert the USB memory storage device/CF

memory card in the PC, and view from the PC.

③ The number tag, log table tag, ext graph tag, and record tag can be used on the touch screen for

real-time viewing.

(1) Format of saved logging data

Logging data is saved in the [*.CSV] file format, separated with [,] as shown in the figure below. Logging
data is saved in the order of date, time, and data.

[Fig. Saved logging data]

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 155

 (2) Logging data upload
Run [Transfer]-[Run transmitter]. In the transmitter, designate [Data upload] - [Logging].

In [Select logging], select the logging number. Select the upload path, then press the [Transfer] button

to proceed with the upload.

[Fig. Logging data upload]

(3) Copying logging data to USB/CF memory

Logging data can be copied to a USB memory storage device or CF memory card, and viewed from the

PC.

① Copying using the file manager

Logging data can be copied to a USB memory storage device or CF memory card using the file

manager.

[Fig. Add file manager window]

After selecting the windows screen in [Project manager], right click with the mouse to bring up a popup

menu. [Add file manager window] in this popup menu. The file manager window is as shown below.

[Fig. File manager window screen]

156 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

The file manager window comprises two file lists. Select touch internal memory in the file list on the

left, and select USB memory storage device or CF memory card in the file list on the right. The data in

each memory is shown in the list below. Select logging data in the touch, and use the arrow buttons to

copy the data to the left side. (☞ See [chapter 40] for the file list and file manager.)

② Copying logging data from the XTOP menu screen to USB memory

Logging data can be copied to a USB memory storage device from the XTOP menu screen.

Press the[Interface]-[USB Storage]-[File Copy] button on the XTOP menu screen. Select Logging in the

popup screen, then click the [HMI->USB] button to save the logging data to the USB memory storage

device.

USB memory must be inserted in the XTOP.

③ Displaying logging data using tags

Using the [NumberLog table/Ext graph/Record] tags, logging data can be displayed in realtime on the

screen.

Using the [Number tag], 1 logging data can be viewed. Using the [Log table tag], logging data can be

viewed in table format. Using the [Ext graph tag] and [Record tag], logging data can be viewed in graph

format, and data change trends can be viewed as well. ( ☞ See [chapter 9~43] for tag usage
instructions.)

7.4.8 Setting logging data autosave to CF memory

Logging data is saved to the internal backup memory (192K Word) of the touch. This memory is disabled

memory, and maintains data even if power is cut off. However, as the capacity of this memory is limited,

logging data can also be saved in a [CF memory card] to save larger amounts of logging data. The usage

method for the CF memory card is as follows.

(1) For CF memory cards of 2 gigabytes or less, format as FAT16. For cards exceeding 2 gigabytes,

format as FAT32. When the CF card is inserted into the touch, the message "CF Card FAT Reading..."
is shown on the top left corner. If the card is successfully recognized, the message "CF Card INIT

OK" appears and disappears. If the card is not recognized, the error message "CF Not FAT File

Format" is displayed.

(2) Enter the [Project]-[Project settings]-[CF card setting] menu to perform CF card settings.

(☞ See [7.12.5] of [chapter 7] for the CF memory card setting method.)

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 157

 [Fig. Save logging data to CF card setting]

7.5 Alarm setting

Set the alarm list. The alarm list is a list of various problems that occur in the controller.

If an alarm list is registered in alarm settings, alarm tags can be used to display alarms on the touch

screen when alarms occur.

[Fig. Alarm setting]

When an alarm occurs, the touch saves alarm details in memory. By designating the maximum alarm

count, how many alarms will be saved can be designated. Designate the maximum alarm count to display
the memory usage on the left. 192KWord internal memory can be used as data storage space. The count

can be designated within this scope.

158 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

7.5.1 Alarm list registration
Enter the alarm list.

[Fig. Alarm list registration]

In each alarm list, enter the following info.

Properties Description

Up to 64 groups can be designated, from A to BL.

Group
When each of the buttons A~BL is pressed, a list of alarms registered to the selected group is displayed.

Alarms can be entered into the selected group.

This number is the list of the alarm list, assigned sequentially.

No
The alarm number is assigned sequentially, even if it is not entered manually.

This is the monitoring address of the alarm list. Only bit addresses can be used as the address.

Address

Double click the address entry part, and enter the monitoring address for each alarm list.

This is the condition for the monitoring address.

Condition

Double click the condition entry part, and enter the ON/OFF condition.

In the [ON] condition, the alarm is triggered when the data of the monitoring address becomes ON.

In the [OFF] condition, the alarm is triggered when the data of the monitoring address becomes OFF.

This is the length of the alarm.

Length
The length is set automatically, counting English as 1 character, and Korean as 2 characters.

Contents This is the string to display when alarm trigger conditions have been satisfied, and an alarm is triggered.

Screen No This is displayed if [Use solution tip] is checked.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 159

 See the section on solution tips below.

This is displayed if [Use address monitoring] is checked. Select between [Trigger] and [Clear]. In [Trigger],

Monitoring the data of the monitoring address at the time point when the alarm has been triggered is saved. In

Condition [Clear], the data of the monitoring address at the time point when the alarm has been cleared is saved.

See the section on address monitoring below.

This is displayed if [Use address monitoring] is checked. Individual addresses can be set. The number of

M-Address1 addresses is equal to the number of addresses. The data of the set address is saved at the time an alarm

is triggered or cleared. See the section on address monitoring below.

7.5.2 Select alarm content registration method

Select the alarm content registration method, from direct input, text table, and image text.

Text Description

In the alarm tag or alarm ext tag, alarm content manually entered by the user is displayed
Direct input
using a font provided by the touch.

Use a string registered in the text table as the alarm content. Select the alarm content from

the text table, as shown in the figure below.

Text table
The text table cannot be used in combination with other types. If an alarm list entered as

direct input or image text exists, changing this setting to text table deletes the existing

alarm list. Therefore, when changed, the following message appears.

Alarm content manually entered by the user in the alarm tag or alarm ext tag is displayed
Image text
as image text using various Windows fonts.

Multiple lines can be entered as the alarm content. With the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard pressed down,

press the [ENTER] key to enter content in the next line.

7.5.3 Solution tip

When an alarm occurs, solution tips are displayed for the alarm that has been triggered, or a page where

160 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

action can be taken is brought up. The solution tip function only works in the [Alarm ext] tag. ( ☞ See

[chapter 27~28] for alarm and alarm ext tag usage methods.)

When [Use solution tip] is checked, [Screen No] appears on the alarm list.

[Fig. Use solution tip]

Set the use solution tip function as follows.

1. Select the display type.

2. Designate the address of the active alarm tip screen no.

3. Register the Screen No. for each alarm list.

Different actions can be taken for different display types. There are two display types, as seen in the

figure below.

[Fig. Display type]

Display type Description

This function switches the screen to take action for a triggered alarm. From the alarm ext

tag, select the triggered alarm for which action will be taken. Then press the [ENTER] key of
Base Screen
the alarm ext tag. The screen transitions to the base screen number set in [Screen No] for

that alarm.

This function calls image, sub screens or window screens to take action for a triggered alarm.

Using parts tags or window tags in the base screen, set the same address as the [Address of

active alarm trip (screen) No.] From the alarm ext tag, select the triggered alarm for which

Parts tags action will be taken. Then press the [ENTER] key of the alarm ext tag. The number set in

or window tags [Screen No] for the alarm is entered as data in [Address of active alarm trip (screen) No.].

This data is used in the parts tag or window tag to call images, sub screens, or window

screens. Therefore, by using parts tags or window tags depending on each alarm, images or

subscreens containing solution tips, or window screens containing action buttons, can be

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 161

 called.

7.5.4 Color info/Current alarm trigger count/Address monitoring

(1) Use color
Colors can be set for each alarm. Use color is used to designate different colors for each alarm. When

an alarm is triggered, the color under Use Color is used, instead of the color set in the alarm or alarm

ext tag.

[Fig. Use color]

Color Description

On text color (C1) The text color for currently triggered alarm content.

On background color (C2) The background color for currently triggered alarm content.

Off text color (C3) The text color for cleared alarm content.

Off background color (C4) The background color for cleared alarm content.

Apply all Apply the set colors to all alarm lists.

When [Use color] is checked, color info is added to each alarm list. To change the color in color info,

double click as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Color setting]

(2) Record enable count of current-alarm

Saves data on the number of currently triggered alarms at the designated address. When a numeric tag

is registered to the touch screen and the value of the set address is displayed, the number of currently

triggered alarms can be displayed.

162 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Record enable count of current-alarm]

(3) Address monitoring function

This function saves(logs) the data of the designated address at the time point when the alarm is

triggered or cleared. Up to 10 addresses can be set. As seen in the figure below, check [Use address

monitoring], then enter the [Address count] between 1 and 10.

[Fig. Check Use Address Monitoring]

When [Use Address Monitoring] is checked, the [Monitoring Condition] and [M-Address] columns are

created in the alarm list, as seen in the figure below. The number of [M-Address] created is equal to the

number of addresses.

[Fig. Monitoring address setting]

In [Monitoring Condition], the time point when monitoring address data is saved is set. In [Trigger], data

is saved when the alarm is triggered. In [Clear], data is saved when the alarm is cleared. [M-Address] is

the part where the address to monitor is set. The M-Addresses are assigned sequential numbers,

according to the number of addresses. The data of the monitoring addresses can be displayed on the

screen through the [Alarm ext tag].

7.5.5 Editing the alarm list

(1) Add/insert/delete

Add alarm Description

Add row count In the beginning, only 1 alarm is registered. Enter the add row count. This number

should be equal to the number of alarms to be added. Up to 1999 can be added.

Alarms are added and registered according to the add row count.

Alarms are inserted into the alarm list, according to the add row count.

Alarms in the area selected in the alarm list are deleted.

Auto address increment

Addresses are automatically added using bit increments, and registered.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 163

 (2) Copy/paste
After dragging and selecting the alarm list with the mouse, the list can be copied (Ctrl+C) and pasted in

a different group (Ctrl+V). Also, the copied alarm list area can be pasted in an Excel file. Content

registered in an Excel file can be copied and pasted into the alarm list.

[Fig. Selected alarm list area]

7.6 Recipe setting

A recipe is a parameter movement function. The recipe movement function is a function where recipe

data required in the PLC or touch is saved in touch internal memory or a CF memory card, and the data

of the recipe appropriate to a set movement condition is moved to the set address range if the

movement condition is satisfied.

[Fig. Recipe setting]

7.6.1 Setting recipe block count/word count

Set the recipe block count and word count. Only 1 recipe set can be set. Even if the [New] button is

clicked, the message [Max. number of recipes is 1.] is shown.

[Fig. Setting block count/word count]

Recipe Description

ID As only 1 recipe can be set, only the ID 1 is shown.

164 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 This is the total number of blocks of the recipe data. The number of block numbers created is

Blocks equal to the total number of blocks. If the total block count is 1000, blocks are created for

block numbers 1 through 1000.

Words/1 block This is the number of words per 1 block.

Description A description of the set recipe.

When blocks and words/1 block are entered, [Memory usage] is displayed on the left. The table in

[Recipe data block] on the bottom is changed according to the block count and words/1 block.

7.6.2 Recipe movement condition

[Variable] and [Bit] recipe movement conditions are provided.

[Fig. Recipe movement condition]

(1) Variable condition

In the variable condition, recipe data is moved when the set [Word address data] and the [Recipe block

number] to be moved are the same. The moment the data of the set word address is changed, the

recipe data with the same number as that data is moved. As block numbers begin with 1, is the data at

the variable condition address is [0] or the block number is exceeded, recipe data is not moved.

Operation in the variable condition is as shown in the table below.

Address Variable condition Movement block

Data value = 1 Block 1

Data value = 2 Block 2

Data value = 3 Block 3

D0050
………… …………
Data value = 999 Block 999

Data value = 1000 Block 1000

(2) Bit condition

In the bit condition, the bit state of the set [Word address] becomes the movement condition of the

recipe. The number of bit addresses required from bit 0 of the set word address is equal to the total

block count. That is, as the set word address is 16 bit, if the block count exceeds 16, the bit of the

address following the word address is used.

The moment the state of the bit address becomes ON from OFF, the corresponding recipe block is
moved.

Operation in the bit condition is as shown in the table below.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 165

 Address Bit condition Movement block

Bit 0 ON Block 1

Bit 1 ON Block 2

Bit 2 ON Block 3

D0050 ………… …………

Bit 13 ON Block 14

Bit 14 ON Block 15

Bit 15 ON Block 16

Bit 0 ON Block 17

Bit 1 ON Block 18

Bit 2 ON Block 19

D0051 ………… …………

Bit 13 ON Block 30

Bit 14 ON Block 31

Bit 15 ON Block 32

When using the bit condition, ensure that the data of the bit addresses used does not become ON

simultaneously. Even if the data become ON simultaneously, only one recipe movement occurs.

7.6.3 Recipe movement target address

The movement target address is the block where the recipe data block is moved to when the recipe

movement conditions are satisfied.

[Fig. Recipe movement target address]

The set address is the start address, and the target address is equal to the words/1 block. When an

address is set, the word column in the [Recipe data block] in the bottom is changed to the target

address.

7.6.4 Memory usage display

In memory usage, the amount of the 192K Word backup memory of the touch used by the currently

set recipe is shown as a graph. Recipe memory usage is [(Total block count x Words per lock) + 4]. The

4 word added to the end is used to save info on the current recipe.

166 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Recipe memory usage]

7.6.5 New/Save/Delete button

Create, save, or delete recipe settings.

Button Description

Creates a recipe. If this button is pressed when a recipe has already been created and set, the

following message appears. This is because only 1 recipe can be set.

Save the set recipe, and register to the recipe list. When saving for the first time, the following

message appears.

When the settings of a saved recipe are changed, then saved, the following message appears.

The set recipe is deleted.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 167

 7.6.6 Recipe data block
(1) Composition of the recipe data block
When recipe settings are performed, the [Recipe data block] is displayed according to the settings.

Block numbers are shown on the left side; the number of rows is the same as [Block count]. One row

signifies one block.

In each column, target addresses are displayed. The number of target addresses is equal to [Words per

block].

[Fig. Recipe data block]

The default initial values for recipe block data are automatically set to [0]. This data can be entered

manually by the user in the recipe settings screen, or while manipulating the touch. As this data is Excel

compatible, Excel data can be copied and pasted, or recipe data can be copied and pasted into Excel.

(2) Viewing recipe data by type

Recipe data can be viewed in various ways, according to size and type.

[Fig. Recipe data size and type]

Recipe Description

size Select between 16 bit and 32 bit.

DEC Show as unsigned decimal.

±DEC Show as signed decimal.

HEX Show as hexadecimal.

Recipe data is displayed as follows, depending on size and type. Using the same data, different size and

type have been set. As there are 6 words per block, there are six columns when the data size is 16 bit.

However, if the data size is 32 bit, the number of columns becomes 3.

168 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

① [Size: 16bit, type: DEC]:

② [Size: 16bit, type: ±DEC]:

③ [Size: 16bit, type: HEX]:

④ [Size: 32 bit, type: DEC]:

⑤ [Size: 32 bit, type: ±DEC]:

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 169

 ⑥ [Size: 32 bit, type: HEX]:

7.6.7 Loading/saving recipe data during operation

(1) Loading recipe data during operation
The moment recipe movement conditions are satisfied; the data block of the recipe block is moved to

the target address.

Therefore, in order to load a saved recipe data block, operate the recipe movement condition.

(2) Saving recipe data during operation

Recipe data blocks can be manually entered in the recipe setting screen, but recipe data can be

changed or saved while operating the touch as well. When [_PARM_SAVE] among the special buffer

addresses becomes 1, the data currently in the target address is saved to the recipe data block. As for

the block number that is saved, if the [Recipe movement condition] is [Variable], the data is saved in the

same block number as the variable address data, and if the [Recipe movement condition] is [Bit], the

data is saved to the block number corresponding to the bit address in ON state.

[Fig. Special buffer for saving recipe data]

7.6.8 Saving recipe data to a CF memory card

Recipe data is saved in the backup memory of the touch by default, by CF memory cards can also be

used. To save recipe data using a CF memory card, use the [CD-Recipe creator] to save set recipes to

170 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 the CF memory card. Recipes set using the [CF-Recipe creator] are saved in the [*.CSV] file format.

The CF-Recipe creator can be run from the [Tools]-[CF-Recipe creator] menu. (☞ See [44.4] of [chapter
44] for recipe settings using the CF-Recipe creator.)

7.7 Script setting

With scrips, the touch is operated by writing an operation program, instead of registering tags on the

screen.

7.7.1 Global scripts and local scripts

[Global scripts] apply to the overall project, and [Local scripts] apply only to individual screens. Global

scripts can be run by running [General settings]-[Script] in [Project manager], or running [Script settings]

in the [Project] menu. Global scripts are run whenever conditions are satisfied.

[Fig. Global script in the project manager]

[Fig. Global script in the project menu]

Local scripts can be set in base screens and window screens. Select the screen to set the script for in the

[Project manager], then right click the mouse. Run [Script] in the popup menu. Local scripts are run only

when the screen they are assigned to is running.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 171

 [Fig. Base screen and window screen local scripts]

The methods for setting global scripts and local scripts are the same.

7.7.2 Composition of the script settings screen

The script settings screen is as follows.

[Fig. Script setting]

(1) New script button

Creates a script, assigning a new script ID. When the new script button is clicked, a new script is created

and added to the script list. The [Script condition] part is filled with default values, and the [Script

content] part is opened.

[Fig. New script]

(2) Composition of the script settings screen

Script Description

Save button Saves the set script conditions and contents.

Delete button Deletes the currently selected script.

172 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 Script ID This script number is assigned sequentially according to the order of creation.

Description This is a description of the script.

This is the condition for the script to be run.

Condition
The moment the condition is satisfied; the content of the script is run.

Select between 16 bit and 32 bit. If 32 bit is selected, the key operations in the script
Data Length
contents are run in 32 bit units.

Script content The content of the operations to be run are implemented according to the script format.

When script content is entered, the content is checked to see whether the script format is

matched.
Error check
If normal, [Condition Expression OK] is displayed.

If there is an error, [illegal Condition Expression] is displayed.

Global script or local script can be selected.

Global script/

Local script selection

Script list A list of set scripts.

Script operation These operations are provided for writing script content.

7.7.3 Script conditions

[Interval] and [Bit] script trigger conditions are provided.

(1) Interval condition

[Fig. Interval condition]

In the interval condition, the script is run in set intervals.

The interval can be entered in 500ms (0.5 second) units.

(2) Bit condition

[Fig. Bit condition]

In the bit conditions, the script is run according to the bit state of the set address. The bit state can be
selected from [ON, OFF, REVERSE, ON Continue, and OFF Continue].

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 173

 [Fig. Bit state setting]

Bit state Description

ON The script is run when the data of the bit address becomes ON.

OFF The script is run when the data of the bit address becomes OFF.

REVERSE The script is run when the data of the bit address becomes REVERSE.

ON Continue The script is run continuously when the data of the bit address is ON.

OFF Continue The script is run continuously when the data of the bit address is OFF.

7.7.4 Script list

When a script is created or saved, the script is registered to the script list.

[Fig. Script list]

The combo box on the top comprises a list of global scripts and local scripts for each screen. Select

global script or local script to see the corresponding list of scripts.

Script list Description

ID The script ID is the script number.

Description This is a description of the script.

If the content of the script fits the format without errors, [TRUE] is shown. If there is an error,
Verify
[FALSE] is shown. Scripts that are [FALSE] do not operate.

Create Date Time This is the script create time. This indicates the time created with the [New script] button.

Update Date Time This is the script update time. This indicates the time of the update using the [Save] button.

Scripts with the same condition are run according to the order in the script order. Therefore,

using this button, scripts registered in the list can be moved up in the list.

Scripts with the same condition are run according to the order in the script order. Therefore,

using this button, scripts registered in the list can be moved down in the list.

7.7.5 Script operation

Script content is written using the script operation part. The script operation part comprises function

174 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

operations, mathematic operations, logical operations, bit operations, an address input part, [if] and

[if~else] statements, and a clipboard.

[Fig. Script operations part]

(1) Function operation

If this button is pressed, a list of the functions provided is shown.

[Fig. Function operation]

The change screen and memory-related functions are as follows.

No. Function Category Description

Format ScreenNum(ScreenNum);

Description Changes the screen. ScreenNum is the base screen number to change to.
1 ChgScreen
Example of ChgScreen(2);

registration Brings up base screen number 2.

Format CopyMem(SrcAddress, DesAddress, Count);

The data in the controller or internal address is copied.

SrcAddress is the start address to copy.

Description
DesAddress start address to copy to.
2 CopyMem
Count is the number of addresses to copy.

CopyMem([DW:PLC1:D0000], [SW:0200], 20);

Example of
The 20 address data in stations [D0~D19] of PLC1 are copied to internal
registration
address stations [200~219] of the touch.

Format CopyMem(SrcAddress, DesAddress, CountAddress;

3 CopyMemEx
Description The data in the controller or internal address is copied.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 175

 SrcAddress is the start address to copy.

DesAddress start address to copy to.

CountAddress is the address that has the number of addresses to copy as

data.

CopyMem([DW:PLC1:D0000], [SW:0200], [SW:0300]);

Example of If there is the value 20 at internal address station 300, the 20 address data in

registration stations [D0~D19] of PLC1 are copied to internal address stations [200~219]

of the touch.

Format InitMem(SrcData, DesAddress, Count);

The data in the controller or internal address is initialized.

SrcData is the data to be initialized.

Description
4 InitMem DesAddress start address to initialize.

Count is the number of addresses to initialize.

Example of CopyMem(3, [DW:PLC1:D0000], 10);

registration The 10 address data in stations [D0~D9] for PLC1 are all initialized to [3].

The functions associated with date and time is as follow.

Time calculation functions used the format [UNIX TIMESTAMP].

[UNIX TIMESTAMP] is a function that converts dates following [00:00:00 January 1, 1970] into seconds.

For example, if [00:00:00 January 21, 2010] is converted into seconds, a 1264032000 [UNIX TIMESTAMP]

value is given. This means that 1264032000 seconds have passed since [00:00:00 January 1, 1970].

Note that because the data in the converted value exceeds 65535, which is the maximum value for 16

bit, the computation must be performed in 32 bit units by checking [32 bit check]. Also, because of the

restriction on the size of the converted value, the format can be used only up to [January 19, 2038].

After this date, the calculated value becomes a negative value.

No. Function Category Description

Format FNowDate();

Calculates the current time as a [UNIX TIMESTAMP].

Description
That is, the current time is converted into seconds.
1 FNowDate
[SW:0100] = FNowDate();
Example of
Converts the current time into seconds, then inserts the result into 32 bit internal
registration
address station 100.

Format FDate(year, month, day, hour, minute, second);

Calculates the designated time as a [UNIX TIMESTAMP].

2 FDate Description That is, the designated time is converted into seconds.

[year, month, day, hour, minute, second] can be entered into the address station.

Example of [SW:0100] = FDate(2010, 1, 21, 18, 20, 50);

176 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 registration Converts the 18:20:50 January 21, 2010 into seconds, then inserts the result into

32 bit internal address station 100.

Format FDay(day);

Description Calculates the set date in seconds.

3 FDay [SW:0100] = FDay(100);

Example of
Converts 100 days into seconds, then inserts the result into 32 bit internal
registration
address station 100.

Format FHour(hour);

Description Calculates the set time into seconds.

4 FHour [SW:0100] = FHour(100);

Example of
Converts 100 hours into seconds, then inserts the result into 32 bit internal
registration
address station 100.

Format FMin(minute);

Description Calculates the set minutes into seconds.

5 FMin [SW:0100] = FMin(100);

Example of
Converts 100 minutes into seconds, then inserts the result into 32 bit internal
registration
address station 100.

Format FSec(second);

Calculates the set seconds into seconds.

Description
(The set value and converted value are the same.)
6 FSec
[SW:0100] = FSec(100);
Example of
Converts 100 seconds into seconds, then inserts the result into 32 bit internal
registration
address station 100.

Format FGetYear(TIMESTAMP value);

Description The TIMESTAMP value is converted into [Years].

[SW:0100] = FGetYear([SW:0102]);
7 FGetYear
Example of or [SW:0100] = FGetYear(1264032000);

registration The value 1264032000 is converted into [Years], and the result is inserted into 32

bit internal address station 100.

Format FGetMonth(TIMESTAMP value);

Description The TIMESTAMP value is converted into [Months].

[SW:0100] = FGetMonth([SW:0102]);
8 FGetMonth
Example of or [SW:0100] = FGetMonth(1264032000);

registration The value 1264032000 is converted into [Months], and the result is inserted into

32 bit internal address station 100.

Format FGetDay(TIMESTAMP value);

Description The TIMESTAMP value is converted into [Days].

9 FGetDay
Example of [SW:0100] = FGetDay([SW:0102]);

registration or [SW:0100] = FGetDay(1264032000);

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 177

 The value 1264032000 is converted into [Days], and the result is inserted into 32

bit internal address station 100.

Format FGetHour(TIMESTAMP value);

Description The TIMESTAMP value is converted into [Hours].

[SW:0100] = FGetHour([SW:0102]);
10 FGetHour
Example of or [SW:0100] = FGetHour(1264032000);

registration The value 1264032000 is converted into [Hours], and the result is inserted into 32

bit internal address station 100.

Format FGetMin(TIMESTAMP value);

Description The TIMESTAMP value is converted into [Minutes].

[SW:0100] = FGetMin([SW:0102]);
11 FGetMin
Example of or [SW:0100] = FGetMin(1264032000);

registration The value 1264032000 is converted into [Minutes], and the result is inserted into

32 bit internal address station 100.

Format FGetSec(TIMESTAMP value);

Description The TIMESTAMP value is converted into [Seconds].

[SW:0100] = FGetSec([SW:0102]);
12 FGetSec
Example of or [SW:0100] = FGetSec(1264032000);

registration The value 1264032000 is converted into [Seconds], and the result is inserted into

32 bit internal address station 100.

Format FGetWeek(TIMESTAMP value);

The TIMESTAMP value is converted into [Weekday].

Description
(1: Sun, 2: Mon, 3: Tue, 4: Wed, 5: Thu, 6: Fri, 7: Sat)

13 FGetWeek [SW:0100] = FGetWeek([SW:0102]);

Example of or [SW:0100] = FGetWeek(1264032000);

registration The value 1264032000 is converted into [Weekdays], and the result is inserted

into 32 bit internal address station 100.

(2) Mathematic operators

If this button is pressed, a list of the mathematic operators provided is shown.

[Fig. Mathematic operation]

Mathematic operation Description

+ This operator calculates the sum (addition) of the two operands.

- This operator calculates the difference (subtraction) of the two operands.

178 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 * This operator calculates the product of the two operands.

/ This operator calculates the quotient of the two operands.

% This operator divides the operands and calculates the remainder.

= This operator substitutes the values of the operands.

(3) Logical operators

If this button is pressed, a list of the logical operators provided is shown.

[Fig. Logical operators]

Logical operators Description

This operator is used between two statements. If both statements are TRUE, the operator becomes
And
TRUE.

This operator is used between two statements. If one of the two statements is TRUE, the operator
or
becomes TRUE.

not This operator is used in front of a statement, and becomes FALSE if the statement is TRUE.

This operator is used to compare the size of two operands, to indicate that the operand on the
<
right is greater.

This operator is used to compare the size of two operands, to indicate that the operand on the
<=
right is greater or equal to the operand on the left.

<> This operator is used to indicate that the values of two operands are not the same.

This operator is used to compare the size of two operands, to indicate that the operand on the left
>
is greater.

This operator is used to compare the size of two operands, to indicate that the operand on the left
>=
is greater or equal to the operand on the right.

== This operator is used to indicate that the values of two operands are the same.

(4) Bit operators

If this button is pressed, a list of the bit operators provided is shown.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 179

 [Fig. Bit operators]

Bit operators Description

This operator bit shifts the binary value of the left operand to the right. The size of the shift is
<<
equal to the value of the operand on the right.

This operator bit shifts the binary value of the left operand to the left. The size of the shift is equal
>>
to the value of the operand on the right.

& This operator performs a bit AND operation on the binary values of two operands.

| This operator performs a bit OR operation on the binary values of two operands.

^ This operator performs a bit XOR operation on the binary values of two operands.

This operator is used in front of an operand to perform a bit NOT operation on the binary value of
~
the operand.

(5) Address input part

Using the [Keypad] that appears when this button is clicked, addresses can be registered to script

content.

Select bit addresses and word addresses for input. The bit address is the address to use for the bit

function, and the word address is the address to use for the word function. [PLC1] is the controller

address, [Internal] is the XTOP internal address, and [Special] is an XTOP special address.

[Fig. Address entry]

The address entry method is as follows.

Address Bit/Word Format

[DB:PLC1:PLC bit address]

DB stands for Device Bit. PLC1 designates a specific PLC, as multiple PLCs can

Bit be connected.
PLC
The PLC address is a bit address, and is entered as an identifier + station
Device
number. e.g.) [DB:PLC1:M0000]

[DW:PLC1:PLC word address]

Word
DW stands for Device Word. PLC1 designates a specific PLC, as multiple PLCs

180 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 can be connected.

The PLC address is a word address, and is entered as an identifier + station

number. e.g.) [DW:PLC1:D0000]

[SB: Internal address bit]

SB stands for System buffer Bit.

Bit
Because internal addresses do not have identifiers and are in word (16bit) units,

Internal designate which number bit is used when using bit addresses. e.g.) [SB:0000.00]

(System Buffer) [SW: Internal address]

SW stands for System buffer Word.

Word
Because internal addresses do not have identifiers and are in word (16bit) units,

only the station number needs to be entered. e.g. [SW:0000]

[SB: Special address bit]

SB stands for System address Bit.

Bit
Because special addresses are in word (16bit) units, designate which number bit

is used when using bit addresses. e.g.) [SB:_1OFF.00]

Special
[SW: Special address bit]
(Special)
SW stands for System address Word.

Word Because special addresses are in word (16bit) units, only the special address

needs to be entered.

e.g.) [SW:_1OFF]

(6) Syntax (if and if~else syntax)

[if~endif] and [if~else~endif] syntax is provided.

[Fig. If syntax]

Syntax Description

if (conditional
An [if] conditional statement. In the parentheses [()] next to [if], enter the conditional
expression) {action
statement. If the condition is TRUE, the action syntax in [{}] is executed. The end of an
syntax}
[if] conditional statement must be [endif].
endif

An [if else] conditional statement.

if (conditional expression)
In the parentheses [()] next to [if], enter the conditional statement. If the condition is
{action syntax}
TRUE, the action syntax in [{}] is executed. Also, if the condition is FALSE, the action
else {Action syntax}
syntax in the [{}] next to [else] is executed. The end of an [if else] conditional statement
endif
must be [endif].

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 181

 [if] statements may be used within another [if] statement. The number of [if] statements that can be

embedded within [if] statements is not limited. That is, as shown in the figure below, an [if] statement can

be used within another [if] statement, and [if] statements can be continuously embedded within [if]

statements in other [if] statements.

[Fig. [if] statement embedded in an [if] statement]

The script statement above can be described as follows.

Description

If the data at the P3 bit address is On, and the data at station D0 is 100, the data 333 is entered in station D100.

If the data at the P3 bit address is ON, and the data at station D0 is not 100, the data 222 is inserted in station

D100. If the data at the P3 bit address is OFF, enter the data 111 is inserted in station D100.

[if~endif] and [if~else~endif] statements can be conveniently registered in script content by dragging and

dropping the statements registered in the bottom left corner with the mouse. The method of registration

is explained in the clipboard section below.

(7) Clipboard
The space on the bottom left is the clip board part. By default,[if~endif] statements and [if~else~endif]

statements are registered. In the clipboard part, [Mouse drag&drop] can be used to register parts of

written scripts. Also, scripts registered in the clipboard part can be moved to the script content screen

using [Mouse drag&drop].

The clipboard part cannot be saved. Therefore, if the [Script settings] screen is closed, all statements

excluding the [if~endif] statement and [if~else~endif] statement disappear

182 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Clipboard part]

(8) Address offset function

The [Address offset function] is a function that specifies an additional address in the addresses of the

script. The data of the additional address is added to the station number of the [Original address], and the

corresponding station can be used. The additional address is called the [Offset address]. The offset

address can be inserted in the format [:@SW:0200] behind the [Standard address]. [:@SW:0200] means

that internal address station 200 is used as the offset address.

The statement [DW:PLC2:D0000]=[SW:0000:@SW:0511]; is described below. When

[DW:PLC2:D0000]=[SW:0000] is used without an offset address, the data at internal address station 0 is

entered into station [D0000] of PLC2. However, when an offset address is used, this means that when the

data at internal address station 511 is [5], the data at internal address station 5 (internal address station 0

plus [5]) is entered into station [D0000] of PLC2. The address offset function can be designated for each

address used in the script content.

7.7.6 Format of script content

Script content is mostly written using the script operation part. Additional formats for writing script

content are described in the following.

(1) Entering comments

Comments are used when entering descriptions, etc., that are unrelated to the program. In the script,

single line and multiline remarks can be entered.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 183

 [Fig. Script remarks]

Single line remarks are denoted by [//] ahead of the remark. To insert multiline remarks, indicate the start

of the remark with [/*], and indicate the end of the remark with [*/].

(2) Format for the end of action statements

The ends of commands in scripts must be marked with [;]. [;] indicates the end of a command.

If a command does not have the [;] mark, the error display part reads [illegal Condition Expression] and

indicates that there is an error in script content.

7.7.7 Closing the script settings screen

After completing script settings, press the [X] button on the top right corner of the script settings screen,

or click the button on the bottom right corner to close the settings screen.
If changes have been made, the following message is shown before closing to save changes.

[Fig. Save changes confirmation message]

7.8 Message table

In the message table, strings to be used in bit message/word message tags are registered.

The message table setting method is as follows.

1. Set groups.

2. Add messages to register.

3. Enter the content (string) for each of the added messages.

7.8.1 Composition of the message table screen.

184 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Message table]

Message table Description

Add row count

Enter the number of messages to add.

Adds messages. The number of messages is equal to the [Add row count].

Inserts one message in the middle of registered messages. Select the position to insert into, and

click the [Insert] button. A new message is added and inserted into that position.

Deletes the selected message. Using the keyboard arrow keys or dragging the mouse with the

Shift key pressed, multiple messages can be selected and deleted at once.

In the message tax, message content manually entered by the user is displayed using a font
Normal text
provided by the touch.

Text table A string registered in the text table is used as the message content.

Message content manually entered by the user in the message tag is displayed as image text using
Image text
various Windows fonts.

Group setting
26 groups can be designated, from A to Z

Message
The content of individual messages added to the message list is entered.
registration part

After completing message table settings, press Apply to save changes.

After completing message table settings, close the message table settings screen. If changes have

not been saved, the following message is shown to confirm save changes.

7.8.2 Message registration

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 185

 (1) Composition of the message registration part
Message Description

Group Shows the applicable group, from A~Z.

No This number is the number of each message, assigned sequentially.

Length If the content of the message is entered, the length is automatically calculated and set.

Contents This is the content of each message. Multiline input is supported.

(2) Entering the message.

Enter the content of each message, depending on the [Normal text], [Text table], and [Image text]

selection. For [Normal text] and [Image text], enter the string manually. For the [Text table] setting, select

among the strings registered in the [Text table].

String type Description

In the message tax, message content manually entered by the user is displayed using a font
Normal text
provided by the touch.

A string registered in the text table is used as the message content.

Text table

The text table cannot be used in combination with other types.

If an alarm list entered as direct input or image text exists, changing this setting to text table

deletes the existing message list. Therefore, when changed, the following message appears.

Message content manually entered by the user in the message tag is displayed as image text

using various Windows fonts. When image text has been selected, click the [Font] button and

set the font for the image text to be displayed.

Image text

(3) Copy/paste

186 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 Messages entered can be copied/pasted. Drag and select multiple messages with the mouse, or use the

arrow keys to select multiple messages with the Shit key on the keyboard pressed, the press [Ctrl + C]

to copy. Press [Ctrl + V] to paste. Messages can be copied and pasted into other groups, or Excel files.

If the number of messages to paste exceeds the number of registered messages, the number of

registered messages is automatically increased. For example, if 20 messages are pasted when 10

messages are registered, 10 additional messages are added before the 20 messages are pasted.

(4) Entering multiline messages

Multiple lines can be entered as the message content. With the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard pressed down,

press the [ENTER] key to enter content in the next line.

[Fig. Entering multiline message content]

7.9 Event log

The event log is a function that monitors events at a particular address. Bit addresses and word

addresses are registered as events in the [Event log] screen according to conditions. If the conditions of

a registered event are satisfied, event log data is recorded in the CF memory card. The event log data

saved on the CF memory card can be displayed on the screen using the event log viewer tag. Up to

255 groups can be used, with up to 254 events registered.

[Fig. Event log]

7.9.1 Add event / Add group

Add events and groups using the buttons on top.

Event log Description

Add count Enter the number of events to add.

The number of new events added is equal to [Add count].

The addresses of newly added events increase automatically by 1 from the address in the last line.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 187

 New events are added above the selected event. The number of events added is equal to [Add count].

Deletes the selected event. To select multiple events, drag with the mouse or select events with the

[Shift] key pressed down.

Adds a group.

7.9.2 Event registration

[Fig. Event registration]

Event Description

Group If groups are added, pages with the names [MYGROUP_A], [MYGROUP_B], … are added on top.

Number Numbers are assigned according to the order of registration.

size Select between [Bit] and [Word].

Address Set the address to monitor.

The conditions when using [Bit] addresses are as follow.

In [ON], a record is made the moment the data of the bit address is turned ON.

In [OFF], a record is made the moment the data of the bit address is turned OFF.

In [REVERSE], a record is made the moment the data of the bit address is reversed.

Condition The conditions when using [Word] addresses are as follow.

In [CHANGE], a record is made when the data of the word address is changed.

In [RANGE], a record is made when word address data changed satisfies the designated range.

Minimum This is the minimum value when using the [RANGE] condition for a [Word] address.

Maximum This is the maximum value when using the [RANGE] condition for a [Word] address.

Enter the content to be recorded when event conditions are satisfied.

Description Multiple lines can be entered as the event content. With the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard pressed down,

press the [ENTER] key to enter content in the next line.

7.9.3 CF card settings

To save data created in the [Event log] in the CF memory card, [Project settings]-[CF card settings] must

be made in the [Project] menu. Check [Event log] as seen in the figure below, then [Allocate]. If [CF card

settings] is not performed, event log data is not saved in the CF memory card.

188 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. CF card settings]

7.9.4 Event log file saved on the CF memory card

If a registered event satisfies the conditions, the following is recorded in the CF memory card.

[Fig. Event log recorded on the CF memory card]

Event logs are created as [*.evt] files, and data is separated using commas. As for the format of recorded
event logs, [Event number, date occurred, time occurred, event content, date before change, data after

change] are recorded whenever an event occurs.

7.10 Password setting

In this function, a password is set for the screen. When the screen is transitioned, the screen can be

viewed only if the password entered is correct.

Up to 15 passwords can be set for the levels. Enter the level of the password for each base screen
on the right. Screens with low levels can be transitioned to without entering passwords. Higher level

screens can only be seen if the password is entered.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 189

 The password setting screen is set as follows.

(1) Check [Use security of screen].

(2) Set the password. The password level can be set from 1 to 15. To use one password, set password

for level 1 only. The password is a combination of English letters and numbers, and is limited to 8

characters. When [Use device indirect] is checked, the password is saved in an address, and the

password can be changed during operation.

(3) Enter the level number in the [Security level] column of the base screen to apply the password to.

For screens where no password is set, enter 0. Only level numbers for which passwords are set can be

entered.

(4) Set the level refresh time. This is the time for which the login is maintained. Enter 0 if not used.

[Fig. Password setting]

7.10.1 Password setting

15 passwords can be set, from level 1 to level 15.

First decide how many passwords to use, and enter passwords beginning from level 1. Passwords are

entered as a combination of English letters and numbers; passwords are not case-sensitive, and are

recognized as upper case characters. The maximum password length is 8.

7.10.2 Screen level settings (Base screen)

In the table on the right, the [Security level] for each base screen can be set. Only level numbers for which

passwords are set can be entered. For screens not using passwords, enter 0 into the [Security level].

When transitioning from a low level screen to a high level screen, the password must be entered. When

transitioning from a high level screen to a low level screen, no password entry is required.

Title Description

Screen This is the number of the base screen registered to the project.

Description This is the name of the base screen registered to the project.

Security level Set the level number for each base screen.

190 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

7.10.3 Use device indirect
In this function, the password is saved in the PLC or an internal address and used. If an indirect address is

used, the password can be modified during operation.

[Fig. Use device indirect]

Title Description

Level This is the level number. Level 1 is the lowest level, and level 15 is the highest level.

Check the boxes to use passwords. The number of boxes checked should be equal to the number of
Use
passwords used.

Address Set the address to start saving passwords from. The number of addresses used varies according to length.

Set the length of the password. As 2 password letters can be saved in a single word address, the password
Length
is saved according to the length entered, with the set address as the start address.

When the address is set to [D20] and the length is set to 8 in the figure above, the password is saved

from station D20 to station D23. The password must first be entered in the address set in the project

screen or the PLC program before beginning operation.

7.10.4 Password window screen and operation

After completing settings in the [Password setting] screen, press the [OK] button. The [Password screen]

shown in the figure below is automatically created.

[Fig. Password window screen]

[Password screen] is a screen that is added to window screen number 65533, which allows password entry.

When transitioning to a password locked screen, the [Password window screen] automatically pops up for

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 191

 password entry. If the 65533 password window screen is deleted during project editing, or to manually

add and use a password window screen to the project, run the [Add password window] menu in the

[Popup menu] of the window screen as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. Add password window]

The number of the password window screen is internally fixed to 65533. Note that if the screen number is

changed, the password window screen does not pop up properly.

7.10.5 Setting the security level for shapes and tags

Individual security levels can be set for all shapes and tags. There is a part for entering the security level

in the bottom left corner of the properties screen for shapes and tags, as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Security level]

A security level of [0] indicates no security setting. If a security level of [1] or higher is entered, the

shape/tag is visible only if the password for the applicable level number is used to log in. If the login is

not performed, the applicable shape/tag is not visible on the screen.

Users which to log in from a screen can use touch tags, as shown below.

Register a touch tag on the screen, set the category to [SCREEN] in [Special Functions], and set the

[Security Level]. When a touch button set in this manner is touched during operation, a [Password window

screen] pops up for login.

[Fig. Password input window popup using touch tags]

192 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 7.10.6 Level refresh time

[Fig. Level refresh time]

The level refresh time can be entered in minutes. This function maintains the login for the set period when

a user logs in to enter a higher level screen from a lower level screen. When transitioning to a higher level

screen after moving to a lower level screen, the higher level screen can be returned to for the set period

without having to log in. The set period is measured as the time during which there is no touch input. If a

certain period (minutes) elapses from the last user touch, the acquired level authority disappears.

7.11 Symbol manager

A symbol address is an address where a different name has been assigned to an address.

The program can be used more conveniently if PLC or internal addresses are assigned with names

indicating their actual usage in the system, etc. To use symbol addresses, which are a type of address, the

appropriate setting must be set in the [Symbol manager].

[Fig. Symbol manager]

In the top portion of the [Symbol manager] screen, symbol addresses can be registered. The bottom

portion shows the locations where each symbol address is used in the project, and symbol info.

7.11.1 Writing the symbol list

A list of symbol addresses is written. Using the [Add] button on top, items are added to the list. The
number of items added should be equal to the number of symbol addresses to register. For symbol

address list items that are not necessary, click the [Delete] button to delete. Symbol addresses that are

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 193

 being used are not deleted, and the following message is displayed.

[Fig. Alarm message when a symbol address is use is deleted]

When each column is double clicked, input can be entered.

Symbol list Description

Designate the name of the symbol address.

NAME
Set the name to use when the symbol address is selected in the project.

If the address to register is a bit address, set to [Bit]. Set as [Word] if the address is a word
SIZE
address.

Set the actual address.

VALUE

This is the number of symbol addresses used in the project. This number is calculated and
USE
displayed automatically.

7.11.2 Using symbol addresses in a project

When using symbol addresses in a project, first select [Symbol] as the address type. The symbol address

registered in [Symbol manager] is shown as a list, as seen in the following figure. Select the symbol

address to use.

[Fig. Using symbol addresses]

7.11.3 Tag and general settings

The location where the symbol address is used is displayed, with symbol info. When a symbol
address other than [0] is clicked in the [USE] portion of the symbol list, arrows are shown, as seen in the

figure below. If the arrows are clicked, a list of tags and general settings where that symbol address has

been used is displayed on the bottom.

[Fig. USB column]

194 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Info on locations where the symbol address is used]

Use location Description

Location This is the name of the base screen where the symbol address has been used.

ID This is the ID of the tag where the symbol address has been used.

Name This is the name of the tag where the symbol address has been used.

When the list is double clicked, the applicable tag/general settings screen is called and displayed.

[Fig. Touch tag where a symbol address has been used]

7.11.4 Export/Import
The written symbol address list can be exported as a file. In the [Symbol manager] screen shown below,

click the [Export] button on top.

[Fig. Symbol manager export]

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 195

 The following save screen is shown, and the written symbol address list can be saved as a CSV file.

[Fig. Symbol address list export]

CSV files can be viewed in Excel as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Saved symbol list file]

Saved symbol list files (CSV files) can be imported using the import button.

Files can be selected and opened using the open screen shown below.

[Fig. Importing]

Redundant data handling options can be set when importing saved symbol list files.

Use location Description

Overwrite Overwrite data with the same address.

Skip Do not overwrite data with the same address, and register all data in the list.

196 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

7.12 Project property

Info associated with the general project environment is managed here.

The major functions of project settings are as follow.

1. Project environment settings

2. Setting touch model names, and setting the touch menu screen.

3. Select the PLC model communicating using [Serial/Ethernet/USB] communication, and set

communication settings.

4. CF memory card settings.

[Fig. Project settings]

The [Project settings] screen comprises the buttons on top, the [Project settings list] on the left, and the

[List setting details] on the right. The [Project settings list] comprises the [Project part], [Touch settings

part], [PLC settings part], and the [CF card settings part].

When [Project] is selected in the [Project settings list], the [Project setting] and [Global alarm scroll] pages

are shown on the right. The [Project settings] page is explained first.

7.12.1 [Project settings] page

(1) Screen change from PLC
This function allows the touch screen to be controlled from the PLC for changing screen.

When a particular PLC address is set, the data of that address becomes the number of the base screen of

the touch, and transitions the screen of the touch. There are two methods of [USe change screen from

PLC]: [Type1] and [Type2].

① Type1

In [Type1], only 1 address is set for screen change. That is, the same address is used as the [Read address]
and [Write address] for changing screen in [Type1].

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 197

 [Fig. Type1]

Address Description

[D0008] This is the address where touch data is read.

Read address The data at the PLC address is read by the touch, and the screen is changed.

This is the address where touch data is recorded.

[D0008]
This is the address where the touch records the current screen number as the data of the PLC
Write address
address.

If the data of the designated screen change address is changed, the touch transitions to the screen

whose number matches that data. (Read function) Also, if a screen transition touch button is registered

to the touch screen, pressing this touch button causes the screen number to be entered as data into

the [Use change screen from PLC] address, and transitions to the applicable screen. (Write function)

The screen change touch buttons are set as follows.

[Fig. Touch tag screen change function]

For example, if the touch is currently displaying screen number 1, and if the PLC address [D0008] is

used as the screen transition address, screen transition operates as follows. When the touch button to

chnage to screen number 3 is pressed from the project screen, the number of the screen to move to [3]

is written at PLC address [D0008], and screen number 3 is moved to. Also, if the data [5] is entered into
address [D0008] of the PLC program, the HMI changes to screen number 5.

198 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 Transition to screen Change data of

Type1 Before RUN Begin RUN number 3 [D0008] to [5] in the

with touch button PLC program

Arbitrary initial value 1 3 5

D0008

This is the initial state If RUN begins with If a touch tag set with In the PLC program,

before the touch is the number of the screen number 3 is changing the data in

run. initial screen of the touched, the data in [D0008] to [5] brings
Action
There may be an touch being [1], the station [D0008] is up screen number 5.
description
arbitrary initial value in first screen becomes changed to [3], and

station [D0008] of the 1, and [1] is written screen number 3 is

PLC. to station [D0008]. brought up.

However, in the [Type 1] function, if the user enters new screen transition data in station [D0008] through

the PLC program while simultaneously touching the screen transition touch tag, the touch brings up the

last recorded screen number in station [D0008]. In this situation, the touch may appear to be

malfunctioning. To prevent this phenomenon, method [Type2], where a separate [Read address] and [Write

address] are used, is used.

② Type2

This function is improved over [Type1]. The [Read address] and [Write address] necessary for screen

transition are set separately. In Type2, as the [Read address] and [Write address] exist separately, the PLC

program does not overwrite data in the address used for screen change.

[Fig. Type2]

Address Description

[D0008] This is the address the touch reads data from. When data is changed in the PLC

Current screen number program, the touch reads the data from the [Read address] and changes the screen.

(Read address) Data is read and the screen is transitioned only if the data has been changed.

[D0000] This is the address where the touch records data. The [Write address] is the address

Change the screen number where the screen number is recorded and the screen transition is performed when a

(Write address) screen transition is performed using a special function of the touch button.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 199

 Transition to screen Change data of

Type2 Before RUN Begin RUN number 3 [D0008] to [5] in the

with touch button PLC program

D0000 Arbitrary initial value 1 3 5

(Write address)

This is the initial state If RUN begins with If a touch tag set with In the PLC program,

before the touch is the number of the screen number 3 is changing the data in

run. There may be initial screen of the touched, the data in [D0008] to [5] brings
Action
arbitrary initial values touch being [1], the station [D0000] is up screen number 5.
description
in stations [D0000] first screen becomes changed to [3], and The data of [D0000] is

and [D0008] of the 1, and [1] is written to screen number 3 is changed to [5] in the

PLC. station [D0000]. brought up. PLC program.

D0008
Arbitrary initial value Arbitrary initial value 0 5
(Read address)

(2) Use window control from PLC

This function pops up a global window screen using the address of the PLC connected to the touch,

regardless of a particular screen. Up to 4 can be set.

[Fig. Use window control from PLC]

In the actual unit, up to 4 popup window screens and 4 fixed window screens can be set for a single

screen. Popup type and fixed type windows can be set in the window tag, as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Bit window tag]

200 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

The use window control from PLC function is included as a popup type. That is, if a popup type window

tag operates on the current screen, with 2 window screen popups, even if the Use window control from

PLC setting is set for 4 window screen popups, only 2 window screens pop up.

The setting method is as follows. The data of the PLC address set in Window 1 becomes the number of

the window screen to pop up. In the case of numbers for window screens whose data is 0 or does not

exist, the window screen does not pop up.

The two addresses in the next device of the set PLC can be used as the popup position of the window

screen.

If [Use Position] is checked, X is automatically designated as the next station, and Y is designated

automatically as the station following that.

As for the position on the touch screen, if the resolution of the touch is 640x480, the top left corner

becomes (0,0) and the bottom right corner becomes (640,480). The top left corner of the window

screen popup is located in this position.

If [Use Position] is not used, the window pops up in the (0,0) position.

(3) Use N:1 Key Input LOCK

[N:1] is used when 1 PLC (controller) communicates with multiple touch units. [N] denotes the number of

touches, and [1] denotes the number of PLCs (controllers).

[Fig. Use [N:1] Key Input Lock]

If [N:1] Ethernet communication is used, this option is used to occupy operations in the touch that is

operated. That is, the function is used to prevent simultaneous input of the touches connected to same

PLC.

To use this function, a touch tag to enable and disable key input lock is necessary. The touch tag that

enables and disables key input lock is set to turn the data in [_MULTILINK_KEYHOLD] among the [Special]

addresses ON/OFF.

[_MULTILINK_KEYHOLD] Description

The key hold function is engaged.

The station number of the touch is recorded in the address set in [Use N:1 key
[ON]
input lock]. All input from touches other than the touch with the station number

recorded at this address is blocked.

[OFF] The key hold function is disengaged.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 201

 [Fig. Touch tag to enable/disable the key input lock function]

(4) Use Sysbuf. to save string of KeyPad (40 words)

This is used when entering text using a [Keypad display (string) tag]. This function is currently not used, as

a separate special address [_KEY_STR_DISP32(32Bit)] has been added. When entering strings, a string keypad

as shown in the figure below is used. A [String tag] that shows the string entered is registered on the top.

[Fig. String keypad]

Conventionally, the string tag address is designated as part of the internal address, as seen below.

[Fig. Address of a string tag registered to the keypad]

Set the [Internal address for saving key input strings] to be identical to the internal address of the string
tag of the string keyboard.

202 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Use Sysbuf. to save string of KeyPad function]

When the above settings are made, when a string key is entered in the string keypad, the characters

entered in the string tag portion are displayed in sequence. Conventionally, it was judged that allocating

certain addresses for key value display when the string keypad is not used was inefficient. The

composition was as follows, so that the setting could be engaged only when the keypad is being used.

Currently, the string keypad string tag is the newly added special address. The [Internal address for saving

key input strings] does not need to be set, making use more convenient.

[Fig. String keypad with a special address]

As shown below, numeric tags are registered in the numeric keypad. This numeric tag is the part that

displays the numeric key value. This numeric tag has a special address, as shown in the table below.

[Fig. Numeric keypad]

Special address Description

[_KEY_DSP] Shows the key value entered through numeric keys. This is a 16-bit address.

[_KEY_DISP32(32Bit)] Shows the key value entered through numeric keys. This is a 32-bit address.

[_KEY_STR_DISP32(32Bit)] Shows the key value entered through string keys.

(5) Use global lock

[Global lock] is a function that locks the touch so that it cannot be controlled, depending on conditions.

That is, the function prevents touches from being registered even if the screen is touched.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 203

 [Fig. Using global lock]

If the data of the set bit address is [ON], touch does not work, and if the data is [OFF], the lock function is

disengaged, and touch is possible.

(6) Use CF/SD-Recipe

This function saves recipe data in a CF memory card. Check when using this function.

[Fig. Using CF/SD-Recipe function]

Use [CF-Recipe Creator] in the [Tools] menu to create and save recipe data files to CF memory cards.

[Fig. CF-Recipe Maker]

(☞ See [44.4] of [chapter 44] for info on how to set the [CF-Recipe generator].)

(7) Setting use of remote functions

[Fig. Remote functions]

[Remote functions] are [TOPView] functions where the screen of the touch is monitored from the PC.

[Remote functions] are possible only when the PC and ethernet are connected through Ethernet. They can

be engaged in [Create TOPView client] in the [Tools] menu.

(☞ See [44.12] of [chapter 44] for TOPView client creation.)

To use TOPView functions, that is, remote functions, [Use remote monitoring] must be checked.

204 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 Remote function Description

Use Remote Monitoring The touch screen is monitored from the PC.

The touch screen is not only monitored from the PC, but also controlled using mouse
Use Remote Control
clicks.

7.12.2 [Global alarm scroll] page

[Global alarm scroll] is a function where the triggered alarms are displayed in a single line on the screen.

Only currently triggered alarms are scrolled one letter at a time from right to left.

[Fig. Global alarm scroll]

First, check [Use global alarm scroll]. Next, make detailed settings as shown below.

Global alarm scroll Description

Group Set the group of the alarm list to be displayed.

Scroll interval Set the time taken for one letter to scroll.

Scroll position Select the position of the alarm display on the screen, between [Top] and [Bottom].

Select the letter that separates alarms.

Delimiter

Font Set the font of the alarm.

Hint font color Set the font color of the alarm.

Hint B.G. color Set the background color of the alarm.

If the settings in the figure above are set, the following is displayed across the bottom of the screen

during operation. Triggered alarms are displayed, scrolling from right to left one letter every 1 second,

which is the scroll interval. Alarms are separated with [/].

[Fig. Global alarm scroll display]

7.12.3 TOP setting

This is the [TOP settings] part of the [Project setting list] on the left side. Functions for changing the

model name of the touch and setting the menu screen are provided.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 205

 (1) Changing the touch model name
The model name of the touch currently set for the project is changed.

[Fig. Changing the touch model name]

If the [Change TOP] button on top is clicked, as shown in the figure above, a screen for touch model

selection is shown. Select the model to change to, and click the [OK] button.

When a different model with a different resolution is designated, the following message appears.

[Fig. Resolution change confirmation message]

Resolution change Description

The size of shapes and tags registered to the screen are automatically changed to match the

[Yes] button resolution. However, the automatic resize function does not apply to some letters or tags.

These must be changed manually.

[No] button The size of the shapes and tags registered to the screen remain the same.

(2) Setting the touch menu screen (use HMI settings)

The menu on the menu screen of the touch can be set in the project. When the project is transmitted

to the touch, the menu screen on the touch is changed to the menu settings made in the project.
First, check [Use HMI setup]. Next, set the [Communication setup] and [TOP SETUP (touch setup)] pages.

206 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 [Fig. Communication setup page in Use HMI setup]

[Fig. Touch setup page in Use HMI setup]

(☞ See [1.1.4] of [chapter 1] for the menu screen of the touch.)

The set [Communication setup] and [TOP SETUP (touch setup)] pages can be initialized using the

[Initialize Comm setup] and [Initialize HMI setup] on top.

Button Description

Initialize Comm setup The settings in the comm setup page are initialized.

Initialize HMI setup The settings in the TOP SETUP (touch setup) page are initialized.

7.12.4 PLC setup

This is the [PLC settings] part of the [Project setting list].

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 207

 The touch that communicates with the PLC is modified/added/deleted.

(1) PLC change

The model of the set PLC is changed.

[Fig. PLC Change]

PLC changes are performed as follows.

1. Select the PLC to change from the [Project setting list] on the left. If the [Change PLC] button is

pressed without selecting the PLC to change, the following message appears.

[Fig. PLC change warning message]

2. First, press [Change PLC] on top.

3. From the popup screen, the vendor of the PLC to change to is selected.

4. Next, select the PLC model.

5. Press the [OK] button to change the PLC model.

(2) Add PLC

The touch communicates with the PLC (controller) using 232/422/485 serial communication, Ethernet

communication, FieldBus communication, and USB communication.

[Fig. PLC setup]

Like the list in the PLC settings part above, the touch has the following communication ports.

Communication ports Description

COM2 (Serial) This is a serial port that communicates with the PLC(controller) using 232C/422/485

208 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

 communication.

This is a serial port that communicates with the PC. Additionally, it can communicate with
COM1 (Serial)
the PLC (controller) using 232C communication.

Ethernet This is an ethernet port that communicates with the PC or PLC (controller).

FieldBus Uses FieldBus communication.

Communicates with the PLC (controller) using USB communication. Supports

USB device
communication with the barcode reader.

Using the following buttons, the PLCs for each communication port can be added/modified/deleted.

Button Description

PLC Change The model of the set PLC is changed.

Delete PLC The set PLC is deleted.

Add COM2 PLC Add a PLC to connect to the COM2 port.

Add COM1 PLC Add a PLC to connect to the COM1 port.

Add ethernet PLC Add a PLC to connect to the ethernet port.

Add FieldBus Add controllers for FIeldBus communication.

When the set PLC model is clicked from the [Project settings list] on the left, the [Device info] and

[Communication options] of the PLC are displayed on the right side.

[Fig. Device info and communication options of the set PLC]

PLC setup Description

The vendor/product name(model)/alias of the set PLC are displayed. [Alias] is the PLC name
Device information
displayed in the address setting part of the project, and can be changed.

Comm options Different options can be set for each PLC.

7.12.5 CF card settings

This is set when saving alarms or logging data using CF memory cards. When [CF Card] is clicked in the

[Project settings list], the screen shown in the figure below appears.

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 209

 [Fig. CF memory card settings]

Alarms, logging, and event log data can be saved in CF memory cards. 1 to 8 logging lists can be set.

Therefore, the list comprises Log1 ~ Log8, as shown above. First, check ( ) the data to be saved in the
list. Next, set the details below.

Item Description

Allocation (%) Set what percentage (%) of the total capacity of the CF memory card to use for the checked item.

The mode of operation when the allocated storage space has been filled is selected, between

[Overwriting] and [Stop saving].

Memory full

In [Overwriting], data continues being saved, erasing the oldest data. In [Stop saving], data saving is

stopped.

Select between [A day] and [A month] as the file generation interval.

Save unit

In [A day], files are generated every day, saving data for a day. In [A month], files are generated every

month, saving data for a month.

If the [Allocation (%)] part is set, a graph is displayed.

[Fig. CF memory card allocation graph]

The graph shows 2% allocated to the system, 20% allocated to alarms, 50% allocated as logging area 1,

20% allocated to the event log, and 8% unallocated.

210 CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu

CHAPTER 8 Shape Menu

CHAPTER 7 -Project Menu 211

CHAPTER 8 - Shape Menu

The shape menu is used when drawing pictures on the screen. After registering shapes on the screen properties can

be changed through the property screen.

8.1 Dot

Draws a dot. Dots of size 1~10dot can be drawn in various colors.

[Fig. Dot properties screen]

(1) Dot color/dot size

Set the color and size of the dot.

Line Description

Dot color Set the dot color using the color palette.

Dot size Select the dot size, from 1~10dot.

(2) Position/size
The value of the X/Y coordinates where the dot is currently located are displayed. Values can be set

manually.

Position/size Description

X position Set the x coordinate position of the dot.

Y position Set the Y coordinate position of the dot.

8.2 Line

Draws a line. Lines of thickness 1~10dot can be drawn in various colors and line shapes. Drop on the
screen, then drag with the left mouse button pressed to draw a line. Drag with the [Shift] key on the
keyboard pressed down to draw vertical or horizontal lines.

212 CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu

 [Fig. Line properties screen]

(1) Line
Set the color, thickness, and style of the line.

Line Description

Line color Set the line color using the color palette.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~10dot.

Line style Select the style of the line.

(2) Position/size
The value of the X/Y coordinates where the line is currently located, and the size of the line are displayed.

Values can be set manually.

Position/size Description

Start X Set the x coordinate position of the point where the line starts.

Start Y Set the y coordinate position of the point where the line starts.

End X Set the x coordinate position of the point where the line ends.

End Y Set the y coordinate position of the point where the line ends.

8.3 Rectangle, rounded rectangle

Draw rectangles or rectangles with rounded corners. Drop on the screen, then drag with the left mouse

button pressed to draw. Drag with the [Shift] key on the keyboard pressed down to draw a square.

[Fig. Rectangle properties screen]

8.3.1 Rectangle

CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu 213

 (1) Line
Set the color, thickness, and style of the lines forming the rectangle.

Line Description

Line color Set the line color using the color palette.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~10dot.

Line style Select the style of the line.

(2) Brush
The inside of the rectangle is filled with color. Two types of color can be selected to apply a pattern.

Fill Description

Select the internal pattern for rectangles or rounded rectangles from the list below. When [tile-

1 ~ tile-14] are selected, the color set in [Brush color] is used as the color of the lines.

Fill method

Brush color Set the color of the parts shown in black in the patterns in [Brush style].

Background color Set the color of the parts shown in white in the patterns in [Brush style].

(3) Position/size
The value of the X/Y coordinates where the rectangle is currently located, and the size of the rectangle are

displayed. Values can be set manually.

Position/size Description

X position Set the x coordinate position of the rectangle or rounded rectangle.

Y position Set the y coordinate position of the rectangle or rounded rectangle.

Width Set the width of the rectangle or rounded rectangle.

Height Set the height of the rectangle or rounded rectangle.

8.3.2 Rounded rectangle

The settings are the same as for rectangle, with an additional item for rounding of the corners. [Round]

indicates the degree of roundness of the corners. The larger the value,the rounder the shape is. [0]

denotes a rectangle.

[Fig. Rounded rectangle properties]

214 CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu

8.4 Ellipse

Draw a circle or an ellipse. Various colors and line types are supported. Using the internal fill options,

brush color and background colors, the inside of the circle can be painted.

[Fig. Circle properties screen]

(1) Line
Set the color, thickness, and style of the lines forming the circle.

Line Description

Line color Set the line color using the color palette.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~10dot.

Line style Select the style of the line.

(2) Brush
The inside of the circle is filled with color. Two types of color can be selected to apply a pattern.

Fill Description

Select the internal pattern for the circle from the list below.

When [tile-1 ~ tile-14] are selected, the color set in [Brush color] is used as the color of the

lines.

Fill method

Brush color Set the color of the parts shown in black in the patterns in [Brush style].

Background color Set the color of the parts shown in white in the patterns in [Brush style].

(3) Position/size
The value of the X/Y coordinates where the circle is currently located, and the size of the circle are

displayed. Values can be set manually.

Position/size Description

X position Set the x coordinate position of the circle.

Y position Set the y coordinate position of the circle.

CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu 215

 Width Set the height of the circle.

Height Set the height of the circle.

Note

Draw shapes after pressing the icon above in the toolbar. The shape is drawn out from a central

spot. This option is especially useful when drawing circles.

8.5 Arc, pie, chord

Arcs, pies, and chords are drawn. Various colors and line types are supported; by setting angle degrees,

various shapes can be expressed. The size can be adjusted manually by dragging with the left mouse

button pressed.

[Fig. Arcs, pies, and chord properties screen]

(1) Line
Select arc, pie or chord from the shape type, and set the color, width, and style of the lines.
Line Description

Shape type Select from arc, pie, and chord.

Line color Set the line color using the color palette.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~10dot.

Start angle Enter the angle of the upper end point (start angle)

End angle Enter the angle of the lower end point (end angle)

Line style Select the style of the line.

Brush Color Set the inner color of the pie or chord. This is not supported for arcs.

(2) Boundary
The value of the X/Y coordinates where the arc, pie or chord is currently located, and the size are

displayed. Values can be set manually.

Boundary Description

X axis position Set the x coordinate position of the arc, pie, or chord.

Y axis position Set the y coordinate position of the arc, pie, or chord.

216 CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu

 Height Set the height of the arc, pie, or chord.

Width Set the width of the arc, pie, or chord.

[Fig. Arc, pie, chord]

8.6 TEXT

Register strings. Strings are displayed using touch fonts and various PC Windows fonts.

[Fig. String properties screen]

(1) Text/font
Enter text and set the font and size.

Text/font Description

Normal Display the entered text using touch internal font.

Text table Select and use a string registered in the [Text table].

The entered text is displayed using a PC Windows font. The text is converted internally into
Image text
an image, and transmitted to the touch.

(2) Option
The background properties of the text are set, and a blink effect can be applied. Background properties

are as follow.
Option Description

Transparent A transparent background is displayed for the text.

Color is used in the text background. Set the color in [Background color]. If [Fill color] has

Fill color been set, the [Blink] effect can be used. [Blink] is an emphasizing effect where the string

appears and disappears, in 0.5 second intervals.

When the background color of text and a shape in the background overlap, the colors are
XOR
displayed as XOR (reverse). Set the color to XOR in [Background color].

CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu 217

 (3) Text input setting
There are three ways of text input : [Normal], [Image text], and [Text table].

① Normal text

Text is displayed using fonts in the touch. Enter the text in the text input part, and set detailed properties.

[Fig. Normal text]

Normal text Description

Align Select from [Left], [Center], and [Right] align.

Text input Enter the text to display.

Select the font of the displayed font from the list below.

Font

The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by the font width ratio.

Text size

Color Set the color of the text.

Line space Set the space between lines if 2 or more lines of a string have been entered.

② Image text

Text is displayed using PC Windows fonts. Therefore, a greater variety of expression than normal text is

possible. The text is converted internally into an image, and transmitted to the touch. As seen in the

figure, check [Image text], and enter the text.

[Fig. Image text]

The usage method is the same as [Normal text]. The text size input is changed, and are
added.

218 CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu

 Display property Description

Text is displayed in bold.

Text is displayed with italics.

Text is underlined.

A cancel line is drawn across the middle of the text.

③ Text table

Select and display a string registered in the text table. To use the text table, [Project]-[Text table] must be

set from the menu first. (☞ See [7.3] in [chapter 7] for the text table.) When [Text table] is selected, the

display is changed as seen in the figure below. Select and use a string from the list.

[Fig. Text table text]

8.7 Fill

Fills a closed area with color. Register inside a closed area formed by lines, shapes, or closed areas inside

bitmaps to fill with color.

[Fig. Fill properties screen]

(1) Brush
Set the color to use for [Fill]

(2) Position/size
The value of the X/Y coordinates where fill is currently located are displayed. Values can be set manually.

Position/size Description

X position Set the x coordinate position for fill.

Y position Set the y coordinate position for fill.

Note [Fill] must be registered after drawing a closed area. [Fill] works properly only if the closed area is

created beforehand.

CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu 219

8.8 Polyline, polygon

Polylines or polygons are registered on the screen. When dots are drawn consecutively, polylines

connecting those points, and polygons connecting the first and last points are drawn. Left click the mouse

on the screen multiple times to draw the desired polyline or polygon. End by right clicking the mouse.

Yellow trackers are displayed on the dots. The shape can be changed by dragging these trackers.

[Fig. Polyline properties screen]

(1) Line
Set the color, thickness, and style of the lines forming the polyline or polygon.

Line Description

Shape type Select polyline or polygon.

Line style Select the style of the line from the list below.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~10dot.

Line color Set the line color using the color palette.

Fill color Set the internal color of the polygon.

(2) Boundary
The value of the X/Y coordinates where the polyline/polygon is currently located, and the size are

displayed. Values can be set manually.

Boundary Description

X axis position Set the x coordinate position of the polyline or polygon.

Y axis position Set the y coordinate position of the polyline or polygon.

Height Set the height of the polyline or polygon.

Width Set the width of the polyline or polygon.

8.9 Image

Register images (bitmap, jpg, jpeg). Images saved on the PC are displayed on the screen in the desired

size.

220 CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu

 [Fig. Image properties screen]

(1) Preview
Registered images are shown in the preview.

Preview Description

User The image in the preview screen is optimized to the registered image size, that is, [DISPLAY SIZE].

Stretch The image is stretched to fill the entire preview screen.

Real The image is displayed in the preview in the original resolution.

(2) Loading images

Load images saved on the PC, or delete loaded images.

Image Description

Path The path of the loaded image is displayed.

A transparent background is displayed for the image. If transparent is selected, the black parts
Transparent
of bitmaps are not displayed, making them transparent.

Load Load images using the [Load image] screen.

Erase Delete the loaded image.

(3) Display size

The size of the current image is displayed. Values can be set manually.

Display size Description

Width Set the width of the image.

Height Set the height of the image.

8.10 Rect ruler

Register a rectangular ruler on the screen. This is used when drawing vertical or horizontal rulers, and for
graphs. The size can be adjusted manually by dragging with the left mouse button pressed. Drag with the

[Shift] key on the keyboard pressed down to draw a square ruler.

CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu 221

 [Fig. Rect Ruler properties screen]

(1) Ruler
Set the shape, direction, color and thickness of the ruler.

Ruler Description

Ruler kind Select between horizontal and vertical rulers

No. of large thick division Enter the number of large thick divisions to insert within the designated area.

No. of small division Enter the number of small divisions to insert between the large thick divisions.

Large thick length Large thick division length applies only to circle ruler. Therefore, this option is disabled.

Small thick length Small division length applies only to circle ruler. Therefore, this option is disabled.

Thick color Select the color for the lines that form the ruler.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~10dot.

For horizontal rulers, the direction is up or down. For vertical rulers, the direction is left
Thick direction
or right.

(2) Position
The value of the X/Y coordinates where the rect ruler is currently located, and the size of the rect ruler are

displayed. Values can be set manually.

Position Description

X axis position Set the x coordinate position of the rect ruler.

Y axis position Set the y coordinate position of the rect ruler.

Height Set the height of the rect ruler.

Width Set the width of the rect ruler.

8.11 Circle ruler

Register a circle ruler on the screen. This is used when drawing circle or semicircle rulers, and for graphs.
By dragging with the left mouse button pressed, the size of the ruler can be adjusted directly. By dragging

with the [Shift] key on the keyboard press, circular rulers can be drawn.

222 CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu

 [Fig. Circle Ruler properties screen]

(1) Ruler
Set the shape, direction, color and thickness of the ruler.

Ruler Description

Ruler kind Select between circle and semicircle rulers

No. of large thick division Set how many large thick divisions the area inside the circle will be divided into.

No. of small division Set how mahy small divisions to insert between the thick divisions.

Large thick length Set the length of the large thick divisions.

Small thick length Set the length of the small divisions.

Thick color Select the color for the lines that form the ruler.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~10dot.

Select the direction of the divisions, between pointing inward and pointint outward
Thick direction
from the circle.

(2) Position
The value of the X/Y coordinates where the rect ruler is currently located, and the size of the rect ruler are

displayed. Values can be set manually.

Position Description

X axis position Set the x coordinate position of the circle ruler.

Y axis position Set the y coordinate position of the circle ruler.

Height Set the height of the circle ruler.

Width Set the width of the circle ruler.

CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu 223

 CHAPTER 9 Common Tag Settings

224 CHAPTER 8 -Shape Menu

CHAPTER 9 - Common Tag Settings

Before illustrating using tags, please use common tag settings thoroughly for proper use.

9.1 Composition of the tag properties screen

The right side of the tag properties screen comprises individual screens. On the left are the preview and

security setting functions. On the bottom, there are the [OK] and [Cancel] buttons.

[Fig. Composition of the tag properties screen]

9.1.1 Information page

Each tag has a different page composition. However, every tag has an [Information] page where tag

information is displayed. Therefore, the [Information] page is described in common tag settings.

The [Information] page shows information on the rgistered tag. The number of the registered screen, tag

ID, time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can edit.

[Fig. Information page]

Information Description

Screen number This is the number of the screen where the tag is registered.

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 225

 This is the tag ID.
Tag ID
The ID number is assigned to shapes and tags in the order they are registered to the screen.

Create time This is the time the tag was first registered to the screen.

Modified time This is the time of the last modification of the tag.

X axis position This is the x coordinate of the top left corner of the position the tag was registered to the screen.

Y axis position This is the y coordinate of the top left corner of the position the tag was registered to the screen.

Width This is the tag width.

Height This is the tag height.

Memo Tag info can be entered into the memo.

9.1.2 Preview
[Preview] shows the tag according to the settings in the tag information screen. The appearance of the

tag here is identical to the tag registered to the actual edit screen. Changes to properties can be

conveniently viewed through the [Preview], without having to check the actual edit screen.

9.1.3 Security
Individual security levels can be set for all shapes and tags. Security levels are set in [Password setting] of

the [Project] menu. (☞ See [7.10] of [chapter 7] for password settings.)

[Fig. Security level]

Passwords apply only when level passwords are enabled in [Password settings.] A security level of [0]

indicates no security setting. If a security level of [1] or higher is entered, a tag is visible only if a level

equal to or greater than the value entered for the security level is used to log in. If the login is not

performed, the applicable tag is not visible on the screen.

9.1.4 OK/cancel buttons

OK/Cancel buttons are provided on the bottom right corner of the information screen.

Button Description

After completing all settings, click the OK button to save.

If this button is pressed, the changes to tag information made after opening the

information screen are not saved, and are canceled.

The tag properties before the tag information screen was opened are preserved.

9.2 Address entry

This is the method of setting the address in a project.

226 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

9.2.1 Address types
There are 5 major types of device : PLC (connected controller) address, internal touch address, special

touch address, symbol address, and offset address.

[Fig. Address types]

A detailed explanation of each address follows.

Address Description

PLC address. [D] stands for device.

Internal address [I] stands for internal address.

Special address [S] stands for special address.

Symbol address [SY] stands for symbol address.

Offset address [O] stands for offset address.

(1) PLC address.

This is the address of the controller that communicates with the touch. List items are created. The number

of list items is equal to the number of controllers connected.

① PLC name

Multiple controllers can be connected to one touch. When multiple controllers are connected, PLC names

are generated as [PLC1], [PLC2], [PLC3], … by default, as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. PLC names]

By selecting each PLC in [Project]-[Project property], the name of each PLC can be changed in [Alias]

under [Device information].

[Fig. Changing the PLC name]

② Characteristics of PLC addresses

In PLC addresses, each address has a separate area (identifier), station, and place number. In the project,

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 227

 addresses must be entered appropriately to the address format of each PLC. For example, the addresses

for MASTER_K 80S from LSIS are as seen in the following table.

Identifier Range of stations used Number of places in the station

P (Input/output relay) 0000 ~ 015F 4

M (internal relay) 0000 ~ 191F 4

K (Keep relay) 0000 ~ 031F 4

L (Link relay) 0000 ~ 063F 4

F (Special relay) 0000 ~ 063F 4

T (Timer) 0000 ~ 1255 4

C (Counter) 000 ~ 255 3

S (Step relay) 00.00 ~ 99.99 5

D (Data register) 0000 ~ 4999 4

Details on the address of each PLC are provided in the [Communication Manual] provided separately for

each PLC. The range of the address range and stations which can be used when entering PLC addresses in

the program are indicated. When a wrong address has been entered, an error is displayed, preventing

entry of wrong addresses.

(2) Internal address

This is the internal address of the touch. The touch has an internal address range. This area is all in [16

bit], that is, in word units. Also, as seen in the description of the figure below, there is no separate

identifier. The range of stations that can be used is from [0000] to [5119].

[Fig. Internal address used as a word address]

When using a word address, as the internal address is in word units, the station number can be entered as

is. When using as a bit address, the bit place must be entered after the station number.
For example, when using the 6th bit of internal address station 10, [10.05] is entered.

[Fig. Internal address used as a bit address]

(3) Special address

This is the internal special address of the touch. Special addresses are internal addresses assigned with
individual names for special functions. They are all in [16 bit] word units. When special address is selected

in the [Address keypad] as seen in the figure below, a description of each special address can be seen in
the information part on the bottom.

228 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

 [Fig. Special address]

Special addresses are as follows.

No Special address Description

Becomes 0 at the first scan when the touch begins operation, or transitions
1 _1OFF
screens.

Becomes 1 at the first scan when the touch begins operation, or transitions
2 _1ON
screens.

3 _1ON_RUN Becomes 0 at the first scan when the touch begins operation.

4 _ADC_X Saves the Analog to Digital Convert X position upon touch.

5 _ADC_Y Saves the Analog to Digital Convert Y position upon touch.

This is the audio control buffer, which stops at 0, and plays for values other
6 _AUDIO_CONTROL
than 0.

7 _AUDIO_CUR_TIME Saves the current audio playback time.

8 _AUDIO_FILE_NUM Saves the file number to play audio.

9 _AUDIO_TOTAL_TIME Saves the total audio playback time.

10 _AUDIO_VOLUME This is the buffer that saves audio volume.

11 _BACK_OFF_COUNTDOWN This is the remaining time until the backlight is turned off. (Minutes)

12 _BACK_OFF_TIME This is the backlight off setting time. (Minutes)

13 _BARCODE_READ Becomes 1 when the barcode reader successfully reads a barcode.

This is the battery warning that becomes 1 when battery replacement is

14 _BAT_WARNING
needed.

This is the LCD brightness level. Step0~Step7 are provided. This is the value
15 _BL_BR_CONT
set in [LCD brightness adjustment] in the touch menu screen.

16 _BTCAP This is the buffer to display remaining battery life for the HTOP.

17 _CF_ALARM_CAPA This is the capacity used by alarms in the CD memory card.

This is a special buffer for searching alarm data saved in the CF.

18 _CF_ALARM_SRCH_DAY After setting the date in the year/month/date special buffer, press the button

set using touch tag-[Special function]-[CF Alarm Search(Date)] to display the

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 229

 applicable alarms.

This is a special buffer for searching alarm data saved in the CF.

After setting the date in the year/month/date special buffer, press the button
19 _CF_ALARM_SRCH_MONTH
set using touch tag-[Special function]-[CF Alarm Search(Date)] to display the

applicable alarms.

This is a special buffer for searching alarm data saved in the CF.

After setting the date in the year/month/date special buffer, press the button
20 _CF_ALARM_SRCH_YEAR
set using touch tag-[Special function]-[CF Alarm Search(Date)] to display the

applicable alarms.

This flag is set before remving the CF memory card. It is set to 1 before the
21 _CF_EJECT
CF memory card is removed.

This is a special buffer for searching Event Log data saved in the CF.

After setting the date in the year/month/date special buffer, press the button
22 _CF_EVENTVIEW_SRCH_DAY
set using touch tag-[Special function]-[CF Event Log Search(Date)] to display

the applicable Event Logs.

This is a special buffer for searching Event Log data saved in the CF.

After setting the date in the year/month/date special buffer, press the button
23 _CF_EVENTVIEW_SRCH_MONTH
set using touch tag-[Special function]-[CF Event Log Search(Date)] to display

the applicable Event Logs.

This is a special buffer for searching Event Log data saved in the CF.

After setting the date in the year/month/date special buffer, press the button
24 _CF_EVENTVIEW_SRCH_YEAR
set using touch tag-[Special function]-[CF Event Log Search(Date)] to display

the applicable Event Logs.

25 _CF_INSERT This becomes 1 when a CF memory card is inserted into the touch.

26 _CF_LOGGED_CAPA_1 This is the capacity used by Log1 data in the CD memory card. (0.00%)

27 _CF_LOGGED_CAPA_2 This is the capacity used by Log2 data in the CD memory card. (0.00%)

28 _CF_LOGGED_CAPA_3 This is the capacity used by Log3 data in the CD memory card. (0.00%)

29 _CF_LOGGED_CAPA_4 This is the capacity used by Log4 data in the CD memory card. (0.00%)

30 _CF_LOGGED_CAPA_5 This is the capacity used by Log5 data in the CD memory card. (0.00%)

31 _CF_LOGGED_CAPA_6 This is the capacity used by Log6 data in the CD memory card. (0.00%)

32 _CF_LOGGED_CAPA_7 This is the capacity used by Log7 data in the CD memory card. (0.00%)

33 _CF_LOGGED_CAPA_8 This is the capacity used by Log8 data in the CD memory card. (0.00%)

This becomes 1 when a comm error occurs in the COM2 port during
34 _CN_ERR
operation.

This becomes 1 when a comm error occurs in the COM1 port during
35 _CN_ERR_P2
operation.

This becomes 1 when a comm error occurs in the ethernet port during
36 _CN_ERR_PE
operation.

37 _COMM_BLOCK_1N_COM1 This is used for [1:N] communication in the COM1 port.

230 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

 The applicable bit position corresponds to the area code.

When this bit is ON, communication with the applicable area code is not

performed.

This is used for [1:N] communication in the COM2 port.

The applicable bit position corresponds to the area code.

38 _COMM_BLOCK_1N_COM2
When this bit is ON, communication with the applicable area code is not

performed.

This 32 bit special buffer is used for [1:N] communication in the COM1 port.

The applicable bit position corresponds to the area code.

39 _COMM_STS_1N_COM1 The comm status for each area code is displayed.

If the value is 1, the controller for the applicable area code is in comm error

state.

This 32 bit special buffer is used for [1:N] communication in the COM2 port.

The applicable bit position corresponds to the area code.

40 _COMM_STS_1N_COM2 The comm status for each area code is displayed.

If the value is 1, the controller for the applicable area code is in comm error

state.

This is the day of week for the date set in the touch. (0-Sunday, 1-Monday,
41 _DAY_OF_THE_WEEK
2-Tuesday, 3-Wednesday, 4-Thursday, 5-Friday, 6-Saturday)

42 _DOCVIEW_ALL This is the total number of pages displayed in the DocViewer tag.

43 _DOCVIEW_NUM This is the number of the current page displayed in the DocViewer tag.

This is a buffer used to change the PLC comm IP during operation, which
44 _ETH_IP1_RUN
sets IP1.

This is a buffer used to change the PLC comm IP during operation, which
45 _ETH_IP2_RUN
sets IP2.

This is a buffer used to change the PLC comm IP during operation, which
46 _ETH_IP3_RUN
sets IP3.

This is a buffer used to change the PLC comm IP during operation, which
47 _ETH_IP4_RUN
sets IP4.

This is a buffer used to change the PLC comm IP during operation, which
48 _ETH_PLC_NO
designates the PLC order registered in the project. (Sarts from 1)

This is a buffer used to change the PLC comm IP during operation, which
49 _ETH_READ_PORT_RUN
designates the read port.

This is a buffer used to change the PLC comm IP during operation, which
50 _ETH_WRITE_PORT_RUN
designates the write port.

51 _EVENT_LOG_CAPA This special buffer displays the CF capacity (%) for Event Log.

This is the number of the function key pressed in the extruder (for LSMtron
52 _FUN_KEY_VAL
only).

53 _KEY_ DISP32(32Bit) This 32 bit buffer for displaying input key data is used in the display

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 231

 keyboard tag.

This 16 bit buffer for displaying input key data is used in the display
54 _KEY_DSP
keyboard tag.

55 _KEY_ENT This beocmes 1 when the [Enter] key is pressed in the touch.

56 _KEY_INPUT_MAX(32Bit) This is the maximum input value used in the display keyboard tag.

57 _KEY_INPUT_MIN(32Bit) This is the minimum input value used in the display keyboard tag.

58 _KEY_STR_DISP32 (32Bit) This is a buffer for displaying string input.

59 _LOGED_ALL_1 If the total log count is reached in Log1, this becomes 1.

60 _LOGED_ALL_2 If the total log count is reached in Log2, this becomes 1.

61 _LOGED_ALL_3 If the total log count is reached in Log3, this becomes 1.

62 _LOGED_ALL_4 If the total log count is reached in Log4, this becomes 1.

63 _LOGED_ALL_5 If the total log count is reached in Log5, this becomes 1.

64 _LOGED_ALL_6 If the total log count is reached in Log6, this becomes 1.

65 _LOGED_ALL_7 If the total log count is reached in Log7, this becomes 1.

66 _LOGED_ALL_8 If the total log count is reached in Log8, this becomes 1.

If this value is not 0, all data in Log1 is erased.

67 _LOGED_ALL_CLR_1
After logging data is erased, the value automatically becomes 0.

If this value is not 0, all data in Log2 is erased.

68 _LOGED_ALL_CLR_2
After logging data is erased, the value automatically becomes 0.

If this value is not 0, all data in Log3 is erased.

69 _LOGED_ALL_CLR_3
After logging data is erased, the value automatically becomes 0.

If this value is not 0, all data in Log4 is erased.

70 _LOGED_ALL_CLR_4
After logging data is erased, the value automatically becomes 0.

If this value is not 0, all data in Log5 is erased.

71 _LOGED_ALL_CLR_5
After logging data is erased, the value automatically becomes 0.

If this value is not 0, all data in Log6 is erased.

72 _LOGED_ALL_CLR_6
After logging data is erased, the value automatically becomes 0.

If this value is not 0, all data in Log7 is erased.

73 _LOGED_ALL_CLR_7
After logging data is erased, the value automatically becomes 0.

If this value is not 0, all data in Log8 is erased.

74 _LOGED_ALL_CLR_8
After logging data is erased, the value automatically becomes 0.

75 _LOGED_CUR_BL_1 The current number of logs in Log1 is displayed.

76 _LOGED_CUR_BL_2 The current number of logs in Log2 is displayed.

77 _LOGED_CUR_BL_3 The current number of logs in Log3 is displayed.

78 _LOGED_CUR_BL_4 The current number of logs in Log4 is displayed.

79 _LOGED_CUR_BL_5 The current number of logs in Log5 is displayed.

80 _LOGED_CUR_BL_6 The current number of logs in Log6 is displayed.

81 _LOGED_CUR_BL_7 The current number of logs in Log7 is displayed.

82 _LOGED_CUR_BL_8 The current number of logs in Log8 is displayed.

232 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

83 _LOGED_ONE_1 This value becomes 1 whenever logging occurs once in Log1.

84 _LOGED_ONE_2 This value becomes 1 whenever logging occurs once in Log2.

85 _LOGED_ONE_3 This value becomes 1 whenever logging occurs once in Log3.

86 _LOGED_ONE_4 This value becomes 1 whenever logging occurs once in Log4.

87 _LOGED_ONE_5 This value becomes 1 whenever logging occurs once in Log5.

88 _LOGED_ONE_6 This value becomes 1 whenever logging occurs once in Log6.

89 _LOGED_ONE_7 This value becomes 1 whenever logging occurs once in Log7.

90 _LOGED_ONE_8 This value becomes 1 whenever logging occurs once in Log8.

In [N:1] communication, when this is set to 1, the controller communicates

91 _MULTI_HOLD_RUN
only with the applicable touch.

In [N:1] communication, this value becomes [1] if there is a touch HOLD state
92 _MULTI_HOLD_STS
among the connected touches.

This changes the type of language set in the text table.

93 _MULTI_LANG For [0], the language in the first column of the text table is displayed, and

For [1], the language in the second column of the text table is displayed.

94 _MULTILINK_KEYHOLD In ethernet [N:1] communication, touch is disabled if this value is [1].

95 _NETVIEW_CONTROL_IP1 This is the IP1 address when using remote control.

96 _NETVIEW_CONTROL_IP2 This is the IP2 address when using remote control.

97 _NETVIEW_CONTROL_IP3 This is the IP3 address when using remote control.

98 _NETVIEW_CONTROL_IP4 This is the IP4 address when using remote control.

99 _NETVIEW_CONTROL_LOCK [1] disables remote control.

When using remote control, [0] enables remote monitoring only, and [1]
100 _NETVIEW_SERVICE
enables remote control as well.

101 _OFF This value is 0 at all times when the touch is operating.

102 _ON This value is 1 at all times when the touch is operating.

103 _PARM_CUR_BLOCK Contains the current block number of the recipe.

If this value is not [0], the recipe data of the project is loaded to the memory

of the touch. The value automatically becomes 0 when loading has been
104 _PARM_DEFAULT_LD
completed. Recipe data is executed once automatically when a project file

has been transmitted to the touch.

105 _PARM_FILE_ERR This value becomes 1 when an error occurs while moving a recipe block.

If this value is not [0], the data in the current task area is stored in the

106 _PARM_RESTORE memory of the touch whenever the data in the task area (target address) is

changed. This is used when current task data is used the next time as well.

If this value is not [0], the data in the current task area is stored in the

107 _PARM_SAVE memory of the touch. The value automatically becomes 0 when saving has

been completed.

(LSMtron only) displays the LED illumination state when the I/O option
108 _PORT_IN
module is used.

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 233

 (LSMtrononly) This is the LED output buffer for the output TOP6L of AUX
109 _PORT_OUT
(Option board), etc.

This value becomes [1] when the action of writing recipe data to the target
110 _RECIPE_FINISHED
address has been completed.

111 _RSSI This special buffer is used to display the HTOP receiving sensitivity.

112 _RTC_DAY This is the day (date) data of the touch RTC. (BCD 1 ~ 31)

This is the day of week for the date set in the touch. (1-Sunday, 2-Monday,
113 _RTC_DAYOFWEEK
3-Tuesday, 4-Wednesday, 5-Thursday, 6-Friday, 7-Saturday)

114 _RTC_HUR This is the hour data of the touch RTC. (BCD 0 ~ 23)

115 _RTC_MIN This is the minute data of the touch RTC. (BCD 0 ~ 59)

116 _RTC_MTH This is the month data of the touch RTC. (BCD 1 ~ 12)

117 _RTC_SEC This is the seconds data of the touch RTC. (BCD 0 ~ 59)

118 _RTC_YER This is the year data of the touch RTC. (BCD 1999 ~ 2098)

If this value is other than [0], the run screen is closed, and the menu screen
119 _RUN_OUT
is brought up.

The current screen number is saved. By entering the screen number to

120 _SCR_NUM
transition to the page is transitioned.

The current screen number is saved. This is a read only buffer, and data
121 _SCR_NUM_READ
cannot be written.

If the value is not [0], the backlight is turned off. If the value of [0], the

122 _SCR_SVE backlight is turned on. When the touch screen is touched when the backlight

is off, the backlight is turned on, and the value automatically becomes 0.

123 _SCR_SVE_STATE 0: Backlight on state , 1: Screen save state.

This special buffer is used to lock/unlock touch action. If the value is 1, all
124 _SCREEN_LOCK
touch is disable.d

125 _SECURITY_LEVEL The security level of the current scren is saved.

126 _STN_BR_CONT This is the LCD brightness level. (Limited to STN models)

Scan reverse : During operation, the value is reversed at the time of each
127 _STOG
scan : 0->1, 1->0.

128 _T1S Counts [0~65535] each second during operation.

129 _TOUCH_PRESSED Turns bit 0 ON when touch tags or display keyboard tags are pressed.

130 _USB_INSERT Is [1] if the USB host is connected.

131 _WS_ID This buffer stores the W-STATION ID.

(4) Symbol address

A symbol address is an address where the address has been substituted with an alias. Assign an alias to

addresses in [Symbol manager] in the [Project] menu.

234 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

 [Fig. Registering addresses in the symbol manager]

Symbols are visible in the address entry window only when there is a symbol list in the symbol manager.

When an address is entered, the address is saved with the newly assigned alias.

[Fig. Symbol address entry]

After assigning and registering the alias [Temperature] to station [D0000] in the symbol manager, register

the symbol address as [Temperature] as shown above. ( ☞ See [7.11] in [chapter 7] for the symbol

manager.)

(5) Offset address

An offset address can additionally be set for each address. In this function, the station number resulting

from adding the value of the offset address to the actual address can be used. If the type is set to

offset, the keypad is changed as seen in the figure below. The actual address, Address, and the offset

address, Offset, can be set.

[Fig. Offset address]

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 235

 The address set in the Address page is the actual address. The address set in the Offset page is the

address to use as the offset value. The actual operating address becomes [Address station + value of

the Offset address]. For example, if the Address is [D0020], the Offset address is [D0300] and the data

at [D0300] is [0], the actual operating address is [D0020]. If the data at [D0300] is [21], the actual

operating address becomes [D0041].

9.2.2 Entering addresses using the keyboard

Addresses are manually entered using the keyboard. First, select [Address type] in the combo box.

[Fig. Address type]

Next, manually enter the address, according to the format of the selected address type.

(1) Automatic address display function

The address range, station range, and the number of places in the station number are displayed

automatically in a popup hint. If the address entry window is empty, a range of available addresses is

displayed.

[Fig. Automatic address range display]

When an address range is selected, a simple explanation of the selected address range, and the range of

available stations are displayed.

[Fig. Automatic station number range display]

Enter the station number, according to the range of available station numbers. After entering the station

number, press the [ENTER] key on the keyboard. The number of places in the addresses is matched

automatically.

[Fig. Automatic station number place number matching function]

236 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

(2) Automatic error display function
If an accurate address is entered, the address is displayed in green, and [OK] is displayed beneath

[Fig. When an accurate address has been entered]

If an improper address has been entered, the address is displayed in red, and [data error] is displayed

beneath. This prevents entry of improper addresses.

[Fig. When an improper address has been entered]

9.2.3 Entering addresses using the address keypad

Enter addresses using the calculator shaped button ( ) to the right of the address input area.

[Fig. Address keypad]

(1) Address input order

First, select [Address type].

[Fig. Address type]

Next, select the [Address range] according to the address type selected. When the address type is selected,

a list of address ranges is automatically displayed.

[Fig. Address range]

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 237

 When PLC is selected as the [Address type], the address ranges of the applicable PLC are automatically

displayed as a list in the combo box in [Address range]. Lastly, enter the station number, according to the

range and number of places. The station can be entered using the keyboard, or using the number keypad

toward the bottom of the address keypad. In the address keypad, like address entry using the keyboard,

when a station number is entered, whether the entered station address conforms to the format of the

address is displayed.

(2) Error display

When an accurate address is entered, [OK] is displayed beneath the station input window.

[Fig. When an accurate address has been entered]

If an improper address has been entered, the background of the station number is displayed in red, and

[Error] is displayed beneath the station input window. This prevents entry of improper addresses.

[Fig. When an improper address has been entered]

When the [OK] button is pressed with an improper address entered, an error message is shown.

[Fig. Error Message]

(3) Input button

This button is used to enter the station number.

Button Description

Select all stations of the entered address.

Deletes the station number for the selected addresses.

The function is the same as the backspace key; the station numbers of the address entered are erased

one by one.

[Fig. Numeric keypad of the address keypad]

238 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

 Numeric keypad Description

A~F These keys are for entry of hexadecimal data.

0~9 These are the 10 numeric keys.

. This is the decimal key.

ok After completing address entry, press the [OK] button to complete address entry.

(4) Entering internal/special/symbol addresses

The address keypad for entering internal addresses/special addresses/symbol addresses is as follows.

Internal address Special address Symbol address

After entering the station number for

Select special address, the press the Select symbol address, the press the
the internal address, press the [OK]
[OK] button. [OK] button.
button.

9.3 Color palette

The color palette is used when selecting colors for the project. In addition to the default colors in the

color palette, desired colors can be registered and used. The color palette is as follows.

[Fig. Color palette]

On the right, the default colors and the My colors palette are shown.

On the left, there is a palette where detailed colors can be selected using the mouse.

On the bottom right corner, the color is displayed as RGB values.

9.3.1 Selecting colors from basic colors.

The color palette provides 48 basic colors.

[Fig. Basic colors]

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 239

 When a basic color is selected, the selected color is marked with a rectangle.

Press the [OK] button to register the color.

Below the color palette, the selected color is displayed. The selected color can be viewed here.

[Fig. Display of the selected color]

9.3.2 Registering/selecting My colors

In [My colors], user defined colors can be registered and used.

(1) Registering user defined colors

[Fig. Registering user defined colors]

To register a [User defined color] in [My colors], first select the part of [My colors] to register the new

color to, then select the user defined color. If the part to register the new color is not selected in [My

colors], the new color is registered in the first space in [My colors]. To select a user defined color, select a

default color in the large circle to the left, or in [Basic colors]. The rectangular portion displays the

selected color with varying brightness/saturation. Use the mouse to select the [User defined color] from

here.

The selected color can be viewed using the RGB data displayed on the bottom, and the [Expressing the

selected color] portion. To register a selected color in [My colors], press the button. A use

defined color can be used in various parts of the project, once registered.

(2) Selecting colors in My colors

In the project, select a color registered in [My colors], and press the [OK] button.

9.3.3 RGB input/selection

In the color palette, RGB color codes can be entered to set the color. RGB is a code used to determine

colors using combinations of R=Red, G=Green, and B=Blue.

[Fig. RGB color code input]

240 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

 By referring to RGB color codes, individual RGB values can be designated. Click the RGB value input part.

The values can be set easily using the [Slide adjusting bar] as seen in the figure above.

9.4 Image library

[Image library] is used when registering images in touch tags or lamp tags.

[Image library] shows the bitmap images provided by default in the XDesignerPlus4 program. From here,

images can be registered in projects. Users can also add new images, and newly added images can be

registered in projects. When [Image library] is run from the [Tools] menu, or the button is pressed in

the part of a tag using a bitmap, [Image library] is displayed.

[Fig. Image library]

9.4.1 Composition of the image library

The left side has an explorer structure. When each list is selected, the images in the selected list are

shown on the right side. Select and drag&drop and image into the [SELECT] box. Press [OK] to select the

image.

On top, there are the [Library Add/Del], [File Add/Del], [Show Image info], and [New My Button] buttons.

(1) Library structure

Images are in the installation path where XDesignerPlus4 is installed. The default path is

[C:\Program Files\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\library].

① Top button

[Fig. Top button]

Button Description

Library Add Add a new folder to the selected folder.

Delete the selected folder. When a folder is deleted, child folders and images in the folder
Library Del
are also deleted. The following confirmation message is shown.

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 241

 Add a image to the selected folder. When the file add button is selected, the [Open

picture] window where the image to add is selected is show.n The types of images that can

be registered are [*.bmp], [*.jpg], [*.jpeg], [*.mbs].

File Add

Delete the selected image. When the file del button is clicked, the following confirmation

message is shown.

File Del

Image for the selected image is shown on the bottom right.

Show Image Info

The path, color, image size, and file size of the image is shown.

My button maker is opened for creation of a new button.

New My Button This is equivalent to running [My button maker] in the [Tools] menu.

(☞ See [44.7] in [chapter 44] for instructions on using My button maker.)

9.4.2 Image registration

When a folder is selected, the images contained in the folder are shown on the bottom right corner.

Select and register the images to register to the image. The selected images can be registered using
mouse drag&drop, or using the [+] button. Registered images can be removed using the [-] button.

[Fig. Image registration]

After completing image registration, press the button on the bottom to end image registration.

242 CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings

CHAPTER 10 Bit Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 9 -Common Tag Settings 243

CHAPTER 10 - Bit Lamp Tag

10.1 Bit Lamp Tag Overview

A bit lamp tag is a tag that indicates the ON/OFF status of a set bit address using a colored

circle/rectangle or image. This is the properties screen for bit lamp tags.

[Fig. Bit lamp properties screen]

In [Touch tag type] of the properties screen, the type is set depending on the use. To use the touch

function only, check [Touch] only. To use the lamp function only, check [Lamp] only. To use both

functions, check both [Touch] and [Lamp]. If the lamp function has been checked, the touch tag type

becomes [Bit lamp/word lamp/N lamp/Bit select] according to the selections in [Bit, Word, N state, Bit

select]. For bit lamp tags, check [Lamp] only, and select [Bit].

10.2 Page composition of the bit lamp properties screen

The bit lamp tag properties screen comprises the [Display] and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Displays On this page, the shape and address of the lamp, and the caption are set.

On this page, bit lamp tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information
created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be edited.

10.3 Display page

On this page, the shape and address of the lamp, and the caption are set.

244 CHAPTER 10 -Bit Lamp Tag

 [Fig. Bit lamp display page]

10.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL)

Select the shape type and set the shape of the lamp. Shape types are : [None Edge], [Rectangle], [Circle],

[Paint], and [Bitmap].

[Fig. Shape Types]

Shape Types Description

None Edge This is a rectangular lamp without edges.

Rectangle This is a rectangular lamp with edges.

Circle Thie is a circular lamp.

Paint With this lamp, a closed shape that has already been drawn is filled with color.

Bitmap Image lamp.

(1) Shape lamp

[None Edge], [Rectangle], [Circle] and [Paint] shape types are called shape lamps.

The color of the line is the color of the boundaries of the outlines of the shape. Among shape lamps, the

line color is designated for [Rectangle] and [Circle]. Among shape lamps, [None Edge] and [Paint] do not

have edges. Therefore, no line color is designated. Therefore, when [None Edge] or [Paint] is selected in

shape type, the part for setting the [Line Color] is disabled.

(2) Image lamp

When the shape type has been set as [Bitmap], the lamp is called an image lamp.

[Fig. Bitmap(image) lamp]

CHAPTER 10 -Bit Lamp Tag 245

 When [Bitmap(bitmap image)] is selected as the shape type, the button is shown on the right side.

When the button is clicked, the [Image Library] is displayed, and the ON/OFF images can be selected.

In the [Image Library], the images provided by default in the XDesignerPlus program, and images added

by the user ([*.bmp], [*.jpg], [*.jpeg]) can be registered as the images for ON/OFF lamps.

(☞ See [9.4] of [chapter 9] for info on the image library.)

[Fig. Image library]

[Image Transparency] is a function that makes the black background of a registered image transparent, if

the background color of the screen to register is not black.

10.3.2 Lamp setup

The bit address, the ON/OFF color of the shape lamp, and the blink/hide/reverse display effects are set.

[Fig. Lamp setup]

Lamp setup Description

Lamp address Enter the bit address to display the ON/OFF state for.

This is the color of the lamp that is shown when lamp address data is [OFF].
Off color
This setting applies to shape lamps, and is disabled for image lamps.

This is the color of the lamp that is shown when lamp address data is [ON].
ON color
This setting applies to shape lamps, and is disabled for image lamps.

Effect This function applies a highlight effect to the lamp that is displayed.

(Effect) [Blink], [Hide] and [Reverse] effects are available.

246 CHAPTER 10 -Bit Lamp Tag

 [Fig. OFF effect] [Fig. ON effect]

No reverse function is provided for the [OFF effect].

The [Blink] and [Hide] effects cannot be used at the same time for ON and OFF.

None No effect function is used.

The lamp appears and disappears (turns on/turns off) at 0.5 second intervals.

Blink When this option is checked for OFF, the [OFF] lamp appears and disappears.

When this option is checked for ON, the [ON] lamp appears and disappears.

This function is used to hide the lamp.

Hide When this option is checked for OFF, the [OFF lamp] is not shown when OFF.

When this option is checked for ON, the [ON lamp] is not shown when ON.

This function is used to emphasize the ON state. When ON, the ON and OFF lamps are
Reverse
alternately displayed at 0.5 second intervals.

10.3.3 Caption
Caption is a function used to write text on ON/OFF lamps.

[Fig. Caption]

The text on the left is the text written on the OFF lamp, and the text on the right is the text to be written

on the ON lamp. These can be set individually, and settings made on one side can be sent to the

opposite side using the arrow buttons in the center. The text input method is the same as the method for
entering [Shape]-[String].

(☞ See [8.6] in [chapter 8] for instructions on how to enter text.)

CHAPTER 10 -Bit Lamp Tag 247

 CHAPTER 11 Word Lamp Tag

248 CHAPTER 10 -Bit Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 11 - Word Lamp Tag

11.1 Word Lamp Tag Overview

A word lamp tag is a tag that shows the data for a set word address using a colored circle/rectangle or

image. A word address generally refers to a [16bit] address. This is the properties screen for word lamp

tags.

[Fig. Word lamp properties screen]

In [Touch tag type] of the properties screen, the type is set depending on the use. To use the touch

function only, check [Touch] only. To use the lamp function only, check [Lamp] only. To use both

functions, check both [Touch] and [Lamp]. If the lamp function has been checked, the touch tag type

becomes [Bit lamp/word lamp/N lamp/Bit select] according to the selections in [Bit, Word, N state, Bit

select]. For word lamp tags, check [Lamp] only, and select [Word].

11.2 Page composition of the word lamp properties screen

The word lamp tag properties screen comprises the [Display], [Case], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

On this page, the shape of the base lamp that is displayed when there is no lamp address or case,
Displays
and captions can be set.

Case On this page, the shape and the captions to be displayed depending on the case are set.

On this page, word lamp tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information
created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be edited.

CHAPTER 11 -Word Lamp Tag 249

11.3 Display page

A word lamp tag is a tag that displays word address data using lamps. In the display page, the word

address is entered, and the shape and caption of the base lamp that is shown when there is no case is set.

11.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL)

[Fig. Display setting]

Select the shape type and set the shape of the lamp. Shape types are : [None Edge], [Rectangle], [Circle],

[Paint], and [Bitmap].

[Fig. Shape Types]

Shape Types Description

None Edge This is a rectangular lamp without edges.

Rectangle This is a rectangular lamp with edges.

Circle This is a circular lamp.

Paint With this lamp, a closed shape that has already been drawn is filled with color.

Bitmap Image lamp.

(1) Shape lamp

[None Edge], [Rectangle], [Circle] and [Paint] shape types are called shape lamps.

The color of the line is the color of the boundaries of the outlines of the shape. Among shape lamps, the

line color is designated for [Rectangle] and [Circle]. Among shape lamps, [None Edge] and [Paint] do not

have edges. Therefore, no line color is designated. Therefore, when [None Edge] or [Paint] is selected in

shape type, the part for setting the [Line Color] is disabled.

The fill color refers to the color inside the shape. Set the default color that is displayed when the

conditions set in the [Case] page are not satisfied.

(2) Image lamp

When the shape type has been set as [Bitmap], the lamp is called an image lamp.
Set the default image that is displayed when the conditions set in the [Case] page are not satisfied.

250 CHAPTER 11 -Word Lamp Tag

 [Fig. Bitmap(image) lamp]

When [Bitmap(bitmap image)] is selected as the shape type, the button is shown on the right side.

When the button is clicked, the [Image Library] is displayed, and the image can be selected. In the

[Image Library], the images provided by default in the XDesignerPlus program, and images added by the

user ([*.bmp], [*.jpg], [*.jpeg]) can be registered as the images for lamps.

(☞ See [9.4] of [chapter 9] for info on the image library.)

[Fig. Image library]

[Image Transparency] is a function that makes the black background of a registered image transparent, if

the background color of the screen to register is not black.

11.3.2 Lamp Setup

In the lamp settings part, the lamp address is set. Because the tag is a word lamp tag, a word address is

entered.

[Fig. Lamp setup]

Lamp setup Description

Using the lamp address as [Float], the address can be displayed with the lamp with decimal

places. When [Use float] is checked, the data for the minimum/maximum values in the [Case]
Use float
page can also be entered as float type (decimals).

This cannot be used together with [Use bit definition].

In use bit definition, the [Word Address] which is the case address is changed to binary.

Use bit definition For example, if the case address is [D0000] and the data at station [D0000] is [2000], [2000] is

changed to binary : [0000/0111/1101/0000].

CHAPTER 11 -Word Lamp Tag 251

 When the start bit is set to [2] and the length is set to [4], only 4 bits from the second bit of

[0000/0111/11[01/00]00] are used. [0100] changed to a decimal number becomes [4]. This cannot

be used together with [Use float].

11.3.3 Caption
Caption is a function used to write text on lamps. Set the caption of the default lamp that is displayed

when the conditions set in the [Case] page are not satisfied.

[Fig. Caption settings]

The text input method is the same as the method for entering [Shape]-[String].

(☞ See [8.6] in [chapter 8] for instructions on how to enter text.)

11.4 Case page

Set the shape and caption of the lamps to be displayed depending on the case. Up to 64 lamps can be

set for different cases.

[Fig. Word lamp case page]

11.4.1 CASE List

This is a list of set cases. Up to 64 cases can be set for word lamps.

[Fig. Case list]

In the bottom, set the case and lamp shape. Then use the [Add/Modify/Delete] buttons to add to the list.

252 CHAPTER 11 -Word Lamp Tag

Also, using the [DOWN/UP] buttons, the order of the list can be changed. When there are two cases

satisfying the conditions, the lamp for the case that is higher in the list is displayed.

11.4.2 Condition setting

For word lamp tags, functions are expanded, and bit conditions can be set in addition to word conditions.

(1) Bit condition

Lamps can be displayed according to the [ON/OFF] status of the bit address. Enter the bit address in

[Condition bit], and select the OFF/ON button. Set the bit condition, and set the lamp shape in the

bottom, then add to the case list.

[Fig. Bit condition]

(2) Word condition

Lamps are displayed according to the data of the word address set in the [Display] page. Using word

conditions, lamps can be displayed by range. Alternatively, lamps can be displayed when the data has a

certain value.

[Fig. Word condition]

Word condition Description

[a] is the minimum value, [X] is the word address set in the display page, and [b] is the

maximum value.

Range setting address

[a<X] is the condition where the data is greater than the minimum value. [X<b] is the

condition where the data is smaller than the maximum value. [a<X<b] is the condition

where the data is between the minimum value and the maximum value. For the [<]

operator, many comparison operators can be selected from.

Many comparison operators can be selected from.

Operators

CHAPTER 11 -Word Lamp Tag 253

 [<] means the right operand is [Greater] than the left operand. Alternatively, it means the

left operand is [Less] than the right operand. [<=] means the right operand is [Greater or

equal to] the left operand. Alternatively, it means the left operand is [Less than or equal

to] the right operand. [==] means the left operand and the right operand are [Equal]. [!=]

means the left operand and the right operand are [Not equal].

Minimum value This is the minimum value to compare in the word condition. Set the constant value.

Maximum value This is the maximum value to compare in the word condition. Set the constant value.

11.4.3 Caption and lamp shape setting

(1) Caption setting
Caption is a function used to write text on lamps. Each lamp can be set with a different caption.

[Fig. Caption settings]

The text input method is the same as the method for entering [Shape]-[String].

(☞ See [8.6] in [chapter 8] for instructions on how to enter text.)

(2) Lamp shape setting

Set the lamp shape for each case.

Lamp shape setting Description

Set the color of the lamp.

Shape lamp

Select the image of the lamp.

Image lamp

When the button is clicked, the [Image Library] is displayed, and the image can be

selected.

To emphasize the lamp, display effects such as blink or reverse can be applied.

Effect
In the [Blink] effect, the lamp appears and disappears in 0.5 second intervals.

In the [Reverse] effect, the lamp and the base lamp set in the [Display] page is displayed

alternately in 0.5 second intervals.

254 CHAPTER 11 -Word Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 12 N Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 11 -Word Lamp Tag 255

CHAPTER 12 - N Lamp Tag

12.1 N Lamp Tag Overview

The N lamp tag is a tag that indicates the state of ON/OFF combinations of [2/3/4] bit addresses using

rectangular/circular color or image lamps. The N lamp tag is used to display the status of multiple bit

addresses in one location. This is the properties screen for N lamp tags.

[Fig. N lamp properties screen]

In [Touch tag type] of the properties screen, the type is set depending on the use. To use the touch

function only, check [Touch] only. To use the lamp function only, check [Lamp] only. To use both

functions, check both [Touch] and [Lamp].

If the lamp function has been checked, the touch tag type becomes [Bit lamp/word lamp/N lamp/Bit

select] according to the selections in [Bit, Word, N state, Bit select]. For N lamp tags, check [Lamp] only,

and select [N-State].

12.2 Page composition of the N lamp properties screen

The N lamp tag properties screen comprises the [Display] and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

On this page, the shape and the captions to be displayed depending on bit address combination
Displays
are set.

On this page, N lamp tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information
created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be edited.

12.3 Display page

On this page, the shape and the captions to be displayed depending on the [2/3/4] bit address

combinations are set.

256 CHAPTER 12 -N Lamp Tag

 [Fig. N lamp display page]

12.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL)

[Fig. Display setting]

Select the shape type and set the shape of the lamp. Shape types are: [None Edge], [Rectangle], [Circle],

[Paint], and [Bitmap].

[Fig. Shape Types]

Shape Types Description

None Edge This is a rectangular lamp without edges.

Rectangle This is a rectangular lamp with edges.

Circle This is a circular lamp.

Paint With this lamp, a closed shape that has already been drawn is filled with color.

Bitmap Image lamp.

(1) Shape lamp

[None Edge], [Rectangle], [Circle] and [Paint] shape types are called shape lamps.

The color of the line is the color of the boundaries of the outlines of the shape. Among shape lamps, the

line color is designated for [Rectangle] and [Circle]. Among shape lamps, [None Edge] and [Paint] do not

have edges. Therefore, no line color is designated. Therefore, when [None Edge] or [Paint] is selected in
shape type, the part for setting the [Line Color] is disabled.

The color of shape lamps is entered when setting the lamp shape depending on the ON/OFF combination

in the bottom.

CHAPTER 12 -N Lamp Tag 257

 [Fig. Lamp color input]

(2) Image lamp

When the shape type has been set as [Bitmap], the lamp is called an image lamp.

[Fig. Bitmap(image) lamp]

When [Bitmap(bitmap image)] is selected as the shape type, the button is shown on the right side.

When the button is clicked, the [Image Library] is displayed, and the image can be selected.

In the [Image Library], the images provided by default in the XDesignerPlus program, and images added

by the user ([*.bmp], [*.jpg], [*.jpeg]) can be registered as the images for lamps.

(☞ See [9.4] of [chapter 9] for info on the image library.)

[Fig. Image library]

[Image Transparency] is a function that makes the black background of a registered image transparent, if

the background color of the screen to register is not black. The image for image lamps lamps is entered

when setting the lamp shape depending on the ON/OFF combination in the bottom.

[Fig. Lamp image selection]

12.3.2 Range setup

The lamp shape is set according to the lamp address combination.

258 CHAPTER 12 -N Lamp Tag

 [Fig. Range setup]

(1) 4-lamp (4 phase lamp)

This lamp uses two lamp addresses. The 2 lamp addresses create 4 combinations, and 4 lamps are

registered, making this a 4 phase lamp. When [4-lamp] is selected, two address input parts are shown : [1]

and [2]. After setting the address, set the shape of the lamp according to the ON/OFF data combination

of the bit address set below.

[Fig. 4-lamp shape setting]

4-lamp Description

Number This number is assigned sequentially, depending on the number of lamps.

1 Is matched with data for address [1].

2 Is matched with data for address [2].

Set the lamp color or image depending on the ON/OFF data combination of [1] and [2].
Color/image
Set the color in the [Color palette] that pops up when clicked.

Write the text over the lamp. Enter the text in the [Text input screen] which pops up when double

clicked.

Text

The text input method is the same as the method for entering [Shape]-[String].

(☞ See [8.6] in [chapter 8] for instructions on how to enter text.)

Set a blink/reverse effect to emphasize the lamp. Double clicking brings up an arrow. Click again to

bring up the list.

Effect

CHAPTER 12 -N Lamp Tag 259

 In the [Blink] effect, the lamp appears and disappears in 0.5 second intervals. In the [Reverse] effect,

the lamp and the base lamp set in the [Display] page is displayed alternately in 0.5 second intervals.

(2) 8-lamp (8 phase lamp)

This lamp uses 3 lamp addresses. The 3 lamp addresses create 8 combinations, and 8 lamps are registered,

making this an 8 phase lamp.

[Fig. 8-lamp (8 phase lamp)]

When [8-lamp] is selected, three address input parts are shown : [1], [2] and [3]. After setting the address,

set the shape of the lamp according to the ON/OFF data combination of the bit address set below.

8-lamp Description

Number This number is assigned sequentially, depending on the number of lamps.

1 Is matched with data for address [1].

2 Is matched with data for address [2].

3 Is matched with data for address [3].

Set the lamp color or image depending on the ON/OFF data combination of [1], [2] and [3].
Color/image
Set the color in the [Color palette] that pops up when clicked.

Write the text over the lamp. Enter the text in the [Text input screen] which pops up when double

clicked.

Text

The text input method is the same as the method for entering [Shape]-[String]. (☞ See [8.6] in
[chapter 8] for instructions on how to enter text.)

Set a blink/reverse effect to emphasize the lamp. Double clicking brings up an arrow. Click again

to bring up the list.

Effect

In the [Blink] effect, the lamp appears and disappears in 0.5 second intervals. In the [Reverse]

effect, the lamp and the base lamp set in the [Display] page is displayed alternately in 0.5 second

intervals.

260 CHAPTER 12 -N Lamp Tag

(3) 16-lamp (6 phase lamp)
This lamp uses 4 lamp addresses. The 4 lamp addresses create 16 combinations, and 16 lamps are

registered, making this a 16 phase lamp.

[Fig. 16-lamp (16 phase lamp)]

When [16-lamp] is selected, four address input parts are shown: [1], [2], [3] and [4]. After setting the

address, set the shape of the lamp according to the ON/OFF data combination of the bit address set

below.

16-lamp Description

Number This number is assigned sequentially, depending on the number of lamps.

1 Is matched with data for address [1].

2 Is matched with data for address [2].

3 Is matched with data for address [3].

4 Is matched with data for address [4].

Set the lamp color or image depending on the ON/OFF data combination of [1], [2] ,[3] and [4].
Color/image
Set the color in the [Color palette] that pops up when clicked.

Write the text over the lamp. Enter the text in the [Text input screen] which pops up when double

clicked.

Text

The text input method is the same as the method for entering [Shape]-[String]. (☞ See [8.6] in
[chapter 8] for instructions on how to enter text.)

Set a blink/reverse effect to emphasize the lamp. Double clicking brings up an arrow. Click again to

bring up the list.

Effect

In the [Blink] effect, the lamp appears and disappears in 0.5 second intervals. In the [Reverse] effect,

the lamp and the base lamp set in the [Display] page is displayed alternately in 0.5 second intervals.

CHAPTER 12 -N Lamp Tag 261

 CHAPTER 13 Bit Select Lamp Tag

262 CHAPTER 12 -N Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 13 - Bit Select Lamp Tag

13.1 Bit Select Lamp Tag Overview

The bit select lamp tag is illuminated according to the ON/OFF state of multiple bit addresses.

Up to 8 bit addresses can be set.

[Fig. Bit lamp properties screen]

In [Touch tag type] of the properties screen, the type is set depending on the use. To use the touch

function only, check [Touch] only. To use the lamp function only, check [Lamp] only. To use both

functions, check both [Touch] and [Lamp].

If the lamp function has been checked, the touch tag type becomes [Bit lamp/word lamp/N lamp/Bit

select] according to the selections in [Bit, Word, N state, Bit select]. For bit select lamp tags, check

[Lamp] only, and select [Bit Select].

13.2 Page composition of the bit lamp properties screen

The bit select lamp tag properties screen comprises the [Display] and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Displays On this page, the shape and address of the lamp, and the caption are set.

On this page, bit select lamp tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be

edited.

CHAPTER 13 -Bit Select Lamp Tag 263

13.3 Display page

On this page, the shape and address of the lamp, and the caption are set.

13.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL)

Select the shape type and set the shape of the lamp. Shape types are : [None Edge], [Rectangle], [Circle],

and [Bitmap].

[Fig. Shape Types]

Shape Types Description

None Edge This is a rectangular lamp without edges.

Rectangle This is a rectangular lamp with edges.

Circle This is a circular lamp.

Bitmap Image lamp.

(1) Shape lamp

[None Edge], [Rectangle], and [Circle] shape types are called shape lamps. The color of the line is the color

of the boundaries of the outlines of the shape.

Among shape lamps, the line color is designated for [Rectangle] and [Circle]. Among shape lamps, [None

Edge] does not have edges. Therefore, no line color is designated.

(2) Image lamp

When the shape type has been set as [Bitmap], the lamp is called an image lamp.

[Fig. Bitmap lamp]

When [Bitmap(bitmap image)] is selected as the shape type, the button is shown on the right side.

When the button is clicked, the [Image Library] is displayed, and the image can be selected.

In the [Image Library], the images provided by default in the XDesignerPlus program, and images added

by the user ([*.bmp], [*.jpg], [*.jpeg]) can be registered.

(☞ See [9.4] of [chapter 9] for info on the image library.)

264 CHAPTER 13 -Bit Select Lamp Tag

 [Fig. Image library]

[Image Transparency] is a function that makes the black background of a registered image transparent, if

the background color of the screen to register is not black.

13.3.2 Range setup

Set the number of lamps, and set a number of bit addresses equal to the number of lamps.

Set the lamp shape, text, and reverse/blink/hide display effects for each bit address.

Menu Description

Lamp count The lamp count is the number of bit addresses. Up to 8 an be set.

Bit address Boxes for entering bit addresses are created. The number of boxes is equal to the lamp count.

Set the lamp shape for each of the address numbers.

Menu Description

No This is the number of the lamp.

If shape lamp has been selected in shape type, set the color of the lamp. If bitmap has been set,
Color/Image
select the image.

Text Enter the text to register over the lamp.

This function applies a highlight effect to the lamp that is displayed. [Blink] and [Reverse] effects

are available.
Effect
None No effect function is used.
(Effect)
Blink The lamp appears and disappears (turns on/turns off) at 0.5 second intervals.

Reverse The lamp and the OFF lamp are displayed alternately in 0.5 second intervals.

CHAPTER 13 -Bit Select Lamp Tag 265

 CHAPTER 14 Touch Tag

266 CHAPTER 13 -Bit Select Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 14 - Touch Tag

14.1 Touch tag overview

A touch tag is a button where a touch area is set, and the set action is performed when that area is

touched.

The actions performed by the touch tag are as follow.

1. Changes the ON/OFF data of bit addresses.

2. Word address data is changed.

3. Allows input of numbers or letters using number and letter keys.

4. Performs special functions such as screen transitions or moving to the menu screen.

This is the properties screen for touch tags.

[Fig. Touch tag properties screen]

The touch tag type can be set freely. In [Touch tag type] of the properties screen, the type is set

depending on the use. To use the touch function only, check [Touch] only. To use the lamp function only,

check [Lamp] only. To use both functions, check both [Touch] and [Lamp]. If the lamp function has been

checked, the touch tag type becomes [Bit lamp/word lamp/N lamp/Bit select] according to the

selections in [Bit, Word, N state, Bit select]. For touch tags, check only [Touch].

14.2 Page composition of the touch tag properties screen

The bit lamp tag properties screen comprises the [Display] and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Displays This page is the touch button shape and caption setting page.

Interlock This page is the page for setting conditions for touch button action.

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 267

 Calculation This page is the page for setting the action to be performed by touch buttons.

On this page, touch tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can

be edited.

14.3 Display page

This page is the touch button shape and caption setting page.

14.3.1 Display settings (VISUAL)

Select the shape type and set the shape of the touch button. Shape types are : [None Edge],

[Rectangle], [Circle], and [Bitmap].

[Fig. Shape Types]

Shape Types Description

None edge This is a rectangular touch button without edges.

Rectangle This is a rectangular touch button with edges.

Circle This is a circular touch button.

Bitmap This is an image touch button.

(1) Shape touch button

[None Edge], [Rectangle], and [Circle] shape types are called shape touch buttons.

[Fig. Shape touch button]

The color of the line is the color of the boundaries of the outlines of the shape. Among shape touch

buttons, the line color is designated for [Rectangle] and [Circle]. Among shape touch buttons, [None Edge]

does not have edges. Therefore, no line color is designated. Therefore, when [None Edge] is selected in

shape type, the part for setting the [Line Color] is disabled.

(2) Image touch button

When the shape type has been set as [Bitmap], the touch button is called an image touch button.

268 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

 [Fig. Bitmap(image) touch button]

When [Bitmap(bitmap image)] is selected as the shape type, the button is shown on the right side.

When the button is clicked, the [Image Library] is displayed, and the image can be selected.

In the [Image Library], the images provided by default in the XDesignerPlus program, and images added

by the user ([*.bmp], [*.jpg], [*.jpeg]) can be registered as the images for lamps.

(☞ See [9.4] of [chapter 9] for info on the image library.)

[Fig. Image library]

[Image Transparency] is a function that makes the black background of a registered image transparent,

if the background color of the screen to register is not black.

(3) Mute on touch/Buzz on (TouchPressed)

Touch sound Description

When the touch button is touched, a short "beep" is sounded.

Mute on touch
To remove this sound, check "Mute on Touch".

Buzz On When a touch button is selected, a long "Beep~" is sounded until another touch button is

(TouchPressed) touched.

14.3.2 Touch color

For shape touch buttons, set the fill color and fill style.

[Fig. Touch color]

Touch color Description

Fill style Select between [NoPaint] and [Solid].

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 269

 In [NoPaint], the inner color of the touch button is empty. When this is selected, [Fill Color] is

disabled. In [Solid], the touch button is filled with a color.

Fill Color Set the inner color of the touch button.

Set whether to show the fill color when a touch button is touched. In NoPaint, no color is shown

when touched. In XOR Color, the touch color and the color set in XOR color are 'XOR'ed and
Touch Fill Style
displayed when touched.

In Image, the set image is displayed when touched.

XOR Color This is the color that is 'XOR'ed with the color of the button when a touch button is touched.

14.3.3 Caption
Caption is a function used to write text on touch buttons.

[Fig. Caption]

The text input method is the same as the method for entering [Shape]-[String].

(☞ See [8.6] in [chapter 8] for instructions on how to enter text.)

14.4 Interlock page

This page is the page for setting conditions for touch button action. If no conditions are set, the set

action is performed each time a touch button is touched. When conditions are touched, the set action

is performed only if conditions are satisfied when a touch button is touched. [Bit state] and [Word

value] conditions are provided.

[Fig. Touch tag interlock page]

270 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

 14.4.1 Bit state condition
When a bit address has been designated, and the designated bit address satisfied the [Operation Bit]

conditions, the designated action is performed when a touch button is touched.

Bit state condition Description

Address Set the bit address to set as the condition.

The designated action is performed only when a touch button is touched when the data of
When the operation
the designated bit address is OFF. If the data of the bit address is ON, the touch button does
bit is 'OFF',
not operate.

the designated action is performed only when a touch button is touched when the data of
When the operation
the designated bit address is ON. If the data of the bit address is OFF, the touch button does
bit is 'ON',
not operate.

14.4.2 Word value condition

When a word address has been designated, and the designated bit address satisfied the [Word value]

condition, the designated action is performed when a touch button is touched.

[Fig. Word value condition]

Word value condition Description

Address Set the word address to set as the condition.

Enter the minimum and maximum values. If the word address data is within the range

between the minimum and maximum value, the designated action is performed when the
Word range
touch button is touched. If the word address data is not in the range between the

minimum and maximum values, the touch button does not operate.

14.5 Operation page

This page is the page for setting the action to be performed by touch buttons. The top of the

operation page is the [Operation list], and the bottom of the [Operation setting] part. In the operation

setting part, the action to be performed by the touch button is set, and added to the operation list. Up

to 10 actions can be performed at once by a touch button. Therefore, up to 10 items can be added to

the [Operation list].

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 271

 [Fig. Touch tag operation page]

14.5.1 Operation list

A list of the operations to be performed by a touch button is shown.

[Fig. Operation list]

Operation list Description

This number is assigned sequentially whenever an operation is added.

No
When a touch button is touched, operations are performed according to this number.
(Number)
The number can be changed using the button.

Operation
Operations are shown in [BIT], [WORD], [KEY], and [SPECIAL] categories.
(Operation)

The set data type is shown.

Data Type
[DEC] is signed decimal, [UDEC] is unsigned decimal, [HEX] is hexademical, and [BCD] is a
(Date Type)
hexadecimal data type that acts like decimal data.

Expression
The set operation is displayed as an expression.
(Expression)

After setting the operation to be performed by a touch button in the lower [Operation settings] part,

the [Add], [Modify] and [Delete] buttons must be used to register the operation in the [Operation list].

Button Description

Registers the set operation.

Modifies the content of a registered operation.

Deletes a registered operation.

272 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

When settings have been changed in operation settings, but not reflected in the [Operation List], the

following confirmation message is shown when the touch tag properties screen is closed.

[Fig. Confirmation message]

Click the [Yes] button to reflect settings. The registered details are changed, and the properties screen is

closed. If the [No] button is pressed, the properties screen is closed without reflecting settings.

14.5.2 Operation settings

There are four type of touch button action: [Bit operation], [Word operation], [Key input], and [Special

function].

(1) Bit operation

Bit operations are operations that turn bit address data ON/OFF. Bit address data only has [0] and [1]

data. [0] is [OFF] and [1] is [ON].

[Fig. Bit operation]

Bit operation Description

ADDRESS Enter the bit address to operate.

ON Press the touch button to turn the data of the bit address [ON].

OFF Press the touch button to turn the data of the bit address [OFF].

Press the touch button to turn the data of the bit address [OFF] if the data is
OPERATION Reverse
currently [ON], and [ON] if the data is currently [OFF].

ON when When the touch button is pressed, the data of the bit address is turned [ON].

pressed only The data is turned [OFF] when touch is ended.

(2) Bit selection

Select and turn ON the multiple bit addresses set using the touch tag in sequence.
Up to 8 bit addresses can be set. Whenever touched, they are turned ON in sequence, beginning with
number 1. All bit addresses other than the selected bit address are turned OFF.

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 273

 (3) Word operation
Word operation refers to a calculation between word addresses. In this action, word addresses are

substituted with data, or operations are performed with word addresses only, then the result is

substituted in place of a word address.

Word addresses are 16-bit address areas. When the 16 bits of a word address are all 0, changing this to a

decimal number gives [0]. When the 16 bits of a word address are all 1, changing this to a decimal

number gives [65535]. Therefore, the data of the word address has a range of [0 ~ 65535]. In the case of

signed decimals, the range is [-32767 ~ 32768].

[Fig. Word operation]

Word operation Description

Write data size is the size of the address where the result of the operation is saved.

Select between [16 bit] and [32 bit]. [32 bit] also uses the station next to the

Write data size designated address, and is used when saving values greater than [16 bit]. The station of

the designated word address becomes the top word, and the next station of that address

becomes the bottom word.

Operand data size is the size of the address used in the operation formula.

Select between [16 bit] and [32 bit]. [32 bit] also uses the station next to the designated

Operand data size address, and is used when saving values greater than [16 bit]. The station of the

designated word address becomes the top word, and the next station of that address

becomes the bottom word.

Set the data type of the constant value. [DEC] is signed decimal. [UDEC] is unsigned
Const Data Type
decimal. [HEX] is hexadecimal. [BCD] is actually hexadecimal, but is used like decimal

data, because numbers that include A~F are not shown.

274 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

The formula for word operations is set as follows.

[Fig. Word operation formula]

: Address to the left of this sign is the [Output operation address] where the result of the

function is stored.

: Addresses to the right of this sign are the [Operation addresses] used in the operation.

Enter constant values in [Output operation address] using the formula, or perform an operation among

[Operation addresses] and enter the result into [Output operation address].

Up to four operation addresses can be set. Use (semicolons) to indicate the end of the formula.

As seen in the following figure, operation addresses can be set not only as addresses but also as constant

values.

[Fig. Operation address types]

Set the operator between the operation addresses to complete the formula. Click the [Operator button] to

the right of the operation address to bring up the operator list.

[Fig. Operator list]

Operators Description

; Denotes the end of the operation.

+ [Adds] the data of two operation addresses.

- [Subtracts] the data of two operation addresses.

* [Multiplies] the data of two operation addresses.

/ [Divides] the data of two operation addresses.

^ This is a bit operator. [Bit XOR] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

This is the remainder operator. After dividing the data of two operation addresses, the remainder is
%
calculated.

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 275

 & This is a bit operator. [Bit AND] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

| This is a bit operator. [Bit OR] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

This is a bit operator that performs the [Bit left shift] operation. This operator performs a left bit shift

<< operation on the data on the right of the operator. The size of the shift is equal to the data on the left

of the operator.

This is a bit operator that performs the [Bit right shift] operation. This operator performs a right bit shift

>> operation on the data on the left of the operator. The size of the shift is equal to the data on the right

of the operator.

(4) Key registration

Key registration is a function used to create [Numeric keys] or [Character keys] using touch buttons.

First, select whether to register a numeric key or a character key.

[Fig. Key registration]

Select the [Numeric] key to show the following numeric keys, as seen in the figure above.

Numeric key Description

0~9 These are the 10 numeric keys.

A~F These 6 keys are used to enter hexadecimal (HEX) data.

These are the direction keys used to change the position in input mode of the key display tag.

Direction keys
(☞ See [19.4] of [chapter 19] for info on the the input mode of the key display tag.)

- This is the negative number tag.

. This is the decimal key.

Esc This key is used to cancel input.

back Among the entered key data, erase the key that was entered last.

Clear Erase all entered key data.

Enter Enter the input key data into the set address.

Select the [Character] key to show the following character keys, as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Character keys]

276 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

 Character keys Description

Special characters Various special character keys are provided from [~] to [=], as provided on the keyboard.

0~9 These are the 10 numeric keys.

26 English alphabet characters are provided. Uncheck [CapsLock] in the bottom to register lower
A~Z
case letters.

These are the direction keys used to change the position in input mode of the key display tag.
Direction keys
(☞ See [19.4] of [chapter 19] for info on the the input mode of the key display tag.)
Esc This key is used to cancel input.

back Among the entered key data, erase the key that was entered last.

Clear Erase all entered key data.

Enter Enter the input key data into the set address.

space This key is used to enter spaces.

(5) Special functions

These are special functions required for touch operation.

[Fig. Special functions]

There are five major categories for the various special functions.

[Fig. Categories]

Categories Description

SCREEN These are special functions associated with the screen.

PRINT These are special functions associated with printing.

USB/CF These are special functions associated with USB memory storage devices or CF memory cards.

MEMORY These are special functions associated with memory.

Extended TAG These are special functions associated with tags.

ETC These are special functions provided in addition to the categories above.

① [SCREEN] special functions

These are special functions associated with the screen.

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 277

 [Fig. Screen-related special functions]

Screen Description

EXIT Close the run screen and navigate to the main screen.

Previous Screen Navigates to the screen that was open before the current screen.

When a screen number is designated, the screen transitions to the designated screen number.

Screen Change

Touch a touch button registered to the window screen, then touch the base screen. The window
Window Move
screen moves to the coordinates touched on the base screen.

Designate the [Window screen number] or the registered [Window tag ID].

The [Window tag ID] is shown on the [Properties] page of the registered window tag. The window

tag must be designated as [Use touch tag] in properties. When [Window tag ID] has been selected

and designated, the window screen set for the window tag is called. Touch once to pop-up the
Window Popup
designated window screen, and touch again to dismiss the window screen.
(Toggle)

(☞ See [chapter 23~24] for info on window tags.)

Calls the password window screen. Passwords can be entered in the password window screen. The

[Password window screen] is automatically generated when [Set password] is clicked from the

Security Level [Project] menu. The screen can be manually created in the pop-up menu that appears when when

[Window screen] is right-clicked in [Project manager].

(☞ See [7.10] in [chapter 7] for the password setting (security level setting) function.)

② [PRINT] special functions

These are special functions associated with printing. The touch can connect to normal printers or roll

printers (mini printers) for printing.

[Fig. PRINT-related special functions]

Print Description

Print Screen Print the current screen using the connected printer.

278 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

 Print logging data using the connected printer.

Print Logging

[Logging1] through [Logging8] can be set for logging. Enter the logging number to print.

Check [Use sign] to show signs (-) when printing logging data, and output negative data.

Print Alarm Print alarm details using the connected printer.

A roll printer is a small mini computer which can print touch data through 232C communication.

Roll Printer The printer connects to the COM1 port of the touch, and prints data from the editor where the

output content has been edited. (☞ See [4.10] in [chapter 4] for roll printer usage info.)

③ [USB/CF] special functions

These are special functions associated with USB memory storage devices or CF memory cards.

[Fig. USB/CF-related special functions

USB/CF Description

Copy files in the USB memory storage device to the memory of the touch.

USB->HMI

Select the files to copy among OS, font, and project files.

Copy data in the touch to the USB memory storage device.

HMI->USB

Select the files to copy among OS, font, project, logging data, and screen capture files. The [Screen

capture] function captures the current screen and saves the captured image as a bitmap in the USB

memory storage device.

By inserting a CF memory card behind the touch, logging or alarm data can be saved.

Before removing this CF memory card, safely remove the card by clicking the [CF Eject] button.
CF Eject
All logging or alarm data remaining in the touch memory is moved to the CF memory card, and the

connection is removed.

By inserting a CF memory card behind the touch, logging or alarm data can be saved.
CF Update
When logging or alarm data is saved using a CF memory card, logging or alarm data in the touch

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 279

 memory is automatically moved to the CF memory card when a certain size has been exceeded. The

[CF Update] function moves logging or alarm data to the CF memory card, even if a certain size has

not been reached.

④ [MEMORY] special functions

These are special functions associated with memory.

[Fig. Memory-related special functions]

Memory Description

This can only be used when using recipe settings into the project.

The saved recipe data is copied to another block, in block units.

Recipe Block Copy

Only internal addresses can be set for [From Reference (reference address to copy)] and

[To Reference (reference address to copy)]. The data of these addresses become the

numbers for the blocks.

Data length does not apply, and does not have to be entered. When the settings above

are applied, with the data at internal address [Station 10] being [5] and the data at

internal address [Station 20] being [3], the data in recipe block number 5 is copied to

block number 3.

Deletes recipe block data.

Recipe Block clear

Only internal addresses can be set for the [Recipe Block Address].

The data of this address becomes the block number of the recipe to delete.

System Buffer Copy In this function, the data of an internal address is copied indirectly to another internal

(indirect) address. The length of the data is equal to [Data length]. Indirect copy refers to copying

using a reference address.

280 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

 Only internal addresses can be set for [From Reference (reference address to copy)] and

[To Reference (reference address to copy)]. The data of the address becomes the station

number of the internal address to copy.

When the settings above are applied, with the data at internal address [Station 10] being

[200] and the data at internal address [Station 20] being [300] with the data length set to

[10], the 10 data in internal address stations [200~209] is copied to internal address

stations [300~309].

In this function, the data of an internal address is copied indirectly to another internal

address. The length of the data is equal to [Data length].

System Buffer Copy

Only internal addresses can be set for [From Address (address to copy)] and [To Address

(address to be copied to)]. When the above settings are made, the 10 data in internal

address stations [10~19] are copied to internal address stations [20~29].

⑤ [Extended TAG] special functions

These are special functions associated with tags. This function is used when creating separate buttons

included in tags, or creating associated keys in associated functions. Functions provided are alarm,

extended alarm, record, file list, log table, and docviewer tags, buzzer sound and system reset functions.

[Fig. Tag-related special functions]

Extended TAG Description

This is a touch button used as the key in alarm tags. When [Use base frame] is enabled in
Alarm Tag
the alarm tag, the key is included in the created alarm tag by default. This is used when

creating a separate button.

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 281

 Set the same group and alarm type set in the alarm tag. Currently, [UP/DOWN] keys can be

made for alarms, and [UP/DOWN/CLEAR] keys can be made for alarm histories.

(☞ See [chapter 27] for alarm tags.)

This is a touch button used for alignment in extended alarm tags. The current alarm list can

be aligned according to various criteria.

Ext Alarm (sort)

Set the same group and alarm type set in the extended alarm tag, and select the alignment

criteria.

[Trigger date] is the date of occurrence, [Trigger time] is the time of occurrence, [ACK date] is

the date confirmed by the worker, [ACK time] is the time confirmed by the worker,

[Recovered date] is the date recovered, [Recovered Time] is the time recovered, and [No. of

Occurrence] is the frequency of occurrence. (☞ See [chapter 28] for extended alarm tags.)
This is a touch button used as the key in extended alarm tags. Buttons included in an

extended alarm tag can be made by registering keys in the extended alarm tag. This function

is used when making separate buttons.

Ext Alarm (key)

Set the same group and alarm type set in the extended alarm tag, and select the key to

register.

[Cursor Toggle] is the cursor key, [ACK] is the key that shows the confirmation date/time by

the workers, [UP/DOWN] is the key used to move the alarm list or cursor up and time,

[Left/Right] is the key used to move the alarm list left and right, [Del] is the key used to

delete the alarm selected with the cursor, [Clear All] is the key used to delete all disabled

alarms, [Enter] is the key used to perform an action, [Clear No. Occurrence] is the key that

282 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

 resets the number of occurrences of the alarm selected with the cursor to 0, and [Clear All

No. Occurrence] is the key that resets all numbers of occurrences to 0.

[CF Alarm Search(Date)] sets the year/month/day for the special address

(_CF_ALARM_SRCH_YEAR/_CF_ALARM_SRCH_MONTH, _CF_ALARM_SRCH_DAY). When this

button is pressed, the alarm data stored in the CF memory card is searched using the set

year/month/day, and results are displayed.

The function of the [CF View] key is to pop up the file manager window screen, import the

alarm file to be displayed, and showing the file in extended alarms. Alarm files are stored

by date/month in the CF card.

The [Next File(CF)] key is a button used when displaying alarms saved on the CF memory

card. The file for the date following the currently displayed alarm file is imported and

displayed. The [Prev File(CF)] key is a button used when displaying alarms saved on the CF

memory card. The file for the date previous to the currently displayed alarm file is imported

and displayed. (☞ See [chapter 28] for extended alarm tags.)

This is a touch button used as the cursor key and the screen navigation key in record tags.

• Cursor movement key

[LEFT] moves the cursor left by 1 data, and [RIGHT] moves the cursor right by one data.
Record Tag
When multiple graphs are displayed, the cursor meets multiple graphs. Using the [UP]

button, a cursor touching the bottom graph is moved up by 1 graph to touch the top graph.

When multiple graphs are displayed, the cursor meets multiple graphs. Using the [DOWN]

button, a cursor touching the top graph is moved down by 1 graph to touch the bottom

graph.

• Page navigation key

[NEXT] navigates to the next page, [PREV] navigates to the previous page, [FIRST] navigates

to the last page, and [LAST] navigates to the last page (☞ See [chapter 34] for record tags.)
This is a touch button used as the key in filelist tags. From the pop-up menu that appears

when the mouse is right clicked in the [Window screen], select [Add file manager window] to

automatically create a screen with the following buttons registered.

FileList Tag

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 283

 [Scroll Up] moves the files in the file list up by 1 position.

[Scroll Down] moves the files in the file list down by 1 position.

[Copy to Left] is used when two file lists are registered. This copies the selected files in the

left file list to the selected memory in the right file list.

[Copy to right] is used when two file lists are registered. This copies the selected files in the

right file list to the selected memory in the left file list.

[Pop Up(Toggle)] causes the [File manager] registered to the window screen in the base

screen. Touch once to pop-up, and touch again to dismiss.

[Enter] is used when using the [CF-recipe] function. Select a recipe file saved on the CF

memory card, then press the [ENTER] button to move the recipe data to the [Save address

for recipe move]. [Delete] deletes the selected files.

(☞ See [chapter 40] for filelist tags.)

This is a touch button used as the key in LOG table tags.

Set the same logging numbers that are set for the LOG table. The scroll count represents the

interval to scroll by when the [Up/Down/Left/Right] buttons are touched.

LOG Table [Up] moves the logging block list up, [Down] moves the logging block list down, [Left]

moves the logging block list to the left, [Right] moves the logging block list to the right, and

[CF] imports and displays logging data saved in the CF memory card. [SRAM] imports and

displays logging data saved in the internal memory of the touch. [First] moves to the first

item in the log table, and [Last] navigates to the last item in the log table.

* Note) When importing logging data saved on the CF card, the First and Last keys

cannot be used.

The [Up/Down/Left/Right] keys operate normally.

(☞ See [chapter 29] for LOG table tags.)

This is a touch button used as the key in DocViewer tags.

DocViewer Tag

[Left] moves the screen left, [Right] moves the screen right, [Up] moves the screen up,

[Down] moves the screen down, [Next] brings up the next page on the screen, [Previous]

brings up the previous page on the screen, [Last] moves the screen to the last page, [First]

moves the screen to the first page, [Scale Up] zooms in on the document, and [Scale Down]

284 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

 zooms out of the document. (☞ See [chapter 41] for DocViewer tags.)
Buzzer Sound
A short [Beep] buzzer is sounded.

If the PLC screen transition function is used, when a different screen is displayed because

System Reset communication cannot be established with the controller, then communication is restored,

pressing this button restores the screen to the screen set in the PLC screen transition

address.

This is a touch button used as the key in EventLogViewer tags.

EventLogView

[Scroll Up] moves the list up, [Scroll Down] moves the list down, [Right] moves the list to the

right, and [Left] moves the list to the left.

[CF EventLog Search(Date)] uses the special addresses

(_CF_EVENTVIEW_SRCH_YEAR,_CF_EVENTVIEW_SRCH_MONTH, _CF_EVENTVIEW_SRCH_DAY)

to set the year/month/date. When this button is pressed, the event log files saved in the CF

card are searched by the corresponding year/month/date, and results are displayed.

CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag 285

 CHAPTER 15 Touch + Bit Lamp Tag

286 CHAPTER 14 -Touch Tag

CHAPTER 15 - Touch + Bit Lamp Tag

15.1 Touch + bit lamp overview

This tag combines the functions of touch tags and bit lamp tags. The properties screen comprises a

[Interlock] and [Operation] pages identical to touch tags, and a [Display] page identical to bit lamp tags.

Therefore, for touch + bit lamp tags, please refer to the sections for touch tags and bit lamp tags.

[Fig. Touch + Bit Lamp]

In [Touch tag type], [Touch] and [Lamp] are both checked, with [Bit] selected.

CHAPTER 15 -Touch + Bit Lamp Tag 287

 CHAPTER 16 Touch + Word Lamp Tag

288 CHAPTER 15 -Touch + Bit Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 16 - Touch + Word Lamp Tag

16.1 Touch + word lamp tag overview

This tag combines the functions of touch tags and word tags. The properties screen comprises a [Int

erlock] and [Operation] pages identical to touch tags, and [Display] and [Case] pages identical to wor

d tags. Therefore, for touch + word lamp tags, please refer to the sections for touch tags and word l

amp tags.

[Fig. Touch + Word Lamp]

In [Touch tag type], [Touch] and [Lamp] are both checked, with [Word] selected.

CHAPTER 16 -Touch + Word Lamp Tag 289

 CHAPTER 17 Touch + N Lamp Tag

290 CHAPTER 16 -Touch + Word Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 17 - Touch + N Lamp Tag

17.1 Touch + N lamp overview

This tag combines the functions of touch tags and N lamp tags. The properties screen comprises a [I

nterlock] and [Operation] pages identical to touch tags, and a [Display] page identical to N lamp tags.

Therefore, for touch + N lamp tags, please refer to the sections for touch tags and N lamp tags.

[Fig. Touch + N lamp]

In [Touch tag type], [Touch] and [Lamp] are both checked, with [N state] selected.

CHAPTER 17 -Touch + N Lamp Tag 291

CHAPTER 18 Touch+Bit Select LampTag

292 CHAPTER 17 -Touch + N Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 18 - Touch + Bit Select Lamp Tag

18.1 Touch + bit select lamp overview

This tag combines the functions of touch tags and bit select lamp tags. The properties screen comprises a

[Interlock] and [Operation] pages identical to touch tags, and a [Display] page identical to bit select lamp

tags. Therefore, for touch + bit select lamp tags, please refer to the sections for touch tags and bit select

lamp tags.

[Fig. Touch + bit select lamp tag]

In [Touch tag type], [Touch] and [Lamp] are both checked, with [Bit select] selected.

CHAPTER 18 -Touch + Bit Select Lamp Tag 293

 CHAPTER 19 Numeric Tags

294 CHAPTER 18 -Touch + Bit Select Lamp Tag

CHAPTER 19 - Numeric Tag

19.1 Numeric Tag Overview

Numeric tags display data stored in an address using numbers. Additional operations can be performed

on data and results can be displayed. Also, by setting cases, the font color and background colors of the

numbers can be set differently.

[Fig. Numeric tag properties screen]

In [Feature], on the left middle side of the screen, the tag type can be changed.

Select [Numeric] for a numeric tag, and [String] for a string tag. With [Numeric] selected, check [Use key

input] for a show numeric key tag. With [String] selected, check [Use key input] for a show string key tag.

19.2 Page composition of the numeric tag properties screen

The numeric tag properties screen comprises the [Address], [Case], [Display], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Enter the address to display, and set the data type and size.

Address page Additional operations can be performed on the data of the address, and the results can be

displayed.

Using the bit/word address state as conditions, the color and background color of the
Case page
numbers can be set differently according to the condition.

On this page, the font and color of the numbers displayed are designated, and the format is
Display page
set.

On this page, numeric tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information page time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be

edited.

CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag 295

19.3 Address page

Enter the address to display, and set the data type and size. Additional operations can be performed on

the data of the address, and the results can be displayed.

[Fig. Address page]

19.3.1 Address setting

Address setting Description

Read address Enter the address to read.

Select the type of data from the list below.

Data type
[DEC] is decimal. [HEX] is hexadecimal. [BCD] binary-coded decimal. Four binary places are

grouped and use one decimal place. It is actually hexadecimal, but is used like decimal

data, because numbers that include A~F are not shown. [FLOAT] is data that can use

decimal points, and [BIN] is binary.

This displays symbols on the data that is shown. If symbols are not shown, data is shown

only as positive numbers.

Use symbols
If symbols are used, data is shown as positive/negative numbers. To display negative (-)

data, [Symbol] must be checked.

16 bit Use 16 bit as the size of data shown.

Data
Use 32 bit as the size of data shown.
size 32 bit
This is used to show data greater than 16 bit, or for double word addresses.

When [Data size] is 32 bit, the display positions of the [Top word (16 bit)] and [Bottom
Word Swap
word (16 bit)] are swapped.

296 CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag

19.3.2 Data processing
[Data processing] is used when the data in the [Read address] is not displayed as is, but additional

operations are performed on the data, and the modified data is displayed. The actual [Read address] data

is not modified. Only the displayed data is modified.

[Fig. Data processing]

(1) Scaling
[Scaling] is a function that zooms in/out on data proportionally. The function displays data exceeding the

minimum/maximum values as the minimum/maximum values.

Scaling Description

This is the actual data of the address set in [Read address]. Set the minimum value (Min) and
Device
maximum value (Max) appropriate to the data range of the address.

Set the minimum value (Min) and maximum value (Max) of the data to e displayed, proportionally
Display
to the [Read address].

The display value is calculated as follows. Display value = [(Max. display value – Min. display value)/(Max.

device value – Device value)] x Device value

For example, if, as in the figure above, the minimum value for [Device] is [0] and the maximum value is

[4000], and the minimum value and maximum value for [Display] are [0] and [100], respectively [(Max.

display value – Min. display value)/(Max. device vale – Device value)] = (100-0)/(4000-0) = 1/40. Therefore,
if [Device] is [4000], [Display] is 4000x(1/40), therefore [100], and if [Device] is [1000], [Display] is

1000x(1/40), therefore [25]. Also, if Device is a value of [0] or less, [0] is shown. If [Device] is [4000] or

greater, [4000] is displayed.

(2) Display data operation

This function performs additional operations on the data of the [Read address] and displays the results.

Check [Operation of display data] and press the button to show a [Operation of display data] screen
as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Operation of display data screen]

The address set in [Read address] is displayed on the first line. Click the buttons to select operators

CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag 297

 and add operations in the following lines.

[Fig. Operator list]

Operators Description

; Denotes the end of the operation.

+ [Adds] the data of two operation addresses.

- [Subtracts] the data of two operation addresses.

* [Multiplies] the data of two operation addresses.

/ [Divides] the data of two operation addresses.

^ This is a bit operator. [Bit XOR] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

This is the remainder operator. After dividing the data of two operation addresses, the remainder is
%
calculated.

& This is a bit operator. [Bit AND] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

| This is a bit operator. [Bit OR] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

This is a bit operator that performs the [Bit left shift] operation. This operator performs a left bit shift

<< operation on the data on the right of the operator. The size of the shift is equal to the data on the left

of the operator.

This is a bit operator that performs the [Bit right shift] operation. This operator performs a right bit

>> shift operation on the data on the left of the operator. The size of the shift is equal to the data on the

right of the operator.

In the [Operation of display data] screen, add operations and press the [OK] button. The operation

formula is shown under Operation of display data.

[Fig. Display data operation]

When the above settings are made, data adding [50] to the data at [Read address] [D0010] is always

shown.

19.4 Case page

Using the bit/word address state as conditions, the color and background color of the numbers can be set
differently according to the condition. If the conditions for the case set in the [CASE List] are satisfied, the

data of the [Read address] is displayed with the number color and background color set for the

corresponding case.

298 CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag

 [Fig. Case page]

19.4.1 CASE List

This is a list of set cases. Up to 64 [Cases] can be set. If 2 or more of the set cases are satisfied, the case

taht was registered first is applied.

(1) Case list

Set a [Case] and register to the case list.

[Fig. Case list]

Case Description

No This is the registration number of the case.

Type Indicates whether the case is a [Bit condition] or [Word condition] case.

Case The operating conditions of the case are displayed. If an address other than the [Read address] is used,

Condition that address is also displayed.

TColor The color for the numbers in the case is shown.

BColor The background color for the case is shown.

(2) Adding/modifying/deleting cases

[Add/modify/delete] cases

Case Description

Ad a case set in [CASE Condition & Status] to the [Case list].

Modify the selected case. Change settings and press the [Modify] button to modify the case.

Delete the selected case.

(3) Option of display color

CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag 299

 When using a [Word condition in a case, this function allows the use of data from an address other

than the [Read address] as a condition. Check [Option of display color] to bring up an address input

box. Set the address to use as the condition for the [Word condition].

[Fig. Option of display color]

19.4.2 CASE Condition & Status

Set the [Case]. [Bit] and [Word] condition cases are provided.

(1) Bit case setting

Colors and background colors are applied to numbers according to the [ON/OFF] status of the bit address.

[Fig. Bit condition case]

Bit condition Description

Option of display color (Bit) Enter the address to use as the bit condition in the case.

OFF The case is applied when the data of the set address is OFF.

ON The case is applied when the data of the set address is ON.

Numeric Color Set the color to apply to numbers when the case operates.

Background Color Set the color to apply to the background when the case operates.

(2) Word case setting

Change the number color and background color depending on the word address data condition.

[Fig. Word condition case]

Word condition Description

Select the word range type from the list below. [a] is the min., and [b] is the max. value.

[a < X] – The data of the address is greater than the minimum value.
Word range type [X < b] – The data of the address is less than the maximum value.

[a < X < b] – The data of the address is etween the minimum value and

maximum value. The [<] operator can be changed.

300 CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag

 This refers to the address entered in [Read address].

X (Reference address) Here, if a number display color option (word) has been set for [CASE List], X (Reference

address) becomes the address set in the number display color option.

Minimum value Enter the minimum value to use as the condition.

Maximum value Enter the maximum value to use as the condition.

Set the operator of the condition.

[<] – Greater than or less than,

Operators [<=] – Greater than or equal to, or less than or equal to,
[==] – same,
[!=] - not the same

Numeric Color Set the color to apply to the number when the case operates.

Background Color Set the color to apply to the background when the case operates.

For example, if the word case is set as in the following, if the reference address data is greater than or

equal to [5], and less than [50], the case is applied, and the numeric tag is displayed with the set number

color and background color.

[Fig. Example of word condition case operation]

19.5 Display page

From this page, the font and color of the number is set, and the display format is set.

[Fig. Display page]

19.5.1 Display settings (VISUAL)

Set the font and color of the numbers

CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag 301

 Display setting Description

Font type (pixel) Designate the font of the numbers displayed.

The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by the font width ratio

Font width ratio

Text color Set the color of numbers used to display numeric values.

Background
Set the background color of numbers used to display numeric values.
color

When [Transparent] is checked, the background of numbers used to display numeric values is
Effect
made transparent.

19.5.2 Format setting (FORMAT)

Set the display format for numbers.

[Fig. Format setting]

Format setting Description

Designate the format of the numbers displayed.

Strings can be inserted in between numbers.

Designate
Enter data as [*], and enter the text to display.
display format
For example, if [**/*** version] has been entered and the data is 12345, the number tag displays

[12/345 version].

Data length Set the length of the data to display.

Align Select between left align and right align.

Set the number of decimal places to display. For example, if [Decimal places] is [3] and the data
Decimal places
is [12345], the number tag displays [12.345].

The displayed number is cut from the lower end by the length designated here.
Cut length
For example, if [Cut length] is 2 and the data is [12345], [123] is displayed.

Blanks are filled with 0.

Fill with '0'
For example, if [Data length] is [3] and the data is [3], [003] is displayed.

Password (with '*') Data is displayed with *.

302 CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag

CHAPTER 20 String Tags

CHAPTER 19 -Numeric Tag 303

CHAPTER 20 - String Tag

20.1 String tag overview

String tags perform the function of displaying data in string form (ASCII) on the screen.

[Fig. String tag properties screen]

In [Feature], on the left middle side of the screen, the tag type can be changed.

Select [Numeric] for a numeric tag, and [String] for a string tag.

With [Numeric] selected, check [Use key input] for a show numeric key tag. With [String] selected, check

[Use key input] for a show string key tag.

20.2 Page composition of the string tag properties screen

The numeric tag properties screen comprises the [Address], [Display], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Address page The address of the string to read is set from this page.

Display page The font and color of the string is set from this page.

On this page, string tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information page
created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can edited.

20.3 Address page

Set the address of the string to read.

304 CHAPTER 20 -String Tag

 [Fig. Address page]

Address page Description

Set the start address of the address to display the string for.

String start address Two English letters can be saved in one word address. To read strings with two letters or

more, the address following the address set in [String start address] must also be read.

The positions of the letters saved in the address are switched.

Byte swap
When [Byte swap] is checked, data saved as [AB] is displayed as [BA], and [ABCDEF] is

displayed as [BADCFE].

20.4 Display page

Designate the number of letters in the string, the font, and the color.

[Fig. Display page]

Display page Description

Font Select the font of the string.

Font size The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by the font size

Text color Designate the font color of the string.

background color Designate the background color of the string.

Text length Set the length of the string to display

Letter effect Display a transparent background for the string displayed.

CHAPTER 20 -String Tag 305

CHAPTER21 Keypad Display(Numeric)Tag

306 CHAPTER 20 -String Tag

CHAPTER 21 - Keypad display (numeric) tag

21.1 Keypad display (numeric) overview

In [Keypad display (numeric) tag], data is entered in the set address, the the address entered is

displayed in numbers.

Data is entered using a keypad (tenkey). When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the entered data is recorded

in the applicable address.

[Fig. Keypad display (numeric) tag properties screen]

In [Feature], on the bottom left of the screen, the tag type can be changed.

Select [Numeric] for a numeric tag, and [String] for a string tag.

With [Numeric] selected, check [Use key input] for a show numeric key tag. With [String] selected, check

[Use key input] for a show string key tag.

21.2 Page composition of the keypad display (numeric) tag properties screen

The keypad display (numeric) tag properties screen comprises the [Address], [Input mode], [Case],

[Display], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Address page The address and data operation is set from this page.

This page is the page where the conditions for the [Input mode] where data can be entered
Input mode page
using the keypad are set.

The color and background color of the numbers are set depending on the bit/word address
Case page
data.

CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag 307

 On this page, the font and color of the numbers displayed are designated, and the format is
Display page
set.

On this page, keypad display (numeric) tag info is displayed. The number of the registered

Information page screen, tag ID, time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size

info can edit.

21.3 Address page

The address and data operation is set from this page.

[Fig. Address page]

21.3.1 Address setting

Set the address to enter and display data for.

Address setting Description

Read address Set the address to enter data for.

Select the type of data from the list below.

[DEC] is decimal. [HEX] is hexadecimal. [BCD] is actually hexadecimal, but is used like decimal data,
Data type
because numbers that include A~F are not shown. [FLOAT] is data that can use decimal points, and

[BIN] is binary.

This displays symbols on the data. If symbols are not used, data can only be entered as positive

Use symbols numbers. If symbols are used, both positive/negative number data can be entered.

To display negative (-) data, [Symbol] must be checked.

Data 16 bit Use 16 bit as the size of data.

308 CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag

 size Use 32 bit as the size of data. This is used to enter data greater than 16 bit, or for double word
32 bit
addresses.

When [Data size] is 32 bit, the display positions of the [Top word (16 bit)] and [Bottom word (16
Word Swap
bit)] are swapped.

21.3.2 Data processing

[Data processing] is used to add operations when entering input data.

The options available under data processing are [Input limit], [Data scaling], [Operation of display data],

and [Operation of input data].

[Fig. Display and input data operation]

(1) Data scaling

[Scaling] is a function that proportionally magnifies/reduces data input using the keypad display (numeric)

tag and saves the data to the corresponding address. The proportional values are calculated with the

ranges entered in [Device] and [Display].

If the value to be entered exceeds the range of [Display], the value cannot be entered.

[Fig. Scaling]

When data is entered, the [Input data] is the [Display] value displayed by the keypad display (numeric) tag.

When the settings are made as seen in the figure above, the range of data that can be entered with the

keypad display (numeric) tag is [Display], [1~100]. Outside this data range, data cannot be entered.

However, the [Device] value that is actually saved at the address is scaled before saving. The Device value

is calculated as follows.

[Device = (Max. Device value – Min. Device value)/(Max. Display value - Min. Display value) x data entered]
If [Device] is [10 ~ 1000] and [Display] is [1 ~ 100], and [50] is entered, the keyboard display (numeric) tag

displays [50], and [(1000-10)/(100-1)x50 = 500] is saved at the corresponding address.

CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag 309

 Scaling Description

This is the actual data that is proportional to the [Display] value, and is saved to the address set in

[Data address].
Device
Set the minimum value (Min) and maximum value (Max) appropriate to the range of the data to

be saved at the address.

Display Set the minimum value (Min) and maximum value (Max) for data entered from the touch.

(2) Input limit

Set the range of data that can be entered using the keypad. If the input value exceeds the set range, the

value is not saved at the set address.

[Fig. Min/Max limit setting]

Part Description

Min (minimum value) Set the minimum value of the data that can be entered.

Max (maximum value) Set the maximum value of the data that can be entered.

The min/max values can be set using not only [Constant] values, but also as addresses.

[Fig. Min/max limits set using addresses]

(3) Display data operation

[Display data operation] performs additional operations on the data of the [Data address] and displays the

results. Check [Operation of display data] and press the button to show a [Operation of display data]
screen as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Display data operation]

[Fig. Operation of display data screen]

310 CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag

The address set in [Data address] is displayed on the first line.

Click the buttons to select operators and add operations in the following lines.

[Fig. Operator list]

Operators Description

; Denotes the end of the operation.

+ [Adds] the data of two operation addresses.

- [Subtracts] the data of two operation addresses.

* [Multiplies] the data of two operation addresses.

/ [Divides] the data of two operation addresses.

^ This is a bit operator. [Bit XOR] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

This is the remainder operator. After dividing the data of two operation addresses, the remainder is
%
calculated.

& This is a bit operator. [Bit AND] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

| This is a bit operator. [Bit OR] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

This is a bit operator that performs the [Bit left shift] operation. This operator performs a left bit shift

<< operation on the data on the right of the operator. The size of the shift is equal to the data on the left

of the operator.

This is a bit operator that performs the [Bit right shift] operation. This operator performs a right bit shift

>> operation on the data on the left of the operator. The size of the shift is equal to the data on the right

of the operator.

Complete the operation in the [Operation of display data] screen using operators and addresses.

[Fig. Display data operation]

In the [Operation of display data] screen, add operations and press the [OK] button. The operation

formula is shown under Operation of display data.

[Fig. Display data operation]

CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag 311

 When set as shown above, the data in [D0020] is always added to the data at [Data address] [D0010]. The

data at internal address station [0000] is subtracted from the result, and the product of multiplying this

result by [2] is displayed.

Calculations are performed in order of input, regardless of the priorities of arithmetic operations.

(4) Operation of input data

[Operation of input data] is a function that performs additional operations on input data, and saves the

results in the corresponding address. Check [Operation of input data] and press the button. Set the
operation in the [Numeric display operation] screen that appears.

[Fig. Input data operation]

The method of adding operations is the same as in the [Operation of display data] process.

[Fig. Input data operation]

When the above setting is made, [50] is always added to the input data and saved at the [Data address].

Calculations are performed in order of input, regardless of the priorities of arithmetic operations.

21.4 Input mode page

The keyboard display (numeric) tag has [Input mode] and [Display mode] states. [Display mode] displays

the data of the set address, and [Input mode] can receive data from the keypad (tenkey). In one screen

only one keyboard display tag is in [Input mode] state. When one keyboard display tag is transitioned to

[Input mode], the keyboard display tag that was originally in [Input mode] changes to [Display mode].
In the [Input mode] page, the conditions for changing a keyboard display (numeric) tag in [Display mode]

to [Input mode] are set.

[Fig. Input mode page]

312 CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag

21.4.1 Input mode settings
[Input mode] operation settings provide the [when Touch], [Popup AutoTenKey], [Selected bit ON], [Use

arrow key], and [Use arrow key (ext)] action types.

(1) During Touch

Transitions to [Input mode] when the keyboard display (numeric) tag is touched.

[Fig. when Touch]

(2) Popup AutoTenKey

Transitions to [Input mode] when the keyboard display (numeric) tag is touched, and a tenkey

automatically pops up.

[Fig. Popup AutoTenKey]

The [Default TenKey window number] is set to [65535] by default. Window screen [65535] is a screen that

is automatically created when a project is created. To have a different window screen popup, create a new

window screen, and enter the new window screen umber in [Default TenKey window number].

By using Use Define Popup Position, the position where the tenkey pops up can be designated. (X,Y)
denotes the position of the top left corner of the popup tenkey.

(3) Selected bit ON

[Input mode] transition occurs when the data of the set bit address becomes [ON]. If data has been input

and the [ENTER] key is pressed, or the data of the bit address becomes [OFF], [Display mode] transition

occurs.

[Fig. Selected bit ON]

(4) Use arrow key

When using multiple keyboard display (numeric) tags on a single screen, move the [Input] mode using up,

CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag 313

 down, left and right arrow keys.

To apply the up, down, left and right arrow keys, the same condition bit address must be set for the

multiple keyboard display (numeric) tags, and this address must be [ON].

When the address becomes [ON], as seen in the figure below, the keyboard display (numeric) tag with the

fastest [Key input order] is transitioned to [Input mode]. When the address becomes [OFF], or the [ESC]

key is pressed, the keyboard display (numeric) tag that was in [Input mode] is changed to [Display mode].

Also, when the condition bit address of a keyboard display (numeric) tag set using the [Arrow keys] is

[ON], touching the keyboard display (numeric) tag once transitions the tag to [Input mode]. Touching the

tag again changes the tag to [Display mode].

[Input mode] is moved by pressing the up, down, left and right arrow keys.

[Fig. Use arrow key]

Arrow keys are registered using touch tags. Register in [Register key] of the [Operation] page.

[Fig. Arrow key registration]

When input is completed and the [ENTER] key is pressed, the input data is saved at the corresponding
address. [Input mode] moves to the next tag, depending on the [Key input order].

[Fig. When the ENTER key is pressed]

The arrow keys are set as follows.

314 CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag

 [Fig. Selected bit ON]

Use arrow key Detailed description

Set the bit address to use as the arrow key condition.

Address (bit) In one screen, the same settings are applied to all keyboard display (numeric) tags to

use as arrow keys.

When [Address(Bit)] is in [ON] state, touching the keyboard display (numeric) tag

Mute on touch transitions between the [Input mode] and [Display mode]. The [Beep] touch sound is

muted when this option is selected

When the [ENTER] key is entered, the input mode moves according to the key input

Key input order order. When [Address(Bit)] becomes [ON], the keyboard display (numeric) tag with

the fastest [Key input order] changes to input mode.

When the arrow keys are pressed to move [Input mode], input mode moves

according to the position of the keyboard display (numeric) tag. That is, when the up

arrow key is pressed, input mode moves to the keyboard display (numeric) tag that is
Auto
located above the current keyboard display (numeric) tag.

When the [ENTER] key is entered, the input mode moves according to the key input

order.

When the up, down, left and right direction keys and the [ENTER] key are pressed,

Arrow key the order of the keyboard display (numeric) tag to transition to [Input mode] next is

ID setting set.

Manual

The arrow key ID is the ID of each keyboard display (numeric) tag. The ID is a

number assigned according to the order registered to the screen, and is shown in

information.

(5) Use arrow key (Ext)

[Use arrow key (ext)] operates identically to [Use arrow key]. However, the scope of application for arrow

keys has been extended. While in [Use arrow key], the arrow keys are only used for keyboard display

CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag 315

 (numeric) tags using the same bit address, in [Use arrow key (ext)], the arrow keys apply even if the bit

address if different, if the tag is in [ON] state.

[Fig. Use arrow key (ext)]

(6) Use interlock and use complete flag

[Use interlock] can only be used in [when Touch] and [Popup AutoTenkey]. Interlock is a function where

input mode for the keyboard display (numeric) tag does not operate if the bit address data is [OFF], and

operates if the data is [ON].

[Fig. Use interlock]

[Use complete flag] is used when confirming that data input has been completed. When the input data is

entered in the corresponding address, the data of the address (bit) becomes [ON].

[Fig. Use complete flag]

Data that has been turned [ON] is not turned [OFF] automatically.

21.4.2 Registering keypad (tenkey)

The method of registering the keypad used in keyboard display (numeric) and keyboard display (string)

tags is explained.

(1) 65535 default tenkey

When a new project is created, the 65535 window screen called [Default TenKey65535] is created by

default in [Window screen]. If this window screen has been deleted, it can be created again using the [Add

autotenkey] menu in the [Window screen] popup menu.

316 CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag

 [Fig. Default tenkey window]

(2) Adding to the window screen using the tenkey library

Tenkeys can be added in [Project manager]. When the [Window screen] in [Project manager] is right

clicked with the mouse, the popup menu shown in the figure below appears.

[Fig. Add library tenkey]

Press [Add library tenkey] in the popup menu to bring up the [TenKey Library].

Select the desired tenkey and enter the window number, then click the [Add] button to add the tenkey to

the [Window screen].

[Fig. Tenkey library]

CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag 317

 Part Description

Small Shows a list of small size tenkeys.

Window size
Large Shows a list of large size tenkeys.

Select the number of the window screen where the tenkey will be registered and
Window number
created. 65400 ~ 65499 is used as the number of the tenkey window screen.

Add Add the selected tenkey to the window screen.

Close Close the tenkey library.

(3) Registering keypads in the base screen

To register keypads in the base screen, copy the tenkey in the window screen registered using the tenkey

library and paste in the base screen. Alternatively, the keypad can be made manually using touch tags. (☞
See [13.5.2] of [chapter 13] for a description of each key.)

[Fig. Touch tag operaion key registration]

21.5 Case page

Using the bit/word address state as conditions, the color and background color of the numbers can be set

differently according to the condition. If the conditions for the case set in the [CASE List] are satisfied, the

data of the [Data address] is displayed with the number color and background color set for the

corresponding case.

[Fig. Case page]

318 CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag

21.5.1 CASE List
This is a list of set cases. Up to 64 [Cases] can be set. If 2 or more of the set cases are satisfied, the case

that was registered first is applied.

(1) Case list

[Fig. Case list]

Case Description

Number This is the registration number of the case.

Category Indicates whether the case is a [Bit condition] or [Word condition] case.

The operating conditions of the case are displayed.

Condition
If an address other than the [Data address] is used, that address is also displayed.

TColor The color for the numbers in the case is shown.

B.G. color The background color for the case is shown.

(2) Adding/modifying/deleting cases

[Add/modify/delete] cases.

Case Description

Ad a case set in [CASE Condition & Status] to the [Case list].

Modify the selected case. Change settings and press the [Modify] button to modify the case.

Delete the selected case.

(3) Number display color options

When using a [Word condition] in a case, this function allows the use of data from an address other

than the [Data address] as a condition. Check [Option of display color] to bring up an address input

box. Set the address to use as the condition for the [Word condition].

[Fig. Option of display color]

21.5.2 CASE Condition & Status

Set the [Case]. [Bit] and [Word] condition cases are provided.

(1) Bit operation case setting

Colors and background colors are applied to numbers according to the [ON/OFF] status of the bit address.

CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag 319

 [Fig. Bit condition case]

Bit condition Description

Option of display color (Bit) Enter the address to use as the bit condition in the case.

OFF The case is applied when the data of the set address is OFF.

ON The case is applied when the data of the set address is ON.

TColor Set the color to apply to numbers when the case operates.

B.G. color Set the color to apply to the background when the case operates.

(2) Word operation case setting

Change the number color and background color depending on the word address data condition.

[Fig. Word condition case]

Word condition Description

Select the word range type from the list below.

[a < X] – The data of the address is greater than the minimum value.
Word range type [X < b] – The data of the address is less than the maximum value.

[a < X < b] – The data of the address is between the minimum value and

maximum value. The [<] operator can be changed.

This refers to the address entered in [Data address].

X (Reference address) Here, if a number display color option (word) has been set for [CASE List], X (Reference

address) becomes the address set in the number display color option.

Minimum value Enter the minimum value to use as the condition.

Maximum value Enter the maximum value to use as the condition.

Set the operator of the condition.

[<] – Greater than or less than,

Operators
[<=] – Greater than or equal to, or less than or equal to,
[==] – same, [!=] - not the same
TColor Set the color to apply to the number when the case operates.

B.G. color Set the color to apply to the background when the case operates.

320 CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag

 For example, if the word case is set as in the following, if the reference address data is greater than or

equal to [5], and less than [50], the case is applied, and the keyboard display (numeric) tag is displayed

with the set number color and background color.

[Fig. Word condition case operation]

21.6 Display page

From this page, the font and color of the number is set, and the display format is set.

[Fig. Display page]

Display setting Description

Font type (pixel) Select the font of the numbers.

Font size The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by the font width ratio

Hint font color Set the color of numbers used to display numeric values.

B.G. color Set the background color of numbers used to display numeric values.

Number length Set the total number of places to display for the number.

Set the number of decimal places to display.

Decimal places
If [Decimal places] is 3 and the word value is 12345, 12.345 is shown on the screen.

Letter effect The background of numbers used to display numeric values is made transparent.

Align Select between left align and right align.

Designate input mode

Set the font color and background color of numbers in input mode state.
color

(Input mode) font color Set the font color when transitioned to input mode.

(Input mode) background

Set the background color when transitioned to input mode.
color

Fill with '0' Blanks are filled with 0. If the data is [3], [00003] is displayed.

Password (with '*') Data is displayed with *.

Display '0' data when

[0] is displayed when input mode is transitioned to.
selected

CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag 321

CHAPTER 22 Keypad Display (String) Tag

322 CHAPTER 21 -Keypad display (numeric) tag

CHAPTER 22 - Keypad Display (String) Tag

22.1 Keypad display (string) overview

Keypad display (string) tags enter strings (ASCII) in addresses, and display the input strings on the screen.

[Fig. Keypad display (string) tag properties screen]

In [Feature], on the left middle side of the screen, the tag type can be changed.

Select [Numeric] for a numeric tag, and [String] for a string tag. With [Numeric] selected, check [Use key

input] for a show numeric key tag. With [String] selected, check [Use key input] for a show string key

tag.

22.2 Page composition of the keypad display (string) tag properties screen

The keypad display (string) tag properties screen comprises the [Address], [Input mode], [Display], and

[Information] pages.

Property page Description

Address page Set the address to enter the string from this page.

This page is the page where the conditions for the [Input mode] where data can be entered
Input mode page
using the keypad are set.

From this page, the font and color of the string displayed is set, and the display options are
Display page
set.

On this page, keypad display (string) tag info is displayed. The number of the registered

Information page screen, tag ID, time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size

info can be edited.

CHAPTER 22 -Keypad Display (String) Tag 323

22.3 Address page

Set the address to enter the string from this page.

[Fig. Address page]

Address page Description

Set the start address of the address to enter the string for.

String start address Two English letters can be saved in one-word address. To input strings with two letters or

more, the address following the address set in [String start address] must also be entered.

The positions of the strings entered are swapped. When [Byte swap] is checked, data entered
Byte swap
as [AB] is saved as [BA], and [ABCDEF] is saved as [BADCFE].

22.4 Input mode page

In the [Input mode] page, the conditions for changing a keyboard display (string) tag in [Display mode] to

[Input mode] are set. This part is identical to the [Input mode page] for the keypad display (numeric) tag.

(☞ See [19.4] of [chapter 19] for info on the input mode page.)

[Fig. Input mode page]

22.5 Display page

Designate the number of letters in the string, the font, and the color.

324 CHAPTER 22 -Keypad Display (String) Tag

 [Fig. Display page]

Display setting Description

Font type (pixel) Select the font of the string.

Font size The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by the font size

Hint font color Designate the font color of the string.

B.G. color Designate the background color of the string.

Text length Set the length of the string to display

When [Transparent] is checked, the background of string displayed is made

Letter effect
transparent.

Designate input mode color Designate the font color and background color in [Input mode].

(Input mode) font color Set the font color when transitioned to input mode.

(Input mode) background color Set the background color when transitioned to input mode.

Password (with '*') The string is displayed with *.

When [Input mode] is entered, existing data is not displayed in the keypad display
Display '0' data when selected
(string) tag.

Spaces are automatically entered into spaces other than the letters entered.

If [Text length] is 5 and [AB] is entered, [AB](4142) is saved in the corresponding

Visible space
word address. Using this function the data is saved including 3 spaces, as

[AB ](4142202020). In ASCII code, [AB] is [4142] and, [AB ] is [4142202020].

CHAPTER 22 -Keypad Display (String) Tag 325

 CHAPTER 23 Bit Message Tag

326 CHAPTER 22 -Keypad Display (String) Tag

CHAPTER 23 - Bit Message Tag

23.1 Bit message tag overview

A bit message tag calls and displays messages registered in the [Message table], depending on the

ON/OFF state of a bit address. (☞ See [7.8] in [chapter 7] for [Message table].)

[Fig. Bit message tag properties screen]

23.2 Page composition of the bit message properties screen

The bit message tag properties screen comprises the [Message], [Address] and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Set display settings for the message shown, and the group and number of the message to be
Message page
shown depending on the ON/OFF state.

Address page Set the bit address to use as the condition for calling messages.

On this page, bit message tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information page
created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location info can be edited.

This is the bit message tag registered to the screen. When a message tag is registered to the edit screen,

the message registered to the OFF action is displayed. If there is no message registered to the OFF action,

only a background color is displayed, as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Bit message tag registered to the edit screen]

CHAPTER 23 -Bit Message Tag 327

23.3 Message page

Set display settings for the message shown, and the group and number of the message to be shown

depending on the ON/OFF state.

23.3.1 Display settings (DISPLAY)

Make settings relating to the display of messages.

[Fig. Display setting]

Display setting Description

Set the length of the message to display

The length of each message is shown in the [Message table].

Message length
Enter the length of the longest of the messages used.

For English, one letter is counted as [1]. Korea is counted as [2] per letter.

Set the number of lines to display the message.

Display line
Set the number of lines for the longest message to be shown.

Font type (pixel) Select the font of the message from the list.

Character size The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by this size

Align Select from [Left], [Center], and [Right] align.

In Blink, an [ON state] message emphasizing effect, the message appears and disappears in 0.5
Blink
second intervals.

Blink Not use The blink function is not used.

Text Only the text blinks, and the set background does not blink.

All Both the letters and background color blink.

The message scrolls one letter at a time from right to left.

Scroll
This cannot be used together with the blink function.

Scroll interval When using the [Scroll] function, set the interval of movement in 100ms (0.1 second) units.

When [Image text] is set for use in the [Message table], the display settings are changed.

[Fig. Message table set as image text]

328 CHAPTER 23 -Bit Message Tag

 [Fig. Display setting]

Display setting Description

Use define size Set an arbitrary size for the area where the message is displayed.

Width Set the width for the area where the message is displayed.

Height Set the height for the area where the message is displayed.

Blink/Scroll These cannot be used when using image text.

23.3.2 Message settings

Select the group of the message registered in the [Message table], and register the messages to be shown

in the OFF and ON states.

[Fig. Message settings]

Message Description

Message
Select among the A ~ Z groups registered in the [Message Table].
group

OFF Select the message to be displayed when the bit address is in OFF state, from the message list.

Font color Choose the font color of the message displayed in OFF state.

B.G. color Choose the background color of the message displayed in OFF state.

ON Select the message to be displayed when the bit address is in ON state, from the message list.

Font color Choose the font color of the message displayed in ON state.

B.G. color Choose the background color of the message displayed in ON state.

23.4 Address page

Set the bit address to use as the condition for calling messages.

[Fig. Address page]

CHAPTER 23 -Bit Message Tag 329

 CHAPTER 24 Word Message Tag

330 CHAPTER 23 -Bit Message Tag

CHAPTER 24 - Word Message Tag

24.1 Word message tag overview

A word message tag calls and displays messages registered in the [Message table], depending on the

ON/OFF state of a word address. It is used when calling multiple messages according to set conditions.

(☞ See [7.8] in [chapter 7] for [Message table].)

[Fig. Word message tag properties screen]

24.2 Page composition of the word message tag properties screen

The word message tag properties screen comprises the [Message], [Address] and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Set display settings for the message shown, and the group and number of the message to
Message page
be shown depending on the data.

Address page Set the word address to use as the condition for calling messages.

On this page, message message tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen,

Information page tag ID, time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location info can be

edited.

24.3 Message page

Set display settings for the message shown, and the group and number of the message to be shown

depending on the data.

24.3.1 Display settings (DISPLAY)

Make settings relating to the display of messages.

CHAPTER 24 -Word Message Tag 331

 [Fig. Display setting]

Display setting Description

Set the length of the message to display

The length of each message is shown in the [Message table].

Message length
Enter the length of the longest of the messages used.

For English, one letter is counted as [1]. Korea is counted as [2] per letter.

Set the number of lines to display the message.

Display line
Set the number of lines for the longest message to be shown.

Font type (pixel) Select the font of the message.

Character size The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by this size

Align Select from [Left], [Center], and [Right] align.

In Blink, an [ON state] message emphasizing effect, the message appears and disappears
Blink
in 0.5 second intervals.

Blink Not use The blink function is not used.

Text Only the text blinks, and the set background does not blink.

All Both the letters and background color blink.

The message scrolls one letter at a time from right to left.

Scroll
This cannot be used together with the blink function.

When using the [Scroll] function, set the interval of movement in 100ms (0.1 second)
Scroll interval
units.

When [Image text] is set for use in the [Message table], the display settings are changed.

[Fig. Message table set as image text]

[Fig. Display setting]

332 CHAPTER 24 -Word Message Tag

 Display setting Description

Use define size Set an arbitrary size for the area where the message is displayed.

Width Set the width for the area where the message is displayed.

Height Set the height for the area where the message is displayed.

Blink/Scroll These cannot be used when using image text.

24.3.2 Message settings

Select the message number calling method. Message number calling methods include [Data Range], [Data

Mapping], and [Data indirect]. Set the message group and message number to be used depending on the

message number calling method.

(1) Data range

The designated message is called according to the data range of the word address. The greatest

number of range counts that can be set in [Data range settings] is 64.

First, set the message group, and set the font and background color of the message to be displayed.
Next, enter the range count, and then set the [Font color/background color/message number]

according to the minimum and maximum values of each range.

[Fig. Data range]

With the above settings, if the word address data is [0~10], message number 1 is shown. For [11~20]

and [21~30], message 2 and message 3 are displayed, respectively. If the word address data has a value

outside the range, nothing is displayed.

Data range Description

Message group Select among the A ~ Z message groups registered in the [Message Table].

Font color Set the font color when the value is outside the set range.

B.G. color Set the background color when the value is outside the set range.

Range count Set the number of messages to call according to the range.

Number These numbers are assigned to the set ranges.

Minimum value The minimum value of the range. Set so that the ranges do not overlap.

Maximum value The maximum value of the range. Set so that the ranges do not overlap.

Font color Set the font color of the message.

B.G. color Set the background color of the message.

CHAPTER 24 -Word Message Tag 333

 Depending on the set group, select among the messages registered in the [Message

table]. When a message is clicked, a list is displayed.

Message

(2) Data mapping

Messages are called according to designated data. A [Value] is set, and the corresponding message is

called when the data becomes that value. First, set the message group, and set the font and

background color of the message to be displayed.

Next, enter the range count, and then set the [Font color/background color/message number]

according to each value.

[Fig. Data mapping]

If the word address data is [1], message number 1 is shown. For [3] and [6], message 2 and message 3

are displayed, respectively. For values other than the word address data, nothing is displayed.

(3) Data indirect

Messages with the same number as the word address data are called. The greatest number messages

that can be called in [Data indirect] is 32767. First, set the message group, and set the font and

background color of the message to be displayed. Next, set the message number range.

[Fig. Data indirect]

If the word address data is between 1 and 999, the message with the same number as the word

address is called.

334 CHAPTER 24 -Word Message Tag

 If the word address data is not between 1 and 999, no message is called.

[Group number indirect] is a function where a word address can be set, and the message group can be

changed depending on the data of the word address. Word address data [0~25] are matched with

groups [A~Z].

To call an A group message, enter [0] in the word address data. To call a C group message, enter [2] in

the word address data.

24.4 Address page

Set the word address to use as the condition in a word message tag. If [Use float] is checked, the data

type of the word address entered is change to flat, and decimals can be used.

[Fig. Address page]

CHAPTER 24 -Word Message Tag 335

 CHAPTER 25 Bit Window Tag

336 CHAPTER 24 -Word Message Tag

CHAPTER 25 - Bit Window Tag

25.1 Bit window tag overview

A bit window tag is a tag that calls window screens depending on the ON/OFF state of bit addresses.

While the number of window tags that can be registered to the base screen is unlimited, a maximum of

8 window screens can popup simultaneously: 4 popups and 4 fixed. That is, if there are 8 popup

windows screens on the screen, the 9th popup window screen pops up only when one of the existing

popup window screens is closed.

25.2 Page composition of the bit window tag properties screen

The bit window tag properties screen comprises the [Window] and [Information] pages.

[Fig. Bit window tag properties screen]

Property page Description

The popup conditions, screen number, and popup position of the window screens is set on this
Window page
page.

On this page, bit window tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information page
created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location info can be edited.

25.3 Window page

The popup conditions, screen number, and popup position of the window screens is set on this page.

CHAPTER 25 -Bit Window Tag 337

 [Fig. Bit window tag window page]

25.3.1 Window
Set the popup conditions and window screen number.

Properties Description

OFF The window screen stays visible when the designated bit address is in OFF state.

ON The window screen stays visible when the designated bit address is in ON state.

Operate a window tag by registering touch tags.

Popup condition Use

touch

tag

[Fig. [Window popup] function for touch tag]

Select [Special functions] in the [Operation] page of the touch tag. Set the category

to [SCREEN], and use the [Window Popup(Toggle)] function. Select window tag ID,

and enter the ID of the corresponding window tag. (Tag ID is shown in information,

and is a number assigned according to the order of registration to the screen.

338 CHAPTER 25 -Bit Window Tag

 When a touch tag has been set as seen in the figure above, and registered to the

screen together with a window tag, the touch tag, which has a toggle conditions,

causes the window screen to popup when touched once. The window screen

disappears when touched again.

Address Set the bit address to use as the condition for calling window screens.

Window screen
Set the window screen number to call.
number

25.3.2 Popup position (VISUAL)

(1) Window type
There are two types of window type, [Popup] and [Fixed], depending on the method the window screen is

handled when called to the base screen.

Window type Description

This option is used when the window screen momentarily pops up and then disappears. When

Pop-up the window screen pops up then disappear, the base screen that was in the popup position of

the window before it popped up is restored.

This option is used to fix a window screen to a certain position on the base screen.

When the window screen pops up then disappear, the base screen that was in the popup

Fixed position of the window before it popped up is not restored. The area covered by the window

screen is erased, and appears black. The area appears black because the touch colors the area

covered by the popup window screen black.

(2) Window coordinates

[Base position], [Relative coordinates], and [Absolute coordinates] can be selected as methods to set the

popup position of windows. Because only 1 window screen is called by a bit window tag, only the [Base

position] function is provided.

For word window tags, which call multiple window screens, all three [Base position], [Relative coordinates],

and [Absolute coordinates] options are available.

(3) Display direction

Display direction is used to set the position of the window screen relative to the point where the window

tag has been registered. The point where the [Window tag] has been registered to the screen becomes

the [Display direction] of the window screen that is called and pops up.

The following table shows the window screen popup positions depending on the 9 display directions.
[W] is the point where the window tag was registered, and the red rectangle denotes the window screen.

CHAPTER 25 -Bit Window Tag 339

 Left top Center top Right top

Left center Center Right center

Left bottom Center bottom Right center

340 CHAPTER 25 -Bit Window Tag

CHAPTER 26 Word Window Tag

CHAPTER 25 -Bit Window Tag 341

CHAPTER 26 - Word Window Tag

26.1 Word window tag overview

A word window tag calls window screens depending on the data of a word address. It is used when

calling multiple window screen according to set conditions.

While the number of window tags that can be registered to the base screen is unlimited, a maximum of

8 window screens can popup simultaneously: 4 popups and 4 fixed. That is, if there are 8 popup

windows screens on the screen, the 9th popup window screen pops up only when one of the existing

popup window screens is closed.

26.2 Page composition of the word window tag properties screen

The word window tag properties screen comprises the [Window] and [Information] pages.

[Fig. Word window tag properties screen]

Property page Description

The screen number and popup position of the window screens depending on the window
Window
screen popup conditions are set on this page.

On this page, word window tag info is displayed.

Information The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time created and time modified, location and size

are shown. Location info can be edited.

342 CHAPTER 26 -Word Window Tag

26.3 Window page

The screen number and popup position of the window screens depending on the window screen popup

conditions are set on this page.

[Fig. Word window tag window page]

26.3.1 Window

(1) Address
Set the word address as the condition address to call the corresponding window screen.

(2) Number designation method

Select the window screen number designation method depending on the word address data.

Number designation methods include [Word Range], and [Word variable].

① Word range setting

The designated window screen is called according to the data range of the word address.

The greatest number of window screens that can be called for each range in [Word range] is 8.

[Fig. Word range setting]

CHAPTER 26 -Word Window Tag 343

 If the data of the set word address has a value between 0 and 100, window screen 1 pops up. If the

value is between 101 and 200, window screen 2 pops up. If the data of the set word address has a

value outside the 8 ranges, no window screen pops up.

Word range setting Description

Range count Set the number of window screens to call according to the range.

No. (Number) These numbers are assigned to the set ranges.

Min (minimum value) The minimum value of the range. Set so that the ranges do not overlap.

Max (maximum value) The maximum value of the range. Set so that the ranges do not overlap.

Window Screen No. Set the window screen number to call.

The data type for the minimum and maximum values for range input becomes [Float],

and decimals can be entered.

Use float

This cannot be used together with [Use bit definition].

In use bit definition, the [Word Address] which is the window tag condition address is

changed to binary.

For example, if the case address is [D0000] and the data at station [D0000] is [2000],

[2000] is changed to binary : [0000/0111/1101/0000].

Use bit definition

When the start bit is set to [2] and the length is set to [4], only 4 bits from the second

bit of [0000/0111/11[01/00]00] are used. [0100] changed to a decimal number becomes

[4].

This cannot be used together with [Use float].

② Word variable

The window screen with the same number as the word address data is called.

The greatest number window screens that can be called in [Word variable] is 65535.

[Fig. Data indirect]

344 CHAPTER 26 -Word Window Tag

If the data at bit address [M0000] is on, and the data of the word window tag condition address is

between 1 and 999, the windows screen with the same number as the word address data is called.

If the data at bit address [M0000] is OFF, or the data of the word window tag condition address is not

between 1 and 999, the windows screen is not called.

Word variable Description

When popup condition is used, the window screen is called only when the data of the set

[Bit address] satisfies the set condition (OFF/ON).

Popup condition
* Note) When not using popup conditions, the window screen is always called when the

word address data is within the [Range of window numbers].

Designated the range of window screen numbers to call using minimum and maximum
Range of window no.
values.

26.3.2 Popup position (VISUAL)

(1) Window type
There are two types of window type, [Popup] and [Fixed], depending on the method the window screen is

handled when called to the base screen.

Window type Description

This option is used when the window screen momentarily pops up and then disappears. When the

Pop-up window screen pops up then disappear, the base screen that was in the popup position of the

window before it popped up is restored.

This option is used to fix a window screen to a certain position on the base screen and use

windows screens of the same size. When the window screen pops up then disappear, the base

Fixed screen that was in the popup position of the window before it popped up is not restored. The area

covered by the window screen is erased, and appears black. The area appears black because the

touch colors the area covered by the popup window screen black.

This option can only be set for [Fixed] windows. When this option is checked, when a window
Background
screen pops up and disappears, the area that was covered by the popup window screen is not
recovery on
painted black.
window

transition

(2) Window coordinates

[Base position], [Relative coordinates], and [Absolute coordinates] options can be selected for the method

of setting the window popup position.

CHAPTER 26 -Word Window Tag 345

 Window coordinates Description

Base position The window screen is called to the (X,Y) position where the window tag is registered.

The window screen is called to the position indicated by the (X,Y) coordinates gained by

adding the data from the two addresses following the [Word address] set as the condition

address for the (X,Y) position where the window tag was registered.

Using relative coordinates, the window screen can be called to the desired position by
Relative coordinates
adjusting the [D0001] and [D0002] data whenever a window screen is called.

* Note) If the word address set for the window tag is [D0000], and the position the window

tag is registered is (50,100), the position where the window screen is called becomes

(50+[D0001] data, 100+[D0002] data).

Regardless of the (X,Y) position where the window tag is registered, the data in the two

addresses following the [Word address] set as the condition address becomes the position

where the window screen is called.

Absolute coordinates Using absolute coordinates, the window screen can be called to the desired position by

adjusting the [D0001] and [D0002] data whenever a window screen is called.

* Note) If the word address set for the window tag is [D0000], the position where the

window screen is called becomes ([D0001] data, [D0002] data).

(3) Display direction

Display direction is used to set the position of the window screen relative to the point where the

window tag has been registered.

The point where the [Window tag] has been registered to the screen becomes the [Display direction] of

the window screen that is called and pops up.

The following table shows the window screen popup positions depending on the 9 display directions.
[W] is the point where the window tag was registered, and the red rectangle denotes the window

screen.

Left top Center top Right top

346 CHAPTER 26 -Word Window Tag

 Left center Center Right center

Left bottom Center bottom Right center

26.4 Moving the window screen position during operation

The position of the window screen can be moved during operation. When a set [Touch tag] is registered

to the window screen as seen in the following figure, touching the touch button once and touching the

position to move the screen to moves the window screen to that position.

The window screen move function can be found under special functions of the [Operation] page for

touch tags. Set the category to [SCREEN], and select the [Window Move] function.

[Fig. [Window screen move function for touch tag]

Register the touch tag set with the window screen move function (Window Move) to the window screen.

CHAPTER 26 -Word Window Tag 347

 [Fig. Moving the window screen position during operation]

When a window screen has been called to the base screen as seen in the figure above, first touch the

[Move window screen] touch tag registered to the window screen first in order to move the window

screen. Next, touch the position to move to, and the window screen moves to the touched position.

348 CHAPTER 26 -Word Window Tag

CHAPTER 27 Bit Par ts Tag

CHAPTER 26 -Word Window Tag 349

CHAPTER 27 - Bit Parts Tag

27.1 Bit parts tag overview

The bit parts tag is a function that calls an image registered in the image list or a sub screen

depending on the ON/OFF state of a bit address. If the designated bit address state is ON, the

registered image or sub screen is shown, and when the state if OFF, the image or subscreen registered

to the OFF state is displayed. Alternatively, images or screens can be displayed for either the ON state

only or the OFF state only. Using this function, two different images can be expressed, or an animation

effect can be given.

[Fig. Bit parts tag properties screen]

27.2 Page composition of the bit parts properties screen

The bit parts tag properties screen comprises the [Parts] and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Sselect the part type, and set the bit address and the number of the parts to display in ON/OFF
Parts page
state.

Information On this page, bit parts tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time

page created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location info can be edited.

This is the bit parts tag registered to the screen. Parts tags using the image list and parts tags using sub

screens are shown differently, as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Bit parts tag registered to the edit screen]

350 CHAPTER 27 -Bit Parts Tag

27.3 Parts page

This page is the page for setting the display screen type used in the bit parts tag, and the bit address.

27.3.1 Action when image list is set

The images registered in [General settings]-[Image list] of the project manager are called depending on

the ON/OFF state of the bit address.

[Fig. When image list is set]

(1) Registering images in the image list

The image list is located in general settings of the project manager. Up to 32767 images can be registered.

After selecting the image list, right click with the mouse and click [Add]. This brings up the [Image

properties] screen. In the [Image properties] screen, add images.

[Fig. Add image]

[Fig. Image properties]

Image property Description

Image number Set the image number. 0 ~ 32767 can be entered.

Description Enter a description of the image.

CHAPTER 27 -Bit Parts Tag 351

 Click the button to load the image to register.
Image
The loaded image can be seen in [Image].

After image loading is complete, press the [OK] button to add the image to the image list, as seen in the

figure below.

[Fig. Image registered]

When the registered image is right clicked with the mouse, a popup menu appears as seen in the

following figure. Through the popup menu, images can be deleted, or properties can be changed.

[Fig. Popup menu of registered images]

(2) PARTS SETUP

Select the display screen type as [Image list], and set the [Display size].

[Fig. Parts setup]

Even if the width and height of the display area do not match the size of the image to be displayed,

the full registered image is displayed on the screen. However, when the image disappears, on the part

covered by the display area disappears, and the rest remains on screen. Also, if the size ofON image

and OFF image is different, a ghost of the larger image remains on the screen. Therefore, the display

area should be set to be the same as or larger than the size of the larger image.

(3) Address and parts number setting

[Fig. Address and parts number setting

352 CHAPTER 27 -Bit Parts Tag

 Address and parts
Description
number setting

Address (bit) Set the bit address for calling parts.

Set the image to display when the bit address state is OFF.

OFF state Enter the image number registered in the [Image list] as the [Parts number].

For [Image list], the [Blink] function is not supported.

Set the image to display when the bit address state is On.

ON state Enter the image number registered in the [Image list] as the [Parts number].

For [Image list], the [Blink] function is not supported.

27.3.2 Action when sub screen is set

The screen registered to the [Sub screen] is called depending on the ON/OFF state of the bit address.

Only shapes can be registered to the sub screen. Tags cannot be registered. ( ☞ See [3.4.3] in [chapter 3]
for [Sub screen].)

[Fig. When sub screen is set]

(1) PARTS SETUP

Set the display screen type as [Sub screen]. As the whole screen is calle dfor sub screens, there is no need

to set the [Display size].

(2) Address and parts number setting

Address and parts
Description
number setting

Address (bit) Set the bit address for calling parts.

Set the sub screen to display when the bit address state is OFF.

Enter the screen number of the sub screen to call as the [Parts number].
OFF state
The [Blink] function can be used when either the [OFF state] or the [ON state] is set.

In the blink function, the sub screen appears and disappears in 0.5 second intervals.

Set the sub screen to display when the bit address state is ON.
ON state
Enter the screen number of the sub screen to call as the [Parts number].

CHAPTER 27 -Bit Parts Tag 353

 The [Blink] function can be used when either the [OFF state] or the [ON state] is set.

In the blink function, the sub screen appears and disappears in 0.5 second intervals.

[Fig. Address and parts number setting]

To display shape registered to a sub screen in the same position on the base screen, the parts tag must

be located accurately on the center point of the base screen.

[Fig. Position identical to the center point]

Note This precaution applies when using and selecting either the OFF state or ON state when using

parts tags calling sub screens. If a background color has been set for the base screen, or if a shape

with a different color exists in the position where the parts tag part (shape of the sub screen) is

displayed, the color of the parts is reversed (XOR).

354 CHAPTER 27 -Bit Parts Tag

CHAPTER 28 Word Par ts Tag

CHAPTER 27 -Bit Parts Tag 355

CHAPTER 28 - Word Parts Tag

28.1 Word parts tag overview

The word parts tag is a function that calls an image registered in the image list or a sub screen depending

on the ON/OFF state of a word address. It is used when calling multiple images or sub screens according

to set conditions.

[Fig. Word parts tag properties screen]

28.2 Page composition of the word parts properties screen

The word parts tag properties screen comprises the [Parts] and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Parts page From this page, the display screen type is selected, and the word address and parts to call are set.

On this page, word parts tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information page
created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location info can be edited.

28.3 Parts page

From this page, the display screen type is selected, and the word address and parts to call are set.

356 CHAPTER 28 -Word Parts Tag

 [Fig. Parts page]

28.3.1 Parts settings

Select the display screen type between [Image list] and [Sub screen]. In [Image list], images registered in

the [Image list] are called according to the data of the word address. In [Sub screen], the sub screens

registered in [Sub screens] are called according to the data of the word address.

[Fig. Parts setup]

(1) Image list

Select the [Display size] if the display screen type has been selected as [Image list].

Even if the width and height of the display area do not match the size of the image to be displayed,

the full registered image is displayed on the screen. However, when the image disappears, on the part

covered by the display area disappears, and the rest remains on screen. Also, if the sizes of the images
called are different, a ghost of the larger image remains on the screen.

Therefore, the display area should be set to be the same as or larger than the size of the larger image.

The method of registering images to the image list is the same as for bit parts tags. (☞ See [25.3.1] in
[chapter 25] for instructions on how to add images.)

(2) Sub screen

If the display screen type is selected as [Sub screen], as the whole screen is calle d for sub screens, there

is no need to set the [Display size]. To display shape registered to a sub screen in the same
position on the base screen, the parts tag must be located accurately on the center point of
the base screen.

CHAPTER 28 -Word Parts Tag 357

 [Fig. Position identical to the center point]

28.3.2 Address and parts number setting

Set the word address for calling parts, then set the parts number according to the number designation

method.

Number designation methods include [Word Range], and [Word variable].

In [Word Range], parts are called according to the data range of the word address.

In [Word Variable], parts with the same number as the word address data are called.

[Fig. Address and action setting]

(1) Word range

When [Word range] has been selected, first set the range count. A maximum of 8 ranges can be set.

Next, enter the [Min value] and [Max value] to define each range, and set the [Parts numbers] to call for

each range.

The [Parts number] of the image list is the image number, and the [Parts number] of the sub screen is

the sub screen number. With the above settings, if the word address data is [0~100], image or sub

screen number 1 is called. For [101~200], image or sub screen number 2 is called. If the data of the set

word address has a value outside the 8 ranges, no part is called.

Use float and use bit definition settings are as follow.

358 CHAPTER 28 -Word Parts Tag

 Option Description

The data type for the minimum and maximum values for range input becomes [Float], and

decimals can be entered.

Use float

This cannot be used together with [Use bit definition].

In use bit definition, the [Word Address] which is the word parts tag condition address is

changed to binary. For example, if the case address is [D0000] and the data at station [D0000]

is [2000], [2000] is changed to binary : [0000/0111/1101/0000].

Use bit definition

When the start bit is set to [2] and the length is set to [4], only 4 bits from the second bit of

[0000/0111/11[01/00]00] are used. [0100] changed to a decimal number becomes [4]. This

cannot be used together with [Use float].

(2) Word variable

When [Word variable] has been selected, set the range of parts numbers.

The greatest number parts that can be called in [Word variable] is 32767.

[Fig. Data indirect]

If the word parts tag data is between 1 and 30, the part with the same number as the word address

data is called. If the word parts tag word address data is not between 1 and 30, no part is called.

CHAPTER 28 -Word Parts Tag 359

 CHAPTER 29 Alarm Tags

360 CHAPTER 28 -Word Parts Tag

CHAPTER 29 - Alarm Tag

An alarm tag shows a list of triggered alarms.

Alarms refer to errors or problems that occur in the system. Each alarm is registered under [Alarm settings] together

with the bit address. To see the alarm settings screen, select [Alarm settings] in [General settings] of the [Project

manager], or select [Alarm settings] in the [Project] menu.

(☞ See [7.5] of [chapter 7] for the alarm setting method.)

Alarm tag types include [Alarm tag] and [Extended alarm tag]. The alarm tag and extended alarm tag perform the

same function, but the extended alarm tag includes more functions than the alarm tag. This is the properties screen

for alarm tags.

[Fig. Alarm tag properties screen]

This is an alarm tag registered to the screen.

[Fig. Alarm tag registered to the edit screen]

29.1 Page composition of the alarm tag properties screen

Alarm tag properties has 3 pages : [Alarm setting], [Display], and [Information].

Properties Description

The details of the alarm tag are set from this page.
Alarm setting page
Set the type of data displayed, and the alarm type.

CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag 361

 The design of the alarm tag is set from this page.
Display page
Set the frame, screen options, font, and color of the alarm tag.

On this page, alarm tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information page time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can

be edited.

29.2 Alarm settings page

Alarm features and data settings are set.

[Fig. Alarm settings page]

Alarm types include [Current alarm], [Alarm history], and [Alarm history (CF)].

Alarm type Description

Only currently triggered alarms are shown.

Current alarm When an alarm is triggered, it is shown. If the alarm is disengaged, it automatically

disappears from the alarm tag.

Displays not only currently triggered alarms, but also disengaged alarms in a history
Alarm history
sorted by order of occurrence.

Alarm history (CF) Displays alarm history data saved on a CF memory card

29.2.1 Current alarm settings

In Current alarm, only a list of currently triggered alarms is displayed.

(1) ALARM FEATURE

Alarm feature Description

Alarm type Select the current alarm.

Group Among the groups A~Z, select the group to show triggered alarm for.

Max. length of contents In the case of current alarms, all content is displayed to the end, even if a max.

length is not set. Therefore, the setting is disabled.

Record line number of Used only for current alarms.

alarm in display Saves the line number of the alarm displayed in the first line of the alarm list

362 CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag

 shown in the alarm tag, in the designated address.

Only internal touch addresses can be used.

Therefore, when this address is displayed as a [Numeric tag] on the screen, the line

number of the currently displayed alarm can be shown on screen.

(2) Data setting

Set the data to be displayed as the current alarm.

Set the [Date format], [Time format], [Line count], and [Line space] of the data to be shown

Properties Description

This format is used to display the trigger/disable date of alarms. y is year, m is month, and d is day.
Date format
Select from the formats provided.

This format is used to display the trigger/disable time of alarms. H is hour, m is minute, and s is
Time format
second. Select from the formats provided.

Used only for current alarms. This is the number of lines that are used to show one alarm. An alarm

can be shown across multiple lines. The first line can show time and date, and the second line can

show alarm details.

Line count

[Fig. Changing alarm data position]

Select the data to change the position for, then click the button to change the vertical

position of the data.

Line space Used only for current alarms. Set the spacing between alarms displayed.

① Setting the type of data to display

Two types of data: [Trigger date and time] and [Alarm content] are shown for current alarms.

Data type Description

Trigger date + time This is the date and time when the alarm occurred. This data can be set to be shown or not

shown, as desired by teh user.

This is the content of a triggered alarm. This is a mandatory item that must be shown.

If this data is excluded, the following error message is shown when the [OK] button is

pressed.
Alarm content

CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag 363

 ② Adding or deleting display data for the current alarm

<How to add alarm data>

After selecting date + time data from the list on the right, click the button on the
bottom to add to the alarm table.

[Fig. Adding alarm data]

<How to delete alarm data>

After selecting date + time data from the list on the right, click the button on the
bottom to delete from the alarm table.

[Fig. Deleting alarm data]

29.2.2 Setting alarm history

In alarm history, not only current alarms, but also cleared alarms are shown in order of occurrence.

Alarm history (CF) is set using the same method as alarm history.

[Fig. Alarm history]

(1) ALARM FEATURE

Alarm feature Description

Alarm type Select the alarm history.

Group Among the groups A~Z, select the group to display.

Enter the length of the longest alarm in the alarm list for the same group. If the
Max. length of contents
max. length of contents is not sufficiently long, the alarm content may not be fully

displayed, and may be cropped.

364 CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag

(2) Data setting
Set the data to be displayed alarm history.

① Setting the [Date format] and [Time format] of the data to show

Properties Description

The format is used to display the trigger/clear data of the alarm. Y is year, m is month, and d
Date format
is day. Select from the formats provided.

This format is used to display the trigger/disable time of alarms. H is hour, m is minute, and s
Time format
is second. Select from the formats provided.

② Setting the type of data to display

5 types of data are displayed in alarm history : [Trigger date], [Trigger time], [Alarm content], [Clear

date], and [Clear time].

Data type Description

Trigger date This is the date the alarm was triggered.

Trigger time This is the time when the alarm was triggered.

This is the content of a triggered alarm. This is a mandatory item that must be shown.

If this data is excluded, the following error message is shown when the [OK] button is pressed.

Alarm content

Clear date This is the date the alarm was cleared.

Clear time This is the time the alarm was cleared.

③ Adding or deleting display data in alarm history

<How to add alarm data>

After selecting data to add from the list on the right, click the button on the bottom

to add to the alarm table.

[Fig. Adding alarm data]

<How to delete alarm data>

After selecting the data to delete form the left alarm table by dragging with the mouse, click

the selecting date + time data from the list on the right, then click the button on the

CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag 365

 bottom to delete from the alarm table.

[Fig. Deleting alarm data]

29.2.3 Alarm history (CF) settings

Displays alarm data saved on a CF memory card. In the CF card, alarms are saved as individual files

organized by date and month in the [-HMI-]-[ALM] folder. The alarm file to display is selected using the

file manager. The file manger window is registered by selecting [Window screen] in [Project manager],

then running [Add file manager window] in the right mouse click popup menu. Window screen number

65530 is added.

[Fig. Add file manager window]

The created file manager looks like the following figure. The figure below shows the file manager in actual

operation. For CF card data to be loaded in the file manager window screen, the ENTER key to perform

the load command must be added.

[Fig. File manager]

The ENTER key above is set as follows by registering a touch tag.

[Fig. Adding an "Enter" button in touch tag special functions]

366 CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag

 Alarm tags set as alarm history (CF) operate as follow in the actual tag.

[Fig. Alarm history CF]

First, touch the [Group] button to set the date of the alarm to be displayed. In the figure above, Group A

has been set. Next, press the [CF View] button to pop up the file manager window.

In the list, select CF. Then select the (*.alm) alarm file in the [-HMI-]-[ALM] folder, then press the [Enter]

key. File manager will he disappear, then a list of alarms saved in the selected file is displayed, as seen

above.

The UP/DOWN keys can be used to move the list up and down, and the [->] keys can be used to move

the list left and right. In alarm history (CF), the trigger date, trigger time, alarm content, clear date, and

trigger time of the alarm are shown.

29.3 Display page

Set the frame, font, and color of the alarm tag.

[Fig. Display page]

29.3.1 Frame setting

Set the frame of the alarm frame, and the alarm background color.

(1) Frame color / background color

Frame color Description

Frame color Set the frame color of the alarm tag frame.

B.G. color Set the background color of the alarm tag frame.

CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag 367

 (2) Screen options
In screen options, basic and scroll options are provided. The scroll option is an option that currently

applies only to alarms.

① Standard type

[Fig. Standard type screen option

Standard type Description

When use basic frame is checked, default buttons are created on the bottom of the alarm tag.

For current alarms, [UP/DOWN] keys are created. For alarm history, [UP/DOWN/CLEAR] buttons

are created.

* Note) To register separately designed UP/DOWN/CLEAR buttons without using the basic

frame, register [Touch tags].

Use basic frame

[Fig. [Special functions] in the [Operation] page of the touch tag]

[UP] button Move the triggered alarms up by the [Up/Down scroll size].

[DOWN] button Move the triggered alarms down by the [Up/Down scroll size].

[CLEAR] button Excluding currently triggered alarms, all already cleared alarms are deleted.

Alarm text blink The text of the alarm can be blinked to create an emphasizing effect.

Up/Down scroll size Set the scroll size for the UP/DOWN buttons.

② Scroll option

This option currently applies to alarms only, and is disabled when alarm history has been set. The

content of triggered alarms is displayed scrolling across a single line, at the designated time interval.

[Fig. Scroll option among screen options]

368 CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag

 Scroll option Description

Set the scrolling direction.

Scroll option
In [Vertical], the list of triggered alarms is shown, alternating lines.

In [Horizontal], the list of triggered alarms is displayed, scrolling letters from right to left one letter

at a time.

Set the scrolling interval. The [0] interval is the touch computing speed, and is the fastest speed. [1
Scroll interval
x 500ms] is 0.5 seconds.

29.3.2 Font/color setting

Font/color setting Description

Designate the font of the letters displaying alarms.

Font * Note) If the alarm list entered in [Alarm setting] of the [Project menu] consists of image

text or multilanguage tables, image text or multilanguage tables are displayed.

Designate the font size to designate the size of the letters. The size of the font selected
Font size
under font is magnified by the font size.

Trigger text color The font color for currently triggered alarms.

Trigger background color The background color for currently triggered alarms.

Clear text color The font color for cleared alarms.

Clear background color The background color for cleared alarms.

Text align
Data shown for alarms is aligned to the [Left], [Center] or [Right].

CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag 369

 CHAPTER 30 Alarm Ext Tags

370 CHAPTER 29 -Alarm Tag

CHAPTER 30 - Alarm Ext Tag

An alarm ext tag shows a list of triggered alarms. The alarm tag and extended alarm tag perform the same function,

but the extended alarm tag includes more functions than the alarm tag.

Alarms refer to errors or problems that occur in the system. Individual alarms are registered in [Alarm settings]

together with bit addresses. To see the alarm settings screen, select [Alarm settings] in [Global Setting] of the

[Project manager], or select [Alarm settings] in the [Project] menu.

(☞ See [7.5] of [chapter 7] for alarm setting methods.) This is the properties screen for alarm ext tags.

[Fig. Alarm ext tag properties screen]

This is an alarm ext tag registered to the edit screen.

[Fig. Alarm ext tag registered to the edit screen]

30.1 Composition of the alarm ext tag properties screen

Alarm ext tag properties has 3 pages : [Display], [Alarm setting], and [Information].

Properties Description

The design of the alarm ext tag is set from this page. Set the frame, font, and color of the
Display page
alarm ext tag.

Alarm setting page The data and buttons to be displayed in the alarm ext tag are set in this page.

CHAPTER 30 -Alarm Ext Tag 371

 On this page, alarm ext tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information page time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can

be edited.

30.2 Display page

The design of the alarm ext tag is set from this page.

[Fig. Alarm ext tag display page]

30.2.1 Frame setting

Frame setting Description

This is the number of lines scrolled by the UP/DOWN buttons. The UP/DOWN buttons move
Scroll line count
alarm data up/down according to the scroll line count.

Set whether to display titles. When this is checked, the title is displayed above the alarm data
Use title bar
displayed. Touch the title to align alarm data.

Frame color Set the frame color.

Hint B.G. color Set the background color of the frame.

When grid is selected, vertical/horizontal lines are displayed between alarm

Description
data.

Grid options Use horizontal line Horizontal lines are displayed.

Use vertical line Vertical lines are displayed.

Line style Select the line style to be used to display the grid.

(1) Sort function

When [Use title bar] is used in the alarm ext tag, touching the title portion aligns the alarms displayed.

372 CHAPTER 30 -Alarm Ext Tag

 [Fig. Alarm ext tag

Among the titles above, excluding [Alarm message], touching [Trigger date], [Trigger time], [ACK date],

[ACK time], [Recovered date], [Recovered time], or [Occur No.] aligns the displayed alarms according to

the touched title. If [Use title bar] is not checked, alarms can be aligned by registering separate touch

buttons to the screen.

[Fig. Aligning alarm ext tags using touch tags]

As seen in the figure above, [Special functions] of the touch tag includes alarm ext tag alignment

functions.

30.2.2 Font/color setting

Font/color setting Description

Designate the font of the letters displaying alarms.

Font * Note) If the alarm list entered in [Alarm setting] of the [Project menu] consists of image

text or Multilanguage tables, image text or multilanguage tables are displayed.

Designate the font size to designate the size of the letters.

Font size
The size of the font selected under font is magnified according to the font size.

Trigger text color The font color for currently triggered alarms.

Trigger background color The background color for currently triggered alarms.

Clear text color The font color for cleared alarms.

Clear background color The background color for cleared alarms.

CHAPTER 30 -Alarm Ext Tag 373

30.3 Alarm settings page

The data and buttons to be displayed in the alarm ext tag are set in this page.

[Fig. Alarm tag alarm settings page]

30.3.1 ALARM FEATURE

Alarm feature Description

Select between current alarm and alarm history.

Alarm type In Current alarm, only a list of currently triggered alarms is displayed.

In alarm history, not only current alarms, but also cleared alarms are shown.

Alarm group Among the groups A~Z, select the group to display.

Enter the length of the longest alarm in the alarm list for the same group. If the max.

Mx length of contents Length of contents is not sufficiently long, the alarm content may not be fully

displayed, and may be cropped.

This format is used to display the trigger/disable date of alarms. y is year, m is month,
Date display format
and d is day. Select from the formats provided.

This format is used to display the trigger/disable time of alarms. H is hour, m is minute,
Time display format
and s is second. Select from the formats provided.

30.3.2 Alarm data

Select the data to display. Alarm content display is mandatory. The items in the list below can be set as

options.

Alarm data Description

Trigger date This is the date when the alarm occurred.

Trigger time This is the time when the alarm occurred.

ACK Date The date when the worker has acknowledged the alarm is displayed.

374 CHAPTER 30 -Alarm Ext Tag

 Select a triggered alarm and press the [ACK] button to display.

The time when the worker has acknowledged the alarm is displayed.
ACK Time
Select a triggered alarm and press the [ACK] button to display.

This is the date when the alarm was cleared. This is only displayed if alarm history has been
Recovered date
selected.

This is the time when the alarm was cleared. This is only displayed if alarm history has been
Recovered time
selected.

Occurrence No. The number of times the alarm has occurred is displayed.

If [Use address monitoring] under [Alarm settings] has been enabled, address values are

Monitoring address displayed.

The number of values displayed is equal to [Address count].

30.3.3 Key setting

Select the buttons to display.

Alarm button Description

The alarm at the top of the list of alarms displayed is selected.

Cursor
Alarms can also be selected by touching the alarm ext tag list.

When cursor has been selected, the position of the cursor is moved up.

Top If cursor has not been selected, alarm data is moved up by the [Scroll line count] on the

[Display page].

When cursor has been selected, the position of the cursor is moved down.

Bottom If cursor has not been selected, alarm data is moved down by the [Scroll line count] on

the [Display page].

Delete one [Cleared alarm] selected with the cursor. Because cleared alarms are only
Del
displayed in alarm history, this is only used when alarm history has been enabled.

Delete all [Cleared alarms]. Because cleared alarms are only displayed in alarm history,
Delete all
this is only used when alarm history has been enabled.

When pressed by the worker when an alarm is selected with the cursor, the ACK date
ACK
and ACK time are displayed.

Clear No. Occurrence The No. Occurrence for the alarm selected with the cursor is changed to [0].

Clear All No. Occurrence The No. Occurrence for all alarms is changed to [0].

This is necessary when Use solution tip is checked in [Alarm settings].

Enter If Use solution tip has been enabled for the alarm selected with the cursor, the set action

is performed. (☞ See [7.5.7] in [chapter 3] for solution tips.)

CHAPTER 30 -Alarm Ext Tag 375

 CHAPTER 31 Log Table

376 CHAPTER 30 -Alarm Ext Tag

CHAPTER 31 - Log Table

31.1 Log table overview

The log table displays logging data saved in the internal memory of the touch in table format.

This is the properties screen for the log table.

[Fig. Log table properties screen]

The log table in actual operation is shown.

[Fig. Touch screen log table]

31.2 Page composition of the log table properties screen

The log table properties screen comprises the [Data], [Display], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Logging data is set from this page.

Data Set the logging number and the format for date/time/column to be displayed on the

table.

The design of the log table is set from this page.

Displays
Set the frame, column width, and font of the log table.

On this page, log table info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can

be edited.

CHAPTER 31 -Log Table 377

31.3 Data page

Select the logging data to display, and set the format.

[Fig. Log table data page]

31.3.1 Table setting

In table setting, select the log number to display. Among the [LOG1~LOG8] logging numbers, only the

numbers selected in [Logging settings] in the [Project] menu is displayed. Note that if two or more log

tables with the same logging number are registered to the same screen, they will not operate properly.

[Fig. Logging number]

31.3.2 Data format

Set the format of data displayed in the log table.

(1) Date format

The date at the time when the log was saved is set here. Select among various date formats.

When [Hide] is selected, the date column is not displayed.

[Fig. Date format]

(2) Time format

The time at the time when the log was saved is set here. Select among various time formats.

378 CHAPTER 31 -Log Table

 When [Hide] is selected, the time column is not displayed.

[Fig. Time format]

(3) Column data type

Individual formats can be set; the number of formats is equal to the [Column count] set for the selected

logging.

To designate a new format, check [Redefinition], select the [Columns] on the left one by one, and set the

format.

[Fig. Column data type settings]

The column name is set in the [Column name & data type] page of the [Project]-[Logging settings] menu.

Column type Description

Select the column data type among the types shown in the figure below.

Data type

[DEC] is signed decimal, [UDEC] is unsigned decimal, and [HEX] is hexadecimal.

[BCD] is actually hexadecimal, but is used like decimal data, because numbers that

include A~F are not shown. [FLOAT] indicates numbers including decimal places.

Data size Select between [16 bit] and [32 bit].

Digital Data length This is the total number of places for the selected column.

Float data when input

the default number of ___ This is the number of decimal places for the selected column.

decimal places.

31.4 Display page

Set the design of the log table.

CHAPTER 31 -Log Table 379

 [Fig. Log table display page]

31.4.1 Frame setting

Frame Description

Frame color Set the frame color.

Background color Designate the general background color.

Line style Select the line style to be used to display the grid. 4 types of line style are provided.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~2dot.

Use title bar Set whether to display titles.

Title bar color Set the background color for the title.

31.4.2 Default column width

Set the column width for data displayed in the log table.

[Fig. Default column width setting]

Column type Description

No This number is the log table number, assigned sequentially.

Date This is the logging date.

Time This is the logging time.

Data Data is displayed in this column.

The column size is set according to the column type. The column size is set in dot (pixel) units.

380 CHAPTER 31 -Log Table

31.4.3 Font
Set the font to display log table data.

[Fig. Font setting]

Font Description

Font Select the font type.

Hint font color Set the color for the text used in the log table.

Background color Set the background color for the text used in the log table.

CHAPTER 31 -Log Table 381

 CHAPTER 32 Event Log Viewer Tag

382 CHAPTER 31 -Log Table

CHAPTER 32 - Event Log Viewer Tag

32.1 Event log viewer tag overview

Events set in [Event log] of the [Project menu] are saved to the CF memory card if conditions are satisfied.

The [Event log viewer tag] displayed event log data recorded on the CF memory card on the screen. (☞
See [7.9] of [chapter 7] for the [Event log] setting method.)

[Fig. Event log viewer tag information screen]

Select an event log file [*.evt] saved to the CF memory card in [File manager] then press [Enter] to display

event log data in the event log viewer tag. (☞ See [40.6] in [chapter 40] for the file manager.)

[Fig. Selecting an event log file using file manager]

This is the event log viewer tag registered to the screen.

[Fig. Event log viewer tag registered to the edit screen]

CHAPTER 32 -Event Log Viewer Tag 383

 Event log viewer Description

No The event occurrence number is displayed.

Trigger date The date the event occurred is displayed.

Trigger time The time the event occurred is displayed.

Event message The event message is displayed.

Previous value The data value before event occurrence is displayed.

Changed Value. The change data value that triggered the event is displayed.

UP Scrolls up.

DOWN Scrolls down.

>> Scrolls to the right.

<< Scrolls to the left.

32.2 Page composition of the event log viewer tag properties screen

The event log viewer tag properties screen comprises the [Event log], [Display], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

The group and the maximum length of the content of the event log to be displayed is set on
Event log page
this page.

Display page The frame and text font is set on this page.

On this page, event log viewer tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,
Information page
time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size in can be edited.

32.3 Event log page

The group and the maximum length of the content of the event log to be displayed is set on this page.

[Fig. Event log page]

Event log page Description

Group Select the group to display among the groups set in [Event log].

384 CHAPTER 32 -Event Log Viewer Tag

 Set the max length of the content to display.
Max. length of contents
The max. setting is 80. The length of the longest event in the selected group is set.

32.4 Display page

The frame and text font is set on this page.

[Fig. Display page]

32.4.1 Frame setting

Set the frame for the event log viewer tag displayed on the screen.

Frame setting Description

Outer frame color Set the color of the event log viewer tag frame.

Background color Set the background color of the event log viewer tag frame.

When use basic frame is checked, default buttons are created on the bottom of the event log
Use basic frame
viewer tag.

32.4.2 Font/color
Set the font, size, and color of the text displayed in the event log viewer tag.

Font/color Description

Font Select the font of the displayed font from the list below.

Font size The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by the font size.

Hint font color Set the color of the text displayed.

Text background color Set the background color of the text displayed.

CHAPTER 32 -Event Log Viewer Tag 385

 CHAPTER 33 Bar Graph Tag

386 CHAPTER 32 -Event Log Viewer Tag

CHAPTER 33 - Bar Graph Tag

33.1 Bar graph tag overview

The bar graph tag displays word address data as a graph. Bar graph types are [Bar graph], [Meta graph],

and [Paint].

[Fig. Bar graph tag properties screen]

[Fig. Bar graph types]

33.2 Page composition of the bar graph tag properties screen

The bar graph tag properties screen comprises the [Graph], [Display], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

On this page, the graph type is selected, the word address to read data from is entered,
Graph page
and the min. and max. values of the word values to be expressed using graphs are set.

The colors of the graph displayed are set in this page.

Display page
Word value sections can be set, and various colors can be applied to each section.

On this page, bar graph tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information page time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can

be edited.

CHAPTER 33 -Bar Graph Tag 387

33.3 Graph page

Select the graph type, and set the graph address and min/max values.

[Fig. Address page]

33.3.1 Graph style

(1) Bar graph
Data is expressed in a bar type graph. Set the graph direction to decide the direction the bars grow as

data increases.

[Fig. Bar graph]

Bar graph Description

Select bar graph.

Graph kind

Shape type Set whether to show frames for the bar graph.

[No Frame] – No frames are used in the bar graph.

[Rectangle] – Frames are used in the bar graph.

Set the graph direction to decide the direction the bars grow as data increases, from up,

down, left and right.

Graph direction

388 CHAPTER 33 -Bar Graph Tag

(2) Meta graph
Data is shown as a circular graph. The direction the needle moves, and the shape of the circle can be set.

[Fig. Meta graph]

Meta graph Description

Select meta graph.

Graph kind

Select the shape of the meta graph

Shape type

[Circle] – Circle [Pie] – Semicircle, [Pie 0, 90, 180, 270] – Fan shape.

Set the direction of movement for the needle in the meta graph.

Graph direction

[Start angle] – The initial position of the needle changes according to the angle set here.
Start angle can only be used when the frame shape is [Circle].

(3) Paint
Data is shown as a graph using filled shapes. After registering a closed shape first, register a [Paint] graph

in the closed shape. The closed shape is painted according to the data displayed.

[Fig. Paint]

Paint Description

Select paint.

Graph kind

Set the graph direction to decide the direction the color is filled as data increases, from up,
Graph direction
down, left and right.

CHAPTER 33 -Bar Graph Tag 389

 33.3.2 Graph data setting
Set the address and min/max values for the graph.

[Fig. Graph data settings]

Graph data settings Description

Graph address Set the word address to express as a graph.

Scan period Set the scan period for reading word address data in 500ms (0.5 second) units.

Select the data type to be used from the list.

[DEC] - signed decimal, [UDEC] - unsigned decimal, [BCD] - Is actually hexadecimal, but is
Data type
displayed as decimal because data including A~F is not used. [FLOAT] – This type of data
uses decimal places.

Data size Select between 16 bit and 32 bit. 32 bit is used when values larger than 16 bit are used.

Enter the minimum value of the graph. A fixed min value may be used by entering a constant.

Alternatively, an address may be set to use a variable min value according to address data.

Minimum value

Enter the maximum value of the graph.

Maximum value A fixed max value may be used by entering a constant. Alternatively, an address may be set to

use a variable max value according to address data.

33.4 Display page

On this page, the fill color, background color, and frame color of the graph are set. Different fill colors

may be used depending on the data section.

390 CHAPTER 33 -Bar Graph Tag

 [Fig. Display page]

33.4.1 Color setting

[Fig. Color setting]

Graph color setting Description

Base color Set the color used to fill the graph when data is between the min and max values.

Exceed color Set the color used to fill the graph when data exceeds the max. value.

Designate the background color of the graph.

Background color The background of the graph refers to the parts other than the parts displaying data in the

graph.

Frame color Set the frame color for the graph.

33.4.2 Range setup

This is used when assigning different graph fill colors depending on word address data ranges. The graph

is filled with a single color.

[Fig. Range setup]

CHAPTER 33 -Bar Graph Tag 391

 Range setup Description

Use range address This is used when using a word address other than the [Graph address] in the [Graph page] for

the word address to be referenced in a range.

Set the number of ranges to designate colors for.

Range count
Up to 8 ranges can be used.

No. This is the number of the set range.

Minimum value Enter the minimum value of the range.

Maximum value Enter the maximum value of the range.

Fill Color Set the fill color of the graph to be used in the range.

392 CHAPTER 33 -Bar Graph Tag

CHAPTER 34 Linear Graph Tag

CHAPTER 33 -Bar Graph Tag 393

CHAPTER 34 - Linear Graph Tag

34.1 Linear graph tag overview

A linear graph tag displays word address data change over time in the form of a linear graph.

Up to 20 linear graphs can be displayed in a single linear graph tag.

[Fig. Linear graph tag properties screen]

This is an actual linear graph tag that operates on the touch screen.

[Fig. Linear graph tag operation screen]

34.2 Page composition of the linear graph tag properties screen

The linear graph tag properties screen comprises the [Display], [Graph], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Display page On this page the frame and graph features of the linear graph are set.

Graph page On this page, the word address, min/max values, and line style are set to register a linear graph.

On this page, linear graph tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time

Information page created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size information can be

edited.

394 CHAPTER 34 -Linear Graph Tag

34.3 Display page

On this page the frame and graph features of the linear graph are set.

[Fig. Display page]

34.3.1 Frame setting

Set the frame and background color for the graph.

[Fig. Frame setting]

Frame setting Description

Select whether to show the frame from the list below.

Frame type

Frame color Set the frame color.

Background color Set the background color within the graph.

34.3.2 Graph feature

Set the number of x-axis divisions, scroll count, scan period and graph direction of the graph.

[Fig. Graph feature settings]

CHAPTER 34 -Linear Graph Tag 395

 Graph feature settings Description

Set the number of x-axis divisions. The number of data changes displayed is equal to

Number of x-axis divisions the number of x-axis divisions.

The maximum setting is the [Horizontal resolution] of the touch.

When the graph has filled the screen, the screen scrolls and continues to draw the

Scroll count graph.

Here, the graph is moved forward according to the value in [Scroll count].

This is the time taken to draw one piece of data in the graph. Set the scan period in

500ms (0.5 second) units.

Scan period
Data is read each time the scan period elapses, and the graph progresses by one x-axis

division each time.

Graph Left The linear graph is drawn from right to left.

direction Right The linear graph is drawn from left to right.

34.4 Graph page

On this page, the word address, min/max values, and line style are set to register a linear graph. Up to 20

graphs can be registered.

[Fig. Graph page]

Part Description

Select the data type to be used from the list.

[DEC] - signed decimal, [UDEC] - unsigned decimal, [BCD] - Is actually hexadecimal, but is
Data type
displayed as decimal because data including A~F is not used. [FLOAT] – This type of data uses
decimal places.

Data size Select between 16 bit and 32 bit. 32 bit is used when values larger than 16 bit are used.

396 CHAPTER 34 -Linear Graph Tag

 Address Set the word address to express as a linear graph.

Minimum value Designate the min value of the graph.

Maximum value Designate the max value of the graph.

Line style Select the line style for the linear graph from the list.

Line width Set the line width for the linear graph. Up to 2 can be set.

Line color Set the line color for the linear graph.

Up to 20 linear graphs can be displayed in a single linear graph tag. Use the [New/Save/Delete] buttons

to register graphs.

Button Description

Registers a new graph.

Saves the settings to the selected graph list.

Deletes the selected graph.

First, press the button and register a linear graph with default values.

[Fig. Graph registration]

Add the number of graphs to be used, and use the mouse to select the graph to change settings for. Set

the address/min value/max value/line style in the bottom, then press the button to save settings.

[Fig. Graph registration]

CHAPTER 34 -Linear Graph Tag 397

 CHAPTER 35 Graph Ex Tags

398 CHAPTER 34 -Linear Graph Tag

CHAPTER 35 - Graph Ex Tag

35.1 Graph Ex Tag overview

This tag displays logging or recipe data as a graph. Multiple data can be displayed in a single graph,

differentiated by line color and width. This is the properties screen for graph Ex tags.

[Fig. Graph Ex tag properties screen]

This is an ext graph operating on an actual touch screen.

[Fig. Touch screen ext graph]

35.2 Composition of the graph Ex tag properties screen

The graph Ex tag properties screen comprises the [Display], [Graph], [Data], and [Information] pages.

Page Description

Displays The design of the graph is set from this page. Set the frame type, color, and background color.

The features of the graph are set from this page. The graph scale, data type, x axis starts address,
Graph
cursor, and scale, etc., are set.

Data to be displayed on the graph is set from this page.

Data
Set the logging/recipe data to display, min value, and max value, etc.

On this page, graph Ex tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information
created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be edited.

CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag 399

35.3 Display page

The design of the graph Ex tag is set from this page. Set the frame type, color, and background color.

[Fig. Graph Ex display page]

35.3.1 Frame setting

Displays Description

Frame type Select the frame type of the ext graph between [No Frame Edge] and [Rectangle].

Frame color Set the frame color for the ext graph.

Background color Designate the background color of the ext graph.

35.4 Graph page

The features of the graph are set from this page. The graph scale, data type, x axis starts address, cursor,

and scale, etc., are set.

[Fig. Graph Ex graph page]

35.4.1 Graph feature

The graph features for the ext graph are set here. The dots/scale, data type, and X-axis start value are set.

400 CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag

 [Fig. Graph feature]

Graph feature Description

Dots/scale This is the scale used to display a single piece of data in the graph. Dot (pixel) units are used.

Select among [DEC], [UDEC], and [BCD].

Data type [DEC] is signed decimal, [UDEC] unsigned decimal, and [BCD] is actually hexadecimal, but is used

like decimal data, because numbers that include A~F are not shown.

Data size Select between [16 bit] and [32 bit].

X-axis start value designates the data at point [0] on the x axis, that is, the data at the start point.

X-axis The address can be selected from various types, as seen in the figure above.

start value [Constant] is used when fixing the data at the start position. If [10] is designated as the [Constant],

the 10th logging/recipe data becomes the data at the start position.

When using [Internal] addresses, or [Logging] or [Recipe] data, the data changes in some cases. The

graph can be viewed by changing the data of the start position.

35.4.2 Cursor
Set the horizontal (y-axis) and vertical (x-axis) cursors displayed on the ext graph.

[Fig. Cursor]

Cursor Description

Set whether the x-axis cursor is displayed. In [Nothing], the cursor is not shown. In

[Always], the cursor is always shown. In [Variable], the cursor may or may not be

shown, depending on the ON/OFF state of the bit condition address.

X axis Select view/hide

cursor

Cursor position Select between [Internal address] and [Constant].

CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag 401

 address

When [Constant] is selected, the position of the cursor is fixed. If [20] is designated as

the constant, the cursor is shown at the 20th data. If [Internal] address is set, the data

can be changed, and the position of the cursor can be varied.

Bit condition This can be set only if [Variable] has been selected. If the bit condition address data is

address [ON], the cursor is shown. If [OFF], the cursor is not shown.

Set whether the Y-axis cursor is displayed.

Select

view/hide In [Nothing], the cursor is not shown. In [Always], the cursor is always shown.

In [Variable], the cursor may or may not be shown, depending on the ON/OFF state of

the bit condition address.

Y axis Select between [Internal address] and [Constant].

cursor

Cursor position

address When [Constant] is selected, the position of the cursor is fixed. If [20] is designated as

the constant, the cursor is shown at the 20th data. If [Internal] address is set, the data

can be changed, and the position of the cursor can be varied.

Bit condition This can be set only if [Variable] has been selected. If the bit condition address data is

address [ON], the cursor is shown. If [OFF], the cursor is not shown.

35.4.3 Scale to
The graph can be zoomed in or zoomed out. First select whether to scale up or scale down the graph. In

ext graph, scale up and scale down cannot be set simultaneously. Only one or the other can be set.

Next, enter the graph scale address to set the rate of scale-up/scale-down.

[Fig. Scale to]

Scale to Description

Scale-up Scales the graph up by the set rate.

Scale-down Scales the graph down by the set rate.

If the graph scale address is [Constant], the scale rate is fixed. For internal addresses or

logging/recipe data, the scale rate can be adjusted.

Rate of Axis scale

402 CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag

 If [Scale-up] has been set and the data is [2] or [3], the graph is scaled up by a factor of 2 and

3, respectively. If [Scale-down] has been set and the data is [2] or [3], the graph is scaled down

to 1/2 and 1/3, respectively. If the data is [0] or [1], the graph is displayed in the original size.

35.5 Data page

Data to be displayed on the graph is set from this page. Set the logging/recipe data to display, min

value, and max value, etc. Up to 20 data can be expressed as graphs in a single ext graph.

[Fig. Graph Ex data page]

35.5.1 Adding data to display in the graph

On the top of the data page, there is a list of data to show in the graph. On the bottom, the properties

of each graph data can be set. Create [Graph data] by pressing the [New] button. After setting detailed

graph features in the bottom section, press the [Save] button to save settings.

Properties Description

Description A description of the graph data is provided.

Creates new graph data.

Save detailed properties for the set graph data.

Deletes registered graph data.

35.5.2 Graph kind

There are two kinds of graph : [Trend graph] and [X/Y chart].

CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag 403

 [Fig. Graph kind]

Graph kind Description

A 2D graph that shows logging/recipe data change over time, with time in the X axis and
Linear graph
data on the Y axis.

X/Y chart In this graph, logging/recipe data are plotted using (X,Y) coordinates.

(1) When trend graph has been selected

In a trend graph, [The value of Y axis when X axis cursor is placed upon graph] is set.

[Fig. When trend graph has been selected]

[The value of Y axis when X axis cursor is placed upon graph] saves the value of the graph when the X

axis is placed upon the graph, that is, the Y axis value, in the designated [Internal] address.

(2) When X/Y chart has been selected

In the X/Y chart, the [Count X/Y point] and [Max X/Y point] are set.

[Fig. When X/Y chart has been selected]

X/Y chart Description

This is the number of points plotted with (X,Y) coordinates. The number of points can be set

using various types of addresses. When [Constant] is set, the number of points is fixed. If

[Internal] address or [Logging/Recipe] data is set, the number of points can be varied.

Count X/Y point

Max X/Y point This is the maximum number of points plotted with (X,Y) coordinates.

35.5.3 Graph data/read direction

Set the graph data to display. Graph data is set depending on the read direction.

404 CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag

 [Fig. Graph data/read direction]

(1) Graph data

First, the logging/recipe data to display as a graph is selected. Next, the [Block number] and [Word

number] are entered to select the data to display from the select logging/recipe data.

[Block] refers to the data when logging data is saved once. Numbers start from block [0].

[Word(column)] refers to the number of data logged at once. Numbers start from [0] words.

[Fig. Graph data]

(2) Read direction

Select the read direction. Options are [Col(column)], [Row(block)], and [Word].

[Fig. Read direction]

Logging data is saved as shown in the table below. Assume a logging setting with 5 columns (logging

targets). The [Read address] can be described as follows using this table.

Date Time Column0 Column1 Column2 Column3 Column4

Block0 Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data1 Data2 Data3 Data4 Data5

Block1 Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data6 Data7 Data8 Data9 Data10

Block2 Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data11 Data12 Data13 Data14 Data15

Block3 Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data16 Data17 Data18 Data19 Data20

... Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data21 Data22 Data23 Data24 Data25

Read direction Description

Data in one column is displayed as a graph according to time. In [Col], [Block number] is not used,

only [Word number] requires setting.

Col(column)

When graph data is set as shown in the figure above, the [Word number] is [1], therefore [Data2,

CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag 405

 Data7, Data12, Data17, Data22, …] are displayed in the graph in order, according to time.
Data in a single block is displayed in a graph. In [Row], [Word number] is not used, only [Block

number] requires setting.

Row(block)

When graph data is set as shown in the figure above, the [Block number] is [2], therefore [Data11,

Data12, Data13, Data14, Data15] are displayed in the graph in order.

An interval is set, and data is selected at the designated interval to display selected data as a

graph.

Word

When the interval is set to [2] as shown in the figure above, [Data1, Data3, Data5, Data7, Data9,

Data11, …] are displayed in the graph in order.

35.5.4 Min value/Max value

Set the min value/max value of the y axis of the graph to display the data.

[Fig. Min value/Max value setting]

[Fig. Address types]

As seen in the figure above, the Y axis range can be set using [Internal] addresses, [Constants], and

[Logging/recipe data]. When [Constant] is set, the range of the Y axis is fixed. When address is set, the
Y axis range can be varied according to the address data.

35.5.5 Visibility on/off address

The graph showing each data can be set to be visible at all times, or to be visible or invisible depending

on conditions.

[Fig. Visibility on/off address]

406 CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag

 Visibility on/off Description

Always On The graph is always visible.

The graph is made visible or invisible depending on the state of the condition address. Only

Variable [Internal] addresses can be set as the [Condition address]. If the data of the [Condition

address] is not [0], the graph is visible. If the data is [0], the graph is made invisible.

35.5.6 Line setting

Set the properties of the lines of the graphs displaying each data.

[Fig. Line setting]

Line setting Description

Line style Select the style of the line. 4 options are provided.

Line color Set the line color.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~2dot.

CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag 407

 CHAPTER 36 Record Tag

408 CHAPTER 35 -Graph Ex Tag

CHAPTER 36 - Record Tag

36.1 Record tag overview

The record tag displays logging or recipe data as a graph. The function is the same as ext graph, but

more functions are included. Multiple data can be displayed in a single graph, differentiated by line

color and width. This is the properties screen for record tags.

[Fig. Record tag properties screen]

This is an actual operating record tag graph.

[Fig. Touch screen record tag]

CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag 409

36.2 Page composition of the record tag properties screen

The record tag properties screen comprises the [Display], [Graph], [Data], and [Information] pages.

Page Description

The design of the graph is set from this page.

Displays
Set the frame, date/time display format, and keys, etc.

The features of the graph are set from this page.

Graph
Set the graph display interval, bit condition for using page navigation keys, grids, and cursors, etc.

Data to be displayed on the graph is set from this page.

Data
Set the logging/recipe data to display, min value, and max value, etc.

On this page, record tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time created
Information
and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be edited.

36.3 Display page

The design of the graph is set from this page.

Set the frame, date/time display format, and keys, etc.

[Fig. Record tag display page]

36.3.1 Frame setting

In record tags, there are two frames : the outer frame and the inner frame. Therefore, their respective

frame colors and background color are set.

Frame setting Description

Outer frame color Set the frame color of the outer frame.

Outer background Set the background color of the outer frame.

Frame color Set the frame color of the inner frame.

Graph background Set the background color of the inner frame.

Display date/time The date/time of the logging data is displayed at the bottom of the x axis.

410 CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag

 The date/time is displayed at the point where the x axis grid meets the graph.

This is displayed only "Use X-axis", that is, the x-axis grid, is enabled in the display

page.

Use color of date/time Set the color for date/time.

As new data is drawn in the graph whenever logging occurs, the graph continuously

Use draw stop condition changes. This option is used to view the graph in stationary state. When a bit address is

set and ON/OFF conditions are set, the graph stops when the conditions are satisfied.

36.3.2 Key setting

[Fig. Key setting]

[Page shift keys] and [Cursor keys] are provided.

(1) Page shift key

[Page shift keys] are used to shift among graph screens. Check to create 4 buttons on the bottom.

Page shift key Description

NEXT Shifts to the next page.

PREV Shifts to the previous page.

FIRST Shifts to the first page.

LAST Shifts to the last page.

Page shift works when the graph screen is filled with data.

Also, page shift works when the [Page shit key use bit condition] in the [Graph page] is satisfied.

(2) Cursor key

[Cursor keys] are used to move the cursors displayed on the graph.

The cursor is a straight line perpendicular to the X axis, indicating the point where the graph is met.

Check to create 4 buttons on the bottom.

Page shift key Description

LEFT Moves the cursor left by one page.

CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag 411

 RIGHT Moves the cursor right by one page.

When multiple graphs are displayed, the cursor meets multiple graphs. Using the [UP] button, a
UP
cursor touching the bottom graph is moved up by 1 graph to touch the top graph.

When multiple graphs are displayed, the cursor meets multiple graphs. Using the [DOWN]
DOWN
button, a cursor touching the top graph is moved down by 1 graph to touch the bottom graph.

(3) Key registration using touch tags

To change the design of a key, or the register a key in a separately registered position, touch tags can be

used to register page shift keys. Select [Special functions] in the [Operation] page of the touch tag.

Set the category to [Extended TAG] and select [Record Tag] for the special operation. This brings up the

record tag cursor keys and page shift keys. Designate each of the 8 keys separately as needed, and

register to the screen.

[Fig. Key registration using touch tags]

36.4 Graph page

The features of the graph are set from this page. Set the graph display interval, bit condition for using

page navigation keys, grids, and cursors, etc.

412 CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag

 [Fig. Record tag graph page]

36.4.1 Record feature

Set the graph display interval and the bit condition used for page shifts.

[Fig. Record feature]

Record feature Description

This is the scale used to display a single piece of data in the graph.
Dots/scale
Dot (pixel) units are used.

When the graph is drawn to the end of the screen, the record tag automatically shifts to

the next screen and continues drawing data. That is, the latest data is displayed

automatically.
Use page shift key

Bit condition
To see data on previous pages, shift pages using the [Page shift keys]. Here, to enable

the [Page shift keys], the conditions set in the [Bit condition used for page shifts] must

be satisfied

CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag 413

 36.4.2 Show X-axis/Y-axis grid
Grids are displayed on the X axis and Y axis.

[Fig. Show X-axis/Y-axis grid]

Ruler Description

Use X-axis When checked, vertical lines (rulers) dividing the x axis in the graph are displayed.

Set the interval to show rulers.

A grid is displayed with the data interval set in [Division size]. As the [Graph display interval]
Division size
is the interval for displaying one data, if [Graph display interval] is [20(Dot)] and [Division

size] is [2], the grid becomes [20(Dot)] X[2] and is shown every [40(Dot)].

Line color Set the color for the grid.

Line style Select the style of the grid. Select from 4 types.

Line width Select the grid line width, from 1~2dot.

Use Y-axis When checked, horizontal lines (rulers) dividing the y axis in the graph are displayed.

This is the number of divisions in the Y axis. If this value is [2], the y axis is divided into two
No of division
equal parts.

When the X axis and Y axis grid are set as shown in the figure above, the following is displayed in the

record tag.

[Fig. Record tag with grid shown]

36.4.3 Cursor
A cursor is a vertical standard line drawn perpendicularly to the x axis. The [Cursor keys] can be used to

move up, down, left and right, and data at the point the graph is met can be displayed at the top of the

414 CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag

 record tag.

[Fig. Cursor]

Cursor Description

Use cursor Check to use cursors

The point where the cursor meets the graph is indicated by a rectangular dot.
Cursor size
The cursor size is the size of this rectangular dot. Enter in dot(pixel) units.

When checked, the data at the point the cursor meets the graph (y axis value) is
Auto-display value on cursor.
automatically displayed on the top left corner of the graph.

Auto-display date/time on When checked, the date and time (x axis value) at the point the cursor meets the

cursor. graph is automatically displayed on the top right corner of the graph.

Saving date/time By designating an [Internal] address, the date and time data at the cursor position

on cursor can be saved.

36.5 Data page

Data to be displayed on the graph is set from this page. Set and register detailed properties of the logging/recipe

data to be displayed.

[Fig. Record tag data page]

CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag 415

 36.5.1 Data type/size
Set the type and size of data to be displayed as a graph.

Data Description

Select among [DEC], [UDEC], and [BCD]. [DEC] is signed decimal, [UDEC] is unsigned
Data type
decimal, and [BCD] is a hexadecimal data type that acts like decimal data.

Data size Select between [16 bit] and [32 bit].

36.5.2 Adding data to display in the graph

On the top of the data page, there is a list of data to show in the graph. On the bottom, the properties

of each graph data can be set. Create [Graph data] by pressing the [New] button. After setting detailed

graph features in the bottom section, press the [Save] button to save settings.

Properties Description

Description A description of the graph data is provided.

Creates new graph data.

Save detailed properties for the set graph data.

Deletes registered graph data.

36.5.3 [The value of Y axis when X axis cursor is placed upon graph] (internal address)
[The value of Y axis when X axis cursor is placed upon graph] saves the value of the graph when the X

axis is placed upon the graph, that is, the Y axis value, in the designated [Internal] address.

[Fig. The value of Y axis when X axis cursor is placed upon graph (internal address)]

36.5.4 Graph data/read direction

Set the graph data to display. Graph data is set depending on the read direction.

[Fig. Graph data/read direction]

(1) Graph data

First, the logging/recipe data to display as a graph is selected. Next, the [Block number] and [Word

number] are entered to select the data to display from the select logging/recipe data.
[Block] refers to the data when logging data is saved once. Numbers start from block [0].

[Word(column)] refers to the number of data logged at once. Numbers start from [0] words.

416 CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag

 [Fig. Graph data]

(2) Read direction

Only [Col(column)] can be used as the [Read direction]. That is, data change over time is displayed as a

graph.

Logging data is saved as shown in the table below. Assume a logging setting with 5 columns (logging

targets).

The [Read address] can be described as follows using this table.

Date Time Column0 Column1 Column2 Column3 Column4

Block0 Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data1 Data2 Data3 Data4 Data5

Block1 Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data6 Data7 Data8 Data9 Data10

Block2 Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data11 Data12 Data13 Data14 Data15

Block3 Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data16 Data17 Data18 Data19 Data20

... Year/Month/Date Hour/Minute/Second Data21 Data22 Data23 Data24 Data25

Read direction Description

Data in one column is displayed as a graph according to time. In [Col], [Block number] is not

used, only [Word number] requires setting.

Col(column)

When graph data is set as shown in the figure above, the [Word number] is [1], therefore [Data2,

Data7, Data12, Data17, Data22, …] are displayed in the graph in order, according to time.

36.5.5 Min value/Max value

Set the min value/max value of the y axis of the graph to display the data.

[Fig. Min value/Max value setting]

[Fig. Address types]

CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag 417

 As seen in the figure above, the Y axis range can be set using [Internal] addresses, [Constants], and

[Logging/recipe data]. When [Constant] is set, the range of the Y axis is fixed. When address is set, the Y

axis range can be varied according to the address data.

36.5.6 Visibility on/off address

The graph showing each data can be set to be visible at all times, or to be visible or invisible depending

on conditions.

[Fig. Visibility on/off address]

Visibility on/off Description

Always On The graph is always visible.

The graph is made visible or invisible depending on the state of the condition address.

Only [Internal] addresses can be set as the [Condition address].

Variable
If the data of the [Condition address] is not [0], the graph is visible. If the data is [0], the graph

is made invisible.

36.5.7 Line setting

Set the properties of the lines of the graphs displaying each data.

[Fig. Line setting]

Line setting Description

Line style Select the style of the line. 4 options are provided.

Line color Set the line color.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~2dot.

418 CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag

CHAPTER 37 X/Y Char t A Tag

CHAPTER 36 -Record Tag 419

CHAPTER 37 - X/Y Char t A Tag

37.1 X/Y chart A tag overview

The X/Y chart A tag is a tag that reads the word values for the X axis and the word values for the Y axis,

then plots the intersection of the two values in a 2D graph to display the change of the value. Data

change can be expressed using a trend graph, histogram, continuous y-graph, or random y-graph. To

express graphs, consecutive word addresses are required.

If word addresses are used beginning with [D0000] as shown in the figure below, 2 addresses are needed

to express one point (X/Y). Therefore addresses are used in the following manner : [D0000]/[D0001](X0/Y0),

[D0002]/[D0003](X1/Y1), [D0004]/[D0005](X2/Y2), ….

If the [No. of point value] in the figure below is used as an address value, the first address becomes the

value that sets the number of points. Therefore the data is changed to [D0000](number of points),

[D0001]/[D0002](X0/Y0), [D0003]/[D0004](X1/Y1), [D0005]/[D0006] (X2/Y2), ….

Here, one address is used per point in the Y-graph.

[Fig. X/Y chart A tag properties screen]

37.2 Composition of the X/Y chart A tag properties screen

The X/Y chart A tag properties screen comprises the [Graph setting], [Graph data], [Display], and

[Information] pages.

Property page Description

This page is used to set the graph type, start address of the word addresses to use, and the
Graph setting page
number of dots to display.

420 CHAPTER 37 -X/Y Chart A Tag

 From this page, the data type of the graph shown on the screen, the number of graphs, and
Graph data page
the minimum and maximum values for each data are set.

Display page Set whether to show frames and their color, and the graph refresh conditions.

On this page, X/Y chart A tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information page time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be

edited.

37.3 Graph setting page

This page is used to set the graph type, start address of the consecutive word addresses to use in the

graph, and the number of dots to display. Depending on the number of points to show on the graph, the

number of addresses varies.

[Fig. Graph setting page]

Graph setting Description

The intersection points between X axis word address values and Y axis word address
Trend
values are displayed on the screen, and data is expressed by connecting points using
Graph
lines.

The intersection points between X axis word address values and Y axis word address

values are displayed on the screen.

Graph Histogram In histograms, even if the data value changes, the dots used to display past data

Type remain on the screen. If the [Clear condition of histogram] is triggered, all points

remaining on the screen are erased.

Y-graph
Consecutive Y axis data is listed, and data change is displayed continuously.
(contiguous)

Y-graph Non-consecutive Y axis data is listed, and data change is displayed continuously.

(random) Separate addresses can be set in the [Graph data] page.

Start address Enter the start address for the consecutive word addresses to read values from.

CHAPTER 37 -X/Y Chart A Tag 421

 Enter the word address to use as the condition for erasing the points displayed in the

Clear condition of histogram [Histogram] graph. If the word address has a value other than 0, points for new data

values are displayed, erasing points on the histogram.

Connection between
Set whether to connect the dots displayed in the [Trend graph].
two points

Use the word address value entered in [Start address] as the number of points to use
No of point From address
in the graph.
value
Fixed Set a fixed number of points to be used in the graph.

Set the max number of points shown on the graph.

Max. point number
When [Fixed] is selected in [No. of point value], [No. of points] is displayed.

The following is displayed, depending on the graph type.

[Fig. Trend graph]

[Fig. Histogram]

[Fig. Y-graph]

422 CHAPTER 37 -X/Y Chart A Tag

37.4 Graph data page

From this page the data values for the graph displayed on the screen are set for each range, so that

different graphs are displayed.

[Fig. Graph data page]

Part Description

Select the type of data to use from the list below.

[DEC] - signed decimal, [UDEC] - unsigned decimal,

Data type [BCD] - It is actually hexadecimal, but is used like decimal data, because data that

includes A~F is not shown.

[FLOAT] – This type of data uses decimal places.

Select between 16 bit and 32 bit.

Data size
32 bit is used when values are larger than 16 bit.

Data line count Set the number of data lines for the data value range to be used.

Use variable min/max values by setting the min value/max value using an internal
X/Y Internal address
address.
Data type
Constant Min/max values are fixed as a constant and used.

Y axis - Min value Enter the min value of the Y axis word address for the applicable range.

Y axis - Max value Enter the max value of the Y axis word address for the applicable range.

X- axis - Min value Enter the min value of the X axis word address for the applicable range.

X axis - Max value Enter the max value of the X axis word address for the applicable range.

Dot size Set the size of the dots displayed on the screen.

Dot color Set the color of the dots displayed on the screen.

Line style Select the style of the line displayed on the screen.

Line width Set the width (1~2dot) of the lines displayed on screen.

CHAPTER 37 -X/Y Chart A Tag 423

 When [Graph type] is set the [Y-graph(random)] in [Graph settings], the following list for [Address type]

and address entry appears, as seen in the following figure.

[Fig. Address type]

When [Random] is selected, non-consecutive addresses can be used. Set addresses by double clicking

each item with the mouse.

37.5 Display page

Set whether to show frames and their color, and the graph refresh conditions.

[Fig. Display page]

37.5.1 Frame setting

Set the frame of the graph.

[Fig. Frame setting]

424 CHAPTER 37 -X/Y Chart A Tag

 Frame setting Description

Frame type Set whether to show the frame.

Frame color Set the frame color.

Background color Set the background color within the graph.

37.5.2 Update condition

Set the condition for updating the graph data in the X/Y chart displayed on the screen.

(1) Cycle
Update according to the time interval set in Interval. The interval is set using 500ms (0.5 second) units.

When 0 is set, data is updated as a very fast rate, using the scan time (each scan) of the touch as the

cycle.

[Fig. Cycle]

(2) Bit state

Data is updated depending on the state of the user designated bit address.

[Fig. Bit state]

Bit state Detailed description

Address Set the bit address to use as the condition.

When 0 Update is performed once, when the set bit address becomes OFF.

When 1 Update is performed once, when the set bit address becomes ON.
CONDITION
Bit reverse Updates once each time the set bit address is reversed.

0 _ maintain state Updated with each scan while the set bit address is OFF.

1 _ maintain state Updated with each scan while the set bit address is ON.

(3) Word value

When word address data is changed, data is updated if the changed data satisfies the set max value and

mix value ranges.

CHAPTER 37 -X/Y Chart A Tag 425

 [Fig. Word value]

Word value Detailed description

CONDITION Min (minimum value) Enter the minimum value of the word address used as the condition.

Max (maximum value) Enter the maximum value of the word address used as the condition.

Address Set the word address.

426 CHAPTER 37 -X/Y Chart A Tag

CHAPTER 38 X/Y Char t B Tag

CHAPTER 37 -X/Y Chart A Tag 427

CHAPTER 38 - X/Y Char t B Tag

38.1 X/Y chart B tag overview

The X/Y chart B tag is a tag that has the same action as the X/Y chart A tag, but includes more functions.

The X/Y chart B tag is a tag that reads the word values for the X axis and the word values for the Y axis,

then plots the intersection of the two values in a 2D graph to display the change of the value.

While in the X/Y chart A tag, a single word address is entered, and consecutive addresses beginning with

that address are used, in X/Y chart B tag, the address for designating the [Fix point count], the X

coordinate start address, and the Y coordinate start address can be set individually.

[Fig. X/Y chart B tag properties screen]

[Fig. Line graph] [Fig. Histogram]

428 CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag

38.2 Composition of the X/Y chart B tag properties screen

The X/Y chart B tag properties screen comprises the [Graph setting], [Display], [Data set], [Graph

conditions], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

On this page, the graph type, the word address designating the number of points, the X
Graph setting page
coordinate start address, and the Y coordinate start address are set.

On this page, the graph frame setting, in-graph grid setting, and update conditions for the
Display page
graphs displayed are set.

From this page, the number of the graphs shown on the screen, the ranges for the min and
Data set page
max values of each data, and the graph display are set.

On this page, the conditions for displaying images registered in the [Image list] as points on
Graph condition page
the graph are set.

On this page, X/Y chart B tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID,

Information page time created and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be

edited.

38.3 Graph setting page

On this page, the graph type, the word address designating the number of points, the X coordinate start

address, and the Y coordinate start address are set. Depending on the number of points to show on the

graph, the number of addresses varies.

[Fig. Graph setting page]

CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag 429

 38.3.1 Graph feature
(1) Line graph
The intersection points between X axis word address values and Y axis word address values are displayed

on the screen, and data is expressed by connecting points using lines. When [Continuity point connection]

is used, the lines are connected. If not used, only points are shown.

[Fig. Line graph]

(2) Histogram
The intersection points between X axis word address values and Y axis word address values are displayed

on the screen.

In histograms, even if the data value changes, the dots used to display past data remain on the screen.

If the [Clear condition of histogram] is triggered, all points remaining on the screen are erased.

If the data of the word address in [Graph clear condition address] has a value other than 0, points for new

data values are displayed, erasing points on the histogram.

[Fig. Histogram]

38.3.2 Graph data setting

[Fig. Graph data settings]

Graph data settings Description

Data type Select the data type to be used.

430 CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag

 [DEC] - signed decimal,

[UDEC] - unsigned decimal,

[BCD] - It is actually hexadecimal, but is used like decimal data, because

data that includes A~F is not shown.

[FLOAT] – This type of data uses decimal places.

Select between 16 bit and 32 bit.

Data size
32 bit is used when values larger than 16 bit are used.

Use a fixed number of points in the graph.

If fix point count is not enabled, the number of points varies according to

the values of word addresses entered. When the checkbox is checked, the

point count part is changed as shown in the figure below.

Fix point count
No of point

value

Max point count Enter the maximum number of points to use

Enter address Enter the word address to use as the point count.

Show coordinates X axis start address Enter the start address for the word addresses to use as x coordinates.

address Y axis start address Enter the start address for the word addresses to use as y coordinates.

This is used when displaying images on the screen, independently from

X/Y coordinates.

This is used when emphasizing dots with particular coordinates.

When the checkbox is checked, the point count part is changed as shown
Use movement point indication
in the figure below.

Image number Enter the image number registered in the [Image list].

Enter the word address to read the X coordinate value use for Use
X coordinate address
Movement Point Indication.

Enter the word address to read the X coordinate value use for Use
Y coordinate address
Movement Point Indication.

38.4 Display page

On this page, the graph frame setting, in-graph grid setting, and update conditions for the graphs
displayed are set.

CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag 431

 [Fig. Display page]

38.4.1 Frame setting

Set the frame of the graph.

[Fig. Frame setting]

Frame setting Description

Frame type Set whether to show the frame.

Frame color Set the frame color for the graph.

Background color Designate the background color of the graph.

Use X-axis grid Set the number of rulers to use on the X axis, and the line color.

Use Y-axis grid Set the number of rulers to use on the Y axis, and the line color.

38.4.2 Update condition

Set the condition for updating the graph data in the X/Y chart displayed on the screen.

(1) Cycle
Update according to the time interval set in Interval. The interval is set using 500ms (0.5 second) units.
When 0 is set, data is updated as a very fast rate, using the scan time (each scan) of the touch as the

cycle.

432 CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag

 [Fig. Cycle]

(2) Bit state

Data is updated depending on the state of the user designated bit address.

[Fig. Bit state]

Bit state Detailed description

Address Set the bit address to use as the condition.

When 0 Update is performed once, when the set bit address becomes OFF.

When 1 Update is performed once, when the set bit address becomes ON.
CONDITION
Bit reverse Updates once each time the set bit address is reversed.

0 _ maintain state Updated with each scan while the set bit address is OFF.

1 _ maintain state Updated with each scan while the set bit address is ON.

(3) Word value

When word address data is changed, data is updated if the changed data satisfies the set max value and

mix value ranges.

[Fig. Word value]

Word value Detailed description

CONDITION Minimum value Enter the minimum value of the word address used as the condition.

Maximum value Enter the maximum value of the word address used as the condition.

Address Set the word address.

CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag 433

38.5 Data set page

From this page, the graphs to be displayed on the screen are registered, and the min/max values and

graph shape for each graph are set.

[Fig. Data set page]

Data set Description

Constant Fix and use the min/max values entered as constants.

Use variable min/max values by setting the min value/max value entered
Internal address
with internal addresses.

Boundary Horizontal minimum Enter the minimum value of the X axis range.

Horizontal maximum Enter the maximum value of the X axis range.

Vertical minimum Enter the minimum value of the Y axis range.

Vertical maximum Enter the maximum value of the Y axis range.

Line style Select the style of the line displayed on the screen.

Value type and Line color Set the color of the lines displayed on the screen.

shape Line width Set the width of the line displayed on the screen.

Dot size Set the size of the dots displayed on the screen.

In a single X/Y chart B tag, up to 21 data value ranges can be registered.

Use the [New/Save/Delete] buttons to register graphs.

Button Description

Registers a new dataset.

Saves the settings to the selected graph list.

Deletes the selected dataset.

When the button is clicked, a graph is registered, as seen in the figure below.

434 CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag

 [Fig. Newly registered data range]

Create rows according to the number of graphs to be displayed. Then select items using the mouse to

change settings for the selected graph. Save the changed settings using the button.

[Fig. Data range with settings saved]

38.6 Graph condition page

On this page, the conditions for displaying images registered in the [Image list] as points on the graph are

set.

[Fig. Graph condition page]

(1) Always
Points displayed on the graph screen are always displayed as images.

Enter the image number registered in the [Image list] in [Indication image number].

[Fig. Always]

CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag 435

 (2) Bit
The points shown on the graph screen are displayed as different images depending on the bit address

state. Enter the number of the image to display when the bit address is ON, and the number of the image

to display when the bit address is OFF.

[Fig. Bit]

(3) Range
Points are displayed as different images, according to the data range of the word address.

[Fig. Range]

Range Description

Condition address Set the word address.

Range count Enter the number of ranges to be used.

Number This is the number of the registered range.

Image number Enter the image number registered in the [Image list].

Maximum value Set the minimum value of the word value to be used in the range.

Minimum value Set the maximum value of the word value to be used in the range.

436 CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag

CHAPTER 39 Calculation Tag

CHAPTER 38 -X/Y Chart B Tag 437

CHAPTER 39 - Calculation Tag

39.1 Calculation tag overview

Depending on the action condition, bit action, word operation, key registration, and special functions

are performed.

[Fig. Calculation tag properties screen]

This is a calculation tag registered to the screen. The calculation tag may be located at any part of the

edit screen. When transmitted to the touch, the tag is not displayed on the screen.

[Fig. Calculation tag registered to the edit screen]

39.2 Page composition of the calculation tag properties screen

The calculation tag properties screen comprises the [Condition], [Operation], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

This page is the page for setting conditions for calculation tag operation.
Condition page
Set cycle, bit state or word value conditions.

Set the action performed when the calculation tag conditions are satisfied.
Operation page
Register bit operation, word operation, key registration, and special functions.

On this page, calculation tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information page
created and time modified, and location and size are shown. Location info can be edited.

438 CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag

39.3 Condition page

Set conditions for conditions for calculation tag operation.

[Fig. Condition page]

39.3.1 Cycle conditions

Calculations are performed at the given time interval. 100ms (0.1 seconds) are used as the time interval

unit. When this is set to [0]x100ms, calculations are performed at very short intervals, because the scan

time of the touch is used as the interval.

39.3.2 Bit state condition

Calculations are performed according to the state of the bit address.

[Fig. Operation according to bit state]

Bit state Description

Address Set the bit address.

When 0 Operates once, when the set bit address becomes OFF.

When 1 Operates once, when the set bit address becomes ON.

Bit Bit reverse Operates once, when the set bit address is reversed.

0 _ maintain state Updated with each scan of the touch while the set bit address is OFF.

1 _ maintain state Updated with each scan of the touch while the set bit address is ON.

39.3.3 Word value condition

The calculation is performed when the comparative calculation formula is TRUE.

CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag 439

 [Fig. Operation according to word value]

Firstly, select the data size between 16 bit and 32 bit. Enter the word address to be used in the first item.

In the second item, enter a word address to compare with the first item, of a constant value. After

entering, press the button to select the comparative operator.

[Fig. Comparative operators]

Operators Description

Value is greater than

Value is greater than or equal to

Value is equal to

Value is smaller than

Value is smaller than or equal to

Value is not the same

AND operator

OR operator

XOR operator

When using two calculation formulas, press the button in the following line and select
between the operators [AND, OR] in the figure below. This enables the following calculation
formulas below.

[Fig. Operators]

Operators Description

Operates if both calculation formulas are satisfied.

Operates if either one of the two calculation formulas are satisfied.

Calculation formulas are not used.

For example, if settings are performed as shown below, if word address [MW0000] is greater than

440 CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag

 [MW0010] and the [MW0100] value is [5], the calculation tag operates, becomes both calculation formulas

are TRUE (AND).

[Fig. Word value condition]

39.4 Operation page

Set the calculation to be performed when the operation condition is satisfied. The types of calculations

are : [Bit operation], [Word operation], [Key registration], and [Special function]. Up to 10 operations can

be set. If conditions are satisfied, the operations are run in sequence, beginning with the operation

registered on top.

[Fig. Operation page]

39.4.1 Composition of the operation page

The operation page comprises a operation list part on the top, and the operation setting part on the

bottom. [Bit operation], [Word operation], [Key registration], and [Special function] in the operation setting

part are explained in the following paragraph.

(1) Scan delay

The operation is delayed by the set time.

[Fig. Time units]

(2) Operation list

CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag 441

 When an operation is registered, it is saved to the operation list. The operation list is composed as

follows.

Calculation Description

No This is the number of the registered operation. Operations are carried out according to this number.

Operation The type of operation is indicated as [BIT], [WORD], [KEY], or [SPECIAL].

DataType The data type (DEC, UDEC, HEX, BCD, ASCII) of the address used in the operation is displayed.

Expression The operation is expressed in simplified form.

The buttons for editing the operation list are as follow.

Part Description

Down Moves the selected operation down in the order.

Up Moves the selected operation up in the order.

Add Adds and registers a new operation.

Modify The content of the selected operation is modified.

Del Deletes the selected operation.

39.4.2 Operation settings

The types of calculation are : [Bit operation], [Word operation], [Key registration], and [Special function].

(1) Bit operation

Bit operations are operations that turn bit address data ON/OFF. Bit address data only has [0] and [1]

data. [0] is [OFF] and [1] is [ON].

[Fig. Bit operation]

Bit operation Description

Address Set the bit address.

ON Turns the set bit address ON.

Operation OFF Turns the set bit address OFF.

Reverse If the bit address is in ON state, it is turned OFF, and is turned ON if in OFF state.

442 CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag

After setting the bit address and the action, press the button to register the bit action in the

[Operation list].

[Fig. Registered bit action]

(2) Word operation

An operation is performed on a word address, and result data is set.

Word addresses are 16-bit address areas. When the 16 bits of a word address are all 0, changing this to a

decimal number gives [0]. When the 16 bits of a word address are all 1, changing this to a decimal

number gives [65535].

Therefore, the data of the word address has a range of [0 ~ 65535].

In the case of signed decimals, the range is [-32767 ~ 32768].

[Fig. Word operation]

Word operation Description

Write data size is the size of the address where the result of the operation is saved. Select

between [16 bit] and [32 bit]. [32 bit] also uses the station next to the designated address, and
Write data size
is used when saving values greater than [16 bit]. The station of the designated word address

becomes the top word, and the next station of that address becomes the bottom word.

Operand data size is the size of the address used in the operation formula. Select between [16

bit] and [32 bit]. [32 bit] also uses the station next to the designated address, and is used when
Operand data size
saving values greater than [16 bit]. The station of the designated word address becomes the

top word, and the next station of that address becomes the bottom word.

DEC Signed decimal.

UDEC Unsigned decimal.

Const Data
HEX Hexadecimal.
Type
Is actually hexadecimal, but is used like decimal data, because numbers that include A~F are
BCD
not shown.

CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag 443

 Type casting is a function that changes the data type. Type casting is initially set to [Nothing]. When type

casting is set, only one operation formula line can be set. The data at the [Operation address] is read,

converted into the set data type, and saved in the [Output operation address].

[BCD] is actually hexadecimal, but is used like decimal data, because numbers that include A~F are not

shown.

[OBCD] is Omron BCD, which denotes the BCD type of Omron PLC.

[HEX] is hexademical,

[DEC] is decimal, and

[Float] is a data type that includes decimal places.

Type casting Description

Nothing Data type casting is not performed.

Operation address data is read as BCD then converted into HEX and saved at the output
BCD -> HEX
operation address.

Operation address data is read as HEX then converted into BCD and saved at the output
HEX -> BCD
operation address.

Operation address data is read as OBCD then converted into DEC and saved at the output
OBCD -> DEC
operation address.

Operation address data is read as DEC then converted into OBCD and saved at the output
DEC -> OBCD
operation address.

Operation address data is read as DEC then converted into Float and saved at the output
DEC -> Float
operation address.

Operation address data is read as Float then converted into DEC and saved at the output
Float -> DEC
operation address.

The formula for word operations is set as follows.

[Fig. Word operation formula]

: the address to the left of this sign is the [Output operation address] where the result of the

function is stored.

: the addresses to the right of this sign are the [Operation addresses] used in the operation.

Enter constant values in [Output operation address] using the formula, or perform an operation among

[Operation addresses] and enter the result into [Output operation address].

444 CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag

Up to four operation addresses can be set. Use (semicolons) to indicate the end of the formula.

As seen in the following figure, operation addresses can be set not only as addresses but also as constant

values.

[Fig. Operation address types]

Set the operator between the operation addresses to complete the formula. Click the [Operator button] to

the right of the operation address to bring up the operator list.

[Fig. Operator list]

Operators Description

; Denotes the end of the operation.

+ [Add] the data of two operation addresses.

- [Subtract] the data of two operation addresses.

* [Multiplie] the data of two operation addresses.

/ [Divide] the data of two operation addresses.

^ This is a bit operator. [Bit XOR] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

This is the remainder operator. After dividing the data of two operation addresses, the remainder is
%
calculated.

& This is a bit operator. [Bit AND] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

| This is a bit operator. [Bit OR] operation is performed with the data of two operation addresses.

This is a bit operator that performs the [Bit left shift] operation. This operator performs a left bit shift

<< operation on the data on the right of the operator. The size of the shift is equal to the data on the left

of the operator.

This is a bit operator that performs the [Bit right shift] operation. This operator performs a right bit

>> shift operation on the data on the left of the operator. The size of the shift is equal to the data on the

right of the operator.

(1) Special functions

These are special functions required for touch operation. If the operation conditions are satisfied, the
special function is performed.

CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag 445

 [Fig. Special functions]

There are five major categories for the various special functions. In [Category], there are various types of

[Special operation].

[Fig. Categories]

Categories Description

SCREEN These are special functions associated with the screen.

PRINT These are special functions associated with printing.

USB/CF These are special functions associated with USB memory storage devices or CF memory cards.

MEMORY These are special functions associated with memory.

Extended TAG These are special functions associated with tags.

① [SCREEN] special functions

These are special functions associated with the screen.

[Fig. Screen-related special functions]

Screen Description

EXIT Closes the run screen and brings up the main screen.

Previous Screen Navigates to the screen that was open before the current screen.

When a screen number is designated, the screen transitions to the designated screen

number.
Screen Change

446 CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag

② [PRINT] special functions

These are special functions associated with printing.

XTOP can connect to normal printers or roll printers (mini printers) for printing.

[Fig. PRINT-related special functions]

Print Description

Print Screen Print the current screen using the connected printer.

Print logging data using the connected printer. [Logging1] through [Logging8] can be set for

logging. Enter the logging number to print. Check [Use sign] to show signs (-) when printing

logging data, and output negative data.

Print Logging

Print Alarm Print alarm details using the connected printer.

A roll printer is a small mini computer which can print touch data through 232C

communication. The printer connects to the COM1 port of the touch, and prints data from
Roll Printer
the editor where the output content has been edited.

(☞ See [4.10] in [chapter 4] for roll printer usage info.)

③ [USB/CF] special functions

These are special functions associated with USB memory storage devices or CF memory cards.

[Fig. USB/CF-related special functions]

USB/CF Description

Copy files in the USB memory storage device to the memory of the touch.

USB->HMI

Select the files to copy among OS, font, and project files.

CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag 447

 Copy data in the touch to the USB memory storage device.

HMI->USB

Select the files to copy among OS, font, project, logging data, and screen capture files. The [Screen

capture] function captures the current screen and saves the captured image as a bitmap in the USB

memory storage device.

By inserting a CF memory card behind the touch, logging or alarm data can be saved.

Before removing this CF memory card, safely remove the card by clicking the [CF Eject] button.
CF Eject
All logging or alarm data remaining in the touch memory is moved to the CF memory card, and the

connection is removed.

By inserting a CF memory card behind the touch, logging or alarm data can be saved. When logging

or alarm data is saved using a CF memory card, logging or alarm data in the touch memory is

CF Update automatically moved to the CF memory card when a certain size has been exceeded. The [CF Update]

function moves logging or alarm data to the CF memory card, even if a certain size has not been

reached.

④ [MEMORY] special functions

These are special functions associated with memory.

[Fig. Memory-related special functions]

Memory Description

This can only be used when using recipe settings in the project.

The saved recipe data is copied to another block, in block units.

Recipe Block Copy

Only internal addresses can be set for [From Reference (reference address to copy)]

and [To Reference (reference address to copy)]. The data of these addresses become

the numbers for the blocks. Data length does not apply, and does not have to be

entered. When the settings above are applied, with the data at internal address [Station

10] being [5] and the data at internal address [Station 20] being [3], the data in recipe

block number 5 is copied to block number 3.

Recipe Block clear Deletes recipe block data.

448 CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag

 Only internal addresses can be set for the [Recipe Block Address]. The data of this

address becomes the block number of the recipe to delete.

In this function, the data of an internal address is copied indirectly to another internal

address. The length of the data is equal to [Data length]. Indirect copy refers to

copying using a reference address.

System Buffer Copy

(indirect)

Only internal addresses can be set for [From Reference (reference address to copy)]

and [To Reference (reference address to copy)]. The data of the address becomes the

station number of the internal address to copy. When the settings above are applied,

with the data at internal address [Station 10] being [200] and the data at internal

address [Station 20] being [300] with the data length set to [10], the 10 data in internal

address stations [200~209] is copied to internal address stations [300~309].

In this function, the data of an internal address is copied indirectly to another internal

address. The length of the data is equal to [Data length].

System Buffer Copy

Only internal addresses can be set for [From Address (address to copy)] and [To

Address (address to be copied to)]. When the above settings are made, the 10 data in

internal address stations [10~19] are copied to internal address stations [20~29].

⑤ [Extended TAG] special functions

While this was used for making a separate touch button included in the tag for touch tags, because

operation tags cannot be used with buttons, there are no tag-related functions. A buzzer function is

provided.

[Fig. Tag-related special functions]

Extended TAG Description

Buzzer Sound A short [Beep] buzzer is sounded.

CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag 449

 CHAPTER 40 Comm Tags

450 CHAPTER 39 -Calculation Tag

CHAPTER 40 - Comm Tag

40.1 Comm tag overview

Depending on the conditions, the data of word addresses between the controller (PLC) and touch is

read or written according to the set length.

[Fig. Comm tag properties screen]

This is a comm tag registered to the screen. The comm tag may be located at any part of the edit screen,

and is not displayed on the touch screen.

[Fig. Comm tag registered to the edit screen]

40.2 Page composition of the comm tag properties screen

Comm tag properties has 3 pages : [Condition], [Operation], and [Information].

Property page Description

This page is the page for setting conditions for comm tag operation.
Condition page
The bit state condition is set for each interval.

Operation page Set the action performed when the comm tag conditions are satisfied.

On this page, comm tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information page
created and time modified, and location and size are shown. Location info can be edited.

CHAPTER 40 -Comm Tag 451

40.3 Condition page

Set the operating conditions.

[Fig. Condition bit state page]

40.3.1 Cycle condition

Operates at a fixed time as interval. 100ms (0.1 seconds) are used as the time interval unit. When this is

set to [0], operation occurs at very short intervals, because the scan time of the touch is used as the

interval.

[Fig. Cycle condition

40.3.2 Bit state condition

Action is performed according to the state of the bit address.

[Fig. Bit state condition]

Bit state Description

Address Set the bit address.

When 0 Operates once, when the set bit address becomes OFF.

When 1 Operates once, when the set bit address becomes ON.

Bit Bit reverse Operates once, when the set bit address is reversed.

0 _ maintain state Updated with each scan of the touch while the set bit address is OFF.

1 _ maintain state Updated with each scan of the touch while the set bit address is ON.

452 CHAPTER 40 -Comm Tag

40.4 Operation page

This page sets the action performed when the conditions set in the [Condition] page are satisfied.

[Read] and [Write] communication methods are available.

40.4.1 [Read] communication method

[Read] is an action where data from consecutive PLC addresses is read to internal addresses of the touch.

The amount of data read is equal to the [Comm data length].

The setting method is as follows.

1. Select [Read] as the comm mode.

2. Set the internal touch address to write the read data to.

3. Set the address of the PLC (external device) to read from.

4. Enter the comm data length.

[Fig. [Read] communication method]

As the comm data length is in [word] units, this is the number of 16 bit addresses.

When settings are made as shown in the figure above, if comm tag conditions are satisfied, the data in

stations [D0000~D0009] of the PLC are read to internal touch address stations [0000~0009].

40.4.2 [Write] communication method

[Write] is an action where data from internal addresses of the touch are written to consecutive PLC

addresses. The amount of data read is equal to the [Comm data length].

The setting method is as follows.

1. Select [Write] as the comm mode.

2. Set the internal touch address to read from.

3. Set the address of the PLC (external device) to write the read data to.
4. Enter the comm data length.

CHAPTER 40 -Comm Tag 453

 [Fig. [Write] communication method]

As the comm data length is in [word] units, this is the number of 16 bit addresses.

When the settings are made as shown in the figure above, if the comm tag conditions are satisfied, the

data in internal touch address stations [0100~0109] is written to stations [D0010~D0019] of the PLC.

454 CHAPTER 40 -Comm Tag

CHAPTER 41 Clock Tag

CHAPTER 40 -Comm Tag 455

CHAPTER 41 - Clock Tag

41.1 Clock tag overview

The date and time are displayed. Date and time info is indicated on the bottom of the touch menu screen.

Also, time data is saved in the special touch addresses [_RTC_YER(year)], [_RTC_MTH(month)],

[_RTC_DAY(day)], [_RTC_HUR(hour)], [_RTC_MIN(minute)], [_RTC_SEC(second)], and [_RTC_DAYOFWEEK(day of

week)].

Date and time can be changed in the menu screen. When special address data is changed, all date and

time settings are changed.

[Fig. Clock tag properties screen]

41.2 Page composition of the clock tag properties screen

Clock tag properties has 2 pages : [Display] and [Information].

Property page Description

Displays Set the format for date and time display, and set the font and color.

On this page, clock tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time
Information page
created and time modified, and location and size are shown. Location info canbe edited.

41.3 Display page

Set the format for date and time display, and set the font and color.

456 CHAPTER 41 -Clock Tag

 [Fig. Display page]

41.3.1 Clock format

Select the format for date and time display. Y-Year, M-Month, D-Day indicate the date, and H-HOUR, M-

MINUTE, and S-SECOND indicate time.

[Fig. Selecting the display format]

If [Year] is YYYY, [2010] is displayed. If this is YY, then [10] is displayed only.

41.3.2 Font
Set the text font, size, color, background color, and text effect for text displayed in the clock tag.

[Fig. Font setting]

Font setting Description

Font Select the font for text indicating date and time.

Font color Select the color for text indicating date and time

Font size The width/height of the font selected under font is magnified by the font size.

Background color Select the background color for text indicating date and time

Letter effect The background of text used to indicate date and time is made transparent.

CHAPTER 41 -Clock Tag 457

 CHAPTER 42 Filelist Tag

458 CHAPTER 41 -Clock Tag

CHAPTER 42 - Filelist Tag

42.1 Filelist overview

The filelist tag is a tag that shows a list of files in the internal memory of the touch, the CF memory card,

and USB memory storage device, and copies these files. After registering two file lists, by using the special

functions button for touch tags, files in memory can be copied. This is the properties screen for the filelist.

[Fig. Filelist properties screen]

42.2 Page composition of the filelist tag properties screen

The filelist tag properties screen comprises the [Data], [Display], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Data Data to be displayed on the filelist is set from this page.

Displays The design of the filelist is set from this page.

On this page, filelist info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time created
Information
and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be edited.

42.3 Data page

Data Description

Select the data to be displayed, from file name, file list, and message.

Display

data
[File name] displays the folder name on top. [File list] shows a list of files contained in the selected

memory.

[Message] shows messages such as [Fail!/No File!/Copying!/Success!] when moving files.

Select between ascending and descending alignment. [Ascending] aligns the file list in ascending order.
Align
[Descending] aligns the file list in descending order.

CHAPTER 42 -Filelist Tag 459

42.4 Display page

[Fig. Display page]

Displays Description

Frame color Set the frame color.

Background color Designate the background color.

Use grid line When checked, horizontal grid lines are drawn in the file list

Line style Select the line style.

Line width Select the line width, from 1~2dot.

Font color Set the color of the text displayed.

42.5 Touch buttons used in the file list

As seen in the following figure, 7 touch buttons are used in the filelist.

[Fig. Filelist touch buttons]

Touch button Description

Scroll Up [Scroll Up] moves the files in the file list up by 1 position.

Scroll Down [Scroll Down] moves the files in the file list down by 1 position.

Copy to Left Is used when two file lists are registered. This copies the selected files in the left file list to

460 CHAPTER 42 -Filelist Tag

 the selected memory in the right file list.

Is used when two file lists are registered. This copies the selected files in the right file list to
Copy to Right
the selected memory in the left file list.

[Pop Up(Toggle)] causes the [File manager] registered to the window screen in the base
Pop Up (Toggle)
screen to pop up. Touch once to pop-up, and touch again to dismiss.

[Enter] is used when using the [CF-recipe] function. Select a recipe file saved on the CF

Enter memory card, then press the [ENTER] button to move the recipe data to the [Save address

for recipe move].

Delete Deletes the selected files.

42.6 Searching/copying files using File manager

In file manager, two file lists are registered, allowing for searching and copying of files among
the internal touch/CF/USB memory. The following can be added to the file manager in the
popup menu that is brought up by clicking the right mouse button on [Window screen] in the
[Project manager]. When [Add file manager window screen] is run, the screen is registered as window
screen number [65530].

[Fig. Add file manager window]

When the file manager is run from the touch, the display is as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. File manager in operation]

There are two file lists, and the [File list] part of each file list shows the respective memory. Touch [TOP],

[CF], or [USB], and a list of files contained in the selected memory is shown.

[Fig. Title created using the [Window Move] function touch tag]

The part on top with the title [FILE MANAGER] is a touch tag containing the [Window Move] function.

CHAPTER 42 -Filelist Tag 461

 Therefore, when this part is touched, and then the base screen part is touched, the [File Manager Window

Screen] is moved to the position of the base screen that was touched.

On the bottom, the [Move file] and [Scroll up/down] touch buttons are registered.

(Note) The Up/Down buttons only work if the [LIST] part on top is touched to enable these buttons.

When the [Exit] button is pressed, the file manager window screen is closed. Next, the file manager is

shown displaying a file list for the selected [TOP], [CF], or [USB] memory, and copying the files to other

memory.

[Fig. File manager in operation]

The file list on the left shows a list of files in <Touch memory>, and the file list on the right shows a list

of files in the <USB memory storage device>.

[OS000000.bin] is an OF file. [FONT0000.fon] is a FONT file. [PC00000.trn] is a project file.

In the file list on the left, select the files to copy by touching. Then touch the (Copy to Right)

button on the bottom. The files are copied from the left file list to the selected memory, and the copy

status is indicated with a message on the bottom (Success!). Conversely, files in the right life list can be

selected to the memory selected in the left file list.

(Note) Using file manager, project (*.TRZ), OS(*.bin), and Font(*.fon) files saved in the touch device can be

saved to USB memory/CF cards. However, project (*.TRZ), OS(*.bin), and Font(*.fon) files saved in USB
memory/CF cards cannot be copied to the touch device.

Logging/alarm/recipe data saved in the touch device is not stored in file form; therefore these

cannot be copied to USB memory/CF cards using file manager. However, using [Interface]-[USB

Storage]-[File Copy] in the menu screen of the touch device, project, OS, Font, internal address data, and

logging data can be copied to USB memory.

Conversely, using [Interface]-[USB Storage]-[File Copy] in the menu screen of the touch device, project, OS,

and font files in USB memory can be loaded into the touch device. See Chapter 45 for this function.

Using File Manager, files can be copied between USB memory and CF cards.

462 CHAPTER 42 -Filelist Tag

CHAPTER 43 DocViewer Tag

CHAPTER 42 -Filelist Tag 463

CHAPTER 43 - DocViewer Tag

43.1 DocViewer tag overview

PDF documents saved in the CF memory card are displayed on the screen.

To use a DocViewer tag, [Tools]-[PDF Image Converter] in the menu must be used to convert PDF files

into bitmap images which the touch can recognize. After creating an index file, the files must be saved on

a CF memory card. (☞ See [44.6] in [chapter 44] for [PDF image conversion].)

The entire [DOC] folder created after [PDF image conversion] is copied into the [-HMI-] folder of the CF

memory card. When the CF memory card containing the [DOC] folder is inserted into the touch device,

the DocViewer tag operates.

[Fig. DocViewer tag properties screen]

This is a DocViewer tag registered to the screen. In the edit screen, a [Sample page] is shown, as seen in

the figure below.

[Fig. DocViewer tag registered to the edit screen]

A DocViewer tag in operation in the touch is shown. Through the DocViewer tag, images of the PDF files

saved in the CF memory card are displayed. Underneath, buttons set with touch tag special functions are
registered. These buttons can be used to navigate within a page of the document, shift pages, and zoom

in/zoom out.

464 CHAPTER 43 -DocViewer Tag

 [Fig. DocViewer tag in operation]

43.2 Page composition of the DocViewer tag properties screen

The DocViewer tag comprises three pages : [Display], [DocViewer setting], and [Information].

Property page Description

Display page Set the frame, and set the page title.

DocViewer setting page The document ID, initial page number, page size, and scroll options are set.

On this page, DocViewer tag info is displayed.

Information page The registered screen number, tag ID, time created and modified, location and size, etc.,

are displayed.

43.3 Display page

Set FRAME SETTING and TITLE FONT/COLOR.

[Fig. Display page]

CHAPTER 43 -DocViewer Tag 465

 43.3.1 Frame setting
Set the frame for the document to be displayed on the touch screen.

[Fig. Frame setting]

Frame setting Description

Use frame Select whether to use frames for the document displayed.

Frame color Set the frame color.

Background color Set the background color for the document display part.

43.3.2 TITLE FONT/COLOR

Perform settings for the document title to be displayed on the screen.

[Fig. Title font/color setting]

Title setting Description

Use page title Select whether to show the page title.

Font Select the font for text indicating the title.

Hint font color Set the color of the text indicating the title.

Background color Set the background color of the text indicating the title.

43.4 DocViewer setting page

Select the document ID to be shown in the DocViewer tag, and set the number of the page to be shown

initially.

[Fig. DocViewer setting page]

466 CHAPTER 43 -DocViewer Tag

 DocViewer setting Description

Enter the number of the folder to use, among the folders contained in the CF

memory card. (1~256) The folder where documents are contained is the [DOC]
Document ID
folder in the [HMI folder] of the CF memory card. The folder path when the

document ID is entered as 1 is [CF\-HMI-\DOC\DOC1].

Fixed Enter the number of the page of the document to be displayed initially.
Initial page
The data of the address entered becomes the number of the page to be displayed
Number Device
initially.

Page Width Set the width of the page to display

size Height Set the height of the page to display

Scroll Soft Scroll Smooth scrolling when the page is scrolled

option Immediate scroll Immediate scrolling when the page is scrolled

When a DocViewer tag is registered to the screen, buttons for moving the document, shifting pages, and
zooming in/out are not generated automatically. When needed, touch tag special functions must be used

to create separate buttons.

Set [Special functions] in the [Operations] page of the touch tag, as shown below. Select functions in

[Extend TAG]-[DocViewer TAG], and register.

[Fig. DocViewer tag-related keys]

KEY Description

Left Scrolls to the left.

Right Scrolls to the right.

Cursor
Up Scrolls up.

Down Scrolls down.

Next Shifts to the next page.

Previous Shifts to the previous page.

Move to page
Last Shifts to the first page.

First Shifts to the last page.

Scale Scale Up Scales the document up.

Up/Down Scale Down Scales the document down.

CHAPTER 43 -DocViewer Tag 467

 CHAPTER 44 Slide Tag

468 CHAPTER 43 -DocViewer Tag

CHAPTER 44 - Slide Tag

44.1 Slide tag overview

In this function, multiple screens are displayed on the screen in sequence with a certain time interval,

giving an animation effect. 100 slides can be used, and only shapes can e registered. The slide can be set

to operate and stop depending on the value of bit addresses or word addresses.

[Fig. Slide tag properties screen]

44.2 Page composition of the slide tag properties screen

The slide tag properties screen comprises the [Display], [Case], and [Information] pages.

Property page Description

Display page On this page, the number of slides is set, and each slide screen is edited.

On this page, bit/word address value trigger conditions, the slide display interval, and the interval
Condition page
type are set.

On this page, slide tag info is displayed. The number of the registered screen, tag ID, time created
Information page
and time modified, location and size are shown. Location and size info can be edited.

This is a slide tag registered to the screen. The screen of the first slide is displayed.

[Fig. Slide tag registered to the edit screen]

CHAPTER 44 -Slide Tag 469

44.3 Display page

On this page, the number of slides is set, and shapes are registered on each slide screen and edited.

[Fig. Display page]

Slide Description

Set the number of slides to be used. Up to 100 slides can be used, and thumbnails are provided

for all screens. When a slide is clicked with the mouse, the edit screen is shown below, and shapes

can be registered.

As seen in the figure below, a number can be entered manually into [Slide count], or the number

can be entered by pressing the arrow buttons. Press the button to create the slides.

Slide count Press the button each time the number of slides changes, in order to apply the

change.

Use background Set a background color for the slide screen. Select the color to use, and press the

color button to change the background color for all slides.

Register shapes to each slide screen. Using the shape toolbar on the left, shapes can be drawn. By
Slide
right clicking the mouse, the edit popup menu can be used. The size of the screen is the same as
Edit screen
the size with which the slide tag has been registered to the base screen.

470 CHAPTER 44 -Slide Tag

 The slide edit screen can be zoomed in or out. This is useful when editing small slide tags. Zoom

in or out by pressing the icons, or select the magnification ratio as seen in the figure below.

Zoom in/Zoom

out

44.4 Condition page

On this page, bit/word address value trigger conditions for the slide tag, the slide display interval, and the

interval type are set.

[Fig. Condition page]

44.4.1 Setting operating conditions

Set the slide tag to operate according to the ON/OFF state of a bit address, or the value of a word
address.

CHAPTER 44 -Slide Tag 471

 (1) When set to [None]
The slide tag operates at all times.

[Fig. When set to None]

(2) When set to [Bit state]

The slide tag is operated according to the state of the user designated bit address.

[Fig. When set to bit state]

Bit state Description

Address Set the bit address to use as the condition.

0 The slide operates when the designated bit address becomes OFF.
Bit
1 The slide operates when the designated bit address becomes ON.

(3) When set to [Word value]

This function compares data, and operates the slide tag if the result is TRUE.

[Fig. When set to word value]

First, select the data size of the word address used as the condition between 16 bit and 32 bit.
Enter the word address to be used in the first item. In the second item, enter a word address to compare

with the first item, or a constant value.

After entering, press the button to select the comparative operator.

472 CHAPTER 44 -Slide Tag

 [Fig. Operators]

Operators Description

Value is greater than

Value is greater than or equal to

Value is equal to

Value is smaller than

Value is smaller than or equal to

Value is not the same

AND operator

OR operator

XOR operator

When using two calculation formulas, press the button and select between the operators [AND,

OR] in the figure below. This enables the address entry item in the bottom.

[Fig. Operators]

Operators Description

Operates if both calculation formulas are satisfied.

Operates if either one of the two calculation formulas are satisfied.

Calculation formulas are not used.

For example, if settings are performed as shown below, if word address [MW0000] is greater than

[MW0010] and the [MW0100] value is [5], the slide tag operates, becomes both calculation formulas are

TRUE (AND).

[Fig. Word value operation]

CHAPTER 44 -Slide Tag 473

 44.4.2 Animation setting
Set the animation cycle and cycle type, and set a word address to display slides depending on the value.

[Fig. Animation setting]

Animation Description

Use animation
The slides registered by the user are displayed in sequence on the screen, at a certain interval.
slide cycle

Cycle Set the cycle in 100ms (0.1 second) units.

Select the cycle type from the list below.

Slide cycle types [1->N, 1->N] - Repeats displaying the slides in sequence, from slide 1 to the last slide.

[N->1, N->1] - Repeats displaying the slides in sequence from the last slide to slide 1.

[1->N->1->N] - Displays the slides in sequence, from slide 1 to the last slide, then

reverses the order, displaying the slides in reverse sequence

[N->1->N->1] - Displays the slides in sequence, from the last slide to slide 1, then

reverses the order, displaying the slides in reverse sequence

Using a word address, the slide with a number matching the word value is displayed on the
Use user defined
screen. If the word value is 1, slide number 1 is displayed, and if the value is 2, slide number 2 is
value
displayed.

474 CHAPTER 44 -Slide Tag

CHAPTER 45 Animation Function

CHAPTER 44 -Slide Tag 475

 CHAPTER 45 - Animation Function

45.1 Animal function overview

This function applies animal effects to shapes and some tags registered to a screen, using simple settings.

The shapes and tags can move in sequence along preset coordinates, or rotated according to user defined

angles. By setting the bit condition, the visible/invisible option where shapes and tags with animation

settings are made visible or invisible can be set. The animation tag can be set to operate or stop

according to the preset bit/word condition.

The animation tag can be run from the popup menu that appears when the right mouse button is clicked

from the edit screen. With a shape or tag selected, right click the mouse to select [Animation] in the

popup menu.

[Fig. Running the animation tag]

45.2 Page composition of the animal function properties screen

The animation tag properties screen comprises the [Visible], [Position], and [Rotation] pages.

Property page Description

On this page the [Visible/Invisible] function is set according to the ON/OFF state of a bit
Visible page
address.

On this page, movement along a track (X/Y coordinates) or movement range can be set for
Position page
horizontal or vertical movement.

Depending on the angle, rotation in place can be set, or central coordinates can be set so
Rotation page
that shapes and tags rotate around a center point.

476 CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function

45.3 Visible page

On this page the [Visible/Invisible] function is set according to the ON/OFF state of a bit address.

[Fig. Visible page]

Visible page Description

Use visible option Select whether to use the [Visible/Invisible] function for the shape or tag.

Reference address Enter the bit address to be used in the [Visible/Invisible] function.

Visible ON status The shapes and tags are visible when the bit address is ON.

Visible OFF status The shapes and tags are visible when the bit address is OFF.

45.4 Position page

On this page, movement along a track (X/Y coordinates) or movement range can be set for horizontal or

vertical movement.

[Fig. Position page]

CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function 477

 45.4.1 Track move
Shapes and tags move, following a sequence of X/Y coordinates.

[Fig. Track move]

Track Description

Use track move When the checkbox is selected, the track move animation effect is used.

Cycle interval Set the time interval when shapes or tags move along the track.

Select the direction type from the list below.

[1->N,1->N] - Moves from track 1 to the track with the last number in sequence. This is

repeated.
Direction type
[N->1, N->1] - Moves from the track with the last number to track 1, in sequence. This is

repeated.

[1->N->1->N] - Moves from track 1 to the last track, then moves again in the opposite

direction. This is repeated.

[N->1, N->1] - Moves from the track with the last number to track 1, then moves again in the

opposite direction. This is repeated.

The value of the entered word address becomes [No] of the track. According to the data,
Use user data
shapes and tags are moved to the X/Y coordinates of the applicable track.

In [Track position], set the X/Y coordinates for the shape or tag to move to. The center of the shape/tag is
the standard for X/Y coordinates.

[Fig. Track position]

478 CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function

 Track position Description

No Displays the order of X/Y coordinates registered in the track.

Enter the value to use as the X coordinate.

X Position Enter the range of movement, not exceeding the resolution of the touch to be used.

When double clicked, input can be entered.

Enter the value to use as the Y coordinate.

Y Position Enter the range of movement, not exceeding the resolution of the touch to be used.

When double clicked, input can be entered.

The values of X and Y which were entered in [No 1] represent the current position of the shape or tag.

Enter the number of tracks to use in the number entry box below, and press the button to add

tracks as seen in the figure below.

[Fig. Track position]

With a track selected, press the button to add a new track above it. Pressing the

button deletes the selected track.

45.4.2 Position move

A move range is set, and the shape or tag moves horizontally or vertically. The shape or tag repeats

moving by the set move range (pixel) within the move range. Also, the value of a user designated word

address can be used as the horizontal or vertical move range.

(1) Horizontal move

A shape or tag is moved horizontally.

[Fig. Horizontal move]

CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function 479

 Horizontal move Description

Use auto move The shape or tag repeats moving by the set move range (pixel) within the move range.

Enter the start and end of the horizontal move range on the touch screen (X axis) in pixels.

Move range (pixel) The default start value is the current position of the shape or tag.

Enter the range of movement, not exceeding the resolution of the touch to be used.

Move pixel. Enter the move units (pixel).

Select the move type from the list below.

[1->N,1->N] -Moves from the [Start] coordinate to the [End] coordinate. This is repeated.
Move type
[N->1,N->1] - Moves from the [End] coordinate to the [Start] coordinate. this is repeated.

[1->N->1->N] - Moves from the [Start] coordinate to the [End] coordinate, then back to the

[Start] coordinate again. This is repeated.

[N->1->N->1] - Moves from the [End] coordinate to the [Start] coordinate, then back to the

[End] coordinate again. This is repeated.

Cycle interval Set the time interval when shapes or tags move according to the set move pixels.

User-defined By entering a word address, the value of the address can be used as the horizontal or vertical

horizontal position position for movement.

The word address value and movement values used are scaled. The shape or tag is moved

according to the proportion between the [Input range (word value)] and the [Move range

Use scale (move value)]. If [Input range 0 ~ 2000] and [Move range 0 ~ 100], the proportion between

the two ranges is 20:1. When the actual word address value is 800, the shape or tag is moved

by 40 along the X axis.

(2) Vertical move

A shape or tag is moved vertically.

[Fig. Vertical move]

480 CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function

 Vertical move Description

Use auto move The shape or tag repeats moving by the set move range (pixel) within the move range.

Enter the start and end of the horizontal move range on the touch screen (Y axis) in pixels.

Move range (pixel) The default start value is the current position of the shape or tag.

Enter the range of movement, not exceeding the resolution of the touch to be used.

Move pixel. Enter the move units (pixel).

Select the move type from the list below.

[1->N,1->N] -Moves from the [Start] coordinate to the [End] coordinate. This is repeated.
Move type
[N->1,N->1] - Moves from the [End] coordinate to the [Start] coordinate. this is repeated

[1->N->1->N] - Moves from the [Start] coordinate to the [End] coordinate, then back to the

[Start] coordinate again. This is repeated.

[N->1->N->1] - Moves from the [End] coordinate to the [Start] coordinate, then back to the

[End] coordinate again. This is repeated.

Cycle interval Set the time interval when shapes or tags move according to the set move pixels.

User-defined vertical By entering a word address, the value of the address can be used as the horizontal or

position vertical position for movement.

The word address value and movement values used are scaled. The shape or tag is moved

according to the proportion between the [Input range (word value)] and the [Move range

Use scale (move value)]. If [Input range 0 ~ 2000] and [Move range 0 ~ 100], the proportion between

the two ranges is 20:1. When the actual word address value is 800, the shape or tag is

moved by 40 along the Y axis.

45.5 Rotation page

Depending on the angle, rotation in place can be set, or central coordinates can be set so that shapes

and tags rotate around a center point.

[Fig. Rotation page]

CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function 481

 45.5.1 Auto rotate
Automatic rotation according to the rotation range and angle.

[Fig. Auto rotate]

Auto rotate Description

Use auto rotate Within the [Rotation range], rotation according to the set rotation angle is repeated.

Rotation range
Enter values between (1°~360°) for the [Start] angle and [End] angle for shape or tag rotation.
(angle)

Rotation angle Enter the rotation angle in 1° units.

Select the rotation type from the list below.

[1->N,1->N] -Moves from the [Start] coordinate to the [End] coordinate. This is repeated.
Rotation type
[N->1,N->1] - Moves from the [End] coordinate to the [Start] coordinate. this is repeated.

[1->N->1->N] - Moves from the [Start] coordinate to the [End] coordinate, then back to the

[Start] coordinate again. This is repeated.

[N->1->N->1] - Moves from the [End] coordinate to the [Start] coordinate, then back to the

[End] coordinate again. This is repeated.

Cycle interval Set the time interval when shapes or tags rotate according to the set rotation angle.

Change rotation When [Change rotation center] is used, the shape or tag does not rotate in place, but orbits

center around the point of intersection of the entered X/Y coordinates.

45.5.2 Manual rotate

Using the value of a word address as the rotation angle, the shape or tag is rotated.

[Fig. Manual rotate]

482 CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function

 Manual rotate Description

Use manual rotate Rotate with the value of the word address entered as the angle.

Rotate Enter the word value to use as the angle value.

The word address value and rotation values used are scaled.

The shape or tag is rotated according to the proportion between the [Input range
Use scale
(word value)] and the [Move range (rotation value)]. If [Input range 0 ~ 2000] and

[Move range 0 ~ 100], the proportion between the two ranges is 20:1. When the actual

word address value is 800, the shape or tag is rotated by 40°.

When [Change rotation center] is used, the shape or tag does not rotate in place, but
Change rotation center
orbits around the point of intersection of the entered X/Y coordinates.

45.5.3 Operation conditions

All animation actions can be set to operate or stop by setting bit/word conditions.

(1) None
The animal tag is set to operate at all times, without using animal operation conditions.

[Fig. None condition]

(2) Bit condition (Bit)

The animation tag is operated according to the state of the user designated bit address.

[Fig. Bit condition]

Bit condition Description

Address Enter the bit address to use in the operating condition.

0 If the state of the designated bit address is OFF, the animation tag operates.
Bit
1 If the state of the designated bit address is ON, the animation tag operates.

(3) Word condition

When the value of the user designated word value is a value within the set range, the animation tag is
operated.

CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function 483

 [Fig. Word condition]

If, as seen in the figure above, the value at station [D0000] is equal to or greater than 10, and smaller than

or equal to 100, the animal tag operates.

45.6 Track edit

The [Track], [Movement range] and [Rotation range] paths set in the animal tag can be changed manually

in the edit screen. This function is located on the top of the edit screen, as shown in the figure below.

Pressing the [Track Edit] button changes the edit screen.

[Fig. Track edit]

When [Track Edit] is enabled as shown in the figure above, the path of each animal tag appears. By

clicking and dragging dots connected to paths, the path can be changed.

[Fig. Edit screen set using Track Edit]

484 CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function

[Fig. Changing the path with the mouse]

CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function 485

 CHAPTER 46 Tool Menu

486 CHAPTER 45 -Animation Function

CHAPTER 46 - Tool Menu

The tool menu includes additional functions for setting the editing options of the XDesignerPlus4 program, and

effective project editing.

46.1 Cross reference

This function allows viewing of the PLC address used by the tags of the project, and the internal

address of the touch body, according to screen, tag, or address. The viewed data can be converted

into an Excel file and managed by the user. In [Address/tag cross reference], two major methods can be

used for viewing. The address used can be viewed using the tag as the standard, or the registered tags

can be viewed using the address used.

46.1.1 Searching addresses based on the tag

Select [Tag] from the [Tag]/[Address] button on top, then select the project, screen or object (tag type) to

search, and click the [Search] button. Information corresponding to the search conditions is brought up on

the screen.

[Fig. Address/tag cross reference- Tag]

Tag Description

Project When using multiple projects, select the project to search

Screen Select the desired screen from the screen list of the selected project.

Object When searching for a particular tag, select the tag type.

Searched information is sorted in ascending/descending order according to the selected

criterion.

Sort by Tag Type – Sort according to tag type. Tag ID – Sort according to the ID number of the

tag.

Screen Name – Sort according to the name of the screen. Screen Number – Sort according

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 487

 to screen number.

ASC – Ascending order, DSC – Descending order

No Number of the searched info

Screen
Name of the screen where the tag is located
Name

Tag ID Unique ID of the tag

Type Type of the tag

AddrCnt The number of addresses set for the tag

X The X coordinate of the tag on the screen

All info
Y The Y coordinate of the tag on the screen

Width Width of the screen

Height Height of the screen

Image Whether the tag uses images

Text Whether the tag uses text

MEMO Shows the content of memos under properties in tag attributes

Update Date and time of last update

No Detailed info number

PLC The name of the PLC model or TOP model the address belongs to

Detailed Address The address being used in the tag

info Kind The kind of address being used

Length The length of the data used by the address

RW Whether the address if ReadOnly or Read&Write

Count Shows the total number of info items

46.1.2 Searching tags using addresses

Select [Address] from the [Tag]/[Address] button on top, then select the project, screen or object (tag

type) to search, and click the [Search] button. Information corresponding to the search conditions is

brought up on the screen.

[Fig. Address/tag cross reference- Address]

488 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Address Description

Project When using multiple projects, select the project to search

Screen Select the desired screen from the screen list of the selected project.

Object When searching addresses for a particular tag, select the tag.

Device Select the type of device to which the address to be searched belongs.

Address Name Select the identifier of the address to be searched (applies only to PLC)

Address Number Enter the number of the address to be searched.

Searched information is sorted in ascending/descending order according to the selected

criterion. Address – Sort by address. Screen Name – Sort according to the name of the
Sort by
screen. Address – Sort according to the type of address. ASC – Ascending order, DSC –

Descending order

No Number of item

Screen
Name of the screen where the address is located
Name

PLC The name of the PLC model or TOP model the address belongs to
All info
Address The address being used in the tag

Kind The kind of address being used

Length The length of the data used by the address

RW Whether the address if ReadOnly or Read&Write

No Number of the searched info

Screen
Name of the screen where the tag is located
Name

Tag ID Unique ID of the tag

Type Type of the tag

AddrCnt The number of addresses set for the tag

Detailed X The X coordinate of the tag on the screen

info Y The Y coordinate of the tag on the screen

Width Width of the screen

Height Height of the screen

Image Whether the tag uses images

Text Whether the tag uses text

MEMO Shows the content of memos under properties in tag attributes

Update Date and time of last update

Count Shows the total number of info items

46.1.3 Convert to Excel

If the [Convert to Excel] button is clicked after [Tag]/[Address] search, the searched info is converted into

an Excel file.

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 489

 [Fig. Convert to Excel file]

46.2 Address converter

This function allows searching of all addresses registered to a project. Some addresses can be changed on

the same PLC, and all addresses can be changed by changing the PLC model. The user can change

addresses manually in the [Address List], but by using the [Address Convert Rule] function, it is possible to

convert a large number of addresses in batch.

[Fig. Address Converter]

46.2.1 PLC Select

Different PLC models can be set for the PLC currently being used and the PLC after the change. When the

[Address Converter] is run, the PLC model name set for the project at hand is displayed, as shown in the
figure below. To change to the address of another PLC model, press the button of the [Before

PLC] and select the model name of the applicable PLC.

490 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 [Fig. PLC Selection]

[Fig. PLC Change]

46.2.2 Address List

Info on all addresses registered to the project, and changed addresses can be viewed.

In the [After Addr] list, the user can change addresses manually.

[Fig. Address List]

Address List Description

No. The number of the address in the list.

Category The type of screen where the address is located.

Num The number of the screen where the address is located.

Kind The parent category of the tag where the address is used.

Class The child category of the tag where the address is used.

Description The content of the memo registered in the properties of the tag.

ID&NUM The ID of the tag.

R/W The type of address. (READ/WRITE)

Before Addr The address before conversion.

After Addr The address after conversion.

By double clicking an address shown in the [After Addr] list, the address can be entered manually.

[Fig. Manual address entry]

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 491

 46.2.3 Address Convert Rule
Batch conversion of all addresses can be performed using [Convert Rules] set by the user. Also, multiple

rules can be added to the [Convert Rule List] and applied in batch. There are three types of [Convert

Rule]: [Change Address], [AutoInc(OffSet)], and [AutoInc(Calc)].

[Fig. Address Convert Rule]

Address Convert Rule Description

Rule name Set the name of the rule. Select [Use user define name] to apply the rule name.

Select the type of convert rule from the list below.

Convert Rule
Change Address – Change the number of the address.

AutoInc(OffSet) – Increase the address, using the OffSet method.

AutoInc(Calc) – Increase the address, using the Calc method.

Select the address list to apply the set rule to.

Task target

Add Add the set rule to the [Convert Rule List].

Modify Modify the selected rule in the Rule List.

Erase Erase the Rule List that has been entered.

Apply the set convert rule. The rule is applied to the [Address List] only, and not the actual
Apply
addresses.

(1) Change Address (Address conversion)

The address entered into [Target Address] is converted into the address entered in [Change To Address].

[Fig. Address Convert]

Address Convert Description

Target Address Select the PLC number and name of the address to convert, and enter the address.

492 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Change To Address Modify the [Change To Address] and enter the address to apply.

Skip PLC Change the Device and Address, skipping PLC.

Skip Device Change the PLC number and Address, skipping Device.

Skip Address Change the PLC number and Device, skipping Address.

Add or insert string Add or insert a string into the address.

As shown in the figure above, if [ALL,100] is entered into [Target Address] and [M, 200] is entered into

[Change To Address], the Device is changed to M and the 100 is changed to 200 for all addresses that

include 100.

① Wildcards

Addresses can be changed using wildcards. With addresses [M0100, M0101, M0102…M0199], entering [M,

01**] in [Target Address] and enter [K, 02**] in [Change To Address] then converts the addresses to [K0200,

K0201, K0202…K0299].

② Add or insert string

Add a string behind or in front of the address, or insert a string into the address.

[Fig. Add or insert string]

Add or insert string Description

Front Add Enter the string to add to the front of the address.

Insert Enter the string to add behind the address.

Enter the place of the location to insert the string. (Counting from the front)

Tail Add Enter the string to add behind the address.

With the above settings, when [M01000] is changed to [M0200], the string is added and the result of

[MA02B00C] is returned.

(2) AutoInc OffSet (Automatic address increase, Offset method)

The address is automatically increased, using the Offset method. Operators such as [+, -, *, /] can be

used to increase or decrease the addres: Y(Converted address) = X(Target address) + N

[Fig. Automatic address increase, Offset method]

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 493

 ① Use X address format

In the case that in a certain PLC, the address is composed of numbers and letters, an address format can

be set and used so that only the number part is converted.

[Fig. Use X address format]

When the address is [INPUT100AB], enter [*****%03D**] into [Use X address format] to increase/decrease

only the number part of the address.

(3) AutoInc Calc (Automatic address increase, Calc method)

A fixed user designated value to increase/decrease the value of the address is applied to all addresses :

Y(converted address) = constant + N.

[Fig. Automatic address increase, Calc method]

With the settings above, a batch increase of 1 starting from 100 is applied to all addresses. If -1 is entered,

the addresses decrease in increments of 1.

① Add string

Add strings in front of or behind the converted address.

[Fig. Add string]

(4) Filter
Use to restrict the address conversion targets.

[Fig. Filter]

494 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Filter Description

Range Select the screen type to restrict conversion for.

Number Enter the number of the screen.

Class Select the tag type to restrict conversion for.

Device Select the device type to restrict conversion for.

Set address range Set the address range to restrict conversion for.

46.2.4 Convert Rule List

Multiple rules can be added and applied in batch. Registered rules are applied in top-down order.

[Fig. Convert Rule List]

Convert Rule List Description

Apply all Convert addresses, applying the entire registered rule list.

Del Delete the selected rule item.

UP Move the selected rule item up.

DOWN Move the selected rule item down.

46.2.5 Saving convert rules and converting addresses

(1) Saving convert rules
Save convert rules registered in the [Convert Rule List] to a file, or retrieve and delete previously saved

rule files. The path where rule files are saved is [C:\Program Files\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\RULE].

[Fig. Saving convert rules]

Saving convert rules Description

Select rule file Select a saved rule file.

Save Rule File Save rules registered in the [Convert Rule List] as a file.

Delete Rule File Delete the selected rule file.

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 495

 (2) Address conversion
Convert actual addresses, applying the convert rules applied to the [Address List].

[Fig. Address Convert]

Address Convert Description

Do Convert Apply the converted addresses in the [Address List].

Initialize Initialize the conversion applied to the [Address List].

Check Address. Check the converted address for anomalies.

46.3 Screen Manager

All screens included in the project can be viewed and verified by type. Screens can be copied, deleted, or

renamed.

[Fig. Screen Manager]

Screen Manager Description

Project When using multiple projects, select the project to show in the screen list.

Select the type of screen to be shown in the screen list. Options are [Base Screen],
Base Screen
[Window Screen], and [Sub Screen].

TEXT Show a text list or thumbnails on the screen.

SMALL, MIDDLE, BIG Adjust the size of the thumbnails.

Del Delete the selected screen.

46.3.1 View
When using multiple projects, the project to be shown on the screen can be selected. Also, the screen

type (base screen, window screen, sub screen) can be selected. The screens can be shown in a text list, or
as small thumbnails.

496 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 [Fig. Switching between text and thumbnail views]

When displaying thumbnails, images can be adjusted among small, medium and big sizes, as shown in

the following figures.

[Fig. Show small thumbnails]

[Fig. Show middle thumbnails]

[Fig. Show big thumbnails]

46.3.2 Editing
(1) Deleting screens
Use the mouse to select the screen to delete in the screen list, and click Delete. Using Ctrl + Mouse click,

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 497

 multiple screens can be selected or deselected. Alternatively, screens can be selected by dragging the

mouse.

[Fig. Deleting screens]

(2) Copying screens

In multiple projects, select the screens to copy. Drag them and drop them in [Screen type] of the desired

project in the [Project Manager] to copy.

[Fig. Copying screens]

When [Drag & Drop] has been performed, a window for setting the number of the screen that was copied

is shown.

[Fig. Set screen number]

Set screen number Description

Default add Add following the largest number among the screen numbers in the project.

Keep the screen number Keep the screen number from the project where the screen was copied.

498 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Change the screen number Designate the start screen number to use.

Applies only when the [Change the screen number] menu is selected. The start screen
Set start screen number
number to be applied is set here.

As multiple screens are copied, the value by which the numbers of the screens copied
Increase value
increases is set.

(3) Changing screen names

When a screen is selected, click the name of the screen again with the mouse to change the name of the

screen.

[Fig. Changing screen names]

46.4 CF-Recipe Maker

This function allows for data to be stored and used in a CF card, instead of in the internal memory of the

touch body. If recipe data is saved in a CF card, data capacity usage is not restricted to internal memory.

The CF-Recipe Maker generates recipe data to be saved in a CF card.

[Fig. CF-Recipe Maker]

46.4.1 Settings before using CF-Recipe

To use parameter blocks written in the [CF-Recipe Maker] in the touch body, the following settings must
first be made.

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 499

 (1) Project property
In order to use recipe data from a CF card, check [Use CF/SD-Recipe] in [Project]-[Project Property].

[Fig. Use CF/SD-Recipe]

(2) Recipe setting

In the menu, select [Project]-[Recipe Setting] and set the [Condition of Movement] and the [Target address

Where recipe move]. The number of recipe blocks and word count are determined by the number of files

saved the CF card and the number of words saved in the file. Therefore the settings here are meaningless.

After completing settings, save by clicking the [Save] button on top.

[Fig. Recipe setting]

46.4.2 Created CF-Recipe file

Recipe data is saved in the [-HMI-\RCP] folder of the CF card. Each block of recipe data is saved as a

separate file. The file format is (*.CSV). That is, if 50 blocks are used, 50 files are needed.

500 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 [Fig. Write parameter block]

Parameter block Description

Enter the recipe number. Values between 1 and 65535 can be entered. The value entered is
Recipe no.
reflected in the file name. The number can be used later to retrieve the recipe.

Recipe file name Displays the automatically generated recipe file name.

Recipe name Enter the name of the recipe. Any name can be entered

Data count Enter the number of words to be saved in the recipe file.

No. This number is assigned sequentially.

Data Name The name of each word in the recipe. Any name can be entered

Data Actual recipe data. This data can be modified or set during operation.

After completing writing for a block, designated the recipe save folder as [-HMI-\RCP] in the CF card, and

save by clicking the [Save] button.

[Fig. Create recipe file]

File creation Description

Recipe save folder Select the folder to save the recipe file in. Set this to [-HMI-\RCP] in the CF card.

Recipe file list Displays the existing recipe files saved in the folder.

New Initialize all items written under [Write block].

Del Delete the file selected in the [Recipe File List].

Save Save the block written in [Write parameter block] as a file.

Load Loads the file selected in the [Recipe file list] to the [Write block] part, and displays the file.

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 501

 46.4.3 CF-Recipe load/save
The CF-Recipe load/save function is identical to when using internal memory.

Therefore, for more detailed information, refer to Chapter 7.6.

When the conditions for [Condition of Movement] in [Project]-[Recipe Setting] are satisfied, the recipe

data of the block is loaded to the address set in [Target address Where recipe move]. To edit/add recipe

data saved on a CF card, load the recipe block to edit, then edit the data in [Target address Where recipe

move]. Then click the [_PARM_SAVE] button of the touch tag to save the new data.

[Fig. _PARM_SAVE save]

46.5 Screen preview

This function shows thumbnails of each screen included in the project, and allows saving of thumbnails as

images.

[Fig. Screen preview]

46.5.1 Screen preview options

The screen selected from the list on the left is shown on the right. When using multiple projects, the

project that the user wishes to view can be selected. All screens can be shown in the list, or base screens,
window screens, and sub screens can be shown separately. Also, ON/OFF or word values 0~15 can be set

for the address status of tags included in the screen, and displayed.

502 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 [Fig. Screen preview options]

46.5.2 Save screen as image file

The screen shown in the thumbnail is saved as a bitmap image to the path designated by the user.

Check the screen to convert into an image, and the save path, then click the [Save image] button.

(1) Selecting screens

Select by checking the checkbox of the screen to save as an image from the screen list. Using the [Select

All] checkbox, all items can be selected or deselected at once.

[Fig. Image selection]

(2) Folder selection

Set the path of the folder to save the image to. When the [Select folder] button is clicked, the following
selection window is shown below. Select the folder to save, then click the [OK] button.

[Fig. Designate image save path]

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 503

 (3) Saving the image and copying to the clipboard
After designating the image save path, click the [Save image] button to save the selected image.

[Fig. Saved images]

If the [Save to clipboard] button is clicked, the selected image is copied to the clipboard. The image can

be pasted into documents or image tools. Only one image can be selected for [Copy to clipboard].

46.6 PDF image converter

This function converts PDF files for use in the [Document viewer] of the tag, and creates index files. To use

the [Document viewer], the converted bitmap image and index file must be saved in the CF memory card.

The color level and size of the image can be adjusted. Select and run [Tools]-[PDF image converter] from

the menu.

[Fig. PDF image converter]

Image converter Description

Open PDF File Select a PDF file saved in the PC.

Convert Applies when color level or image size have been changed.

Export After conversion is completed, save the selected image on the PC.

504 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Close Close the PDF image converter.

PDF file Shows the path of the PDF file that is currently open

Choose among Mono Color, Gray Color, 256Color, and 65536Color.

Color depth
The higher the color level, the larger the size of image file.

Image height Enter the height of the image.

Image width Enter the width of the image.

Image type Select the format of the image to save. (Currently only Bitmap is supported)

Document ID Enter the number of the folder that is created when the image is saved. (1~256)

Page title Enter the title of the document to be saved to the index file.

46.6.1 Converting PDF files

When [Open PDF file] is clicked, the file selection screen is brought up. Only folders and PDF files are

shown in the list. Select the PDF file to convert, and click the [Open] button.

[Fig. Select PDF file]

Once PDF file selection is completed, the image is converted to match initial settings (Mono Color,

original size) and displayed in the page list of the [PDF image converter] and the preview screen.

[Fig. Converting PDF files]

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 505

 There are 4 kinds of color depth : Mono Color, Gray Color, 256Color, 65536Color. The higher the color

depth level, the greater the size of the converted image file becomes. After entering the color type and

image size to use, click the [Convert] button to convert. When viewing the converted images, click the

image on the page list on the left, or click the next page button on top of the preview screen.

[Fig. Mono Color] [Fig. Gray Color]

[Fig. 256 Color] [Fig. 65536 Color]

46.6.2 Exporting images

Before exporting the image, enter the document ID and the page title. 1~256 can be entered as the

document ID. This is indicated in the name of the folder that is created when the image is saved.

(Document ID: 1 -> Folder name: DOC1) In the page list on the left, select the checkbox of the image to

save, then click the [Export] button to bring up the folder selection screen. Images can be selected
/unselected in batch using the [Select all] checkbox.

[Fig. Select saving folder]

506 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Select the folder to save to and click the [OK] button to create a DOC folder in that folder. The image and

index files are saved in the folder. When a document ID of 1 has been entered, and files have been saved

to [C:\], the path of the image and index files is [C:\DOC\DOC1]. The name of the saved folder is the

code that connects the image saved to CF memory and the document viewer tag. Therefore, the name

must not be changed, and should be used as-is.

[Fig. Saved image and index file]

46.7 My button maker

[My button maker] is a function where users can select the desired shape and create customized button

images by inserting shadow effects of patterns. Images created here are stored in the MBS (My Button

Shape) format. They can be registered and used in the [Image Library]. MBS images can be resized

without quality loss, unlike bitmap images. [My button maker] can also be run from the [Image library].

[Fig. My button maker]

46.7.1 MBS image editing

[Fig. MBS image editing screen]

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 507

 By moving the shapes in the edit screen using the mouse, or using the tracker, size can be adjusted.

When the [Center] button on top of [My button maker] is clicked, the shape is moved to the center of the

edit screen. The image can be decorated using the [Shape], [Fill], and [Effect] pages on the bottom.

(1) Shape
Select the size and shape of the button.

[Fig. Shape]

Shape page Description

Shape Select the shape of the button to be used.

Name Enter the name of the MBS image.

This shows the width of the shape that is currently being edited. This value can be
Width
designated manually.

This shows the height of the shape that is currently being edited. This value can be
Height
designated manually.

Depending on the shape of the button, the [Round & Cut] item may be displayed. Options for Round &

Cut are [Scale] and [Fixed]. In the [Scale] option, rounding and cutting of the outline of the button is

scaled to the size of the entire button. In the [Fixed] option, the outline of the button is round and cut

according to fixed pixels.

[Fig. Round & Cut]

(2) Fill
The inside of the button can be filled with color in a number of ways. In [Fill Style], select the fill style to

bring up additional settings.

① Single color flat

Fill the inside of the button with a single color. Click [Color1] to set the color to fill the button with.

508 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 [Fig. Single color flat]

② Linear gradient

This effect causes the color to change along a linear gradient. Depth and contrast can be adjusted. By

selecting [Two-Colors], [Color 2] can be set. Two colors are then used to fill the button.

[Fig. Linear gradient]

③ Radial gradient

This effect causes the color to disperse. Depth and contrast can be adjusted.

By selecting [Two-Colors], [Color 2] can be set. Two colors are then used to fill the button.

[Fig. Radial gradient]

④ Smoothness

This effect causes the color disperse along the edges. Depth and contrast can be adjusted.

By selecting [Two-Colors], [Color 2] can be set. Two colors are then used to fill the button.

[Fig. Smoothness]

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 509

 ⑤ Picture fill

Images saved in the PC can be used to fill the button. Set the color for the image background by setting

[Color 1], then click [Stretch] to fill the inside of the button with the image.

[Fig. Picture fill]

(2) Effect
The inside of the button can be tiled, or shadows can be used.

[Fig. Effect]

In the [Shadow] effect, the direction of the shadow can be selected in the list shown in the image above.

X (width) and Y (height) can also be set. Check [Use Tile] under the [Tile] effect, and select an option to

apply from the tile list shown below.

[Fig. Tile list]

46.7.2 File menu

Edited MBS images can be saved in the PC. Also, saved images can be retrieved. Click [Menu] on top of

[My button maker] to bring up the list shown below.

[Fig. File menu]

510 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Menu Description

New button Initialize the button to pre-edit status.

Open Open an MBS image.

Save Save an MBS image.

Save as Save an MBS image under a new name.

Save image Save the edited button as an MBS image.

Exit Close [My button maker]

46.8 Image library

[Image library] shows the bitmap images provided by default in the XDesignerPlus4 program. From here,

images can be registered in projects. Users can also add new images, and newly added images can be

registered in projects.

[Image library] is used when registering images in touch tags or lamp tags.

[Fig. Image library]

46.8.1 Composition of the image library

On the left, an explorer shows the image folders.

On the right, the selected images, and the images contained in the selected folder are shown.

On top, there are the [Library Add/Del], [File Add/Del], [Show Image info], and [New My Button] buttons.

(1) Folder structure

When the program is installed, the image folders are in the program path. The default path is
[C:\Program Files\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\library].

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 511

 (2) Top button

[Fig. Top button]

Button Description

Library Add Add a new folder to the selected folder.

Delete the selected folder. When a folder is deleted, child folders and images in the folder are

also deleted. The following confirmation message is shown.

Library del

Add a image to the selected folder.

When the file add button is selected, the [Open picture] window where the image to add is

selected is shown. The types of images that can be registered are [*.bmp], [*.jpg], [*.jpeg],

[*.mbs].

Image add

Delete the selected image.

When the file del button is clicked, the following confirmation message is shown.

Image del

Image for the selected image is shown on the bottom right.

Show image info

The path, color, image size, and file size of the image is shown.

My button maker is opened for creation of a new button.

New button
This is equivalent to running [My button maker] in the [Tools] menu.

512 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

46.9 Project image tool

[Project image tool] show info on all image files registered to the project currently in use. Image formats

can be converted, or images can be saved on the PC.

[Fig. Project image tool]

46.9.1 Convert and save images

Images selected from the list can be converted to the format set in the figure below, then saved.

[Fig. Convert and save images]

Top menu Description

Select the format of the images to show in the list.

Format

(Format)

Image format Select the format to convert the selected images to, between [Bitmap] and [Jpg].

Select the quality of the bitmap image from the list below.
Bitmap Color

GO Converts the selected image into the format set by the user.

Export Saves the selected image to the PC.

Select all Selects all images in the list.

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 513

 46.9.2 Image list

[Fig. Image list]

Part Description

Select Shows images for selection.

No. The registration number of the image is shown.

File Name The name of the image file is shown.

Format The format of the image is shown.

Width The width of the image is shown.

Height The height of the image is shown.

Bitmap Size The data size when the image is a bitmap format file is shown.

Jpg Size The data size when the image is a Jpg format file is shown.

Image ID Image ID info is shown.

46.9.3 Image statistics and info

Shows statistics for images registered in the project currently being used, and the expected data size

when all images are converted.

[Fig. Current statistics]

[Fig. The prediction size which converts]

514 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

46.10 Run Simulator

The [Simulator] function allows the project to be operated on the PC, without sending to the touch.

When the screen is clicked with the mouse cursor, the screen behaves as if a touch screen is pressed with

the fingers. The address list on the right displays the status or value of addresses. Addresses can be set

manually by the user.

[Fig. Simulator]

46.10.1 Menu and toolbar composition

[Fig. Top menu]

Top menu Description

[Open] opens the project file. [Close] closes the simulator.

File

[Run] starts the simulator, and [Pause] suspends the simulator. The number of the screen

to be shown in the simulator can be selected.

Action

When [About] is pressed, the version of the simulator program can be viewed.
About

The buttons below are the [Show background], [Show shapes], and [Show tags] buttons,

Adjust screen respectively. [Zoom in/Zoom out] can be used to adjust the screen size.

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 515

 46.10.2 Address List
All addresses registered in the project currently running in the simulator are displayed. The status or value

of addresses can be set, and reflected in the simulator.

[Fig. Address List]

(1) Object
When the tag type is selected from the list, the addresses used in the tag are shown in the address list.

[Fig. Object]

(2) Address Filter

Set the scope of addresses shown in the address list.

[Fig. Filter]

Address Filter Description

Device Select the device of the address to show in the list.

Address Name Select the name of the PLC address to show in the list.

Address number Enter the number of the address to show in the list.

516 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Type Select the type of address (Bit, Word) to show in the list.

Sort by Sort the addresses shown by type.

(3) Current Address List

Shows detailed address info in a list. The real-time status of the address is indicated under [Status]. The

user can modify the value.

[Fig. Current Address List]

(4) Debug List

① Tag

In the [Current Address List], select an address using the mouse to show a list of tags where that address

is used.

[Fig. Debug List]

② Watch List

Right click an address in the [Current Address List]. Register a watch list by clicking [Add Watch List]. The

status of the address is continuously shown, even if the page is transitioned in the [Simulator].

[Fig. Debug List]

46.11 TopView client creation

Generates a [TopView Client] file. [TopView] is a function for monitoring or remote control of a remote
touch from a PC, using [EtherNet] communications.

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 517

 46.11.1 Creating a client file

(1) Project property

Before creating the [TopView Client], check [Use Remote Monitoring] under [Project]-[Project Property] as

shown in the figure below.

[Fig. TopView client creation]

Part Description

Use Remote Monitoring Monitor a remote touch from the PC, using EtherNet communications.

Use Remote Control In addition to remote monitoring, the touch can be controlled from the PC.

If [TopView Client] is run without making the above settings, the following message to change [Project

Property] is shown.

[Fig. Message]

518 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

(2) TopView Client Creator
After [Project Property] has been changed, the [TopView Client] file is created.

[Fig. TopView client creation]

Creator Description

IP Address Enter the IP address of the TOP.

This is the Ethernet communications port between the touch and TOPView. The default
Port Num
value is [3531].

Password Enter the password of the touch body.

Save to Set the path and file name to save the TopView executable file.

Create RView Client Create a TopView client file according to the settings above.

Close Close [TopView client creation].

Click the [Create RView Client] button to create an executable file, as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. TopView client executable file]

46.11.2 TopView screen

When the [TopView client] file is executed, [TopView] is shown, as in the figure below.

The operating screen of the touch is shown in real-time. When [R-Control Stop] is run, the mouse can be

used to perform remote control. Settings for file creation in the [TopView client] can be changed in

[TopView]. Change settings and click [Apply] to apply.

[Fig. TopView]

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 519

 TopView Description

Run Begin real-time monitoring.

Stop Stop real-time monitoring.

R-Control Start In "R-Control Start" status, the mouse can be used to control the touch, instead of the fingers.

Import Project Import a project file saved on the PC and apply to TOPView.

Project Sync Upload a project file running in the touch, and apply to TOPView.

Target Touch IP Show the IP address of the touch that is being remotely monitored/controlled.

Port Show the number of the communications port. (Normally does not need to be changed.)

Password Enter the password of the touch.

Refresh Time Set the refresh cycle of the real-time monitoring screen.

Transparency Set the transparency of [TopView]. Settings are between 0 and 250.

Auto Run Automatically begin real-time monitoring when [TopView] is run.

46.12 Editing options

Set the program options for XDesignerPlus4.

When [Default] is clicked, all options are reset to the settings at the time of initial program installation.

[Fig. Editing options]

46.12.1 Editing options page

Editing options Description

Interval of auto saving Set the interval for auto saving of the project, in minutes.

Use auto save Use the project auto save function.

520 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

 Save on transferring The project is automatically saved when [Transfer]-[Build and transfer] is run in the menu.

Turn off Undo / Redo Do not use the [Undo] and [Redo] funcitons.

Use default TenKey Use the default TenKey when creating a new project.

Use default FileManager Use the default FileManager when creating a new project.

Enable Update Service Set for automatic updates.

If the OS installed in the connected touch has a lower version than the OS included in the
OS Auto Patch
current XDesignerPlus4, the OS is automatically patched when projects are transferred.

Check the limit area of When building, shapes/tags that have exceeded the limit area are checked, and errors are

object at build time indicated in the [Project builder] screen.

Set the transparency of the subscreen when using the subscreen as the background of the
SubScreen transparency
base screen.

Global transparency Set the transparency of the master screen or frame when using the global screen as the

in design time background of the base screen.

Quality of JPG
Set the quality of JPG images registered to the project.
images in project

Float data when input the Set the default number of decimal places for values where decimal places are input.

default number of ___

decimal places.

Show Grid A grid is shown on the editing screen.

Show center point A center point is shown on the editing screen.

Grid dot color Set the color of the grid.

X grid space Set the spacing of the dots forming the grid along the X axis.

Y grid space Set the spacing of the dots forming the grid along the Y axis.

Snap style Select between [Object snap] and [Grid snap].

Show snap line Set to show a line when snap operates.

Snap line color Set the color of the snap line.

Ctrl reverse Use the Ctrl key when using the keyboard key buttons to move shapes or tags.

Window frame color Set the color of the size adjusting frame in the window screen.

Input font Set the font for input when editing properties

Snap left Set to enable snap left.

Snap center Set to enable snap center (horizontal axis).

Snap right Set to enable snap right.

Snap top Set to enable snap top.

Snap middle Set to enable snap middle (vertical axis).

Snap bottom Set to enable snap bottom.

46.12.2 Hint Option

Balloon hints are hints shown on the top left corner of tags registered to a screen. The name, ID, and

address of the tag are shown.

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 521

 [Fig. Balloon hint]

Hint Option Description

Hint font color Set the hint font color.

Hit transparent Set the background of the hint to transparent.

Hint B.G. color Set the color of the background of the hint.

Hint font size (X) Set the horizontal size of the hint font.

Hint font size (Y) Set the vertical size of the hint font.

522 CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu

CHAPTER 47 Transfer Menu

CHAPTER 46 -Tool Menu 523

CHAPTER 47 - Transfer Menu

The transfer menu performs the function of sending data between the touch and the PC. The transfer menu items

are [Build and Transfer] and [Execute Transmitter].

[Fig. Transfer Menu]

In [Build and Transfer], a project file is built (compiled), and the the transmitter is executed to transfer the file. In

[Execute transmitter], the transmitter is executed without building. Therefore, to transfer a project, run [Build and

Transfer]. For other transmissions, select [Execute transmitter].

Note Before running the transfer menu, be sure to check that the transmission cable is connected properly.

Also, confirm that the project file that is currently open has been [Saved]. Only saved files can be transmitted.

47.1 Transfer overview

The touch and the PC can communicate using [Serial], [USB], and [Ethernet].

Transfer method Description

Serial Communication with a serial cable connection to the COM1 port of the touch.

USB Communication with a USB cable connection to the USB Device port of the touch.

Ethernet Communication with an ethernet cable connection to the ethernet port of the touch.

Data that can be transmitted includes project files, touch OS files, and logging/recipe/alarm data files.

File transmitted Description

Project file Touch screen files written in the XDesignerPlus4 program.

Files used to operate the file; when a touch is purchased, the latest OS comes pre-installed.
OS file
If the touch OS is not up to date, an OS file can be transmitted to update the OS.

Logging/recipe/alarm These data files have been created and saved in the touch during operation. These data files

data files can be uploaded to the PC.

Select [Download] or [Upload], depending on the transfer direction.

Transfer direction Description

Data is sent from the PC to the touch.

Download
Project, OS, and Font files can be downloaded.

Touch data is sent to the PC.

Upload
Project and logging/recipe/alarm data files can be uploaded.

524 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

47.2 Build and transfer

A project file written in the XDesignerPlus4 program is built and transferred.

Building begins immediately when [Build and Transfer] is selected. The build process checks for errors in

the currently open project, and creates a file for internal transfer. Here, if the project file does not have

errors, the transmitter is run. The project file is automatically linked to the transmitter, facilitating transfer.

47.2.1 Project builder

When [Build and transfer] is selected, the first screen that is shown is [Project builder]. In [Project builder],

the [*.DPX4] file currently open in the XDesignerPlus4 program is imported and built. Build options can be

checked.

[Fig. Project builder]

(1) Building and the [*.TRZ] file transfer

Building is the same as compiling. The [*.DPX4] file open in the XDesignerPlus4 program is analyzed for

errors, and a file for transfer is created.

As the [*.DPX4] file is large, and also includes info that the touch OS does not require, only the required
info is selected from the content of the [*.DPX4] file to create a file for transfer.

The extension of the transfer file is [*.TRZ]. This file is create internally. The transfer file [*.TRZ] cannot be

opened and edited using the XDesignerPlus4 program. The file cannot be converted in to a [*.DPX4] file

either.

(2) Composition of the project builder

When building is complete, progress is shown as in the figure below.

The top of the project builder includes buttons and options. Info and size is displayed on the bottom.

The very bottom indicates the build result.

CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu 525

 [Fig. Project builder]

① Buttons

The buttons of the project builder are as follow.

[Fig. Buttons]

Button Description

Build Builds the project file.

Send Run the transmitter. If the build result is [Fail], the transmitter is not run.

A [*.TRZ] file is created for transfer. This file can be stored or used.

By running the [Transfer]-[Run Transmitter] menu in XDesignerPlus4 and selecting [Transfer

Project], a [*.TRZ] file that has already been built and converted into a transfer file can be

imported and transferred. When the [Make TRZ] button is clicked, the [Make TRZ File] screen

is shown. The path to save the [*.TRZ] file that is created after building can be designated.

Make TRZ

Set the save path and file name, then click the [Save] button.

The items of the project file in the connected touch body and the project file opened in

Compare projects XDesignerPlus4 are compared for matches. The touch body and PC must be connected.

When the [Transfer] button is pressed, the project is transferred.

526 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

 Close Close [Project builder].

② Options

The options of the project builder are as follow.

[Fig. Options]

Option Description

There are two types of project file: DPX4 files and TRZ files.

DPX4 files are used for editing and saving in XDesignerPlus4.

TRZ files are files used for transfer, and are created when building in XDesignerPlus4.

This file is the protocol file that is used for touch operation, and is always loaded into

the touch when a project is transferred. This file cannot be converted into a DPX4 file,

Include project file and cannot be edited manually.

in build file Upload files are compressed DPX4 files. These files can be uploaded and edited on the

(use upload data) PC for later project modification.

The [Include project file in build file (use upload data)] option determines whether to

include the upload file when transmitting/

If the project is transmitted to the touch without checking this option, the project file

cannot be uploaded. It is recommended that [Include project file in build file (use

upload data)] is checked for later editing/supplementation of the project.

Transmitter auto run After building, if there are no errors, the transmitter is run automatically. This option

at build completion determines whether the transmitter is run automatically.

After downloading
After the project has been transmitted to the touch body, the transmitter is closed.
the transmitter close

The foll printer build file [*.rbf] is included in the [TRZ] file.

Click the [Open] button, select the roll printer build file, and designate the path.
Include roll printer

build file

(☞ See [4.10] in [chapter 4] for roll printer usage info.)

CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu 527

 If the [Include project file in build file (use upload data)] or [Include roll printer build file] options are

changed, compiling must be performed again to include or remove files. When the [Transfer] button is

clicked after changing options, the following message is shown.

[Fig. Build again message]

③ Info

The info section indicates build progress, and indicates errors in individual items.

[Fig. Info]

Info Description

Total Displays the DPX4 file name and build progress in %.

Build progress is shown in %, and build results are shown in more detail.
Detail
When the build is successful, [Build Complete] is shown. When the build fails, [Build Fail] is shown.

Message Whether errors have been found in individual project items is shown. If there are no errors, [OK] is shown.

④ Build result display

The very bottom indicates the build result, as shown in the following figure.

[Fig. Build result]

If the build has been completed without errors, and [Build Success] is shown, as in the figure to the left,

the transmitter is run automatically. If there is an error in the project file and [Build Fail] is shown as in

the figure to the right, the transmitter is not run. When the [Project builder] screen is closed, an error
message is shown on the bottom of the XDesignerPlus4 program.

528 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

 [Fig. Error Message]

The error message indicates the location in the project where the error has occurred. When the error

message is double clicked, the location in the project where the error has occurred is brought up.

⑤ Project size display

[Fig. Project size display]

Projects up to 26M can be written for the touch. The right side of the project builder shows the size of

the project file being transmitted. In [Size], the size of the transmitted project file is shown in [Mb]. The

graph indicates how much [%] of the touch memory is occupied.

47.2.2 Transmitter run after build

When a build is successfully completed, the transmitter is immediately run. In the transmitter, the [*.TRZ]

transfer file is automatically linked to [Select file] in project file info. When the transfer channel

(Ethernet/USB/serial) is set and the [Transfer] button is pressed, transfer begins.

[Fig. Transmitter run after build]

47.3 Running the transmitter

The [Run Transmitter] menu is the [Build and Transfer] menu without the build process. This menu is used

to transfer or upload files other than project files.

CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu 529

 [Fig. Transmitter]

47.3.1 Composition of the transmitter

Using the transmitter, project transfers, OS transfers, and data uploads can be performed. To transfer,

connect the touch and PC with a cable. Depending on the type of the cable, select among

USB/Ethernet/Serial. If the PC and touch are connected properly, [Connected] is shown. Info on the

connected touch is shown under [Touch information].

[Fig. Touch information]

(1) Transmitting channel

The touch and PC can connect through USB, EtherNet, and Serial transmitting channels.

[Fig. Select transmitting channel]

① USB transmission

The touch communicates with the PC through a USB cable connected to its USB Device port (mini 5-pin).
USB transmission can be used after installing the USB deriver first. The USB driver is automatically installed

when XDesignerPlus4 is installed. To install manually, navigate to the [C:\Program Files\M2I

530 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

Corp\XDesignerPlus4\usb_driver] folder and run the driver file (USB Driver Setup.exe).

When the USB cable is connected to the USB Device port and the transmitter is run, the [Connected]

status is shown automatically, as in the figure above. If the touch body is off, or the cable has not been

properly connected, a [Not Connected] status is shown. If the [Not Connected] status is shown, check

the body, cable, and USB driver, then click the [Connection] button. The [Connected] status should be

indicated. Transmitting is possible when the [Connected] status is indicated.

② EtherNet transmission

An ethernet cable is connected to the ethernet port of the touch. Use a cross cable to connect the PC and

touch directly. Use a direct cable when using an ethernet hub. Using ethernet transmission, multiple

touches can be connected to simultaneously.

[Fig. Ethernet transmission]

The setting method is as follows.

1. Connect the touch and PC with an ethernet cable.

2. Match the IP and submet mask in [Menu Screen]-[Communication Settings] of the touch.

Set the same [Subnet Mask] for the PC and touch. As for [IP], set the same three leading numbers as

the IP of the PC. The last number should be different.

3. Click the [Search] button to search for touches currently connected with the PC.

4. Among the touches shown, select the touch to transmit to. Multiple touches can be transmitted to.

5. Perform [Transfer].

③ Serial transmission
Here, the touch communicates with the PC through a serial cable attached to the COM1 port of the touch.

The transmission speed is slower than ethernet or USB transmission.

[Fig. Serial transmission]

The setting method is as follows.

CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu 531

 1. Connect the serial cable to the COM1 port of the touch.

2. In [Communication Port], set the COM port of the PC where the serial cable has been connected.

When using a [USB To Serial Converter], verify and set the port number of the [USB Converter] in

[Control Panel]-[System]-[Hardware]-[Device Manager]-[Ports].

3. Communication settings [Baud rate (115200)/Data bits (8)/Parity bits (none)/stop bit(1)] are fixed. By

clicking [Advanced], comm settings can be changed, as shown below.

[Fig. Advanced settings]

(2) Transmit file

Transmit an open project file. Run the [Transfer]-[Build and Transfer] menu to automatically link the file to

transmit to the [Select a file], as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. Transmit file]

Project file info Description

Project name The project name, project size, XDesignerPlus4 version, and transmit date are shown.

Whether an OS file is included, and the version of the OS is shown. If [Auto OS Patch] is

checked in [Tools]-[Edit options], and the OS in the installation path of XDesignerPlus4

Including OS file
[C:\Program Files\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\OS\OS] is later than the OS in the connected

touch, the latest OS is included when the project is transmitted.

Whether upload data is included, and the size of the upload file is shown. The upload file is

Including upload data the compressed (*.DPX4) file, and is included only when "Include upload data" is checked on

the [Project builder] screen.

532 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

 The PLC drive connected to the touch is displayed. The drive of the controller set under [PLC

Settings] of [Project]-[Project property] is transmitted together when the project is transmitted.

Comm. drive file
Note) Before XDesignerPlus V4.0, the Os included all communication drives. However, from

V4.0 onwards, only the drive of the set PLC is transmitted when the project is transmitted.

When the Build & Transfer menu is run, the transfer project file (TRZ) file is automatically
Select a file
linked. To attach a separate TRZ file, use the button.

Click the [Transfer] button on the button to proceed with project transfer. Once the transfer is complete,

the figure below is shown.

[Fig. Project transfer complete]

(3) OS transfer
This menu is used when transferring separate OS files. Run [Transfer]-[Transmitter menu]. Select [OS FONT],

as shown in the figure below.

[Fig. OS FONT]

Under [System File Information], use the button to select the OS file (*.bin) to transfer. Transfer to

the touch using the [Transfer] button. If the XDesignerPlus4 software version is up to date, and "Auto OS

Patch" is checked under [Tools]-[Editing options], the latest OS is transmitted together when the project is

transmitted.

(4) Data upload

Data in the touch is uploaded to the PC. The process of sending data to the PC is called uploading.

Uploadable data includes project, logging, alarm, and recipe data.

CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu 533

 [Fig. Data upload]

Select [Data project] as shown in the figure above.

Select the upload file. The types of upload file are as follow.

List Description

Uploads upload files in the touch. The size of the upload file is displayed.

Project This button is used to designate the save path. When upload is completed, a (*.DPX4) file is

created in the designated path.

Uploads logging files in the touch. Under [Select Logging], select the logging number of the logging

data to be uploaded, between log1 and log8.

Logging

Designate the save path. Logging data has an extension of (*.CSV), and can be viewed in Excel.

Uploads alarm data in the touch. Designate the save path. Alarm data has an extension of (*.CSV), and

can be viewed in Excel.

Alarm

Uploads recipe data in the touch. Designate the save path.

Recipe
Alarm data has an extension of (*.CSV), and can be viewed in Excel.

534 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

Select the type of file to upload, then press the [Transfer] button to proceed with the upload. If the upload

is successfully completed, the following is shown.

[Fig. Upload completed]

If there is no data in the touch, the "No upload data" message is shown, as in the figure below.

[Fig. Upload data error]

(5) Option menu

On the bottom left corner of the transmitter, there are three options.

① Transfer changed data

The project file in the touch and the project file to be transmitted are compared, and only changed data

is transmitted. If the project has been modified only by a little, the amount of data to be transmitted

becomes small. This allows for faster project transmission.

② Auto transfer
Project transfer is performed immediately when the transmitter is run.

CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu 535

 ③ Safe mode

When transmitting by USB, the file is transmitted slowly to increase safety. This option is helpful when a

[Transmit fail] occurs during USB transfer due to PC specifications.

47.4 Errors that occur during transfer

(1) Touch model mismatch

If the touch model set in the project and the touch model to transmit do not match, the file is not

transmitted, and the following notification window is shown.

[Fig. Touch model mismatch error]

Change the touch model in [Project]-[Project property].

(☞ See [7.12.3] in [chapter 7] for instructions on how to change the model name.)

(2) OS version mismatch

If the OS of the touch is not V4.0, the following error message is shown when a project transfer is

attempted, and the project is not transmitted.

[Fig. Error Message]

If the OS is not V4.0, run the [Transfer]-[OS Upgrade] menu to upgrade the touch.

47.5 V4.0 OS Upgrade

If the OS installed in the touch is V3.1, the following program can be used to upgrade to V4.0.

In order to upgrade to V4.0, the boot file/font file/OS file must be transmitted in sequence.
When the [Transfer]-[OS Upgrade] menu is run, the following screen is shown.

536 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

 [Fig. V4.0 OS Upgrade]

This program is a program that uses a USB cable for transfer. Connect the USB cable and click

to transmit the boot file. When transfer is completed, the touch resets. Once reset is completed, use the

button again to transfer the font and OS files in sequence. When transfer of the three files has

been completed, the touch enters "Touch Calibration Mode." When calibration is completed by

touching the points, the V4.0 menu screen is shown.

47.6 USB driver installation

To connect the touch and PC and transfer files using a USB cable, the USB driver must be installed. The

USB driver is automatically installed when XDesignerPlus4 is installed. If a driver issue occurs during use,

and the driver must be installed again, navigate to the XDesignerPlus4 installation path [C:\Program

Files\M2I Corp\XDesignerPlus4\usb_driver] and run [USB Driver Setup.exe] to install the driver again.

47.7 Transfer to USB memory storage device

This can be performed by using the [Interface]-[USB Storage]-[File Copy] menu from the menu screen

of the touch body. Project files, OS files, or font files in the USB memory can be transmitted to the

touch body, and project files, OS files, font files, system buffer data, and logging data in the touch body

can be copied to USB memory.

(Warning) System Buffer Data and Logging Data in the USB memory cannot be sent to the touch

body.

47.7.1 Copying and transmitting projects to USB memory

The function of saving project data to USB memory for loading in the touch is a function that is useful

in the field, which does not require a PC or laptop. If there are two touches, the project from one touch

can be copied and loaded on the other touch.

The project files copied and transmitted using USB memory are not DPX4 files for editing, but TRZ files
for transfer. Therefore, project files copied using USB memory cannot be edited.

CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu 537

 USB memory must be formatted in FAT if memory size is 2 gigabytes or less, and FAT32 is the size is in

excess of 2 gigabytes.

When the USB memory is inserted into the touch body, a message is shown on the top left corner.

When the memory is successfully recognized, the [USB Storage Insert!]-[USB Storage FAT Reading!]-[USB

Storage Init OK!] messages are displayed in sequence. Some USB memory devices may not be

recognized.

(1) Copy project to USB memory

Run the [Interface]-[USB Storage]-[File Copy] menu from the menu screen of the touch body.

Select Project File in the [File Copy] screen, then touch the [HMI->USB] button.

The project file is copied to the [-HMI-\PRJ] folder of the USB memory inserted in the touch.

The files copied are the build files used in the touch for actual operation. These cannot be edited on

the PC.

This function is used to load the same project in another touch unit with the same specifications.

(2) Transfer project from USB memory

If a project has been copied to USB memory in a different touch body with the same specifications, the

project can be loaded in the touch directly. From the menu screen of the touch body, run the

[Interface]-[USB Storage]-[File Copy] menu. In the [File Copy] screen, select Project File, then click the

[USB->HMI] button. The project file copied to USB memory is loaded in the touch body.

47.7.2 Copying and transmitting OS and font files to USB memory

Run the [Interface]-[USB Storage]-[File Copy] menu from the menu screen of the touch body.

In the [File Copy] screen, select OS File, then click the [HMI->USB] button to copy the OS file to the

inserted USB memory. The file is saved as [S1000000.SYS] in the [-HMI-\SYS] folder of the USB memory.

Remove the USB and insert into a different touch. In the [File Copy] screen, click the [USB->HMI] to

load the copied OS file in the touch.

An OS file in the PC can be loaded in a touch by saving an OS file on the PC as [S1000000.SYS] in the
[-HMI-\SYS] folder of the USB memory.

In the case of font files, select Font File in the [File Copy] screen and copy the file. The file is saved in

the [-HMI-\SYS] folder of the USB memory with the file name [S2000000.SYS]. Only the file name is

different. The method of copying and loading is the same as for OS files.

47.7.3 Copy internal address and logging data to USB memory

Internal address data and logging data can be transmitted to USB memory.

System Buffer Data and Logging Data in the USB memory cannot be sent to the touch body.

(1) Copy internal address to USB memory

538 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

Run the [Interface]-[USB Storage]-[File Copy] menu from the menu screen of the touch body.

In the [File Copy] screen, select System buffer data, then click the [HMI->USB] button to copy the

internal address file to the inserted USB memory. These files cannot be viewed from the PC, and can

only be used to copy and load in the touch body.

(2) Copy logging data to USB memory

Run the [Interface]-[USB Storage]-[File Copy] menu from the menu screen of the touch body.

In the [File Copy] screen, select OS File, then click the [HMI->USB] button to copy the OS file to the

inserted USB memory.

[Fig. Logging data copied to USB memory]

The LOG00001.CSV file represents logging1 data, and the LOG00002.CSV file is logging2 data.

The content of these files can be viewed on the PC using Excel.

CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu 539

 CHAPTER 48 Window Menu

540 CHAPTER 47 -Transfer Menu

CHAPTER 48 - Window Menu

The window menu is used to align or close the base screen, window screen, sub screen, and global screen. The

menu allows more effective editing when multiple screens are active.

48.1 Minimize all

All screens open in the program are minimized, and aligned on the bottom of the screen.

[Fig. Minimize all]

48.2 Maximize all

All screens open in the program are shown in the maximum size.

[Fig. Maximize all]

CHAPTER 48 -Window Menu 541

48.3 Cascade

All screens open in the program are aligned in cascading order.

[Fig. Cascade]

48.4 Tile

All screens open in the program are tiled.

[Fig. Tile]

542 CHAPTER 48 -Window Menu

48.5 Close all

All screens open in the program are closed.

[Fig. Close all]

CHAPTER 48 -Window Menu 543

 CHAPTER 49 Help Menu

544 CHAPTER 48 -Window Menu

CHAPTER 49 - Help Menu

The help menu includes product info, communication manuals, and help files providing additional functions and

info for use of XDesignerPlus4.

49.1 Help

A PDF version of the XDesignerPlus4 user manual is shown. This function requires that a PDF reader

program is installed on the user PC.

49.2 Communication manual

Communication manuals for different manufacturers can be viewed. The communication manuals also

include descriptions of communication setting methods, and cabling diagrams between the touch and

controller. Select the manufacturer of the controller from the list on the left, and select the manual

depending on the CPU/Port.

[Fig. Communication manual]

49.3 Product info

The XDesignerPlus4 version can be viewed. Also indicated are the telephone number and address of the

M2I Corporation.

[Fig. About]

CHAPTER 49 -Help Menu 545